Systems Toolkit Tutorial

STK Fundamentals
Version 9
Analytical Graphics, Inc.

www.agi.com agitraining@agi.com
800.220.4785 610.981.8000
2010-04
Overview
Welcome to the STK Fundamentals training course.This course is a collection of
instructor-led exercises that provide hands-on experience with a variety of the
features and functions on which STK is built. It will familiarize the first-time user
with the AGI Graphical User Interface (GUI); introduce them to some of the
various land, sea, air, and space objects; their associated properties, and tools;
and leave them with a basic understanding of the capabilities that are a part of the
Satellite Tool Kit (STK) software suite.
This is not a comprehensive guide to any of the products that make up the STK
Product Suite. The full scope of the STK Product Suite is far too broad to address
in a single day course. When you complete this course, you will have the
knowledge that you need to navigate the software and access additional
resources including the STK Help system, which contains in-depth information
about operating STK and all of its associated modules and add-ons.
This course will focus on the core modules that are commonly used to perform
various types of analysis. In order to complete the exercises herein you must
have a fully functional copy of the following products:
STK Professional Edition
Table Of Contents
When Can I Spy On Washington

From a Molniya Satellite?.............................................................. 1-1
Problem Statement ................................................................................................1-2
Welcome To STK!..................................................................................................1-2
Create a Scenario ..................................................................................................1-3
Scenarios ...............................................................................................................1-5
Insert STK Objects Tool .........................................................................................1-8
Model a Spacecraft ...............................................................................................1-9
Model Washington ..............................................................................................1-11
The STK City Database ........................................................................................1-12
2D and 3D Visualization.......................................................................................1-13
Animation Properties ...........................................................................................1-14
Moving Around in 2D and 3D ..............................................................................1-15
Report Positional Data.........................................................................................1-17
Access Graphics...................................................................................................1-19
Report Access Times ...........................................................................................1-21
When You Finish..................................................................................................1-23
Where Is the Space Station Now? ................................................ 2-1
Scenario Analysis Period .......................................................................................2-3
Model MyTown......................................................................................................2-4
Table Of Contents
Renaming Objects..................................................................................................2-5
Model ISS ..............................................................................................................2-5
The STK Satellite Database...................................................................................2-5
When Can I See ISS From My Town?....................................................................2-6
Model Real World Conditions ...............................................................................2-7
Add a Constraint To the ISS ..................................................................................2-8
Add Constraints To MyTown .................................................................................2-9
Where Am I? ........................................................................................................2-11
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................2-14
How Is the Reception On My Satellite Radio Outside the
Continental U.S.?............................................................................ 3-1
Model Locations On the Ground............................................................................3-3
Get a Better Look!..................................................................................................3-6
Ground Vehicles In STK .........................................................................................3-9
Model Ground Transportation .............................................................................3-10
Where Am I? ........................................................................................................3-13
Ship Out ...............................................................................................................3-14
Where In the World Am I?...................................................................................3-16
You Are Here! ......................................................................................................3-17
Get Moving!.........................................................................................................3-19
Get a Better Look!................................................................................................3-24
SIRIUS XM Access...............................................................................................3-26
Constrain Iwo Jima..............................................................................................3-28
Get Moving!.........................................................................................................3-29
When You Finish..................................................................................................3-30
Can I Detect a Rogue Aircraft In Route From Havana
to Cape Canaveral?......................................................................... 4-1
Model The Planes Target......................................................................................4-3
The STK Facility Database.....................................................................................4-4
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Model Destinations ...............................................................................................4-4

Model the Intruder.................................................................................................4-5
Model a LEO Satellite............................................................................................4-7
Model Instruments.................................................................................................4-8
Fixed Sensors On Moving Objects.........................................................................4-9
Moving Sensors On Moving Objects ...................................................................4-11
Change Your Perspective....................................................................................4-14
Fixed Sensors On Stationary Objects ..................................................................4-14
Share a VDF .........................................................................................................4-25
When You Finish..................................................................................................4-27
How Many Satellites Must I Access To Communicate
With the GPS Network?................................................................. 5-1
Model Omaha ........................................................................................................5-3
Model an Aircraft...................................................................................................5-4
Model a Circular Orbit ...........................................................................................5-6
Complex Accesses .................................................................................................5-7
Other Ways to Introduce Objects ..........................................................................5-7
Using Chains ..........................................................................................................5-9
Report Chain Accesses ........................................................................................5-10
Model the GPS Network......................................................................................5-11
Define a Complex Chain ......................................................................................5-12
Create a Window In the Aircraft......................................................................5-13
Now, What Can Eagle Eye See?..........................................................................5-16
Constrain GPS Sats..............................................................................................5-18
Report Chain Accesses ........................................................................................5-19
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................5-20
How Will I Take Pictures Of The Hiroshima Castle and Relay Them
In Near-Real-Time? ......................................................................... 6-1
On the Ground........................................................................................................6-4
III
Table Of Contents
Model the Target City............................................................................................6-4

Add a KML File.......................................................................................................6-5
Adjust the Target ...................................................................................................6-7
Model Ground Sites...............................................................................................6-8
What Is the ADF?...................................................................................................6-9
Model Spacecraft ................................................................................................6-10
Model the TDRS Network....................................................................................6-12
Define a Chain of Events .....................................................................................6-14
Constrain Access to Hiroshima............................................................................6-15
When Can I see It?...............................................................................................6-15
On Your Own........................................................................................................6-17
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................6-18
iv
When Can I Spy On Washington

From a Molniya Satellite?
EXERCISE 1
In this exercise you will create a simple scenario that will help you get acquainted with
navigating through the STK Graphical User Interface (GUI) and achieve some key
objectives. Upon completion, you will be able to:
Understand the questions that STK answers:

Where am I? What can I see? When can I see it?
Use the Orbit Wizard.
Insert and position an object using an STK database.
Move around in the 2D and 3D Graphics windows.
Calculate a simple line-of-sight access.
When Can I Spy On Washington From a Molniya Satellite?
Problem Statement
It is said that the Molniya orbit is a great way to spy on the United States.
During such a spacecrafts two (2) twelve (12) hour daily orbits, how many
hours a day can a Molniya satellite actually see Washington?
BREAK IT DOWN
You have some information that may be helpful. Heres what you know:
There are two players in the scenario--a spacecraft traveling in a Molniya
orbit and the city of Washington.

A Molniya orbit has two (2) twelve (12) hour daily orbits.
You want to know if and when a Molniya satellite can see Washington.
SOLUTION
Build an STK scenario that allows you to calculate a simple line-of-sight access
between a spacecraft traveling in a Molniya orbit and Washington, D.C. so
that you can tell at what points along the spacecrafts orbit it can see
Washington.
Welcome To STK!
The first thing you need to do is launch STK, and create a new scenario.
1. Double-click the STK icon ( ) on the desktop.
Everything in STK begins with a scenario. A scenario is STK's name for an
instance of an analytical or operational task being modeled using STK. In
STK a scenario is represented by an icon of an idealized scene. The STK
scenario creates the context, or environment, within which all other objects in
the scenario exist. You can create an unlimited number of scenarios with
STK, however only one scenario can be open at a time.
When STK launches, the Welcome to STK! dialog (the Welcome Dialog) will
appear. Using the options available here, you can create new scenarios, open
existing scenarios, access the STK Help System, or exit the STK application.
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 2
WHEN CAN I SPY ON WASHINGTON FROM A MOLNIYA SATELLITE?
Table 1. Welcome to STK!
2. Click the Create a New Scenario button.

The Welcome Dialog also provides an option to disable this feature in the event
that you prefer to create and manage scenarios manually. If the Welcome Dialog
dialog were disabled, you could create a new scenario by either:
Clicking the New button( ) on the Default toolbar, or
Selecting the New ( ) option from the File menu.
FIGURE 1-1.
Scenario icon
Create a Scenario
When you click the Create a New Scenario button, the New Scenario Wizard
appears. You can input basic information about the scenario here. Lets set the
basic parameters for scenario creation now.
1. Enter the following in the New Scenario Wizard:
Exercise 1 | Page 3
TABLE 1-1. New
Scenario Wizard options
OPTION
VALUE
Name
See_DC
Description
Can a Molniya satellite spy on Washington, D.C.?
Location
C:\Documents and Settings\Student\My Documents\STK 9
Analysis
Period
Leave the default analysis period.

Noon today local time displayed in UTCG (based on your
computer time zone) for 24 hours.
ANALYSIS PERIOD
Every scenario requires that you define the times during which the conditions
that you set for your world, and the objects in your world, will be relevant.
The analysis period defines the epoch and the start and stop times of your scenario.
The analysis period defines the general time span (a range of several hours,
days, or weeks) for analysis.
By default, times are displayed in UTCG. That being the case, the analysis
period will vary based on the time zone to which your computer is set. You
can change the time unit to LCLG to display the analysis period in your
current local time. Lets try it.
1. Click the unit selector ( ) beside the scenario start time.
2. Select LCLG from the menu that appears.
What is the current local time?
STK provides a user-editable default analysis period for every new scenario.
Since you are not concerned with determining when Molniya can see
Washington, D.C. on a specific day at a specific time, but are instead just
doing some general analysis, you can accept the default analysis period for this
example.
1. When you finish, click OK to dismiss the New Scenario Wizard.
2. When the scenario loads, click Save ( ).
3. Verify the scenario name and location and click Save.
Once a scenario is saved the first time, it will be saved to the same location
every time you click the Save button. The Save button is always available, and
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 4
always saves the entire scenario, regardless of the window or object that is
selected.
GET OFF ON THE RIGHT FOOT--STAY ORGANIZED

Once you begin working with STK, you may create and save several scenarios
with many objects in a short time. The most helpful technique to manage your
scenario files is to save each scenario into its own folder, and give the folder
and the scenario file (*.sc) the same name as in the example above. Youll find
that this simple rule of thumb will help you to manage your scenarios more
efficiently for the following reasons:
It decreases the likelihood that you will accidentally overwrite your
previous work, especially if you have objects with the same names in
different scenarios (e.g. several satellites named LEO).
It helps keep your work organized, so that it is easier to find a given
scenario later.
It makes it easier to share your scenarios with others.
When you use the New Scenario Wizard to create a new scenario, STK will
automatically create a new directory in your default user directory
(C:\Documents and Settings\Student\My Documents\STK 9) with the same
name that you input for the scenario name and store all of your scenario files
as described above. While the folder is created in the new directory, the
scenario is not saved until you actually save the scenario.
Scenarios
The scenario itself is saved as an object (*.sc) and each object within the
scenario (e.g., satellites, facilities, planets, stars, receivers and transmitters, etc.)
is saved individually.
Exercise 1 | Page 5
FIGURE 1-2.
Object Browser
When you create a new scenario, STK updates the Object Browser to include the
new scenario and creates the appropriate visualization windows. Once in the
Object Browser the objects can be named and properties can be applied.
THE PROPERTIES BROWSER

Each STK object and visualization window has its own set of properties,
which are organized into categories (e.g., Basic, 2D Graphics, Constraints, etc.).
Customizing properties creates a meaningful environment for the other
objects in your scenario. The properties used to define STK objects are
organized in the Properties Browser. When you open the Properties Browser you
will see the properties for whatever object or visualization window is selected
in the STK Workspace.
ACCESSING OBJECT PROPERTIES

There are several ways to access object and window properties. You can
access object properties on one of the following ways:
Double-click the object in the Object Browser.
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 6
Right-click the object in the Object Browser or visualization window (2D or
3D), and select Properties ( ) from the menu that appears.

Select an object in the Object Browser, and click the Properties ( ) button.
SCENARIO BASIC PROPERTIES

Scenario properties customize the conditions of your scenario. Customizing
properties creates a meaningful environment for the other objects in your
scenario. Take a look at the rest of the scenario Basic properties.
1. Double-click See_DC ( ) in the Object Browser to open its properties ( ).
TABLE 1-2. Scenario
Basic properties
PROPERTIES
DESCRIPTION
Time
Define the epoch and start and stop times that apply throughout
the scenario. Control the animation cycle, animation step
definition, and the intervals between refresh updates in the
graphics windows. Values set here can be overridden at the
subordinate level for certain objects.
Units
Establish the default settings for all units of measure used for
display and data input purposes in a scenario. Selections made
here can be overridden locally for a specific object or for an
entire class of objects.
Database
Set defaults for available databases.
Earth Data
Select an Earth Orientation Parameters (EOP) file.
Terrain
Import and display terrain elevation data for facility and target
azimuth-elevation mask and position.
Global
Attributes
Allows the configuration of warning messages for missiles,

satellites, and Aircraft Mission Modeler objects.
Description
Record useful information about your scenario.
2. Select the Time page.

Are the Start and Stop times set to those that you set when you
created the scenario?
3. Select the Description page.

Is the description that you provided when you created the scenario in
the Description page?
Exercise 1 | Page 7
4. When you finish, click Cancel to dismiss the scenario properties without
making any changes.
Insert STK Objects Tool

When a scenario is created, the Insert STK Objects tool appears automatically
unless the Do not show me this again option is enabled. From here, you can begin
the object creation and insertion process. The Insert STK Objects tool makes it
easy to insert and configure some of the most commonly used individual
objects. The left-hand pane lists commonly used STK objects. When you
select an object on the left, all of the methods available for introducing that
class of object will be listed on the right. The process and data that you will
have to provide will depend on the object class and introduction method
selected.
FIGURE 1-3.
Insert STK Objects tool
The Insert STK Objects tool can be customized using the options available on the
New Object page of the Application Preferences.
1. Click the Edit Preferences... button.
2. Select the New Object page.
3. Locate the Define Default Creation Methods area.
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 8
The Objects list contains all of the available object in STK. When an object is
selected, all of the available methods for creating and configuring that object
display in the Method list to the right. You can include or exclude options from
the Insert STK Objects tool by selecting them in the list and enabling or disabling
the Show object in insert new object tool.
4. When you finish, click Cancel to dismiss the New Object preferences page.
Model a Spacecraft
Now you have a model of a meaningful world, but your world has no
objects. You still need a spacecraft traveling in a Molniya orbit. In STK, the
satellite object is used to model the properties and behavior of a vehicle in
orbit around a central body.
1. Select the following in the Insert STK Objects tool ( ):
TABLE 1-3. Insert
OPTION
satellite
VALUE
Select an Object To Be Inserted:
Satellite
Select a Method:
Orbit Wizard
2. Click the Insert... button.

When you click the Insert... button, the Orbit Wizard will appear.
THE ORBIT WIZARD

The Orbit Wizard is a satellite level tool designed to assist you in creating any
one of several standard orbits or designing your own satellite orbit. The
configurable options available will depend on the orbit Type selected.
Exercise 1 | Page 9
FIGURE 1-4.
Orbit Wizard
The orbit types available are outlined below.

TABLE 1-4. Orbit
types
ORBIT
DESCRIPTION
Circular
Circular orbits have a constant radius.
Critically Inclined
Critically Inclined orbits maintain perigee at a fixed latitude. The line of apsides
does not change over time.
Critically Inclined,
Sun Sync
Critically Inclined Sun Synchronous orbits combine the features of both basic types
of orbits. The orbit uses a retrograde inclination of 116.565 degrees. The satellite
will pass overhead at the same local time for each revolution and has a perigee
which remains at a fixed latitude.
Geosynchronous
A satellite in a stationary orbit will remain fixed in the sky above the specified fixed
longitude.
Molniya
Molniya orbits are highly eccentric, meaning that there is a large difference between
the altitude at apogee and the altitude of perigee. Molniya orbits are also critically
inclined. This keeps the perigee of the orbit in the Southern Hemisphere. Molniya
orbits also have a long dwell time in the extreme latitude regions of the Northern
Hemisphere.
Orbit Designer
With this option, you can create any orbit you wish.
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 10
TABLE 1-4. Orbit
ORBIT
types
DESCRIPTION
Orbits with repeating ground traces are useful when identical viewing conditions
Repeating Ground Trace are desired at different times to detect changes. The ground trace may be caused to
repeat every day or to interweave from day to day before repeating.
Repeating Sun Sync
Sun Sync orbits with repeating ground traces are useful when identical viewing and
lighting conditions are desired at different times to detect changes. The ground
trace may be caused to repeat every day or to interweave from day to day before
repeating. The orbit repeats the ground coverage cycle and passes overhead at
approximately the same local time for each revolution.
Sun Synchronous
The effect of the oblateness of the Earth is used to cause the orbit plane to rotate
at the same rate at which the Earth moves in orbit about the Sun. Thus, at the
equator, the satellite passes overhead at the same local time for each revolution.
No matter which Type of orbit you select, the Orbit Wizard lets you change the
satellite analysis period as well as configure and preview satellite graphics
before the object is introduced into the scenario.
1. When the Orbit Wizard appears, select the following:
TABLE 1-5. Orbit
Wizard options
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Molniya
Satellite Name
SpySat
2. Accept all other default values.

3. Click OK.
Can you see SpySat in the Object Browser? The 2D Graphics window?
3D?
Model Washington
It looks like you have one more object to model--Washington. STK provides
two objects that can be used to model a point-of-interest on the surface of the
central body--Facilities ( ) and Targets ( ). Facilities and targets are almost
identical in properties and behavior. Often, facilities and targets are used to
differentiate between friendly and unfriendly sites, where a facility marks a friendly
site, and a target marks a unfriendly site.
Exercise 1 | Page 11
INSERT THE FACILITY

Facilities can be positioned and repositioned in a variety of ways. For this
example, youll use an entry from the STK City Database.
1. Return to the Insert STK Objects tool ( ).
2. Select the following:
TABLE 1-6. Insert
OPTION
facility
VALUE
Facility
Select a Method:
Select From City Database
The STK City Database

Several comprehensive databases are shipped with STK for your use. The City
Database contains thousands of cities around the world. Individual city
information includes the exact location of the city. You will use the City
Database tool to model Washington, D.C.
1. When the City Database Search tool appears, set the following:
TABLE 1-7. City
search criteria
OPTION
STATE
VALUE
City Name
On
Washington
Province
Off
N/A
Country
Off
N/A
2. Click Search.
3. When the search results appear, select Washington (City Name) District of
Columbia (Province).
4. Click the Insert button.
5. Close the City Database Search tool.
When a predefined object is imported from an STK databases (satellite,
facility, city or star), information about that object is automatically
written to its Long Description.
6. You dont need to create any more objects, so you can close the Insert STK
Objects tool ( ) now if you like.
2D and 3D Visualization
Two of the most powerful and indispensable STK tools are the 2D (STK
Basic Edition) and 3D Graphics (STK Professional and Expert Editions)
windows. Using them, you can visualize your scenario in a dynamic 2D and/
or 3D environment. Time can be animated forward, backward, and in realtime to display space- and ground-based object positions, coverage areas,
visibility status, lighting conditions, and much more.
1. Bring the 2D Graphics window to the front.
2. Advance the animation ( ) a few steps until SpySat ( ) is clearly visible.
FIGURE 1-5.
2D View: SpySat position
FIGURE 1-6.
3D View: SpySat position
SpySats object marker is positioned according to the current animation time

in both windows, and its ground (2D) and orbit tracks (2D and 3D) are clearly
visible.
Animation Properties
Animation properties are part of the Scenario Basic - Time properties. Using
Animation properties you can define the animation cycle, step definition and
the intervals between refresh updates in the 2D and 3D Graphics windows.
ANIMATION CYCLE
The animation cycle defines a portion of the scenario that you wish to see in
motion when you animate. Movement of objects within a scenario during any
portion of the analysis period that do not fall within the animation cycle will not
display in the visualization windows.
1. Play ( ) the animation, and watch as Molniya ( ) travels along its path.
2. Pause ( ) the animation at any point.
ANIMATION TOOLBAR
The Animation toolbar provides controls that allow you to set your scenario in
motion in all 2D and 3D Graphics windows.
FIGURE 1-7.
Animation toolbar
Take a look at the Animation toolbar. Notice the date and time display in the
editable field on the toolbar. This is the current animation time. Whenever
you reset the animation, the animation time also resets. If you edit the
animation date and time here, STK will move all objects so that they are
positioned according to the new animation time.
You can also use the Decrease Time Step ( ) and Increase Time Step ( ) buttons
to change the pace of the animation. The animation time step will increase or
decrease incrementally each time you click one of the buttons.
3. Try using the Step in Reverse ( ) and Step Forward ( ) buttons to move
SpySat ( ) along its path a step at a time.
The current step displays in the lower right hand corner of the STK Workspace
in the taskbar. The time step should also display 3D Graphics window as an
annotation by default.
FIGURE 1-8.
STK taskbar
If your satellite disappears, you have animated beyond the analysis

period for the scenario or that object. Reset the animation to restore
your objects to their proper place in time.
Moving Around in 2D and 3D

There are several ways to manipulate the view in the 2D and 3D Graphics
windows. Take a moment to try moving around and focusing on objects.
MAGNIFY AN AREA ON THE MAP

The Zoom In button can be used to magnify a portion of the selected
2D Graphics window or graph.
1. Reset ( ) the animation.
2. Step Forward ( ) until SpySat ( ) is clearly visible.
3. Select the 2D Graphics window.
4. Click the Zoom In button ( ) on the Default toolbar.

5. Click and hold the left mouse button and drag it over the area of the map
around SpySat ( ) in the 2D Graphics window.
6. Zoom ( ) as many times as needed until SpySat ( ) is clearly visible.
FIGURE 1-9.
2D View: SpySat marker
As you can see, SpySat is represented by a generic marker in the 2D Graphics

window.
ZOOM TO SPYSAT
STK provides tools for changing your perspective in the 3D Graphics window.
It is often helpful to view the events in a scenario from the perspective of a
particular object. Use the Zoom To to center the view in the 3D Graphics
window on SpySat, and get a better look at the satellite model.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bring the 3D Graphics window to the front.

Right-click SpySat in the Object Browser or in the 3D Graphics window.
Select Zoom To.
Check the 3D Graphics window. SpySat ( ) is now the focal point.
MOUSE AROUND IN 3D
You can use the mouse to move around in the 3D Graphics window. Use the
mouse to zoom and rotate in the 3D Graphics window to get a better look at
the satellite object model.
Click and hold the left mouse button, then move your mouse around in the
3D Graphics window to rotate the focal point.

Click and hold the right mouse button, then move your mouse forward and
backward to zoom in and out.
FIGURE 1-10.
3D View: SpySat model
In the 3D Graphics window, SpySat is represented by a 3D model.

You can also focus the 3D Graphics window on an object-of-interest by
holding down Shift on your keyboard and double-click on the object-ofinterest in the 3D Graphics window.
RESTORE THE VIEW

2. Select the 3D Graphics window, and click the Home View button ( ) on the
3D Graphics toolbar to restore the default Earth-centered view.
3. Select the 2D Graphics window, and click the Zoom Out button ( ) on the
Default toolbar as many times as necessary to return the map to its original
view.
Report Positional Data

Using the visualization windows, you were able to see the location of SpySat
and watch its position change over time, but suppose you needed more
detailed data about how SpySats position or orbital parameters will change
over time?
STK includes a number of Data Provider tools with which you can report and
display data about objects in one of the four available formats--Report, Dynamic
Display, Graph, or Strip Chart.
1. Click the Report & Graph Manager button ( ) on the STK Tools toolbar.
TABLE 1-8. Classical
orbital elements report
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Satellite
Object (Below Object Type)
SpySat
Show Reports
On
Show Graphs
Off
Style
Classical Orbit Elements
Generate as
Report/Graph
3. Click Generate...
STK will generate and display a text report that provides a representation of
the SpySats orbital elements.
4. Using the data in the report, answer the following:
What is the inclination of SpySat over time?
5. When you finish, close the Classical Orbit Elements report.
6. Close the Report & Graph Manager ( ).
When Can SpySat See Washington?

You have added two objects to your scenario--one satellite object representing
SpySat and one facility object representing Washington, D.C. Now, you need to
determine when Washington, D.C. is within the SpySats line of sight.
Calculating object-to-object visibility in STK is called access. STK will calculate
the times one object can access, or see, another object based on position and
availability information that considers timing and constraints if necessary. An
access is defined by the two objects for which the access is computed and is
calculated FROM the object that is looking for another object TO the
object that it is looking for. Once an access is calculated, it maintains a close
relationship with the defining objects. If either of the defining objects is
changed in such a way that the access times may be altered, the access is
automatically recomputed. Also, if either of the defining objects is removed
from the scenario, the access is automatically removed.
Now determine when SpySat can see Washington by calculating a simple
access. A simple access will calculate an unconstrained line-of-sight between the
two objects in your scenario.
1. Click the Access Tool button ( ) on the STK Tools toolbar.
When you open the Access tool, you can select both the object from which
access will be calculated and the object(s) to which access will be calculated.
The object FROM which access will be calculated is selected using the Access
for: option, and all objects TO which access can be calculated is selected in the
Associated Objects list. You can select the object(s) TO which youd like to
calculate access be selecting them in the list.
2. Ensure that the Access for option says SpySat. If not, use the Select Object...
option to select SpySat as the from access object.
3. Select Washington ( ) in the Associated Objects list.
4. Click Compute.
Now, take another look at Washington in the Associated Objects list. Washington is
now bold, and an asterisk * appears next to the object to indicate that access
has been calculated to that object.
Access Graphics
Whenever an access occurs during animation, each object is outlined and a line
connects SpySat to Washington. The line provides a clear visual representation
of object-to-object visibility.
1. Position the 2D and 3D Graphics windows so that you can see them both
clearly.
2. Play ( ) the animation.
Can you identify accesses from SpySat to Washington?
A portion of SpySats ground track is now thicker and marked in the same
color as Washingtons object label. Whenever SpySat is within any marked
portion of its path, it will be able to see Washington.
3. Pause ( ) the animation when SpySat ( ) has access to Washington ( ).
FIGURE 1-11.
3D View: Access from SpySat to Washington
Can you spot any unexpected accesses?

FIGURE 1-12.
2D View: Accesses from SpySat to Washington
Report Access Times

Well, access has been calculated, and you can even see that access occurs in the
2D and 3D Graphics windows, but that doesnt tell you what you need to know.
You need to know exactly WHEN access occurs. Data providers can return
information about when AND where accesses occur.
1. Select the Access tool ( ) to bring it to the front.
2. Click the Access... button in the Reports area.
STK will generate and display an access report. The access report lists the start
and stop time for each instance that SpySat can see Washington.
3. Take a look at the access report, and answer the following questions:
How many periods of access are there?
REPORT DATA TOOLS

The Report Data window contains tools that allow you to adjust the report
style while the report is open. Lets take a look at the options available on the
Access report that you created.
TABLE 1-9. Report
BUTTON
FUNCTION
Data Window options
BUTTON
FUNCTION
Save As Text
Refresh
Save As .csv
Global Report Units
Print
Save As Quick Report
Find
Save Change to Style
Copy
Help
START AND STOP TIMES AND STEP

Using the Start and Stop times in the report header, you can limit the data to a
selected portion of the analysis period. The default period for the report is the
analysis period. You can also adjust the step to report data in coarser (increase
the step) or finer (decrease) increments.
REPORT UNITS
Take a look at the first access.
When does the first access occur?
What is the duration of the first access?
Thats a lot of seconds. It really doesnt seem to make sense to report this
length of time in seconds, does it? What youd like to know, is how many
hours that is. Can you figure how each duration translates to hours? You dont
need to.
1. Select the access report to bring it to the front.
2. Click the Global Report Units button ( ) at the top of the report.
3. When the Units dialog appears, select Time in the Dimensions list. You will
see that the default time unit is set to Seconds (sec).
4. Select Hours (hr) from the New Unit Value list.
5. Click OK to save the change and dismiss the Units window.
6. Return to the access report.
Look at the duration values. Theyve all been converted to hours.
Now, you can answer the question that you set out to solve.
For how many hours in one twenty-four hour period could you spy on
Washington, D.C. from a satellite in a Molniya orbit?
7. When you finish, close the access report.
Where Is SpySat When He Sees It?

The access report that you created assures you that SpySat can indeed see
Washington, and even tells us WHEN SpySat can see Washington; but suppose,
for instance, you are operating some sort of collection sensor attached to
SpySat and you want to know where to point the sensor during access. Youd
need to know WHERE SpySat is with respect to Washington when access occurs.
Access data can also give you this information.
1. Select the Access tool ( ) to bring it to the front.
2. Click the AER... button in the Graph area.
STK will generate and display an AER report. The AER report gives the
azimuth, elevation, and range of SpySat, relative to Washington, during each
period of access.
3. Use the AER report to answer the following questions:
When is SpySat furthest from/closest to Washington?
What is the minimum/maximum distance from which SpySat can
see Washington?
Where Should Washington Look To See SpySat?

Turn things around. Suppose youre in Washington, and you want to know
where you can look to see SpySat. In this case, you would need to calculate
access FROM Washington TO SpySat.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select the Access tool ( ) to bring it to the front.

Click the Select Object... button.
Select Washington ( ).
Click OK.
Select SpySat ( ) in the Associated Objects list.
Click the AER... button in the Reports area.
Use the two AER reports to answer the following questions:
Is the distance between Washington and SpySat different from

Washingtons perspective?
Would you be able to answer your original question if you had
calculated data FROM Washington TO SpySat? How can you tell?
8. Close any open reports.

9. Close the Access tool.
When You Finish

1. Save ( ) your work.
2. Close the scenario ( ).
3. Leave STK ( ) open.
Where Is the Space Station Now?
EXERCISE 2
In this exercise, you will define and assess a real-world problem, and then model and
analyze that problem in STK. Upon completion, you will be able to:
Understand the STK paradigm, Scenario Basic properties, and the Properties
Browser.
Build a scenario that models a real-world problem.
Use object Constraints properties to model real-world limitations.
Use 2D & 3D Graphics to visualize real-world constraints.
Problem Statement
Its exciting to be able to see a satellite moving in the night sky - even more so
when its the International Space Station (ISS). Youd like to determine when you
can see the ISS from your present location (call it MyTown) when it flies
overhead within the next three (3) weeks.
BREAK IT DOWN
You will start looking for ISS tomorrow.

You are interested in passes that occur over the next three weeks (21 days).
You can see ISS with the naked eye from the ground when it is illuminated.
You can see ISS with the naked eye when it is dark on the ground.
When you are on the ground trying to see something in space, the lower
you look along the horizon, the more atmosphere you have to look
through and the better the chance that something will be in the way.
It is often effective, when building STK scenarios, to start from the ground
and work your way up. Make an outline of how you might build an STK
scenario.
I. Model the World
A. Define the analysis period of interest
B. Save the scenario to a unique folder
C. Add Terrain and imagery
II. Populate the World
A. Model facilities, cities, targets, and area targets
B. Model ground vehicles, ships, and submarines
C. Model aircraft and air breathing missiles
D. Model missiles, launch vehicles, and satellites
III. Personalize Your World
A. Model payloads (sensors or radar) and comms (transmitters and
receivers)
B. Set Constraints
C. Set Accesses, Chains, and Coverage
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 2
WHERE IS THE SPACE STATION NOW?
IV. Analyze the Relationship of Objects in Your World

A. Where am I?
B. What can I see?
C. When can I see it?
SOLUTION
Build a scenario that allows you to calculate a simple line-of-sight access
between MyTown and the International Space Station (ISS) that considers lighting
and elevation limitations.
Scenario Analysis Period

You can set the scenario analysis period by typing Now, Today, Tomorrow, or +/
- a specified number of days or weeks in the appropriate fields. These settings
reference the current date and time based on your computer's internal clock.
If you save a scenario that includes these settings, the analysis period is
updated every time the scenario is opened to correspond to the current date
and time.
This scenario might be used a hundred times from various locations at various
times. The specific date isnt important. It is more important that you get
information that lets you know when you can see the ISS right now. That
being the case, it seems like it might be a real time saver to set the scenario
start time to Today.
Lets try it!
TABLE 2-1. New
OPTION
VALUE
Name
Where_Is_ISS
Description
When will ISS be visible over the next three (3) weeks?
Location
3. Right click in the Analysis Period text box to reveal the floating menu.
4. Set the Start Time to Today.
5. Set the Stop Time to + 21 days.
Exercise 2 | Page 3
If the default start of the analysis period is already todays date at noon
(displayed in UTCG), why do I need to change it to Today?
6. When you finish, click OK.

A folder with the same name as your scenario is created for you in the
location specified above.
Model MyTown
The Insert STK Objects tool offers a variety of methods for introducing different
types of facilities. For this example, it will be sufficient to mark the location of
the city where you are right now, or MyTown. An easy way to introduce a city is
to create the object using a predefined database object from the STK City
Database.
1. Bring the Insert STK Objects tool ( ) to the front.
By default, new facilities are inserted at the latitudinal and longitudinal
coordinates of AGI headquarters near Philadelphia. If you are at AGI
headquarters, select Insert Default as the method to position the facility
at that location.

TABLE 2-2. Insert
OPTION
facility
VALUE
Facility
Select a Method:

4. Query the City Database to find a database entry that matches the city
where you are currently taking this class.
5. Use that entry to insert an STK facility object representing MyTown into
the current scenario.
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 4
Renaming Objects
STK provides a variety of options for renaming object in the Object Browser.
Select the object, and then click the name of the object to make it editable.
Right-click the object and select Rename from the context menu that
appears
Select the object in the Object Browser, and click the F2 button on your
keyboard.
Use one of the methods outlined above to rename the new facility MyTown.
1. Select the facility( ) in the Object Browser.
2. Click the F2 button on your keyboard.
3. Rename the facility MyTown.
Model ISS
You can also introduce predefined satellite models based on database entries.
TABLE 2-3. Insert
OPTION
satellite
VALUE
Satellite
Select a Method:
Select From Satellite Database
The STK Satellite Database

The Satellite Database is another database tool shipped with STK for your use.
The unclassified Satellite Database that comes with basic STK is published by
USSTRATCOM. This database contains positional data for thousands of
satellites in the form of two-line element sets (TLEs). You will use the Satellite
Database tool to model ISS.
See if you can find a database entry for ISS, and use it to insert an STK
satellite object ( ).
Exercise 2 | Page 5
1. When the Satellite Database Search tool appears, set the following:
TABLE 2-4. Satellite
search criteria
OPTION
STATE
VALUE
Common Name
On
ISS
SSC Number
Off
N/A
TLE Source
N/A
Online: AGI Server
2. Click Search.
By default, when you insert a satellite using Satellite Database entries, ephemeris
is propagated using the analysis period and the SGP4 propagator.
3. Select the ISS entry (25544).
4. Click Insert to insert an STK satellite object ( ) representing ISS into the
scenario.
5. Close the Satellite Database Search tool.
SATELLITE PROPERTIES
Lets take a look at the properties for the satellite imported from the database.
1. Double-click ISS_25544 ( ).
2. Ensure that the Basic - Orbit page is selected.
3. Click the Preview... button in the TLE Source area.
A window that displays the two-line element (TLE) information that will be
used to propagate the SGP4 satellite will appear. Feel free to discuss the
various TLE data with your instructor.
4. When you finish, click OK to dismiss the TLE Preview window. Leave
ISS_25544s ( ) properties open.
When Can I See ISS From My Town?

You have two objects in your scenario, one satellite representing ISS and one
facility representing MyTown. You need to know when ISS is within MyTowns
line of sight. Calculate a simple access to determine when you can see the ISS.
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 6
1. Click the Access tool button ( ) on the STK Tools toolbar.

2. Set the Access For option to MyTown ( ).
The Access For object will automatically be set to the object selected in
the Object Browser.
3. Select ISS_25544( ) in the Associated Objects list.

Access is automatically computed when you generate any type of
Access report, graph, or display. You do not need to click the Compute
button before generating data from the Access tool
STK will generate and display an Access report. The Access report that you
created tells you WHEN access occurs. Knowing when to look for ISS is
helpful, but you also want to know where to look for ISS. See if you can
determine WHERE ISS is with respect to MyTown when access occurs.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Select the Access tool ( ) to bring it to the front.

Click the AER... button in the Reports area.
Close the Access tool ( ).
Leave the Access and AER reports open.
The Access report lists the start and stop time for each instance that ISS is
within MyTowns line of sight. The AER report gives the azimuth, elevation,
and range of ISS during each period of access.
9. Take a look at the Access and AER reports that you created.
10. Note the answers to these questions:
How many accesses are there?
What is the total duration of all the accesses?
What is the elevation range of the accesses?
Model Real World Conditions

According to the information that you have, you can only see ISS with the
naked eye from the ground when it is in direct sun and when it is dark in
MyTown. Take another look at the times when MyTown can see ISS.
Are these access times useful to you?
Exercise 2 | Page 7
How can you ensure that STK will only provide access times that meet
your criteria?
In order to model realistic system limitations, STK provides constraints.

Constraints allow you to place limitations on the performance of objects. STK
provides several different types of constraints. The types of constraints
available will depend on the object on which the constraint is being imposed.
All constraints work in an AND configuration meaning that when multiple
constraints are set, they must all be satisfied in order for an access to occur
(e.g., Basic constraints AND Sun constraints AND Temporal constraints,...
must all be satisfied in order for an access to occur). If any single constraint is
violated, that access is invalidated.
Add a Constraint To the ISS

Your list says you can only see ISS with the naked eye from the ground when
the spacecraft is in direct sun. You need to exclude access that occur when
ISS is NOT in direct sunlight because although it will pass over you, it wont
be illuminated such that you will be able to see it from the ground with the
naked eye.
SUN CONSTRAINTS
You can use a Sun constraint to model this limitation. Sun Constraints enable
you to impose lighting constraints based on the position of the Sun and
Moon. When a Lighting option is set, it indicates that access to an object,
which uses one or more constraints, is valid only under these specified lighting
conditions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open ISS_25544s ( ) properties ( ).

Select the Constraints - Sun page.
Enable the Lighting option towards the bottom of the page.
Select Direct Sun from the adjacent list.
Click OK to accept the changes, and dismiss ISS_25544s ( )
properties ( ).
WHEN CAN I SEE ISS?

The lighting constraint ensures that ISS will be considered in your analysis
only when it is in direct sun. See how that has affected your access.
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 8
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bring the Access...report to the front.

Refresh ( or F5) the Report Data window.
Bring the AER...report to the front.
5. Take a look at the access and AER reports that you created.
6. Note the answers to the following questions:
What is the total duration of the accesses?
Do accesses occur during daylight hours?
CHANGE TO LOCAL TIME

Your default report access times are in Universal Time (UTCG). You want to
change the time to the local time. This will simulate the current conditions in
MyTown.
1. Select the AER report to bring it to the front.
2. Click the Report Units button ( ) at the top of the Report Data window.
3. When the Units dialog appears, select DateFormat in the Units list. You will
see that the default time unit is set to Gregorian UTC (UTCG).
4. Select Gregorian LCL (LCLG) from the Change Unit Value list.
5. Click OK to save the change and dismiss the Units window.
6. Return to the Access report.
Gregorian LCL is dependent on your system clock and time zone. If
MyTown is located in a time zone other than the one your computer is
set to, the resulting access times would be invalid.
7. Take a look at the access and AER report.

Now, do accesses occur between sunset and sunrise?
Add Constraints To MyTown

Your list says you can only see ISS with the naked eye when it is dark in
MyTown. You need to exclude accesses that occur during daylight hours in
MyTown because, although the ISS will pass over you, it won't be dark enough
in MyTown to spot ISS from the ground with the naked eye.
Exercise 2 | Page 9
SUN CONSTRAINTS FROM THE GROUND

For your analysis, you need MyTown to be available only at night. To model the
lighting conditions you need to impose a separate constraint on MyTown based
on the position of the Sun.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open MyTowns ( ) properties ( ).

Enable the Lighting option.
Select Umbra (no sun light) from the adjacent list.
Click Apply. Do not close the properties ( ).
WHEN CAN I SEE ISS WITH MYTOWN CONSTRAINED?

Constraining MyTown ensures that it will be considered in your analysis only
when it is totally shadowed from the sun. Check to see how that has affected
access to ISS.
1.
2.
3.
4.

5. Take a look at the access and AER reports that you created.
6. Note the answers to the following questions:

How did applying a lighting constraint to MyTown affect accesses?
At what elevation does the first access occur?
BASIC CONSTRAINTS
You know that when you are on the ground trying to see something in space
the lower you look along the horizon the more atmosphere you have to look
through and the better the chance that something will be in the way. To help
avoid the elevation angle problem, STK allows you to put an elevation angle
constraint on a ground-based location. A good typical minimum elevation is
6-8 degrees, but it can be more depending on the area, the surrounding
terrain, and even buildings.
To model a more realistic representation of MyTowns ( ) availability, impose

a minimum elevation angle constraint.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Return to MyTowns ( ) properties ( ).

Select the Constraints - Basic page.
Enable the Min option in the Elevation Angle area.
Enter 6 deg in the adjacent textbox.
Click OK to accept the changes, and dismiss MyTowns ( ) properties ( ).
WHEN CAN I SEE ISS?

The elevation angle constraint models a more realistic representation of
MyTowns availability. Check to see how that has affected the number of
accesses.
1.
2.
3.
4.


How did applying an elevation angle constraint to MyTown affect
accesses?
5. When you finish, close all open report windows.
Where Am I?
Now, you have data that lets you know exactly where and when to look for
ISS from MyTown, but wouldnt it be nice if you could visually identify when
the accesses occur and when the constraints that youve set are valid? That
would give you a nice visual representation of accesses.
ACCESSING WINDOW PROPERTIES

Suppose you wanted to change the properties of a visualization window
itself ? What if you needed to adjust the lighting display in the window and not
just for an object, or change the central body? Every visualization window
(2D and 3D) has its own properties just like STK objects. Properties for
windows have their own Properties Browser which is accessed in the same
manner as object properties.
You can access window properties on one of the following ways:
Right-click anywhere in the window, and select Properties ( ) from the
menu that appears.

Click the Properties ( ) button on the toolbar that corresponds to the
window whose properties you would like to access.
DISPLAY CONSTRAINTS
You can set lighting conditions in the 2D Graphics window that will provide a
visual representation of how the lighting constraints that you set are affecting
the objects in your scenario.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the 2D Graphics window to bring it to the front.

Open the 2D Graphics window properties ( ).
Select the Lighting page.
Enable the Sunlight - Show Outline option.
Enable the Subsolar Point - Show option.
Click OK.
When you display outlines on the map in the 2D Graphics window, lighting
conditions are displayed on the surface of the Earth. ISS is several kilometers
above the Earth, so the times at which it crosses the solar terminator in the
2D Graphics window will not be exact, but they do provide a general idea of
the lighting conditions for ISS. If you want to display exact lighting for ISS,
you can use the 3D Graphics window.
GET MOVING!
The ISS object marker is positioned according to the current animation time
in both windows, and its ground and orbit tracks are clearly visible.
1. Ensure that the 2D and 3D Graphics window are clearly visible in your
STK Workspace.
3. Watch as your objects move along in the 2D Graphics window as
animation progresses.
Can you identify the approximate times when ISS moves in and out of
periods of sunlight?
1. Reset ( ) the animation again

3. Pause ( ) the animation when you see an access.
FIGURE 2-1.
2D View: Access from MyTown to ISS
4. Now, check the time in the Animation toolbar.

FIGURE 2-2.
Animation toolbar during access from MyTown to ISS
Does that time show up on your access report?

The time of access will be different in your report because your scenario
is based on relative time (Today +\-).
5. Close any remaining Report Data windows.
SET YOUR 3D GRAPHICS WINDOW TO ISS

1.
2.
3.
4.
Reset ( ) the animation.

Right-click ISS_25544 ( ) in the Object Browser.
Select Zoom To.
Mouse around in the window to get a better look at ISS_25544 ( ).
The ISS satellite looks quite different than the default satellite. If you load a
satellite using the Satellite Database tool, information for the inserted satellite
appears on the Description page of its basic properties, and when available, the
appropriate 3D model is also loaded.
FIGURE 2-3.
3D View: ISS model

Is ISS always in sunlight when access occurs?
Save Your Work

1.
2.
3.
4.

Save ( ) your work.
Close the scenario ( ).
Leave STK ( ) open.
How Is the Reception On My

Satellite Radio Outside the
Continental U.S.?
EXERCISE 3
In this exercise, you will define and assess a real-world problem, and then model and
analyze that problem in STK. Upon completion, you will be able to:
Understand and manipulate 2D object and window properties.

Model and manipulate multiple objects simultaneously.
Model a region-of-interest on the surface of the central body.
Model land- and sea-based Great Arc vehicles.
Define and manipulate a vehicle route.
Use the Message Viewer and Status Bar to aid in definition and analysis of an object.
How Is the Reception On My Satellite Radio Outside the Continental U.S.?
Problem Statement
In this exercise, youre going to take a little trip. You are a naval officer who
just graduated from the Naval Post Graduate School in Monterey, CA. You got a
Sirius XM Radio for graduation. After graduation, you need to drive from
Monterey to San Diego to ship out for Nagasaki, Japan on the USS Iwo Jima.
You have a friend who lives on the Big Island of Hawaii. The USS Iwo Jima is
scheduled to dock briefly on the Big Island. Youd like to know if youll be able
to use your new satellite radio in Nagasaki or should you leave it on the Big
Island with your friend?
BREAK IT DOWN
You will leave Monterey today at noon local time (displayed in UTCG) on
graduation day.
To get to San Diego, you will drive down the Pacific Coast Highway traveling at
about 50 m.p.h.
Your trip to San Diego from Monterey will take about seven and a half (7.5)
hours.
You ship out of San Diego for Nagasaki tomorrow morning at 8 a.m. local
time (displayed in UTCG).
The USS Iwo Jima will dock on the Big Island of Hawaii briefly.
Your friend lives on the Big Island of Hawaii.
Your satellite radio must be able to communicate with the satellite radio
Sirius XM Radio satellites XM-3 (Rhythm), XM-4 (Blues), SIRIUS-1, SIRIUS2, SIRIUS-3 to work.
SOLUTION
Build a scenario representing your travels from Monterey to Nagasaki. This will
include two separate trips--the trip from Monterey to San Diego, and then from
San Diego to Nagasaki (including a momentary port on the Big Island of
Hawaii), and then determine if your new satellite radio will work for the
duration of your trip.
Create a Scenario
If everything goes according to schedule:
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 2
HOW IS THE RECEPTION ON MY SATELLITE RADIO OUTSIDE THE CONTINENTAL U.S.?
You leave Monterey Today at noon (displayed in UTCG).

It takes about seven and a half (7.5) hours to get from Monterey to San Diego.
It takes a little over nine (9) days to get from San Diego to Nagasaki, Japan.
You make a short stop on the Big Island of Hawaii while aboard the USS
Iwo Jima.
It looks like a ten (10) day analysis period should be more than enough time to
encompass all that you need to accomplish.
TABLE 3-1. New
OPTION
VALUE
Name
Rock_the_Boat
Description
Hows the Reception On My Satellite Radio Outside the

Continental U.S.?
Location
Analysis Period
Default (today at noon local time) to + 10 days

Model Locations On the Ground

You have a world, and a defined period for analysis. You need to add objects
that model locations and vehicles that youll need. According to what you
know there are four locations of interest on the ground:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Monterey
San Diego
The Big Island of Hawaii
Nagasaki
Exercise 3 | Page 3
Use the object insertion tool to model facility objects representing the start
(Monterey) and destination (San Diego) locations for the first leg of your journey,
as well as your final destination (Nagasaki). These entries should also be
available via the STK City Database.
TABLE 3-2. Object
insertion options
OPTION
VALUE
Facility
Select a Method:
CALIFORNIA CITIES
First, lets add your start location--Monterey, California and your destination
location--San Diego, California.
1. When the City Database Search tool appears, set the following:
TABLE 3-3. City
search criteria
OPTION
STATE
VALUE
City Name
On
Province
On
California
Country
Off
N/A
Auto Select Color
On
N/A
Enabling the Auto Select Color option ensures that each city is assigned
a unique color for display in the visualization windows.
2. Click Search.
3. You may get a warning telling you that only the first 2000 results will
display in the search window. Click OK to dismiss the warning.
4. When the search results appear, hold down the Ctrl key and select the
Monterey entry and the San Diego entry.
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 4
NAGASAKI
Now add your final destination location--Nagasaki, Japan.
1. Return to the City Database Search tool.
2. Set the following:
TABLE 3-4. City
search criteria
OPTION
STATE
VALUE
City Name
On
Nagasaki
Province
On
Nagasaki
Country
Off
N/A
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click Search.
When the search results appear, select the Nagasaki entry.
Click Insert
When you finish, close the City Database Search tool.
MODEL A REGION-OF-INTEREST
Now, you need to model the location of your ships first stop as well as the
location where your friend lives--the Big Island of Hawaii. Assume that if you
leave your satellite radio with your friend in Hawaii, theyll want to use it all
over the island (e.g., at the beach, in the car, etc.) and not just in one city. That
being the case, youll want to model the entire Big Island of Hawaii.
Just as STK provides objects that can be used to represent a specific point-ofinterest on the surface of the central body, it also provides an object that can
be used to model a region-of-interest on the surface of the central body-- an area
target ( ).
TABLE 3-5. Create
OPTION
an area target
VALUE
Area Target
Select a Method:
Select Countries And US States
Exercise 3 | Page 5
STK comes with predefined area target objects representing all countries and
each of the U.S. states. These predefined objects can be imported into an STK
scenario and used to represent various regions-of-interest on the surface of
the central body. Youll use one of the predefined area targets to model the Big
Island of Hawaii.
4. When the selection dialog appears, select the following:
TABLE 3-6. Area
List Selections
target list selection options
OPTION
STATE
Countries
Off
US States
On
Other Features
Off
5. Locate and select Hawaii, United States in the list.

6. Enable the Primary Area Only option in the Insert area.
Hawaii is a collection of islands represented by several different area targets in
STK--each island, including the Big Island, is a separate polygon. Selecting
Primary Areas Only during the creation process, will insert only one area target
representing the Big Island of Hawaii when you click the Insert button. If you
had selected All Areas, an area target representing each one of the Hawaiian
islands would be imported when you click Insert.
8. Close the area target selection dialog.
Get a Better Look!

Sometimes it is helpful, or even necessary, to remove background distractions
from the visualization window when using them to define objects. Up until
now, youve used 2D Graphics properties to define the display of objects in the
2D Graphics window.
ZOOM TO IT!
2. Zoom To the Hawaii ( ) area target in the 3D Graphics window.
3. Mouse around until you get a clear view of the Big Island.
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 6
FIGURE 3-1.
3D View: Hawaii area target
4. Look at the outline of the Hawaii ( ) area target against the globe in the
3D Graphics window.
Why doesnt the outline of the Hawaii area target match the imagery on
the globe?
The predefined area targets that are shipped with STK are now based on GIS
data making them incredibly accurate. The background image laid on the
globe in the 3D Graphics window, although very accurate, is simply an image
overlay and not as accurate as the GIS shapefile.
2D GRAPHICS WINDOW DETAILS

Details control the appearance of the map in the 2D Graphics window. Change
the map background and turn on some borders so that you can focus on the
locations of interest more clearly.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the 2D Graphics window properties button ( ).

Select the Details page.
Select RWDB2_Provincial_Borders (state boundaries) in the Items list.
Select a new map background using the Image option in the Backgrounds
area.
5. Click Apply each time you select a new map background to see it in the 2D
Graphics window.
6. After exploring some of the available map backgrounds, disable the Image
option.
Exercise 3 | Page 7
7. Click OK.
The map image will be removed from the map, and the 2D Graphics window
will have a solid background. Only objects and outlines will be visible.
FIGURE 3-2.
2D View: Black map with provincial borders only
2D ZOOM
The first portion of your journey has you driving from Monterey to San Diego.
Before you define the route from Monterey to San Diego, get a better look at
those two locations. Looking at this from a world view its really difficult to
separate the two California locations. They look like theyre all bunched up on
top of each other.
Zoom In on the map in the 2D Graphics window so that Monterey and San Diego
are clearly visible but distinctly separate. This will help you pinpoint the
beginning and end of your route more accurately.
2. Click the Zoom In button ( ) on the Default toolbar.
3. Click and hold the left mouse button and drag it over the area of the map
around Monterey ( ) and San Diego ( )in the 2D Graphics window.
CHANGE THE FACILITY MARKER STYLE

Now, your objects stand out on the map more, but its still hard to pinpoint
the exact locations of Monterey, San_Diego, and Nagasaki. Change the
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 8
appearance of the facility markers in the 2D Graphics window so that the

facility model isnt covering the location marker.
1. Hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard.
2. While holding the Ctrl key down, select all three facilities ( ) in the Object
Browser.
3. Click the Properties button ( ) on the Default toolbar to open the
properties for all three objects.
4. Select the 2D Graphics - Attributes page.
5. Change the Marker Style option to * (asterisk).
6. Click OK.
Much better. Now, you can really pinpoint the location of your first two
points-of-interest. It should look something like this:
FIGURE 3-3.
2D View: Zoom to California
Ground Vehicles In STK

It looks like youve defined all relevant points-of-interest on the ground, but
now you need a way to get from point to point. You need to model the
various vehicles that will take you from Monterey to Nagasaki.
Youll use ground vehicles to move around on the ground in STK. Great Arc
vehicles travel along the surface of the central body. The route of a Great Arc
vehicle is defined with respect to the central body at a specified altitude. Three
types of Great Arc vehicles--aircraft, ships, and ground vehicles--are available in STK.
Exercise 3 | Page 9
When you insert an undefined vehicle object, essentially you insert an empty
shell. Although all STK objects are inserted with default properties defined,
vehicles must be propagated before they become active because they are
moving objects. To propagate means to cause to move in some direction, so
when you propagate a Great Arc vehicle it has a defined route.
Three types of propagators are available for Great Arc vehicles:
TABLE 3-7. Propagators
for Great Arc vehicles
PROPAGATOR DESCRIPTION
GreatArc
The Great Arc propagator is used exclusively for Great Arc vehicles in STK. It
defines a point-by-point path over the surface of the central body with position and
altitude defined at each point.
The STKExternal propagator is available for all vehicles in STK. It allows you to
read the ephemeris for a vehicle from a file. The file must be in ephemeris file
STKExternal
format (*.e). A detailed description of the ephemeris file format can be found in
STK Help.
RealTime
The Real Time propagator is available for all vehicles in STK. It allows you to
propagate vehicle ephemeris using near-real-time data received over a Connect
socket.
Model Ground Transportation

Your first vehicle will take you from Monterey to San Diego. Heres what you
know:
You will leave Monterey today at noon local time (displayed in UTCG) on
graduation day.
To get to San Diego, you will drive down the Pacific Coast Highway traveling at
about 50 m.p.h.
Youll travel the first leg of your journey in some sort of car or truck. In STK,
ground vehicles can be used to model vehicles, such as automobiles, trucks,
and trains. Youll insert an STK Ground Vehicle to model the truck in which
you will be cruising down the Pacific Coast Highway to San Diego.
TABLE 3-8. Create
OPTION
an area target
VALUE
Ground Vehicle
Select a Method:
Define Properties

4. Rename the new ground vehicle object Hot_Rod ( ).
When STK creates an object using the Define Properties method, it will
automatically open its properties for you.
DEFINE A ROUTE
Route properties for Great Arc vehicles allow you to define the path that the
vehicle will follow.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bring the new vehicles properties ( ) to the front.

Ensure that the Basic - Route page is selected.
Ensure that the Propagator option is set to GreatArc.
With the Route page open, click the* Monterey marker on the map in the
2D Graphics window to begin Hot_Rods ( ) route.
When the Route page is open, every time you click on the map in the
2D Graphics window, STK will define a waypoint along the vehicles route that
corresponds to the coordinates on the map. The waypoint will be recorded in
the table at the bottom of the Route page. Each row of values in the table
describes a single waypoint in the vehicles route.
5. Return to the Route page.
6. Double-click the Speed entry for the first waypoint to make it editable.
7. Change the Speed value to 50 mi/hr. Dont forget to include the mi/hr unit
abbreviation.
Mph is not an acceptable abbreviation. STK will not accept values
followed by mph. Enter values in miles per hour using the mi/hr unit
abbreviation.
8. Press the Enter key on your keyboard.
The speed value will automatically be converted to kilometers per second (the
default Distance and Time Units set at the scenario level). All subsequent points
will use the new speed.
9. Click the * San_Diego marker to end Hot_Rods ( ) route.
REFINE YOUR ROUTE

Take a look at Hot_Rods route in the 2D Graphics window. It appears that, to
get from * Monterey to * San_Diego you will have to drive through the ocean for
a bit. How about you fix that.
FIGURE 3-4.
2D view: Hot_Rods route
1. Return to the Route page.

2. Select the first waypoint in the table.
3. Click the Insert Point button to the right of the table. A new waypoint will
be added below the first point.
4. Select the new point in the table.
5. Enable the Clicking on map changes current point option below the table.
6. Click somewhere on that map along the vehicles ( ) route to add a point
that brings the vehicle out of the ocean.
7. Click OK.
FIGURE 3-5.
2D view: Hot_Rods adjusted route
8. Play ( ) the animation, and watch as Hot_Rod ( ) moves along its route.
Where Am I?
While zoomed in on an area in the 2D Graphics window its easier to
distinguish your California locations but your other points-of-interest are out
of your view.
2. Restore the view ( ) in the 2D Graphics window.
THE CENTER OF THE UNIVERSE

Earlier, you removed distractions from the map background and locations
that youll need to pinpoint on the map, but some of your points-of-interest
are on opposite sides of the world. Projection properties control the display of the
central body in the 2D Graphics window. Changing the map center can give
you a better perspective of where your points-of-interest are relative to each
other. Recenter the map in the 2D Graphics window.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the 2D Graphics window.

Click the Properties button ( ) on the 2D Window Defaults toolbar.
Select the Projection page.
Ensure that Click on New Center Point option is selected in the Select Map
Center area.
5. Bring the 2D Graphics window to the front being careful not to click on
the map.
When the Projection page is open, every time you click on the map in
the 2D Graphics window, STK will center the view on the location that
you select.
6. Click somewhere west of California in the Pacific Ocean on the map in the
2D Graphics window to recenter the view.
7. Click OK.
8. Zoom In ( ) on the map in the 2D Graphics window so that you can see all
of your locations.
FIGURE 3-6.
2D View: Recentered zoom of Pacific Ocean
Ship Out
You still need a way to get from San Diego to Nagasaki. Model the USS Iwo
Jima using an STK ship object.
Heres what you know:
You ship out of San Diego for Nagasaki tomorrow morning at 8 a.m. local
time (displayed in UTCG).

The USS Iwo Jima will dock on the Big Island of Hawaii briefly.

TABLE 3-9. Create
OPTION
a ship
VALUE
Ship
Select a Method:
Define Properties
VEHICLE TIME PERIODS

Vehicles in a scenario may have a defined period of their own, so that they are
available for only a portion of the scenario, as illustrated in Figure 3-7.
FIGURE 3-7.
Time relationships
Youre only interested in Iwo_Jima from the time you board it to leave for
Nagasaki, so you can limit its availability to that portion of the scenario.
1. Ensure that the Basic - Route page is selected.
2. Change the vehicle Start Time to tomorrow morning at 8 am (12:00
UTCG), since that is the time you ship out.
3. Click Apply.
CHART A COURSE
Use Iwo_Jimas Basic - Route properties to chart a course from San_Diego to
Nagasaki.
1. Ensure that the Propagator option is set to GreatArc.
2. With the Route page open, click * San_Diegos marker on the map in the
2D Graphics window. This is the first waypoint in Iwo_Jimas ( ) route.
3. Now, click Hawaii ( ) on the map in the 2D Graphics window.
4. End the route by clicking * Nagasakis marker.
5. Note the time that you arrive in Nagasaki.
7. Rename the new ship ( ) Iwo_Jima.
Where In the World Am I?

Can you identify where you are on the globe in the 3D Graphics window? If
not, you can use the Show Location of 2D Maps option to locate the zoomed
area on the globe in the 3D Graphics window. If the Show Location of 2D Maps
option is on, whatever area is zoomed in the 2D Graphics window will be
outlined on the globe in the 3D Graphics window.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the 3D Graphics window to bring it to the front.

Click the Properties button ( ) on the 3D Window Default toolbar.
Enable the Show Location of 2D Maps option.
Click OK.
Click the Home View button ( ) on the 3D Graphics toolbar to restore the
default Earth-centered view.
7. Mouse around until you get a good look at the outline of your 2D zoom
on the globe.
FIGURE 3-8.
3D View: 2D Graphics zoom
Can you see the outline marked on the globe in the 3D Graphics window? If
you cant see the outline use the mouse to rotate the globe in the 3D Graphics
window until you can.
You Are Here!

If you click anywhere along any Great Arc vehicles route, in the 2D Graphics
window, you can return information about that point using one of the
following methods:
Click a point and check the Status Bar along the bottom of the STK
Workspace.
Click a point, and then double-click the last row in the Message Viewer. A
message window will pop up displaying information about that point. Each
time you click on a point, a new entry will be added to the Message Viewer.
THE MESSAGE VIEWER

STK uses the Message Viewer to display various error and informational
messages. The Message Viewer is not visible in the STK Workspace by default.
You can use the Message Viewer to return information about any point in a
vehicles route.
1. Click any point along the route of either Great Arc vehicle in the 2D
Graphics window.
2. Check the Status Bar along the bottom of the STK Workspace.
3. Click the information bubble ( ) beside the waypoint information.

OR
1. Extend the View menu on the Menu bar.
2. Select Message Viewer ( ) from the View menu.
You will see a series of informational messages organized in a grid along the
bottom of the STK Workspace. You can extend the limits of individual cells in
the grid to make all of the information clearly visible if you like. To change the
width of a column:
1. Move the mouse to its right-hand border of the column that you wish to
resize. The mouse pointer will turn into a vertical sizing bar with arrows
( ).
2. When the sizing bar appears, hold the left mouse button and drag the
border to the right to increase the width of the column or to the left to
decrease it.
Columns to the right of the selected border will move as the border moves,
without themselves being resized.
3. Try using the Status Bar and the map to return information about
individual waypoints, and answer the following questions:
What time will you arrive in Hawaii?
in Nagasaki?
When do you cross the international date line?
Approximately how long did each leg of your journey take?
MEASURE DISTANCE ON THE MAP

The 2D Graphics window also has a Measure tool with which you can measure
the distance between any two points on the map. When you use the Measure
tool, the shortest distance between two points will be returned via an entry in
the Message Viewer.
Try using the Measure tool to get an idea of the distance between Monterey and
San_Diego.
1. Make sure the Message Viewer ( ) is visible in the STK Workspace.
2. Click Measure ( ) on the 2D Graphics toolbar.
3. Hold the left-mouse button down, and drag the mouse between * Monterey
and * San_Diego.
4. Release the mouse button.
5. Double-click on the last entry in the Message Viewer ( ). A message
window containing the shortest distance between the two points, the
central angle, and the azimuth bearing, will pop-up.
6. Use the Measure ( ) tool to answer the following questions:
Approximately how far is it from Monterey to San Diego?
San Diego to Hawaii?
Hawaii to Nagasaki?
San Diego to Nagasaki?
The east coast to the west coast of the Big Island?
7. When you finish, close the Message Viewer ( ).
Get Moving!
2. Pause ( ) the animation when Hot_Rod ( ) gets to San_Diego ( ).
Hot_Rod ( ) will stay in that position until you reset or play again. If you
resume animation, Hot_Rod ( ) disappears because no positional data
exists for it beyond its arrival time in San Diego ( ).
3. If you go too far, try using the Step in Reverse ( ) to back Hot_Rod ( ) up.
FIGURE 3-9.
2D View: Hot_Rod in San Diego
WHERES MY RIDE?
Where is Iwo_Jima? Look at the current animation time in the Animation
toolbar. Youve arrived in San_Diego, but it is not quite time to ship out yet.
Iwo_Jimas not here.
1. Advance to the second part of your trip by editing the time in the
Animation toolbar so that it is after Iwo Jimas expected arrival (8 a.m. local
time tomorrow).
2. Press the Enter key on your keyboard.
FIGURE 3-10.
2D View: Iwo Jimas route
Did you find Iwo Jima?

3. Play ( ) the animation again.
Is Iwo_Jima ( ) moving?
4. When you finish, Reset ( ) the animation.
Wheres that Sirius Rhythm and Blues?

XM and SIRIUS were originally two different satellite service providers. The
XM Satellite Radio service originally used two satellites Rock (XM-1) and Roll
(XM-2). They have since launch two new satellites Rhythm (XM-3) and Blues
(XM-4) and powered down the two originals satellites which are now used as
backups.
So, under normal circumstances, my Sirius XM Radio would rely on the two
active XM satellites and the three active SIRIUS satellites. That means you
need to include all five active satellites in our analysis. Lets add those now.
RHYTHM & BLUES

First, add the XM radio satellites.
TABLE 3-10. Insert
OPTION
satellite
VALUE
Satellite
Select a Method:

4. When the Satellite Database Search tool appears, set the following:
search criteria
OPTION
STATE
VALUE
Common Name
On
Rhythm
SSC Number
Off
N/A
Auto Select Color
On
N/A
5.
6.
7.
8.
Click Search.
When the search results appear, select Rhythm (official name XM-3).
Click Insert.
Now, change the search criteria as follows:
search criteria
OPTION
STATE
VALUE
Common Name
On
Blues
SSC Number
Off
N/A
Auto Select Color
On
N/A
9. When the search results appear, select Blues (official name XM-4).
10. Click Insert.
SIRIUS SATELLITES
Now, add the SIRIUS radio satellites.
1. Change the search criteria as follows:
search criteria
OPTION
STATE
VALUE
Common Name
On
Sirius
SSC Number
Off
N/A
Auto Select Color
On
N/A
2. Click Search.
When the search results appear, youll see several satellites that have SIRIUS
in their name listed. Some of those satellites are owned by the U.S. based
SIRIUS satellite radio company. The others are owned by a Swedish company
which provide the Nordic countries and the Baltic states, with TV, radio, data
and communications. Since, you only want the U.S. satellites, youll need to
determine which is which.
How can you see more information about each of the search results?
By default, the search results provide each satellites common name, SSC
number, and official name.
FIGURE 3-11.
Satellite database search results window
You can edit the display of your search results by adding or removing
columns from the results table. Lets add another column of data that will help
us sort the results.
1. Right-click in the headings area for the search results.
2. Select Owner from the menu that appears.
3. Select the three satellites whose owner is US (SIRIUS-1, SIRIUS-2, and
SIRIUS-3).
4. Click Insert.
Get a Better Look!

When XM and SIRIUS were different companies they had very different
ideas about how to provide the best coverage which is obvious when you look
at the SIRIUSly different orbits of the sister satellites.
1. Position the 2D & 3D Graphics windows so that you can clearly see them
both in the STK Workspace.
All of the radio satellites are positioned according to the current animation
time in both windows, and its ground (2D) and orbit tracks (2D and 3D) are
clearly visible.
2. First, lets take a look at the 3D Graphics window.
FIGURE 3-12.
3D View: SIRIUS XM Radio satellite orbits
XM has two high-powered satellites in geostationary orbit above the equator-Rhythm (white) and Blues (blue).
SIRIUS does not use geostationary satellites. The three SIRIUS satellites
(orange and yellow) fly in highly elliptical geosynchronous orbits in a 24-hour
orbital period.
The ground tracks for the SIRIUS satellites show up nicely on the map in the
2D Graphics window. Lets take a look.
FIGURE 3-13.
2D View: SIRIUS satellite ground tracks
The two original companies also used very different satellites, which you can
see by bringing the 3D models in focus. Lets take a look.
2. Make Blues_29520 ( ) the focal point in the 3D Graphics window.
FIGURE 3-14.
3D View: SIRIUS satellite model
3. Now, change the view so that one of the SIRIUS satellites ( ) is the focal
point.
FIGURE 3-15.
3D View: XM satellite models
SIRIUS XM Access
In 2007, XM and Sirius merged. The merger combined the two radio services
and created a single satellite radio network proving satellite radio service
across North America. That being the case, you are not concerned with
maintaining a signal as you drive down the coast of CA; however, youre not
sure if you will be able to maintain a signal as you traverse the ocean. If you
have access to any of these five satellites during your voyage, you can maintain
some radio service.
Has the merger expanded the area from which you can receive a
signal?
If they were still two companies, which one would have been able to
provide you service closest to Nagasaki?
Do I have to calculate access to all of those different satellites
separately and compare the results?
No. Fortunately, STK allows you to compute access FROM one object TO
multiple objects in the same scenario. Lets use that capability to determine
when you can see how many satellites, if any, from the Iwo Jima during our
voyage.
1. Open the Access tool ( ).
TABLE 3-14. Access
from Iwo Jima to SIRIUS XM
OPTION
VALUE
Access for
Iwo_Jima
Associated Objects
Select all of the satellites:

BLUES_29520
RHYTHM_28626
SIRIUS-1_26390
SIRIUS-2_26483
SIRIUS-3_26626
3. Click the Access button in the Graphs area.

FIGURE 3-16.
Graph: Access from Iwo Jima to SIRIUS XM Radio
satellites
XM satellites are in orbits designed to provide gap-free coverage anywhere

within the contiguous U.S., the southern tip of Alaska, and in the southern
part of Canada. The three SIRIUS satellites broadcast directly to the
consumer's receiver, but due to the highly elliptical orbit only two of them
broadcast at any given time. The access graph makes this obvious. Accesses
for the XM satellites (Rhythm and Blues) is uninterrupted but not as far
reaching. Access to the SIRIUS satellites has gaps but reaches much further
than the XM satellites.
The exact time that access starts and ends is not as obvious on a graph as it
would be on a report, but the data for five different satellite is much easier to
compare side by side on a graph. If you want to see the exact times for any of
the access intervals in the graph, rest your cursor on that interval line.
FIGURE 3-17.
Graph: Access times
4. Use the graph to answer the following questions:

What time do you arrive in Nagasaki?
Do you have access to any of the satellites at the time of your arrival in
Nagasaki?
If they were still two separate companies, which would have been the
better choice for long distance voyages outside the U.S.? Inside the
U.S.?
Constrain Iwo Jima

You have one more consideration. You can not realistically access a satellite
that is right along the horizon as you sail across the ocean. Lets make our
analysis a bit more realistic by restricting line of sight access to those which
are at least ten degrees above the Iwo_Jima.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open Iwo_Jimas ( ) properties ( ).

Enable the Min option in the Elevation Angle area.
Enter 10 deg in the adjacent textbox.
Click OK to accept the changes, and dismiss Iwo_Jimas ( )
properties ( ).
REFRESH
1. Bring the Access...graph to the front.
2. Refresh ( or F5) the Report Data window.
3. Use the graph to answer these questions.
Do you have access to any of the satellites when you arrive in
Nagasaki?
Will you leave your radio with your friend in Hawaii or take it with you to
Nagasaki?
What time do you lose access to the satellites?

4. When you finish, close your access graph.
5. Leave the Access tool ( ) open.
Get Moving!
The graph tells you what time you lose access, but do you know exactly where
you are when you lose access? Lets see if you can get a look at where exactly
Iwo Jima is when you lose access to the satellites.
clearly.
Can you visually determine when you lose all access with the SIRIUS
XM Radio satellites?
You could continue to let the animation play until the first access occurs, but
there is an easier way to fast forward the animation to an access period.
Lets try it now.
1. Bring the Access tool ( ) to the front.
TABLE 3-15. Access
from Iwo Jima to SIRIUS XM
OPTION
VALUE
Access for
Iwo_Jima
Associated Objects
Select all of the satellites:

BLUES_29520
RHYTHM_28626
SIRIUS-1_26390
SIRIUS-2_26483
SIRIUS-3_26626
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click the Access button in the Reports area.

Right-click the last access time from the access report.
Select Start Time --> Set Animation Time from the context menu.
Position the 2D and 3D Graphics windows so that you can see them both
clearly.
FIGURE 3-18.
2D View: Iwo Jima last access
How far from Nagasaki are you when you lose access?
When You Finish

1. Close the Access report.
2. Close the Access tool ( ).

Can I Detect a Rogue Aircraft

In Route From Havana
to Cape Canaveral?
EXERCISE 4
In this exercise you will define and assess an unauthorized aircrafts flight through
sensitive airspace. You will then model and analyze that problem in STK. Upon
completion, you will be able to:
Model an airborne Great Arc vehicle.

Use a sensor object to model various stationary and moving instruments.
Use Access to detect an aircrafts flight.
Create a Viewer Data File (VDF) using STKs publishing capability.
Can I Detect a Rogue Aircraft In Route From Havana to Cape Canaveral?
Problem Statement
You are working for the FAA and your boss is concerned about the
possibility of an unauthorized aircraft flying from Havana to Cape Canaveral.
Your boss wants you to examine an early warning detection system in Miami
that works in concert with an existing tracking radar attached to a satellite
(Icarus) traveling in a low-earth orbit (LEO). You want to send this scenario to
your colleagues and supervisors at both Miami and Cape Canaveral. Keep in
mind, they do not have STK.
BREAK IT DOWN
You need an early warning detection system that will catch the
unauthorized aircraft flying to Cape Canaveral from Havana, Cuba at an

altitude of 10,000 feet.
You can use the Icarus satellite to monitor the Havana airport and any
aircraft that penetrate sensitive airspace.
You know that Icarus is equipped with both a fixed field-of-view radar and
another radar that can gimbal to track objects, but you need to determine
which system will track intruders more efficiently.
You need to design a radar net over Miami.
SOLUTION
Model a scenario that allows you to consider and compare all of your system
options. Simulate an aircraft traveling from Havana to Cape Canaveral and
determine which portion of the aircraft's route can be tracked by the various
radars.
Create a Scenario
The first thing you need to do is create a scenario.
You need to define the times during which the conditions that you set for
your world, and the objects in your world, will be relevant. You will only be
sampling a small portion of the day--just enough time to fly from Havana to
Cape Canaveral. Three hours should more than cover it.
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 2
CAN I DETECT A ROGUE AIRCRAFT IN ROUTE FROM HAVANA TO CAPE CANAVERAL?
Enter the following in the New Scenario Wizard:

TABLE 4-1. New
OPTION
VALUE
Name
Rum_Runner
Description
Can I detect a rum runner in route from Havana to Cape

Canaveral?
Location
Analysis Period
Change the default analysis period so that it spans only three

hours.

So, now you have a world. Before you can build the early warning system
simulation, youll populate the world with all the players - youll add Cape
Canaveral, Miami, Havana, and an aircraft to fly through your tracking systems.
Model The Planes Target

The Facility Database is yet another database available for use in STK. Lets
launch a query and see if you can find a database entry for Cape Canaveral.
TABLE 4-2. Create
OPTION
target location
VALUE
Target
Select a Method:
Select From Facility Database
Exercise 4 | Page 3
The STK Facility Database

The Facility Database catalogs known facilities which are part of ground station
networks. See if you can find a database entry for the Cape_Canaveral site, and
use it to model a target object representing your destination location.
QUERY THE FACILITY DATABASE

1. When the Facility Database Search tool appears, enter the following:
TABLE 4-3. New
target search criteria
OPTION
STATE
VALUE
Site Name
On
Cape Canaveral
Color
On
Red
2. Click the Search button.

3. When the search results appear, double-click the Cape_Canaveral entry to
insert it into the scenario.
4. Close the Facility Database Search tool.
Model Destinations
See if you can find a database entry for Miami and Havana, and use them to
model STK facility objects representing the city where your boss wants you to
place the early warning system (Miami) and the aircraft's home port (Havana).
TABLE 4-4. Insert
OPTION
facility from database
VALUE
Facility
Select a Method:
ADD CITIES
Query the STK City Database for Miami and Havana.
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 4
1. When the City Database Search tool appears, enter the following criteria:
TABLE 4-5. New
city search criteria
OPTION
STATE
VALUE
City Name
On
Miami
Auto Select Color
On
N/A
2. Click Search.
3. When the search results appear, double-click the Miami, Florida entry to
insert it in the scenario.
TABLE 4-6. New
OPTION
STATE
VALUE
City Name
On
Havana, Cuba
Auto Select Color
On
N/A
5. Click Search.
6. When the search results appear, double-click the Havana, Cuba entry to
insert it in your scenario.
7. When you finish, close the City Database Search tool.
Model the Intruder

Your next player is an aircraft that youll use to model a possible attacker. In
STK, an aircraft is an airborne Great Arc vehicle.
TABLE 4-7. Create
OPTION
aircraft
VALUE
Aircraft
Select a Method:
Define Properties
Exercise 4 | Page 5
GET A BETTER LOOK

2. Zoom In ( ) around Havana ( ) and Cape_Canaveral ( ).
FIGURE 4-1.
2D View: Zoom to Cape Canaveral and Havana
DEFINE A ROUTE
Of course, an aircraft doesnt travel on the central body at zero (0) altitude the
way that a ship or ground vehicle would, but its route is also defined with
respect to the central body at a specified altitude.
1. Ensure that the Basic - Route page for the new aircraft ( ) is selected.
3. With the Route page open, click Havana ( ) on the map in the 2D Graphics
window.
4. Go back to the aircrafts ( ) properties ( ).
5. Double-click the altitude field for the first waypoint to make it editable.
6. Change the Altitude value to 10000 ft.
Dont forget to include the ft unit abbreviation.
7. Press the Enter key on your keyboard. The altitude value will automatically
be converted to kilometers (the default distance unit set at the scenario
level).
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 6
8. Click Cape_Canaveral ( ) on the map in the 2D Graphics window. A

second way point (at 3.048 km altitude) will be entered in the table on the
Route page.
FIGURE 4-2.
2D View: Rogue aircrafts route
9. Click OK.
10. Rename the new aircraft ( ) Rogue_Aircraft.
Model a LEO Satellite

There is only one more player to add to your scenario - the satellite that you
are going to use to try to track the rouge aircraft as it runs for Cape_Canaveral.
TABLE 4-8. Create
OPTION
satellite
VALUE
Satellite
Select a Method:
Orbit Wizard

4. Change the following values:
Exercise 4 | Page 7
TABLE 4-9. Icaruss
definition properties
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Repeating Ground Trace
Satellite Name
Icarus
Longitude of the First Ascending Node
-90 deg
5. Click OK.
ZOOM TO ICARUS
Use the Zoom To option to center the view in the 3D Graphics window on
Icarus, so that you will have a birds eye view of our camera angles as you add
them.
1. Zoom To the Icarus ( ) satellite in the 3D Graphics window.
2. Mouse around in the window to get a good view of Icaruss ( )
perspective of the Earth.
FIGURE 4-3.
3D View: Icarus
Model Instruments
It looks like you have all the players loaded in your scenario. Its time to
design your early warning detection system. Youll use sensors to model the
various components that make up the system.
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 8
An STK sensor object can be used to represent the field-of-view, the overall
volume of space in which radar looks, of such instruments as optical or radar
sensors, receiving or transmitting antennas, and lasers. Sensor objects model
generic payloads and as such must be a child, or subordinate, object of a
facility, target, or vehicle object.
Fixed Sensors On Moving Objects

The default STK sensor model will create a nice representation of a sensor
with a fixed field-of-view. Attach a sensor to Icarus, and see if you can detect
the rouge aircraft as it makes its move on Cape_Canaveral.
TABLE 4-10. Create
sensors
OPTION
VALUE
Sensor
Select a Method:
Insert Default

When you select an Attached Object for insertion, STK requires that you select
the parent object for the object being created. In this example, you want to
attach the first sensor that youll create to the Icarus satellite.
1. Select Icarus ( ) in the Select Object dialog.
2. Click OK.
3. When the new sensor ( ) appears in the Object Browser, rename it Fixed.
The default sensor that STK creates when you introduce a sensor object is a
simple conic sensor with a 45 degree cone angle. The default sensor view is
fixed at zero (0) degrees azimuth and 90 degrees elevation which is nadir
pointing. When a sensor object is attached to a moving object it points with
respect to the parent objects reference frame. A fixed sensor is always
pointing in a fixed direction with respect to its parent object.
GET A BETTER LOOK

Exercise 4 | Page 9
2. Mouse around to get a clear view of the fixed sensors field-of-view.

FIGURE 4-4.
3D View: Fixed sensor field-of-view
GET MOVING!
1. Compute Access ( ) between Fixed ( ) and the Rogue_Aircraft ( ).
2. Position the 2D and 3D Graphics windows so that they are both clearly
visible.
4. Play ( ) the animation, and watch as Icarus ( ) travels along its path.
5. When you finish, reset ( ) the animation.
Were there visible accesses between the fixed sensor and the rogue
aircraft?
6. Bring the Access tool ( ) to the front.

7. Generate an Access report.
According to your data, Fixed cant see the rogue aircraft coming at all. Well,
that didn't work so well. Try again with a targeted sensor.
8. After reviewing the data, close the report window.
Moving Sensors On Moving Objects

When you attached the first sensor, you used the default fixed pointing type.
In reality, most satellites can gimbal their sensors to track other objects
(stationary and moving). STK provides a variety of sensor definition and
pointing types that allow you to model this type of movement.
TABLE 4-11. Create
OPTION
sensors
VALUE
Sensor
Select a Method:
Define Properties

4. Select Icarus ( ) in the Select Object dialog.
5. Click OK.
TARGETED SENSOR DEFINITION

To create a sensor that will move to target the Rogue Aircraft, you'll again, use
the Simple Conic type, but this time, youll make the cone angle much smaller.
You dont need a large field-of-view because the sensor is targeted directly at
the object-of-interest.
1. When the sensors ( ) properties ( ) open, ensure that the Basic Definition page is selected.
2. Set the following Definition properties:
TABLE 4-12. Targeted
sensor definition properties
OPTION
VALUE
Sensor Type
Simple Conic
Cone Angle
5 deg
3. Click Apply.
SENSOR POINTING
Targeted sensors track other objects. A targeted sensor is positioned with
respect to the parent object, but instead of pointing in a fixed direction, it will
move about so that its boresight is always pointing in the direction of the
object that it targets. Lets use a targeted sensor so it can monitor the rogue
aircraft at all times.
1. Select the Basic - Pointing page.
2. Set the following Pointing properties:
sensor pointing properties
OPTION
VALUE
Pointing Type
Targeted
Boresight Type
Tracking
3. Select the Rogue_Aircraft ( )in the Available Targets list.

4. Click the button to move Rogue_Aircraft ( ) to the Assigned Targets list.
5. Click on the Target Times... button.
This is an easy way to see if access exists between the targeted sensor and its
targeted object/objects without actually computing access.
When does access to the rouge aircraft begin?
6. Click OK to close the Target Times window.
If you want to change the color of the Targeted sensor, you can do so by
going to the 2D Graphics Attributes page.
7. Click OK.
8. Rename the new sensor ( ) Targeted.
GET A BETTER LOOK

clearly.
FIGURE 4-5.
3D View: Targeted sensor field-of-view
Can you see the targeted sensors field-of-view?

Why does the targeted sensors field-of-view disappears from time to
time?
Were there visible accesses between the targeted sensor and the
rogue aircraft at the time the aircraft is taking off?
WHAT CAN TARGETED SEE?

1. Compute Access ( ) FROM Targeted ( ) TO the Rogue_Aircraft ( ).
2. Generate an Access Graph ( ).
FIGURE 4-6.
Graph: Access from Targeted to the Rogue_Aircraft
3. Use access data to answer the following questions:
Can Havana see the potential intruder?

Is the Rogue_Aircrafts entire flight detectable?
If not, during what portion of the Rogue_Aircrafts flight is it detectable?
For how long?
4. Close the Access Graph ( ).
Change Your Perspective

1. Zoom to Miami ( ) in the 3D Graphics window.
2. Mouse around until you get a clear view of Miami ( ).
Fixed Sensors On Stationary Objects

Now that you know Icarus can monitor the rogue aircraft shortly after
takeoff, and can then pass this information back down to the ground. To
complete your early warning detection system, you need to model the radar
net in Miami. First, youll simulate a stationary radar dome attached to
Miami.
In the previous examples, you attached sensors to moving objects to model a
tracking system. Sensors can also be used to model instruments attached to
stationary objects, such as facilities and targets. Fixed sensors attached to
stationary objects also point with respect to the parent objects reference
frame. Since stationary objects never change position or direction, a fixed
sensor will always point in a fixed direction with respect to the parent object.
2. Use the Define Properties method to attach a sensor ( ) to Miami ( ).
3. Rename the new sensor ( ) Radar_Dome.
RADAR DOME DEFINITION

TABLE 4-14. Radar
Dome definition properties
OPTION
VALUE
Sensor Type
Simple Conic
Cone Angle
90 deg
3. Click Apply.
CONSTRAIN RADAR DOME

The sensor created here is similar to the fixed sensor attached to Icarus, but it
has a larger field-of-view, and instead of pointing straight down this one
points straight up from the Miami facility. It has an up looking field-of-view
that covers everything above Miami. Thats not very realistic. Lets limit its
range so that the field-of-view spans a constrained area around Miami.
1.
2.
3.
4.

In the Range area, enable the Max. option.
Enter 200 km in the adjacent textbox.
Click Apply.
PROJECTION DISPLAY
2D Graphics Projection properties for sensors control the display of sensor
projection graphics in the 2D Graphics window. Sensors attached to facilities
and targets differ in their display behavior from those attached to vehicles.
The intersections of vehicle-based sensors with the Earth are displayed during
animation.
The Extension Distances option indicates whether the sensors field-of-view
crossings at specified distances are computed and displayed in the 2D Graphics
window. When the sensor display is set to project to the range constraint,
STK projects the sensor field-of-view to the maximum range specified on the
Basic Constraints properties page for the facility or target.
1. Select the 2D Graphics - Projection page.
2. Set the following Extension Distances options:
TABLE 4-15. Radar
Dome extension distances
OPTION
VALUE
Use
On
Project To
Use Range Constraint
3. Click OK.
GET A BETTER LOOK

1. Ensure that the view is set on Miami ( ).
2. Mouse around to get a better look at the radar dome.
FIGURE 4-7.
3D View: Radar Dome sensor attached to Miami
WHAT CAN RADAR DOME SEE?

Can you see the radar dome that you modeled?
2. Watch as the Rogue_Aircraft travels from Havana to Cape_Canaveral.
Did you see the Rogue_Aircraft enter and then exit the radar dome?
WHEN CAN RADAR DOME SEE IT?

You know that the Rogue_Aircraft travels through the radar dome, which
constitutes an access, but when do accesses occur? For how long? Check to
see.
1. Compute Access ( ) FROM Radar_Dome ( ) TO the Rogue_Aircraft ( ).
2. Position the windows such that the 2D and 3D Graphics windows are
clearly visible.
clearly.
FIGURE 4-8.
2D View: Access from Radar Dome to Rogue Aircraft
Are there visible accesses between Radar_Dome and the

Rogue_Aircraft?
FIGURE 4-9.
3D View: Rogue Aircraft in Radar Dome
ACCESS DATA
Generate some hard data to help you determine when and for how long the
rogue aircraft is in the dome.
1. Generate an Access graph.
FIGURE 4-10.
Graph: Access from Radar Dome to Rogue Aircraft
2. Use access data to answer the following questions:

Can Radar_Dome detect the Rogue_Aircraft?

For how long?
3. When you finish, close the Access graph.
Moving Sensors On Stationary Objects

Often, the dome created by a sensor is used to model a field-of-view - the
overall volume of space in which radar looks. The radar itself often sweeps or
scans through that field-of-view in a repeating cycle. The area of space
represented by such a scanning or spinning radar at any given instant is its
field-of-view. Add another level of fidelity to your scenario and build a
sweeping radar beam using a moving sensor.
Just as you were able to track the Rogue_Aircraft using a sensor that moved
independent of its parent object, you can also model instruments attached to
stationary objects that move independent of the object to which they are
attached. Spinning sensors are often used to model radars, push broom
sensors, and other instruments that spin, scan, or sweep over time.
1. Use the Define Properties method to attach a second sensor ( ) to
Miami ( ).
2. Rename the new sensor ( ) Radar_Sweep.
3. When the Radar_Sweeps ( ) properties ( ) open, ensure that the Basic Definition page is selected.
TABLE 4-16. Radar
Sweep definition properties
OPTION
VALUE
Sensor Type
Complex Conic
Inner Cone Angle
0 deg
Outer Cone Angle
90 deg
Minimum Clock Angle
0 deg
Maximum Clock Angle
30 deg
5. Click Apply.
SENSOR POINTING
The above configuration should create a wedge type field-of-view. Right now,
that wedge is just pointing straight ahead. You want the wedge to spin and
scan the radar dome continuously. Spinning sensor model radars, push broom
sensors and other instruments that spin, scan or sweep over time. Lets take a
look.
TABLE 4-17. Radar
Sweep pointing properties
OPTION
VALUE
Pointing Type
Spinning
Spin Rate (Revs/Min)
Spin Axis Cone Angle
3. Click Apply.
If you want to change the color of the Radar Sweep, you can do so by
going to the 2D Graphics Attributes page.
CONSTRAIN RADAR SWEEP

Right now the sweeping radar extends beyond the limits of the radar dome
because you haven't constrained it. Lets limit the range of the radar so that it
scans only the inside of the dome.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Enable the Max. option in the Range area.
Enter 200 km in the adjacent textbox.
Click Apply.
PROJECTION DISPLAY
1. Select the 2D Graphics - Projection page.
2. Set the following Extension Distances options:
TABLE 4-18. Extension
Distances
OPTION
VALUE
Use
On
Project To:
Use Range Constraint
3. Click OK.
GET A BETTER LOOK

1. Use the Decrease Time Step button ( ) to decrease the time step to one
second.
2. Play ( ) the animation. Notice how Radar_Sweep ( ) continuously scans
around Miami.
If your animation time step is an even multiple of your spin rate, you will
not see motion of the sensor when you animate.

FIGURE 4-11.
3D view: Radar Sweep sensor attached to Miami
WHAT CAN RADAR SWEEP SEE?

1. Compute Access ( ) FROM Radar_Sweep ( ) TO the Rogue_Aircraft ( ).
2. Position the 2D and windows so that they are both clearly visible.
FIGURE 4-12.
2D View: Access from Radar Sweep to Rogue Aircraft
Are there visible accesses between Radar_Sweep and the Rogue_Aircraft?
WHEN CAN RADAR SWEEP SEE IT?

You know that Radar_Sweep brushes over the Rogue_Aircraft repeatedly as the
intruder travels from Havana to Cape_Canaveral, which constitutes access, but
when do accesses occur? How many? For how long? Check and see.
1. Return to the Access ( ) tool.
2. Generate an Access graph.
FIGURE 4-13.
Graph: Access from Radar Dome to Rogue Aircraft
At first glance, it appears that you have one continuous access, but this is not
the case. Because the accesses are so short and close together, you cant
identify the individual accesses from this graph. The Zoom In tool can be used
on a graph much like it can be on the 2D Graphics window.
3. Use the Zoom In ( ) tool to zoom in on a section of the graph.
FIGURE 4-14.
Graph: Zoom In section of the graph
Due to the number of accesses, an access report might be more helpful in

providing statistical data on these accesses.
4. Close the Access graph.
5. Return to the Access tool ( ).
6. Generate an Access report.
7. Using access data, answer the following questions:

8. Leave the Access report open. You will need it in a minute.
LOG YOUR FIRST ALERT

You want your colleagues to know the instant that the Rogue_Aircraft is caught
by Radar_Sweep inside the dome. Lets store a view that depicts just that.
1. Reposition your view so that Miami ( )is the focal point in the
3D Graphics window, if it is not already.
2. Right-click the first access time from the Access report.
3. Select Start Time --> Set Animation Time from the context menu.
4. Mouse around until you are happy with the view.
The view should show the rouge aircraft breaching the perimeter of the radar
dome.
FIGURE 4-15.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
3D View: First access
Click Stored Views ( ) on the 3D Graphics toolbar.

Click New.
Rename View0 FirstAccess.
Click OK.
Close the Access report.
The view of Miami and the associated time are now saved for immediate
recall. To recall a view at any time, select it from the drop down menu beside
the Stored Views button ( ) on the 3D Graphics toolbar.
Which Radar Sees the Aircraft When?

Return to STK and compare the sensors that had access to the rogue aircraft.
1. Compute access ( ) FROM the Rogue_Aircraft ( ) TO all four
sensors ( ).
2. Click the Access button in the Graph area.
FIGURE 4-16.
Graph: Access from the rogue aircraft to sensors
3. Use the Access Graph ( ) to answer the following questions:

Why doesnt data for the fixed sensor display on the graph?
Can you see the difference between the access times for the various
sensors?

5. Close the Access graph.
Share a VDF
Now you want to send this scenario to your colleagues and supervisors at
both Miami and Cape Canaveral; however, they do not have STK. You could
send them the raw text data, but you would really like for them to be able to
see how the different tracking instruments perform. How can they interact
with your STK scenario without installing STK?
Simple--your colleagues can download a free copy of AGI Viewer! AGI Viewer
enables users of any technical level to view and interact with STK analyses via
a VDF files--4D scenes of time-varying STK analyses. These files are created
with STK. STKs publishing capability allows users to save scenarios as VDF
files, and share them with anyone, regardless if they have STK or not.
PACK IT UP
Youve stored the view that you want them to see. Now you need to create a
VDF file that can be opened using the free AGI Viewer tool.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Save ( ) the scenario ( ).

Select Rum_Runner ( ) in the Object Browser.
Extend the File menu.
Select VDF Setup...
Enable the Minimal VDF option.
When the dialog comes up, the Minimal VDF option is off by default. If
Minimal VDF is on, STK creates the smallest possible VDF file that can be
opened in STK and AGI Viewer. The Minimal VDF option will include only
the default data sets in your VDF file. (The default data sets are selected when
the Minimal VDF option is enabled.). Clear the Minimal VDF option to
include analysis files, globe data files, graphics files, and/or scenario files with
the VDF file.
6. Click the Create VDF... button.
STK should default to the same directory where the Rum_Runner scenario is
stored. If it does not, locate the Rum_Runner directory that you created
earlier.
7. Click Save.
If you selected the Minimal VDF option, you should open and view the
VDF you created to ensure all critical information is included in the file.
8. Minimize the STK application.
VIEW ROGUE AIRCRAFT

Its always a good idea to review the VDF before you send it.
1. Locate the default user directory where your scenario is saved (C:\My
Documents\STK 9).
2. Double-click the Rum_Runner.vdf ( ) file. The AGI Viewer application will
launch automatically.
The controls at the top of the window work exactly the same as they did in
STK.
3. Experiment with playing ( ) and pausing ( ) the animation, zooming,
mousing around in the 3D Graphics window, and switching to a Stored
Views ( ).
While there is no View To/From button, you can still focus the 3D
window on a particular object by right-clicking and selecting View
Object.
When You Finish

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Close AGI Viewer ( ).

Return to STK ( ).
Restore the view in the 3D Graphics window ( ).
Save ( ) your work.
Leave STK ( ) open.
How Many Satellites Must I

Access To Communicate
With the GPS Network?
EXERCISE 5
In this exercise you will acquire some new skills that will help you define and assess a
real-world problem, and then model and analyze that problem in STK. Upon completion,
you will be able to:
Understand the definition and application of the constellation object in STK.

Understand the definition and application of the chain object in STK.
Change a 3D object model file (*.mdl).
Understand the various types of access data.
Calculate complex accesses.
How Many Satellites Must I Access To Communicate With the GPS Network?
Problem Statement
You are going to be involved in an in-flight test utilizing STK. In this
experiment, you will be flying in an aircraft and modeling that aircrafts route
in STK on a laptop you have brought onboard with you. The analysis you are
doing will include feeding real-time GPS positional data on the aircraft into
the STK scenario. You have a handheld GPS receiver that you will be using to
generate the positional data, as you cannot tap into the aircrafts main
navigational system.
Under normal conditions you know you would have no problem obtaining a
GPS positional fix on the aircraft for the duration of its mission. However,
the area of the aircraft in which you will be working offers only a small
navigation window in the roof for you to mount your handheld GPS receiver.
This limits your visibility to the GPS constellation considerably. You can only
access those satellites which have at least a 45 degree elevation relative to the
aircraft. To obtain a GPS positional fix, you must have access to at least 4
GPS satellites simultaneously.
Also, as you are flying this mission, you will be receiving communications
from your experiment support team who are in Omaha, Nebraska. This
communication will be sent to the aircraft from Omaha via a low earth
orbiting (LEO) satellite.
BREAK IT DOWN
The aircraft will be receiving instructions from Omaha during the mission.
You will use a satellite traveling in a circular orbit to communicate
EXERCISE 5 | PAGE 2
instructions from Omaha to the aircraft.

You will use a handheld GPS receiver.
You will feed the position data into a laptop running STK.
You can accurately model the GPS network using the GPS almanac.
When you attach the GPS receiver to the inside of the window, you can't
get a complete horizon to horizon visibility. The field-of-view is restricted
to 45 degrees or more above the local horizon of the aircraft.
You must have simultaneous access with at least four (4) or more satellites
in the GPS network at any given time to obtain a positional fix.
You need to test the efficacy of your system over a 24 hour portion of your
aircrafts route.
HOW MANY SATELLITES MUST I ACCESS TO COMMUNICATE WITH THE GPS NETWORK?
SOLUTION
Build a scenario that can be used to determine if and when you have access to
at least four (4) members of the GPS network from your aircraft. Your
scenario must consider the signal receiving and minimum coverage limitations
outlined above.
Create a Scenario
The first thing you need to do is create a scenario. You are modeling a twentyfour (24) hour (STK default) surveillance mission, so you dont need to
change the analysis period.
1. Click the Create a Scenario button.
TABLE 5-1. New
OPTION
VALUE
Name
How_Many_Sats
Description
How many satellites can I communicate with in the GPS

network?
Location
Analysis Period

Model Omaha
Start building your scenario from the ground up by modeling the city from
which your aircraft will be receiving instructions (Omaha).
1. Select the Insert STK Objects tool ( ).
Exercise 5 | Page 3
TABLE 5-2. Insert
OPTION
facility
VALUE
Facility
Select a Method:

TABLE 5-3. New
OPTION
STATE
VALUE
City Name
On
Omaha
Auto Select Color
On
N/A
5. Click the Search button.

6. When the search results appear, double-click the Omaha, Nebraska entry to
Model an Aircraft
Now, go ahead and add the surveillance aircraft from which you want to
access the GPS network.
TABLE 5-4. Create
target location
OPTION
VALUE
Aircraft
Select a Method:
Define Properties

4. Rename the new aircraft ( ) Eagle_Eye.
GET A BETTER LOOK

You will be clicking on the map in the 2D Graphics window to create the
aircraft route. Before you begin, lets zoom in a bit.
EXERCISE 5 | PAGE 4

2. Zoom In ( ) around North America.
3. With the aircraft properties open, click the mouse anywhere over North
America in the 2D Graphics window to mark the starting point of the
aircrafts ( ) route.
4. Click two more points anywhere over North America.
5. Return to the Basic - Route page and check the time of the last waypoint in
the waypoints table. Make sure that it is at least twenty-four (24) hours
after the first waypoint. If not, continue inserting waypoints over North
America until the route does span twenty-four (24) hours.
6. When you finish, click Apply to save the new route.
FIGURE 5-1.
3D View: Eagle Eye route
OBJECT MODELS
You can use 3D models to represent scenario objects and aid in analyzing and
visualizing the relationships among the objects. STK contains detailed
3D models representing objects such as ground stations, aircraft, air strips,
satellites, aircraft carriers, and helicopters. Once you specify a model to
represent an object, it is graphically displayed in its correct position and
orientation, as defined in the objects Basic properties. Position and orientation
can vary over time and can be manually adjusted within the objects
3D Graphics properties.
Lets use a model to represent the aircraft in this scenario.
Exercise 5 | Page 5
1. Reposition your view so that the aircraft( ) is the focal point in the
3D Graphics window, and zoom in until it is clearly visible.
2. Select the 3D Graphics - Model page. The model file should show
aircraft.mdl.
3. Click the ellipsis button ( ) beside the Model File option to locate available
model files (*.mdl).
4. Select a new model.
5. When you return to the Model page, click Apply.
6. Select the 3D Graphics window to bring it to the front, so that you can see
the new model.
7. Experiment with the different models available until you find one that you
like.
8. When you finish, click OK to accept the changes.
9. Rename the surveillance aircraft Eagle_Eye.
Model a Circular Orbit

You have a world, the city of Omaha, and a surveillance aircraft with a twentyfour (24) hour route--Eagle_Eye. Lets model the satellite that will be used to
communicate instructions from Omaha to Eagle_Eye.
TABLE 5-5. Insert
OPTION
satellite
VALUE
Satellite
Select a Method:
Orbit Wizard

TABLE 5-6. Create
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Circular
Satellite Name
Comm_Sat
EXERCISE 5 | PAGE 6
satellite
6. Click OK.
Complex Accesses
Lets change gears for a minute and talk some more about object availability
and visibility. The Access tool allows you to calculate line-of-sight visibility
between two objects of interest in a scenario. More complex scenarios may,
however, require more extensive analysis than simple point-to-point access
can provide. STK provides additional functionality which contain tools and
objects that can be used to calculate more advanced analysis.
Access - Calculates line-of-sight visibility between two objects of interest.
Chains - Chains allows you to calculate multi-hop links in a defined
sequence and treat them as a single access. When you build a chain, every
link must be met in order for access to be valid. Just like a real chain, if any
link fails, the entire chain is broken.
STK/Coverage - STK/Coverage takes the ideas of Access and Chains and
extends it to lines and surfaces in three dimensions. Coverage allows you to
analyze the global or regional coverage provided by one or more assets (e.g.
vehicles, facilities, sensors) while considering all access constraints.
Coverage also allows you to analyze coverage of individual objects within
an STK scenario as provided by one or more additional objects in the
scenario.
Other Ways to Introduce Objects

The Insert STK Objects tool also provides an option to disable this feature in the
event that you prefer to create and configure objects manually. If the Insert
STK Objects tool were disabled, you could open that tool by either:
Clicking the Insert Object button ( ).
or
Selecting
New... from the Insert menu.
If you prefer to use the Object Catalog, you can enable that tool by:
Clicking the New Object button (
) to launch the Object Catalog.
Exercise 5 | Page 7
THE OBJECT CATALOG

All objects that you can add to a scenario are also found in the Object Catalog.
The Object Catalog updates dynamically based on your selections in the Object
Browser. When you select an object in the Object Browser, the Object Catalog will
be populated with all eligible siblings and children of that object. When you
introduce an object using the Object Catalog, a generic instance of that selected
object is introduced into the scenario. STK configure that object using the
standard default properties which vary depending on the object.
FIGURE 5-2.
EXERCISE 5 | PAGE 8
Object Catalog
Using Chains
You have the three main players in the scenario, but you still need to analyze
visibility between the three. You know you need to transmit instructions
FROM Omaha TO Comm_Sat, and then FROM Comm_Sat TO Eagle_Eye.
Instead of calculating two separate line-of-sight accesses for each segment,
you can use Chains to create a relationship that will determine if the objects
have access based on the order of the sequence.
INSERT A CHAIN
1. Use the Object Catalog to insert a new chain ( ) into the scenario ( ).
2. Rename the chain Omaha_To_EagleEye.
DEFINE A SIMPLE CHAIN

The sequence of the chain is very important because the order in which the
objects are listed in the chain is the order in which the accesses are computed.
Use the information that you have and the figure below to help determine
how the chain should be ordered.
FIGURE 5-3.
Omaha to Eagle Eye chain
It looks like your chain should be ordered as follows:

Omaha ( )
Comm_Sat ( )
Eagle_Eye ( )
3. Double-click Omaha_To_EagleEyes ( ) to open its properties ( ). The
Basic - Definition page should already be selected.
Exercise 5 | Page 9
4. Locate the objects listed above in the Available Objects list and add them to
the Assigned Objects list in the order specified.
Report Chain Accesses

A chain is complete or active when all of the criteria has been met in the
proper sequence. The Complete Chain Access report is the chain's equivalent of
the access report. It tells you when the chain is complete or active.
1. Right-click Omaha_To_EagleEye ( ) in the Object Browser.
2. Select the Report & Graph Manager ( ) item from the menu that appears.
TABLE 5-7. Complete
chain access report
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Chain
Omaha_To_EagleEye
Show Reports
Off
Show Graphs
On
Style
Complete Chain Access
Generate as
Report/Graph
FIGURE 5-4.
Graph: Omaha To Eagle Eye Complete Chain Access
If necessary you could see the actual start and stop times for each
access interval by mousing over the shaded portions of the graph.
5. Use the Complete Chain Access graph to answer the following questions:
Will Eagle_Eye have the opportunity to receive data from Omaha?
How many opportunities occur in this 24 hour period?
What is the average duration of each communication window?
WHEN YOU FINISH

1. Close the Complete Chain Access report.
2. Close the Select the Report & Graph Manager ( ).
Model the GPS Network

You can use the Load GPS Constellation creation method to insert a
constellation object containing all of the satellites that make up the GPS
network and insert those objects into the active scenario.
A thorough database of historical GPS almanac data can be found at
www.celestrak.com.

TABLE 5-8. Create
OPTION
a GPS network
VALUE
Satellite
Select a Method:
Load GPS Constellation

4. Take a look at the Object Browser.
When you use the Load GPS Constellation method, all of the satellites that make
up the GPS constellation as well as a constellation are inserted into the
scenario. Each satellite that is inserted is set to use the scenario analysis
period, and is propagated using the GPS propagator. The positional data for
the GPS satellites comes from the GPS almanac. The GPS almanac is a set of
data that every GPS satellite transmits, and it includes information about the
state (health) of the entire GPS satellite constellation, and coarse data on
every satellite's orbit. This data is published by 2SOPS (2nd Space Operations
Squadron) at Schriever AFB. AGI receives regular almanac updates which are
used to keep STK up to date.
You can also import GPS positional data using the Satellite Database option.
If you pull GPS data from the Satellite Database, ephemeris is propagated from
TLE data using the analysis period and the SGP4 propagator.
Define a Complex Chain

You know you need to access the GPS signal from a receiver within the
aircraft, so you will need to know when accesses FROM Eagle_Eye TO
GPSConstellation occurs. Although an entire GPS network will be considered
in your chain, you need only include Eagle_Eye (the first object in the chain)
and GPSConstellation (the last). You do not have to add all of the individual
satellites to the chain. When the constellation is included, all objects that make
up the constellation are considered.
Define a multi-hop link analysis between Eagle_Eye (a single object) and
GPSConstellation (a collection of objects) using another chain.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the scenario ( ) in the Object Browser.

Use the Object Catalog to insert a new chain object ( ).
Rename the chain EagleEye_To_GPS.
Open EagleEye_To_GPSs ( ) properties ( ). The Basic - Definition page
should already be selected.
5. Locate and double-click Eagle_Eye ( ) in the Available Objects list to add it
to the Assigned Objects list.
6. Locate and double-click the GPSConstellation ( ) constellation in the
Available Objects list to add it to the Assigned Objects list.
7. Click OK.
CHANGE YOUR PERSPECTIVE

2. Make Eagle_Eye ( ) the focal point in the 3D Graphics window.
3. Mouse around until Eagle_Eye ( ) is clearly visible.
WHAT CAN EAGLE EYE SEE?

1. Play ( ) the animation, and watch as Eagle_Eye ( ) travels along his path.
2. Watch as the access lines between Eagle_Eye ( ) and each available
satellite as Eagle_Eye ( ) makes and loses access with them.
FIGURE 5-5.
3D View: Unconstrained GPS Access to Eagle Eye
Why are accesses between Eagle_Eye and the satellites in

GPSConstellation displaying in the window?
You didnt calculate access, did you?
Yes, you did! When you define a chain, you not only define the order of
accesses within the chain, but accesses that complete the chain are
automatically calculated. If you had objects in the scenario that were not part
of the chain, they would not be considered in chain accesses. Accesses could,
however, be calculated to and from any member of the chain to any other
object in the scenario.
Create a Window In the Aircraft

Its obvious from watching the animation that accesses occur, but how many
access are really valid? Eagle_Eye seems to have access with four (4) or more
of the GPS satellites at any given point along its route, but you know that you
only have a small window in the top of the aircraft for receiving the GPS
signal. How can you exclude accesses that arent available from that angle?
Look back at the list you made in Break it Down, on page 5-2. Your
visibility limitation restricts access to those GPS satellites which have a
minimum 45 degree elevation angle relative to the aircraft. You could model
this by placing an elevation constraint on Eagle_Eye, but that constraint would
also be taken into account in your Omaha_To_EagleEye chain. Since the
communications link does not have this same restriction, adding the
constraint would invalidate the results of that chain. The other option is to use
a sensor to model the communications window for access to the GPS
satellites.
TABLE 5-9. Create
sensors
OPTION
Sensor
Select a Method:
Define Properties
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click the Insert... button.

Select Eagle_Eye ( ) in the Select Object dialog.
Click OK.
Rename the sensor Window.
You dont need to create any more objects, so you can close the Insert STK
GET A BETTER LOOK

VALUE
FIGURE 5-6.
3D View:
Can you see the sensors field-of-view extending from Eagle_Eye?
2. Go to Windows ( ) properties ( ).
3. Ensure that the Basic - Definition page is selected.
The cone angle is the off-boresight angle. You will adjust the boresight to
point straight up 45 degrees relative to the horizon of Eagle_Eye. The
restriction yields a 45 degree off-boresight angle, so the default 45 degree
cone angle is correct.
FLIP THAT SENSOR

The restriction is correct, but the sensor is oriented straight down. You need
to reorient the sensor to point up from Eagle_Eye. Youll have to flip the
field-of-view. You can do this by pointing the sensor 180 degrees in the other
direction.
OPTION
VALUE
Pointing Type
Fixed
Elevation
-90 deg
3. Click OK.
By changing the elevation from 90 to -90 degrees, You flip the field-of-view
a full 180 degrees. Lets take a look.
The field-of-view display shows up as the shaded area projecting from the top
of the aircraft. Its obvious that many of your access opportunities will not fall
within that 45 degree window. How will you limit accesses such that you only
see and report those that fall within the aircrafts window?
FIGURE 5-7.
3D View: Eagle Eye access window display
Now, What Can Eagle Eye See?

The elevation constraint ensures that only accesses that hit the window on
Eagle_Eye will be considered. Check to see how that has affected access. To
do that, youll need to make some adjustments to the EagleEye_To_GPS chain
so that youre calculating access from the window and not from the entire
aircraft.
1. Open EagleEye_To_GPSs ( ) properties ( ). The Basic - Definition page
2. Reorder the chain as follows:
Window ( )
GPS Constellation ( )
3. Click OK.
SENSOR DISPLAY
You really dont need to see the sensor field-of-view now that youve
restricted access such that you will only display those that hit Eagle_Eye in that
window. Lets quickly remove the graphical display of the sensor field-of-view.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open Windows ( ) properties ( ).

Select the 2D Graphics - Display Times.
Change the Display Status to Always Off.
Click OK.
GET MOVING!
2. Play ( ) the animation, and watch as Eagle_Eye ( ) travels along its path.
3. Take some time to watch the access lines between Eagle_Eye ( ) and each
available satellite as Eagle_Eye ( ) makes and loses access with them.
FIGURE 5-8.
3D View: GPS access with elevation angle constrained
4. Use the 2D and windows and answer the following questions:

What happened when you reset the animation?
How many accesses do you see?
Whats different about the angle of the access lines coming to
Eagle_Eye?
Does there appear to be four or more accesses at any given time?
Constrain GPS Sats

Looking at access graphics you can see that the number of accesses has been
dramatically reduced, but are you sure that Eagle_Eye has access to at least
four (4) of the GPS satellites at any given time during the analysis period? You
could report data and identify accesses that meet this criteria, or you can
constrain the constellation--GPSConstellation--such that at least the specified
number of objects in the constellation meet the needs of the chain for a
successful access. Using the constraint will ensure that only the necessary data
is reported.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open GPSConstellation ( ) properties ( ).

Select At Least N from the Restriction list.
Enter the number 4 in the adjacent textbox.
Click OK.
NOW, WHAT CAN EAGLE EYE SEE?

1. Play ( ) the animation, and watch as Eagle_Eye ( ).
How many accesses do you see, now?
Does there appear to be four (4) or more accesses at any given time?
FIGURE 5-9.
2D View: GPS access with constraints

Accesses to fewer than four (4) members of GPSConstellation no longer display
in the visualization windows, but there still seems to be sporadic accesses.
Why dont you get some hard data that tells you exactly when accesses that
meet all of your criteria occur.
Report Chain Accesses

Previously, you used the Complete Chain Access report to ensure that Eagle_Eye
could receive instructions from Omaha. Lets use it again to see exactly when
and how often Eagle_Eye has access to GPSConstellation.
1. Right-click EagleEye_To_GPS ( ) in the Object Browser.
TABLE 5-11. Complete
chain access report
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Chain
EagleEye_To_GPS
Show Reports
On
Show Graphs
Off
Style
Generate as
Report/Graph
5. Use the Complete Chain Access report to answer the following questions:
Approximately how many accesses occur between Eagle_Eye and
GPSConstellation?
What portions of the twenty-four (24) hour mission does Eagle_Eye
have access to the required number of satellites in GPSConstellation?
If you like, you can change the report units to hours (hrs) instead of
seconds (sec). It may make the second question easier to answer.
INDIVIDUAL STRAND ACCESS

The Individual Strand Access report tells you what complete chain access
cannot, or which object in the constellation completed the chain and when.
the Complete Chain Access tells you WHEN you have a solution. The Individual
strand Access tells you WHAT your solution consists of during those time that
you have a solution.
1. Return to the Report & Graph Manager ( ).
2. Select Individual Strand Access from the Styles list.
3. Click the Generate... button.
4. Use the Individual Strand Access report to answer the following questions:
Can Eagle_Eye see at least four (4) members of GPS_Sat during the
twenty-four (24) hour mission?
Save Your Work

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Close any remaining report windows.

Close the Report & Graph Manager ( ).
Save ( ) your work.
Leave STK ( ) open.
How Will I Take Pictures Of The

Hiroshima Castle and Relay Them
In Near-Real-Time?
EXERCISE 6
In this exercise you will use your STK expertise to define and assess a complex, real-world problem,
and then model and analyze that problem. Upon completion, you will have had the opportunity to
practice the following skills:
Evaluating a complex problem and building an STK scenario to analyze that problem.
Create objects using the Object Catalog.
Use the STK databases to model objects.
Define and manipulating object and window properties.
Analyze and assess data.
You will also have the opportunity to do some things that you havent done before, such as:
Change inheritable properties for multiple objects at the scenario level.

Add a KML file to the STK 3D Graphics window for visualization.
Use the AGI Data Federate to create objects in STK
How Will I Take Pictures Of The Hiroshima Castle and Relay Them In Near-Real-Time?
Problem Statement
With the increased global seismic activity, Japanese and U.S. intelligence would
like to collect as much visual imagery of possible on Hiroshima Castle. They
need to monitor the geography of the area around the castle as well as the
structural integrity of the castle.
To do this, you need to take as many pictures of Hiroshima Castle as possible
and get them to White Sands or Guam within the next two weeks.
BREAK IT DOWN
It must be daylight in Hiroshima when you take the pictures.

The cameras attached to Landsat 5 and 7 can take pictures of Hiroshima.
Each camera has a fifteen (15) degree by four (4) degree rectangular lens.
You CANNOT downlink directly from Landsat to White Sands.
You CAN uplink from the Landsat site to TDRS 3, 5, and/or 10.
You CAN downlink from TDRS 3, 5, and/or 10 to White Sands or Guam.
Hiroshima Castle is located at 34.40 latitude and 132.46 longitude.
You have a KML file that models Hiroshima Castle that you want to use in
the 3D Graphics window.
SOLUTION
Build a scenario that can be used to determine when you can take near-realtime images of Hiroshima, in the daylight over the next two weeks using the
cameras attached to Landsat 5 or 7. After you take the images, you need to
uplink to one of the TDRS satellites, and then downlink to your White Sands,
NM or Guam site.
Wow, thats a mouthful! Lets sketch that out, and see if it makes more sense.
It all looks something like this:
EXERCISE 6 | PAGE 2
HOW WILL I TAKE PICTURES OF THE HIROSHIMA CASTLE AND RELAY THEM IN NEAR-REAL-TIME?
FIGURE 6-1.
Problem sketch
Create a Scenario
You will, again, build your analysis from the ground up. First, you need to
define the analysis time period of the conditions that you set for your world
and the objects in your world. You know that your period of analysis will be
two weeks because thats how long you have to collect the data that you need.
Define a two week analysis period.
TABLE 6-1. New
OPTION
VALUE
Name
Image_Relay
Description
How will I take pictures of Hiroshima and relay them in nearreal-time?
Location
Analysis Period
Tomorrow + 14 days
Exercise 6 | Page 3

On the Ground
The first thing you need to do is model a few locations on the ground. To
start, youll model:
The location of Hiroshima Castle.
The White Sands site.
The Guam site.
Model the Target City

Youll use the provided information in the City Database to model Hiroshima as
a target, since thats the location that your cameras will be looking at, or
targeting.
TABLE 6-2. Create
locations on the ground
OPTION
VALUE
Target
Select a Method:

TABLE 6-3. New
EXERCISE 6 | PAGE 4
OPTION
STATE
VALUE
City Name
On
Hiroshima
Color
On
Red
5. Click Search.
6. When the search results appear, double-click the first Hiroshima
(Hiroshima, Hiroshima) entry to insert it in the scenario.
Add a KML File

Now that you have entered in the ground location that you want to visualize,
you would like to see Hiroshima Castle as a model in the 3D Graphics window.
You have a KMZ file that models Hiroshima Castle.
Keyhole Markup Language (KML) is an XML based language scheme for
expressing geographic annotation and visualization on existing or future
Internet-based, two-dimensional maps, and three-dimensional Earth
browsers. KML was developed for use with Google Earth, which was
originally named Keyhole Earth Viewer. It was created by Keyhole, Inc. which
was acquired by Google in 2004. The name Keyhole is an homage to the KH
reconnaissance satellites, the original eye-in-the-sky military reconnaissance
system first launched in 1976.
KML is an international standard of the Open Geospatial Consortium.
Google Earth was the first program able to view and graphically edit KML
files. The KML file specifies a set of features (placemarks, images, polygons,
3D models, textual descriptions, etc) for display in Google Earth, Maps and
Mobile, or any other 3D Earth browser (geobrowser) implementing the KML
encoding. Each place always has a longitude and latitude. KML files are very
often distributed in KMZ files, which are zipped files with a *.kmz extension.
You will need internet access to file the Hiroshima KML file. If you not
have internet access, you can find the file in
C:\Training\STK\Image_Relay or jump to the section Model Ground
Sites on page 6-8.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open Internet Explorer ( ).

Browse to http://earth.google.com.
Click the Gallery link.
Click the 3D Building link.
Locate HiroshimaCastle.kmz. You can typically find this on the second page
or you can use the Google Earth search feature.
6. Click the Open in Google Earth button.
Exercise 6 | Page 5
7.
8.
9.
10.
Click Save.
Save the file to your desktop.
Click Close when the download is complete.
Click the button to close Internet Explorer.
BRING KML FILE INTO STK

Now that you have dowloaded the KML file, you can bring it into STK for
visualization.
1. Bring STK to the front.
2. Open the Globe Manager ( ).
The Globe Manager is used to create a profile for a globe in the 3D Graphics
window by applying and managing world background textures (.wtm), image
inlays (.jp2 &.pdttx), terrain inlays (.pdtt), specular textures (.wtm) and night
light textures (.wtm) from multiple sources, both local and external, including
AGI Globeserver, to create a globe profile. Profile items can then be set to be
displayed or hidden in the 3D Graphics window and organized into sets which
can be turned on and off in the 3D Graphics window.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select the KML tab.

Click the Open KML Content ( ) button.
Browse to the location of your KML file.
Select HiroshimaCastle.kmz.
Click Open.
You will need an install of STK 9.2 or later.
It may take a moment for the KMZ file to load into STK.
VIEW IN 3D GRAPHICS WINDOW

1. Select the Model in the KML browser.
2. Click the Zoom To ( ) button.
3. Mouse around in the 3D Graphics window until you can clearly see
Hiroshima Castle.
EXERCISE 6 | PAGE 6
FIGURE 6-2.
3D View: Hiroshima Castle
Adjust the Target

You notice that the model of the castle does not line up with your target. You
can adjust the location of the target so it is closer to the actual location.
1. Open Hiroshimas ( ) properties ( ).
2. Select the Basic - Position page.
3. Set the following coordinates:
TABLE 6-4. Move
Hiroshimas target
OPTION
VALUE
Latitude
34.403 deg
Longitude
132.459 deg
4. Click OK.
VIEW IN 3D GRAPHICS WINDOW

1. Right-click on Hiroshima ( ) in the Object Browser.
2. Select the Zoom To option.
3. Mouse around in the 3D Graphics window until you can clearly see
Hiroshima Castle.
Exercise 6 | Page 7
Model Ground Sites

Youll use the information in the Facility Database to model the sites in your
network as facility objects.
TABLE 6-5. Create
OPTION
VALUE
Facility
Select a Method:
Select From Facility Database

4. When the Facility Database Search tool appears, enter the following criteria:
TABLE 6-6. New
site search criteria
OPTION
STATE
VALUE
Site Name
On
White Sands
Auto Select Color
On
N/A
5. Click Search.
6. When the search results appear, double-click the White Sands entry to
TABLE 6-7. New
site search criteria
OPTION
STATE
VALUE
Site Name
On
Guam
Auto Select Color
On
N/A
8. Click Search.
9. When the search results appear, double-click the Guam entry to insert it in
your scenario.
10. When you finish, close the Facility Database Search tool.
EXERCISE 6 | PAGE 8
GROUP YOUR GROUND SITES

In your scenario you have the two ground stations used by the TDRS system.
In addition to including them in your scenario, you want to group them
together for analysis. How do you create a constellation with objects already
contained in your scenario? This is not a problem. In addition to having STK
create a constellation using objects selected during the object creation process,
you can also manually create an empty constellation and assign objects
yourself. Lets try it.
1. Use the Object Catalog to create a constellation object ( ).
2. Rename the constellation TDRS_Ground.
3. Open TDRS_Grounds ( ) properties ( ). The Basic - Definition page
4. Use the Selection Filter to select all of the facilities ( ) in the scenario.
5. With the Selection Filter on, move ( ) all of the facilities in the scenario to
the Assigned Objects list.
6. Click OK.
What Is the ADF?

AGI Data Federate (ADF) is a data management system that enables you to
share, collaborate, and reuse your STK data across your teams and
organizations. ADF provides a central data repository that can be accessed
seamlessly from within STK through standard file loading and saving
operations. STK provides the capability of search within the ADF and
managing the data stored there.
You will need a valid install of STK 9.2 or later and have the appropriate
license for ADF.
ADF allows for a built-in configuration management and version control

system. You can easily work together to manage, share, and modify STK data
and publish it on ADF.
You will also know who modified any of your data, when they did it, and why
they did it. ADF allows you to track the status and changes throughout the
entire life cycle of your data.
Exercise 6 | Page 9
CONNECT TO AN ADF SERVER

1. Extend the Edit menu.
2. Select Preferences.
3. Select ADF Servers in the Preferences list.
Before you use the ADF, you will need a user name and a password.
4. Click the Add a new server ( ) button.
5. Set the following options as the ADF Server details:
TABLE 6-8. ADF
OPTION
VALUE
Name
AGI ADF Server
URL
https://adf9.agi.com
Default Folder
Blank
Description
AGI ADF Server
User Name
Student
Password
Student
Server details
Confirm Password Student
6. Click OK on the ADF Server page.

7. Click OK on the Preferences page.
Now that you have connected to the ADF, let's create our Landsat satellites
from the ADF.
Model Spacecraft
You have a world, and youve defined all relevant points-of-interest on the
ground. Now, its time to look to the sky. Your scenario still needs:
The Landsat satellites of interest.
TABLE 6-9. Create
OPTION
satellite
VALUE
Satellite
Select a Method:
From AGI Data Federate
MODEL THE LANDSAT SATELLITES

Use the AGI Data Federate to model the Landsat satellite network. You can
utilize ADFs built-in searching capabilities to easily discover and access all the
latest and trusted models and data in the repository.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the Search tab when the AGI Data Federate tool appears.
Type Landsat in the All or part of the file name field.
Click Search.
When the search results appear, select Landsat5.sa.
Click Open.
The Landsat 5 satellite has been added to your scenario. You will notice
Landsat 5 has the appropriate sensor attached to it.
6. Open Landsat5s sensor ( ) properties ( ).
7. Select the Basic - Definition page.
8. Ensure the following options are set:
TABLE 6-10. Camera
definition
OPTION
VALUE
Sensor Type
Rectangular
Vertical Half Angle
7.5 deg
Horizontal Half Angle
2 deg
9. Click OK.
10. Follow the same steps to insert Landsat 7 using the AGI Data Federate.
GROUP YOUR LANDSAT SATELLITES

2. Rename the constellation Landsat_Sats.

3. Open Landsat_Sats ( ) properties ( ). The Basic - Definition page should
already be selected.
4. Use the Selection Filter to select all of the Landsat satellites ( ) in the
scenario.
5. With the Selection Filter on, move ( ) all of the satellites in the scenario to
6. Click OK.
GROUP THE CAMERAS

Now, you need to create a constellation for the two cameras that you created
because you want them to be considered as a unit also.
2. Rename the constellation CamerasFOV.
3. Open CamerasFOVs ( ) properties ( ). The Basic - Definition page should
4. Use the Selection Filter to select all of the sensors ( ) in the scenario.
5. With the Selection Filter on, move ( ) all of the sensors in the scenario to
6. Click OK.
Model the TDRS Network

Currently, the Standard Object Catalog in ADF only contains information on
imaging satellites (LEO satellites). In the future, more data will be added to
the catalog. You can use the Satellite Database Search tool to bring in the
TDRS satellites.
TABLE 6-11. Create
OPTION
VALUE
Satellite
Select a Method:
4. When the Facility Database Search tool appears, enter the following criteria:
TABLE 6-12. TDRS
search criteria
OPTION
STATE
VALUE
Common Name
On
TDRS
Auto Select Color
On
N/A
Create Constellation from Selected Satellites
On
N/A
Name
N/A
TDRS_Sats
5. Click Search.
6. When the search results appear, select TDRS 3, TDRS 5, and TDRS 10.
7. Click Insert.
8. When you finish, close the Satellite Database Search tool.

Before you move on, reposition your 3D view to see what you have done.
1. Bring the3D Graphics window to the front.
2. Zoom To the Landsat7 ( ) satellite so that it is the focal point in the
3D Graphics window.
FIGURE 6-3.
3D View: Landsat 7
Define a Chain of Events

It looks like as well as creating and grouping objects you also need to consider
the sequence of events.
For example, it wouldnt do you much good to be transmitting data before
youve taken images, and it wouldnt make sense to downlink from TDRS to
Whites Sands before images were transmitted from Landsat to TDRS, would
it? You need to define a sequence of events whose definition must be met
before access is of any interest to you.
1. Use the Object Catalog to create a chain ( ).
2. Rename the chain Hiroshima_To_Ground.
Now, you need to define the order of access within the chain. Think about
how the chain should be ordered:
Hiroshima must be visible.
At least one member of the Cameras ( ) constellation must be able to see
Hiroshima.
The Landsat satellites must be able to transmit to TDRS.
The member of the TDRS_Sats constellation who receives the images can
downlink to either White_Sands or Guam.

Not so tough. Make a chain.
3. Open Hiroshima_To_Ground ( ) properties ( ). The Basic - Definition page
4. Move the following objects to the Assigned Objects list in this order:
Hiroshima ( ).
CamerasFOV ( ).
Landsat_Sats ( ).
TDRS_Sats ( ).
TDRS_Ground ( ).
5. Ensure that the objects are in the Assigned Objects list in the order specified.
6. Click OK.
Constrain Access to Hiroshima

Now, make sure youve considered everything before you start your analysis.
The first thing that jumps out is the second item--It must be daylight in
Hiroshima when you take the pictures. How can you ensure that the cameras
on the SPOT satellites only take pictures of Hiroshima during daylight hours?
To model this, you need to impose a constraint based on the position of the
Sun.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open Hiroshimas ( ) properties ( ).

Enable the Lighting option towards the bottom of the page.
Select Direct Sun from the adjacent list.
Click OK.
Congratulations! Thats everything. Now, you can answer the original

question--When will you have the opportunity to take pictures of Hiroshima and relay
them to White Sands or Guam in near-real-time?
When Can I see It?

Calculate Complete Chain Access to see when the chain is active.
1. Right-click Hiroshima_To_Ground ( ) in the Object Browser.
chain access report
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Chain
Hiroshima_To_Ground
Show Reports
On
Show Graphs
Off
Style (Installed Styles)
Generate as
Report/Graph
5. Use the Complete Chain Access report to answer the following questions:
Which date has the longest access time?

What are the most access periods found in one day?
VISUAL ANALYSIS
Look at a complete chain access in the 2D and 3D Graphics windows.
1. Right-click the first access time in the Access report.
2. Select Start Time --> Set Animation Time from the context menu.
The time of access will be different in your report because your scenario
is based on relative time (Today +\-).
FIGURE 6-4.
Animation toolbar with access times
The animation will be set to start at the beginning of the access period.
3. Select the 3D Graphics window to bring it to the front.
4. Click the Home View button ( ) on the3D Graphics toolbar.
5. Use the mouse to manipulate the view in the3D Graphics window so that
the entire chain access is visible.
FIGURE 6-5.
3D View: Complete chain access
WHEN YOU FINISH

WHO CAN SEE WHAT WHEN?

Calculate Individual Strand Access to see which object in each constellation,
made the chain complete at each step.
TABLE 6-14. Individual
strand access report
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Chain
Hiroshima_To_Ground
Show Reports
On
Show Graphs
Off
Style
Individual Strand Access
Generate as
Report/Graph
The Individual Strand Access report is useful when youre trying to balance
timelines against accuracy of assets. For example, using this report (or graph)
would help you determine the impact on your mission should any of the
satellites or ground stations become inoperable.
3. Use the Individual Strand Access report to answer the following questions:
What is the first satellite to image Hiroshima?
If either of your Landsat satellites became disabled, would you still be
able to complete the chain?
Are all TDRS satellites used? If not, which satellite is not used.
On Your Own
You have now been told to use the SPOT satellites as your imagining satellites
instead of Landsat. You now must put together two new system plans that
can still give you comparable results. Design these two systems, and note the
possible new resources you would need to use.
Save Your Work

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Save ( ) your work.
Close STK ( ).
Designing Mission Environments

Version 9

800.220.4785 610.981.8000
2010-04
Overview
Welcome to the Designing Mission Environments training course. This course is a
collection of instructor-led exercises that provide hands-on experience with a
variety of the features and functions on which STK is built. It will familiarize you
with the STK Software Suite.
This course will teach you not only how to analyze the land, sea, air, and space
objects and their environments, but how to assess and adaptively plan operations
using quantitative analysis of the positions and attributes of assets.
STK Basic Edition

STK/Integration Module
STK/Terrain, Imagery, & Maps Module
STK/AMM
Table of Contents
Will the Local Terrain Impact My Ground Based Radar? ............ 1-1
Open an Existing Scenario.....................................................................................1-2
Scenario Setup.......................................................................................................1-3
Terrain Data ...........................................................................................................1-3
Manage Terrain, Imagery and Globes ...................................................................1-4
Views .....................................................................................................................1-5
Scenario Properties................................................................................................1-7
Model a Ground Based Radar................................................................................1-8
Model the Range of Your Radar ..........................................................................1-11
Build an AzEl Mask ..............................................................................................1-13
Constrain Radar Dome.........................................................................................1-15
How Efficient Is My Radar Dome?.......................................................................1-16
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................1-18
Will My Radar Detect a Cruise Missile Attack?............................ 2-1
Model an Air Missile? ...........................................................................................2-3
Export Missile Route Data.....................................................................................2-6
Insert a Missile ......................................................................................................2-7
Remove Unnecessary Objects ...............................................................................2-7
Table of Contents
Use a More Realistic Object Model ......................................................................2-8

Visualize a Cruise Missile Strike .........................................................................2-10
Extend Your Radar Coverage ...............................................................................2-12
Group the Radar Sites for Analysis .....................................................................2-16
Are Three Radars an Improvement? ....................................................................2-17
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................2-21
How Can I Recreate the Venus Transit of 2004? ......................... 3-1
Close the 2D Graphics Window.............................................................................3-3
Model Stupava.......................................................................................................3-3
Model Planets........................................................................................................3-4
Set the Sun as the Central Body............................................................................3-5
Model Venus In Transit........................................................................................3-10
Vector Geometry Tool ..........................................................................................3-11
Model the Telescope View..................................................................................3-13
A View from Stupava to the Sun .........................................................................3-14
Custom Windows.................................................................................................3-15
Viewer Position & Direction ................................................................................3-16
Set the View ........................................................................................................3-18
Unidentified Object in Transit..............................................................................3-21
Import ISS ............................................................................................................3-23
Additional Analysis..............................................................................................3-26
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................3-27
Can I Communicate With My Firefighting Crews In the Field? .. 4-1
Some Highs and Lows ...........................................................................................4-4
Zoom In On the Map ..............................................................................................4-4
Identify the Analysis Area .....................................................................................4-6
Preview the Imagery ..............................................................................................4-8
Create Terrain Inlays..............................................................................................4-9
Apply Imagery To the Map ..................................................................................4-11
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Fight Fire With Firetrucks.....................................................................................4-14

Refine Your Route................................................................................................4-17
Model Satellites ..................................................................................................4-20
Back At HQ...........................................................................................................4-21
Import the Relay Nodes .......................................................................................4-23
Chain Analysis .....................................................................................................4-26
When Can I See It? ..............................................................................................4-27
Who Is the Weakest Link?...................................................................................4-28
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................4-31
Will Incorporating Aerial Water Drops Improve My
Firefighting Model? ........................................................................ 5-1
Reacquaint Yourself With REMSAT ......................................................................5-2
Model Peterson Air Force Base .............................................................................5-3
Aircraft Mission Modeler ......................................................................................5-7
Design Hercules Mission......................................................................................5-8
Apply a More Accurate Model ..............................................................................5-9
Design a Flight Path.............................................................................................5-10
Give Hercules Some Direction.............................................................................5-14
When Will Hercules Be Where?..........................................................................5-20
What If I Were A C-5 Aircraft? ............................................................................5-20
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................5-21
When Will My GPS Satellites Enter an Eclipse Season? ............ 6-1
Display the Earth Sun Vector.................................................................................6-3
Create an Orbital Plane..........................................................................................6-4
Display the Orbital Plane in 3D..............................................................................6-6
Use VGT to Create a Beta Angle ...........................................................................6-9
Display the Beta Angle in 3D...............................................................................6-10
Visualize All Six Orbital Planes............................................................................6-11
Access To a Plane................................................................................................6-12
Custom Reports & Graphs ...................................................................................6-17
III
Table of Contents
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................6-20

Use What You Know.............................................................................................. A-i
iv
Will the Local Terrain Impact

My Ground Based Radar?
EXERCISE 1
In this exercise you have taken over a terrorist camp in northern Afghanistan,
which is located in a hostile area. You will use your STK expertise to define and
assess the effectiveness of the ground based radar that is in place to warn your
troops of unexpected attacks. Upon completion, you will have had the opportunity
to:
Import and change the graphic properties of area targets.

Use the Globe Manager to lay terrain and imagery on the 3D globe.
Use terrain data to create an azimuth-elevation mask.
Create and modify a mask file graph.
Will the Local Terrain Impact My Ground Based Radar?
Problem Statement
The United States has located and taken control of a terrorist training site in
the mountainous region of northern Afghanistan. This site housed not only
terrorist training facilities, but also a large stash of weapons. United States
forces have set up camp at this site in order to oversee the destruction of this
camp and associated weapons.
You are concerned about safeguarding your local perimeter while U.S. forces
are inside. You have a ground based radar with a range adequate to provide
ample warning of an attack. In order to give adequate warning, however, the
radar must detect an intrusion. How will the mountainous terrain surrounding
your radar affect its ability to detect such an attack should it be launched?
BREAK IT DOWN
You need to determine to what extent the mountainous terrain of
northern Afghanistan will interfere with your radar.

You have a ground based radar located at 36.509 degrees north longitude
and 70.786 east latitude that you would like to use to monitor the
perimeter.
The radar has a range of 50 km.
SOLUTION
Build an STK scenario that models a ground based radar and considers the
mountainous terrain of northern Afghanistan. Use that scenario to determine
if your existing ground based radar will provide adequate warning in the event
of an attack or if the local terrain is interfering with your radar.
Open an Existing Scenario

To speed things up and allow you to focus on the portion of this exercise that
analyzes the analysis, a partially developed scenario has been provided for you.
This scenario can be found in the student files area.
1. Ensure that the Welcome to STK! dialog is visible in the STK Workspace.
2. Click the Open a Scenario button.
3. Locate the starter scenario in the student files provided for this exercise
(C:\Training\STK\Afghan\Scenarios).
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 2
WILL THE LOCAL TERRAIN IMPACT MY GROUND BASED RADAR?
4. Select Afghan_Starter.vdf ( ).
5. Click Open.
When you open a VDF, a directory with the same name as the VDF will be
created in the default user directory (C:\My Documents\STK 9) and unpack
the contents of the VDF into that directory.
If you do not have the Afghan_Radar scenario, you can open a VDF
version of the completed scenario at C:\Training\STK\Afghan\Scenarios.
6. Save the new scenario in your student area (C:\My Documents\STK 9).
In doing so, create a unique folder and rename the new folder and the
scenario file (*.sc) Afghan_Radar.
Scenario Setup
The scenario provided contains only one object--an area target outlining the
entire region of Afghanistan. The area target is provided to help orient you to
the location of the terrorist camp and the area for which you have terrain data
for visualization and analysis.
Most of the work relating to importing and applying terrain has been
completed for you. Terrain data can enhance your analytical and visual
analysis. Lets first talk a bit about the terrain data provided, as well as other
terrain data sources available, and then we can walk through the scenario
setup.
Terrain Data
The captured camp is in the mountains of Afghanistan. The hilly nature of the
terrain will directly impact your radars visibility. It would be nice if STK could
account for this mountainous terrain. Well, it can!
AGI works with several sources of terrain data. When used with STK, terrain
exploits sophisticated multi-dimensional interpolation algorithms to provide
accurate 360 degree azimuth-elevation masks for access calculations form any
point on the Earths surface. These algorithms also provide altitude
information for user defined facilities and ground based targets. Terrain
allows a vivid 3D visual depiction of the Earths true surface relief and its
effect on accesses and visibility.
Exercise 1 | Page 3
In this exercise you will use terrain data from AGIs TIM (Terrain, Imagery and
Maps) module server. This data set provides the user with worldwide SRTM
(Shuttle Radar Topography Mission) terrain data. This data is 90 meters in
resolution for all land masses falling between 60 degrees north latitude and 60
degrees south latitude. Higher resolution NED (North American Elevation Data)
data of 30 meters is available for the United States, including Alaska and
Hawaii. To keep the files sizes manageable, SRTM data is broken up into five
degree tiles, while NED data is broken up into one degree tiles.
In addition to terrain data, corresponding imagery data is available via TIM.
These images are JP2 format and are shaded relief images. This means the
terrain data is color coded according to altitude, so even in 2D the user can
clearly see the lay of the land based on the coloration of the image.
This terrain and imagery data all reside on AGI's TIM server. AGI provides a
free utility to assist users in easily identifying and downloading pertinent
terrain and imagery data. The Data Download Utility may be downloaded from
the AGI Web site or from the AGI Data Disc for STK 9.
However, for this exercise, a subset of an SRTM tile and the associated shaded
relief imagery have been pre-loaded on your computer. These files were added
and set to be managed via the Globe Manager.
Manage Terrain, Imagery and Globes

The Globe Manager is used to create a profile for a globe in the 3D Graphics
window by applying and managing world background textures (.wtm), image
inlays (.jp2 &.pdttx), terrain inlays (.pdtt), specular textures (.wtm) and night
light textures (.wtm) from multiple sources, both local and external, including
AGI Globeserver, to create a globe profile. Profile items can then be set to be
displayed or hidden in the 3D Graphics window and organized into sets which
can be turned on and off in the 3D Graphics window.
Using the Globe Manager you can display different globe features in different
3D Graphics windows and display different aspects of a scenario globe in
multiple 3D Graphics windows. Each 3D Graphics window has its own globe
profile that can be edited independently. Globe profiles can be saved in STK's
GLB file format. These GLB files can be imported into the Globe Manager and
shared with other users.
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 4
2. Open the Globe Manager ( ) if it is not already.

3. The following items should be enabled below the Earth ( ) heading in
the Globe Manager ( ). If they are not, enable them now.
Earth_PE_b.jp2 ( )
NAfghan.jp2 ( )
NAfghan.pdtt ( )
If the terrain and imagery files do not display in the Globe Manager, you
can use the Add Terrain/Imagery option to add them from
C:\Training\STK\Afghan\Terrain
Now, lets outline Afghanistan on the map and the globe so that we can see
exactly where in Afghanistan the terrain region that you outlined falls.
Views
In this scenario both the 2D and 3D Graphics window have been set to focus
on the Afghan. The JP2 image inlay is also being displayed in the 2D Graphics
window for visual purposes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select the Images page.
Ensure that the Show option for the NAfghan.jp2 image is enabled.
Click OK.
The views of Afghanistan and the terrain provided should help acquaint you
with the area of Afghanistan where the terrorist camp is located and there
where you will be doing your analysis.
Exercise 1 | Page 5
FIGURE 1-1.
3D View: Afghanistan area target
Can you see the border of Afghanistan outlined in the 2D and

3D Graphics windows?
Can you see the area for which you have terrain data?
ZOOM TO IT!
Before we move on, lets take a closer look at the imagery in the 3D Graphics
window. The Globe Manager includes a Zoom To option that will quickly focus
your 3D Graphics window on a selected piece of terrain or imagery.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 6

Open the Globe Manager ( ) if it is not already.
Right-click NAfghan.jp2 ( )
Select the Zoom To ( ) option.
Mouse around and view the terrain from various angles.
FIGURE 1-2.
3D View: Afghanistan terrain and imagery
Scenario Properties
Some of the options used to manage terrain and imagery are set at the
scenario level. Lets take a look at them now.
ANALYTICAL TERRAIN
Weve discussed how the terrain and imagery are being managed visually in
this scenario, but you will also need STK to consider the terrain data for
access calculations and visibility. The terrain data has been enabled at the
scenario level for you so that it will be included in your analysis. Lets take a
look.
1. Select the Basic - Terrain page.
2. Ensure that the Central Body is set to Earth.
3. Ensure that the PDTT file provided for this exercise is listed on the
terrain page (C:\Training\STK\Afghan\Terrain).
4. Ensure that the Use option is enabled for the aforementioned PDTT.
DESCRIPTION
As with any scenario, it is always a good idea to provide a description and one
has also been provided for you here.
1. Select the Basic - Description page.
Exercise 1 | Page 7
2. Notice that the description the description sheds some light on what you
hope to learn using the analysis performed in this scenario.
CACHE
Since we will be loading high resolution data, the cache sizes for terrain and
imagery have been increased. These caches temporarily store terrain and
imagery data for the globe.
1. Select the 3D Graphics - Global Attributes page.
2. Set the following values in the Imagery section:
TABLE 1-1.
OPTION
VALUE
Chunk Terrain Cache
120 MB
Chunk Imagery Cache
256 MB
3. Click OK to close Afghan_Radars ( ) properties ( ).

That does it for the scenario provided. Now, you can get to the business of
adding the elements necessary to complete your analysis.
Model a Ground Based Radar

According to what you know, you have a ground based radar located at 36.509
degrees north longitude and 70.786 east latitude. Model that now.
1. Open the Insert STK Object Tool ( ) if it is not already.
2. Use the Define Properties ( ) method to insert a new facility object ( ).
3. When the facility properties ( ) appear, ensure that the Basic - Position
page is selected.
4. Set the following position values:
TABLE 1-2. The
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 8
position of the radar site
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Geodetic
Latitude
36.509
Longitude
70.786
Use terrain data
On
The Use terrain data option will reference the terrain data you loaded earlier to
determine the appropriate altitude for the latitude and longitude you specified.
This will ensure that your facility is positioned realistically.
5. Click Apply.
6. Rename the new facility ( ) Radar_Site.
CONSTRAIN RADAR SITE

The radar that you have has a maximum range of 50 kilometers. Constrain the
radar in your scenario as such.
1. Select the Constraints - Basic page.
2. Set the following values for the Range constraint:
TABLE 1-3. Radar_Site
range constraint
OPTION
VALUE
Max
On
Value
50 km
3. Click Apply.

2. Reposition the view so that Radar_Site ( ) is the focal point in the
3D Graphics window.
3. Mouse around the 3D Graphics window until you can clearly see
Radar_Site ( ).
Exercise 1 | Page 9
FIGURE 1-3.
3D View: Default facility model
3D OBJECT MODEL
Your facility looks more like a building than a ground based radar. You can
change the 3D display of the facility object by bringing in a different model.
3D Model properties for objects allow you to select and display a model that
will represent a vehicle, facility, or target in the 3D Graphics window.
Return to Radar_Sites ( ) properties ( ).
Select 3D Graphics - Model page.
Click the ellipsis button ( ) beside the Model File option.
Locate the model file in the default STK install location (C:\Program
Files\AGI\STK 9\STKData\VO\Models\Land).
5. Select ground-radar.mdl.
6. Click Open.
1.
2.
3.
4.
The model scale is logarithmic, not linear. A scale size of 0 corresponds

to actual size. Keep in mind that increasing a model size from 1 to 2
does not double it; it increases it by a factor of 10.
7. Click OK.
GET A BETTER LOOK

2. Mouse around the 3D Graphics window until you can clearly see the
ground based radar model.
FIGURE 1-4.
3D View: Ground radar model
Model the Range of Your Radar

You need to model the radar dome that covers the camp. Use a sensor to
model the field-of-view of your radar so that you have a visual representation
of your radar coverage.
2. Use the Define Properties method to attach a sensor ( ) to Radar_Site ( ).
3. Rename the new sensor ( ) Radar_Dome.
RADAR DOME DEFINITION

TABLE 1-4. Radar
dome definition
OPTION
VALUE
Sensor Type
Complex Conic
Half Angles - Outer
120 deg
3. Leave all of the other default values.

These settings will allow the sensor to extend below the local horizon if
needed to avoid the surrounding terrain.
4. Click Apply.
CONSTRAIN THE RANGE OF THE RADAR

2. Set the following values for the range constraint:
TABLE 1-5. Range
constraints on the radar site
OPTION
VALUE
Max
On
Value
50 km
3. Click OK.

ground based radar model.
FIGURE 1-5.
3D View: Constrained radar dome
Build an AzEl Mask

It is obvious that the local terrain is interfering with the radars field-of-view,
and you need to take that into account if you want to know where your radar
is potentially vulnerable. How can you model the effects of terrain on your
radars field-of-view?
STK provides options that allow you to use the terrain data specified on the
Terrain page of the scenario's Basic properties to define an azimuth-elevation
mask. The mask that is created will contain minimum visible elevation for the
corresponding azimuths. Go ahead and create an azimuth-elevation mask that
surrounds your radar site.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open to Radar_Sites ( ) properties ( ).

Select the Basic - AzELMask page.
Select Terrain Data from the Use drop down box.
Enable the Use Mask for Access Constraint option
Click Apply.
When you enable this option, you enable the Az-El Mask constraint on
the Constraints->Basic properties page. You can use this option only if
an azimuth-elevation mask is defined.
DISPLAY THE AZEL MASK

The azimuth-elevation mask has been created, and access to the Radar_Site
can be constrained by the mask, but it is not visible. You have to tell STK to
display an azimuth-elevation mask that extends from the radar site out 50
kilometers (the maximum range of your radar).
1. Select the 2D Graphics - AzElMask page.
2. Set the following at range options:
TABLE 1-6. Azimuth-elevation
OPTION
VALUE
Show (At Range)
On
Number of Steps
10
Minimum Range
0 km
Maximum Range
50 km
mask display properties
3. Click OK.

mask around Radar_Site ( ) hovering over the terrain.
FIGURE 1-6.
3D View: Radar_Site azimuth-elevation mask in the dome
The surface surrounding Radar_Site in the 3D Graphics window is the visual

representation of your azimuth-elevation mask. Any objects under the mask
will not be tracked by Radar_Site.
4. Zoom In ( ) until you can clearly see the mask around Radar_Site ( ).
FIGURE 1-7.
2D View: Radar_Site azimuth-elevation mask
Constrain Radar Dome

The radar dome extends to the surface of the Earth beyond the elevation
limits introduced by the terrain. The areas of your radar dome that extend
beyond the azimuth-elevation mask represent obstructions to the radar
domes field-of-view. That being the case, your radar dome appears to
cover more area than it actually does.
Although the terrain and the elevation of the azimuths are accounted for in
calculations, you would also like to visualize the real limits of your radar
dome. Constrain the radar dome so that it does not extend beyond the
azimuth-elevation mask.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open Radar_Domes ( ) properties ( ).

Select the 2D Graphics - Projection page.
Enable the Use Constraints option in the Field Of View section.
Select AzElMask from the associated list of constraints.
Click Apply.

7. Enable the Az-El Mask option at the bottom of the page.
By default Line-of-Sight and Field-Of-View should also be on. If they are
not, ensure that you enable them here.
8. Click OK.

2. Mouse around the 3D Graphics window until you can clearly see where the
dome meets the mask around Radar_Site ( ).
Now the visual representation of your radars coverage is accurately depicted.
The dome no long extends beyond the azimuth-elevation mask.
FIGURE 1-8.
3D View: Radar sites az-el mask constrained to the dome
How Efficient Is My Radar Dome?

You have defined your ground site, but you will need some data regarding
your Radar_Sites ability to track objects around the local horizon. You are
looking for the minimum tracking elevation for the 360 degrees of azimuth
around Radar_Site.
1. Open the Report & Graph Manager ( ).

TABLE 1-7. Azimuth
and elevation report settings
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Facility
Radar_Site
Show Reports
Off
Show Graphs
On
Style (Under Installed Styles)
Azimuth-Elevation
Generate as
Report/Graph
You will see a graph of your local horizon. The X-axis shows your azimuth
from zero (North) to 360 degrees. The y-axis displays the minimum elevation
at which an object can be tracked for each corresponding azimuth.
FIGURE 1-9.
Graph: Radar site azimuth elevation
The graph could be cleaner. Go ahead and add grid lines so that you can more
easily read the graph data.
1. Right-click anywhere in the graph.
2. Select Grid Options.
3. Enable the following:
TABLE 1-8. Azimuth
and elevation Grid Options
OPTION
STATE
Show Y Axis Grid Lines
On
Thin Grid Lines
On
4. Now, take another look at the graph.

FIGURE 1-10.
Graph: Radar site azimuth-elevation
The gridlines make it easier to read the elevation values.

5. Use the graph to answer the following questions:
What is the maximum elevation blockage around your site? At what
azimuth does it occur?
What is the minimum elevation at which an intruder coming from the

north could be tracked? At what azimuth does this occur?
What azimuth ranges have their visibility impaired by ten degrees or

less?
Save Your Work

1.
2.
3.
4.
Close the Azimuth-Elevation graph.

Leave the scenario ( ) open.
Will My Radar Detect a

Cruise Missile Attack?
EXERCISE 2
In this exercise you are destroying a terrorist camp in northern Afghanistan. There
is another terrorist cell to the north of your location. You will use your STK
expertise to define and assess how to improve your ground based radar system
so that it provides adequate warning for your troops to mount a defense in the
event of a sudden attack. Upon completion, you will have had the opportunity to:
Model an aircraft route, and export the ephemeris.

Use an ephemeris file to model a missile object.
Assess the feasibility of using your current radar system to detect an attack.
Will My Radar Detect a Cruise Missile Attack?
Problem Statement
You have captured and taken control of a terrorist camp in northern
Afghanistan. You know that the difficult terrain in the area of the camp is
interfering with your ground based radar. Intelligence suggests that there is
another terrorist cell to the north of your camp. What if terrorists were to
launch a cruise missile from that location? You need to put your ground
based radar to the test. Will the current radar provide ample warning of a
cruise missile attack from the north? Should you consider extending your
perimeter by setting up some additional radars on surrounding hilltops?
BREAK IT DOWN
The camp is in the mountainous terrain of northern Afghanistan.
Intelligence suggests that an enemy may launch a modified cruise missile
from the north.

You have a sample flight path similar to the one that the cruise missile
might take were it launched from the northern location.
You will model a cruise missile with an approximate range of 100
kilometers, flying at an altitude of 100-200 meters, at a speed of
approximately 1000 kilometers per hour.
The surrounding terrain prevents your radar from detecting anything
approaching from due north below twelve (12) degrees in elevation.
You would need at least two minutes to prepare an intercept.
SOLUTION
Build an STK scenario that will help you track an enemy missile headed
toward your camp in northern Afghanistan. Use that scenario to determine if
you would be able to detect a cruise missile attack with your current radar
system, and assess whether additional radar sites would strengthen your
system and provide the coverage needed for your troops to prepare a defense.

Previously, you modeled and analyzed the terrain at the camp in northern
Afghanistan to determine the impact that it would have on the ground based
radar that you set up at that location. The Afghan_Radar scenario set up your
initial conditions in Afghanistan and provided a model of your ground based
radar. You can use that as your starting point.
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 2
WILL MY RADAR DETECT A CRUISE MISSILE ATTACK?
There is no need to change any of the scenario level properties, but you will
need to save the scenario with a different name to preserve the integrity of the
previously developed analysis.
1. Open the Afghan_Radar scenario if it is not already.
If you do not have the Afghan_Radar scenario, you can open a VDF
version of the completed scenario at C:\Training\STK\Afghan\Scenarios.
Before you make any more changes to the scenario, save it with a different
name to preserve the integrity of the previously developed analysis.
2. Save ( ) the new scenario in the default user directory
(C:\My Documents\STK 9). In doing so, create a unique folder and
rename the new folder and the scenario file (*.sc) Missile_Attack.
CHANGE THE DESCRIPTION

1. Open Missile_Attacks ( ) properties ( ).
3. Change the Description to Will the current radar provide ample warning of a cruise
missile attack from the north?
4. Click OK.
Model an Air Missile?

Intelligence has also provided you with a sample flight path similar to the one
that the cruise missile might take. Go ahead and model the route of the
terrorist cruise missile.
2. Use the Define Properties ( ) method to insert an aircraft ( ) object named
Missile_Route.
One of the many objects that STK provides is a missile ( ) object. Wouldnt it
make more sense to use a missile to model a cruise missile? Not in this case.
The default missile object uses a ballistic trajectory, but a cruise missile does
not follow a ballistic trajectory. It travels more like an aircraft. That being the
case, it makes more sense to model an aircraft flight path similar to that which
Exercise 2 | Page 3
a cruise missile would follow, export the flight path as an ephemeris file, and
then associate the ephemeris file with a missile object.
DEFINE CRUISE MISSILES ROUTE

According to the information provided by intelligence, the cruise missile will
be coming from the north, and flying at an altitude between 100-200 meters at
approximately 1000 kilometers per hour. Intelligence has also provided the
coordinates for the site from which they believe the missile is likely to be
launched. Use that information to create the cruise missiles route. Since there
is some range in the altitude, split the difference and have the cruise missile
traveling at a 150 meter altitude, at 1000 kilometers per hour.
1. When the aircraft properties ( ) appear, ensure that the Basic - Route page
is selected.
3. Click the Insert Point button.
4. Enter the following values to define the first point along Missile_Routes
flight:
TABLE 2-1. Coordinates
of the first point in the cruise missiles route
OPTION
VALUE
Latitude
37.47
Longitude
70.842
Altitude
150 m
Speed
1000 km/hr
Ensure that you enter the altitude unit (m) and the speed unit km/hr
when you enter the values for those parameters.Since latitude and
longitude is always entered in degrees you do not have to include the
unit abbreviation when you enter those values. STK will provide it for
you.
Now that you have entered the speed and altitude of the cruise missile, they
will serve as default values for any new points that you add to the cruise
missiles route.
5. Click the Insert Point button twice. You should now have a total of three
points.
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 4
6. Use the table below to edit the latitude and longitude of the last two
points.
of final two points
POINT
LATITUDE
LONGITUDE
Point 2
36.980
70.870
Point 3
36.509
70.786
7. Click Apply.
WILL THE TERRAIN AFFECT MY FLIGHT PATH?

Your scenario references the local terrain, but the flight path that you created
does not. The altitude of the missile should sample the local terrain at each
waypoint along cruise missiles route. STK provides options that allow you to
ensure that moving objects will reference and follow the terrain.
1. Set the following altitude reference options on the Basic - Route page.
TABLE 2-3. Missile
Route altitude reference settings
OPTION
VALUE
Altitude Reference
Terrain
Granularity
0.9 km
Interp Method
Terrain Height
When you use the Terrain Altitude Reference, waypoint altitudes can be
referenced to the terrain under the vehicle's route if terrain sources are loaded
into the scenario. The highest resolution terrain which overlaps the area of the
vehicle route is used.
Granularity defines the distance between sampling points along a vehicle route,
used when waypoint altitudes are referenced to terrain. If you choose too
large of a granularity, it will result in a path that poorly follows the terrain,
sometimes intersecting it. If you choose too small of a granularity, it will result
in a path with multiple adjustments, resulting in an erratic flight path.
Interp Method sets the terrain interpolation method to be used to define the
height of the vehicle with respect to terrain data. Using the Terrain Height
method assigns a height above terrain by a linear interpolation between the
heights above terrain at the waypoints.
Exercise 2 | Page 5
2. Click OK.
Export Missile Route Data

You really want your cruise missile to be associated with a missile object
rather than an aircraft, but you want to use the flight path of this aircraft. You
need to export Missile_Routes flight path, and then apply that data to a missile
object.
EXPORT DATA FILE TOOL

You can export and save a vehicle attitude (*.a), ephemeris (*.e), or SPICE
ephemeris (*.bsp) data file for all types of vehicles using the Create Data File tool.
An ephemeris file is an ASCII text file that has been formatted for
compatibility with STK and ends in an E extension (*.e). Ephemeris files can
be useful when you need to provide STK with position and velocity data for a
vehicle to model certain unique circumstances.
1. Right-click Missile_Route ( ) in the Object Browser.
2. Select Export Ephemeris/Altitude.
3. When the Create Data File tool appears, select the following:
TABLE 2-4. Create
data file options
OPTION
VALUE
Create Data File for
Missile_Route
External STK File Type
Ephemeris
File
Missile_Route.e
Coordinate System
Fixed
The default directory for saving data files is the scenario directory. If
not, use the ellipsis button beside the Filename option to locate the
Missile_Attack scenario directory.
4. Leave all of the default ephemeris creation options.

5. Click Export.
6. Close the Create Data File tool.
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 6
When you select the ephemeris file type, STK creates a file with a *.e
extension that contains the ephemeris points based on the route of the
selected vehicle.
An ephemeris file (*.e) file, like all other files in STK, is simply a text file.
If you wish to view the ephemeris file you just created, it can easily be
opened with any text editor.
Insert a Missile
You now have an ephemeris file containing the flight path of the terrorist
cruise missile. Use the ephemeris file (*.e) that you created to apply
Missile_Routes flight path to a missile object.
1. Bring the Insert STK Object Tool ( ) to the front.
2. Use the Define Properties ( ) method to insert a missile object ( ) named
Cruise_Missile.
IMPORT THE MISSILE ROUTE

Use the ephemeris that you exported from the Missile_Route object to define
Cruise_ Missiles trajectory.
3. When Cruise_Missiles ( ) properties ( ) open, select the Basic - Trajectory
page.
TABLE 2-5. Cruise
missile trajectory settings
OPTION
VALUE
Propagator
STKExternal
Filename
C:\My Documents\STK 9\Missile_Attack\MissileRoute.e
4. Click Open.
5. Click Apply.
Remove Unnecessary Objects

Now that you have the ephemeris data that you needed to model the cruise
missile, the aircraft serves no purpose in this scenario. Go ahead and remove
it, so that its route does not overlay and interfere with the missile object using
an identical route.
Exercise 2 | Page 7

2. Select Missile_Route ( ) in the Object Browser.
3. Click the Delete button ( ) from the Default toolbar.
If you do not save the scenario before you delete the aircraft object, the
object will be lost when you delete it from the scenario. If you save the
scenario before you delete the aircraft, the aircraft object will be saved
in the scenario directory in the event that you need to reload it to adjust
the missile route.

1. Reposition the view so that Cruise_Missile ( ) is the focal point in the
3D Graphics window.
2. Mouse around the 3D Graphics window until you can clearly see the cruise
missile model.
FIGURE 2-1.
3D View: Default missile model
Use a More Realistic Object Model

The missile object is using the generic, default, missile model. A custom
model that looks more like a cruise missile has been provided for you. Go
ahead and bring that model in now.
1. Return to Cruise_Missiles ( ) properties ( ).
2. Select the 3D Graphics - Model page.
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 8
3. Click the ellipsis button ( ) beside the Model File option.

4. Locate the models in the student files provided for this exercise
(C:\Training\STK\Afghan\Models).
5. Select the CruiseMissile.mdl file.
6. Click Open.
7. Click Apply.

2. Mouse around the 3D Graphics window until you can clearly see the new
model of Cruise_Missile ( ).
FIGURE 2-2.
3D View: Cruise missile model
VISUALIZE TERRAIN REFERENCES

You can better visualize your route following the terrain as it travels along its
trajectory using drop lines. Drop lines are vertical lines that extend from the
missile to the terrain as the cruise missile flies toward your camp.
Return to Cruise_Missiles ( ) properties ( ).
Select the 3D Graphics - Droplines page.
Enable the Show Terrain option in the From Trajectory area.
Change the Interval (sec) to 5 sec. The interval specifies the distance in time
between interval lines.
5. Click OK.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Exercise 2 | Page 9
6. Mouse around the 3D Graphics window until you can clearly see the drop
lines extending from Cruise_Missiles ( ) route to the terrain.
FIGURE 2-3.
3D View: Drop lines from cruise missile to the terrain
Visualize a Cruise Missile Strike

You have all of the elements that you need to model a cruise missile strike on
your camp from a location to the north. Set the scenario in motion, and see if
your radar will track the missile in enough time to allow troops to launch a
defense.
1. Reposition the view so that Radar_Site ( ) is the focal point in the
3D Graphics window.
2. Mouse around until you have a clear view of the northern extent of
Radar_Sites azimuth-elevation mask.
4. Decrease ( ) the Time Step to 1-3 seconds. The actual flight of
Cruise_Missile is very short compared to your one-day time period.
5. Play ( ) the animation and watch as Cruise_Missile ( ) travels along its
path.
FIGURE 2-4.
3D View: Cruise missile flies in under the terrain cover
It is obvious from your visualization that the terrorist cruise missile will fly
under the cover of terrain until it is almost at Radar_Site.
Approximately how long after launch does the missile penetrate your
radar coverage?
Access data will help you see exactly how much warning Radar_Site gives the
troops to prepare a defense.
WHEN CAN I SEE IT?

You know what time cruise missile will strike if it cannot be intercepted. Now
you need to know what time your radar will detect cruise missile and for how
long it will be able to track it. Create an access report that tells you exactly
when you would be able to detect a missile like the one modeled here.
TABLE 2-6. Access
from radar to cruise missile
OPTION
VALUE
Access for
Radar_Site or Radar_Dome
Associated Objects
Cruise_Missile

4. Use the Access report to answer the following question:
If a strike like the one you are modeling here were to occur, exactly
how much warning would your troops have?
Will you have at least two minutes to launch an intercept?
5. Close the Access report.
HOW CLOSE WILL IT BE?

If you were attacked from the north, your radar would not be able to detect an
intruder flying in below twelve degrees because the terrain would be blocking
your radars field-of-view.
Will the cruise missile be able to slip in under the radar?
1. Return to the Access tool ( ).
2. Select AER... under the Report section.
3. Use the AER report to answer the following questions:
How close to Radar_Site is Cruise_ Missile when it can first be tracked?
Based on this data, is your perimeter secure with the existing system,
or should more radar sites be added?
4. Close your AER report.

Extend Your Radar Coverage

Intelligence suggests that if terrorists were to strike your camp, they would
most likely strike from a location north of you. Your camp is vulnerable from
that direction because terrain interference would allow a cruise missile to fly
in virtually undetected. You need more protection.
To flood your camp with radar covering the north side, you will position two
more radars. Place the first on the east facing slope with a clear view in the
west/northwest direction, and the second will be on the west facing slope
with a clear view in the east/northeast direction.
COPY RADAR SITE

The other two radars will be identical to your existing radar except for their
positions. Copy the existing site, and use it as the model for the two new sites.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select Radar_Site ( ) in the Object Browser.

Click the Copy button ( ) on the Object Browser toolbar.
Click the Paste button ( ) on the Object Browser toolbar.
Click the Paste button ( ) a second time.
Now you should have three radar sites in your scenario (Radar_Site,
Radar_Site1, and Radar_Site2). Leave Radar_Site at its original location but
reposition the other two sites at the decided locations. As it stands now, the
two new radar sites are directly on top of your original Radar_Site. You need
to reposition these radar sites.
RADAR EAST
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Radar_Site1 ( ) in the Object Browser.

Rename it Radar_East ( ).
Open Radar_Easts ( ) properties ( ).
Select the Basic - Position page.
Set the following values to position the new radar on the east facing slope
around your camp:
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Geodetic
Latitude
36.545
Longitude
71.074
6.
7.
8.
9.
for the east radar
Select the 2D Graphics - AzElMask page.

Change the color to something different from the two other radar sites.
Rename the attached sensor Radar_Dome_East ( ).
Click OK.
RADAR WEST
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select Radar_Site2 ( ) in the Object Browser.

Rename it Radar_West ( ).
Open Radar_Wests ( ) properties ( ).
Select the Basic - Position page.
5. Set the following values to position the new radar on the west facing
slope.
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Geodetic
Latitude
36.669
Longitude
70.757
6.
7.
8.
9.
for the west radar
Select the 2D Graphics - Attributes page.

Change the color to something different from the two other radar sites.
Rename the attached sensor Radar_Dome_West ( ).
Click OK.

2. Zoom in around the radar domes.
FIGURE 2-5.
2D View: Radar sites coverage
When looking down at the area on a flat map it appears that Radar_West
(green above) provides some additional coverage from the north. Lets take a
better look.
FIGURE 2-6.
With all three radars in such a concentrated area, your 3D Graphics window
looks a little cluttered. Since the domes are being used simply to visualize the
range of the radar, you can remove their display so that it does not obstruct
your view.
REMOVE THE DOMES

Removing the radar domes is as simple as disabling their display either
globally at the scenario level or individually at the object level. In this example,
well disable their display as a group at the object level.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the three Radar_Domes ( ) in the Object Browser.

Open their properties ( ).
Set the following 2D graphics attributes:
TABLE 2-9. Radar
Dome 2D Graphics attributes
OPTION
STATE
Inherit From Scenario
Off
Show
Off
5. Click OK.

1. Reposition the view so that Radar_West ( ) is the focal point in the
3D Graphics window.
Radar_West ( ).
FIGURE 2-7.
You can see that each of your new radar locations has great visibility in one
direction and impaired visibility in the opposite direction. However, it looks
like these sites combined will provide much better coverage of the enemy
cruise missile than just one radar site. Look at how much tighter the
azimuth-elevation masks hug the terrain to the north when combined.
Group the Radar Sites for Analysis

Your radar sites are now ready for analysis. You need to know when these
sites can track that enemy missile. You could do individual access calculations
from each of your three radar sites, but it will be easier if you use a
constellation to group the three sites and analyze them as a unit.
1. Insert a new constellation object ( ) named Radars.
2. Open Radars ( ) properties ( ). The Basic - Definition page should already
be selected.
3. Use the Selection Filter to select all of the sensors in the scenario.
4. With the Selection Filter on, click

Assigned Objects list.
5. Click Apply.
to move all three sensor objects to the
CONSTRAIN THE CONSTELLATION

You are interested in knowing when any of these sites can track the enemy
cruise missile. You should ensure that your constraint is set to Any Of, which
is the default constraint for constellations.
2. Ensure that Any Of is selected in the Restriction field.
3. Click OK.
CONSTELLATION ACCESS
You have grouped your radar sites into a constellation. You need to compute
access from the enemy cruise missile to this constellation. Access to
constellations must be done through a chain ( ).
1. Insert a new chain object ( ) named Missile_To_Radars. ( ).
2. Open Missile_To_Radars ( ) properties ( ). The Basic - Definition page
3. Move ( ) Cruise_ Missile ( ) to the Assigned Objects.
4. Move ( ) Radars ( ) to the Assigned Objects.
5. Click OK.
Are Three Radars an Improvement?

One radar site did not provide enough warning for your troops. It is time to
see if these two new radar sites provide more warning than the original site.
chain access report
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Chain
Missile_To_Radars
Show Reports
On
chain access report
OPTION
VALUE
Show Graphs
Off
Installed Styles
Generate as
Report/Graph
4. Use the Complete Chain Access report to answer the following question:
Have the additional radars increased your warning time?
If so, by how much?
NUMBER OF ACCESSES
An access graph will help you determine when the radar sites actually track
the cruise missile. By default, the graph will be created for the duration of
your scenario (24 hours). The enemy missile exists for less than seven (7)
minutes in the entire scenario. You will have to reduce the analysis period for
the graph.
TABLE 2-11. Number
OPTION
VALUE
Specify Properties
On
Stop
Set the Stop time to the stop time of

Cruise Missiles trajectory.
Use Step Size
On
Step Size
1 sec
Show Reports
Off
Show Graphs
On
Style
Number of Accesses
of accesses report
FIGURE 2-8.
Graph: Number of accesses from cruise missile to radars
4. Use the Number Of Accesses graph to answer the following questions:

Do all three (3) sites ever track Cruise_ Missile simultaneously?
What is the maximum number of sites that track Cruise_ Missile
simultaneously?
5. Close the Number Of Accesses graph.

The Individual Strand Access graph tells you what complete chain access can
not, or which object in the constellation completed the chain when. Data is
divided so that you can identify all possible paths through constellations that
complete the chain. This will be useful because you want to know which sites
are tracking Cruise_ Missile at any given time.
OPTION
VALUE
Specify Properties
On
Stop
Set the Stop time to just past the stop

time of Cruise Missiles trajectory.
Use Step Size
On
Step Size
1 sec
Show Reports
Off
OPTION
VALUE
Show Graphs
On
Style
Individual Strand Access
FIGURE 2-9.
Graph: Individual strand access from cruise missile to radars
4. Use the Individual Strand Access graph to answer the following questions:
Which radar detects the cruise missile first? last?
Do any of the radars track the cruise missile simultaneously?
Could you eliminate any one radar site and still detect the cruise missile
in time to intercept it?
If you had to limit yourself to one radar site, which would you keep?
5. When you finish, close the Individual Strand Access graph.
ONE FINAL PIECE

There is one more piece of evidence you will need to know. An AER report
will help you find out the positional relationship between your missile and
your radar sites.
OPTION
VALUE
Specify Properties
On
Stop
Set the Stop time to just past the stop

time of Cruise Missiles trajectory.
Use Step Size
On
Step Size
10 sec
Show Reports
On
Show Graphs
Off
Style
Access AER
4. Use AER report to answer the following questions:
Which radar site tracks Cruise_ Missile at the farthest range?
What is that range?
Save Your Work

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Save ( ) your work.
Leave STK ( ) open.
How Can I Recreate the

Venus Transit of 2004?
EXERCISE 3
In this exercise you will create a scenario that will model a rare celestial event--the
2004 Venus transit. Using that model, you will pinpoint the viewing times and
telescope positioning for optimal viewing. Upon completion, you will be able to:
Import and visualize planets and their orbits.

Run an access calculation against an entire database of objects.
Use multiple 3D Graphics windows in a scenario.
Set your View/To and View/From objects to be different.
Work with some advanced 3D Graphics window properties.
How Can I Recreate the Venus Transit of 2004?
Problem Statement
In 2004 a Venus transit occurred. Venus transits are rare. Only six have
occurred since the invention of the telescope, and the next transit will not
occur until 2012! In 2004, Europe had ideal visibility of the entire event. Being
an astronomy fanatic, you were so excited to view this rare celestial
occurrence that you traveled to your grandparents house in the village of
Stupava, Slovakia armed with your telescope and your solar filter lens to enjoy
some sauerkraut, wine, and stargazing.
Some members of your astronomy club were not so fortunate. They were
unable to view the transit in person. You would like to recreate the transit that
you observed in STK for your group so that they can enjoy it.
BREAK IT DOWN
Here is what you know:
A Venus transit occurs when Venus passes between the Earth and the Sun,
crossing the Earth-Sun plane, and all three bodies are aligned.
The transit that you viewed occurred on June 8, 2004.
You viewed the event from your grandparents house in the village of
Stupava.
You viewed the transit using a telescope with a 0.25 degree conic lens.
SOLUTION
Build an STK scenario that models a recreation of the rare Venus transit of
2004 and will illustrate how to prepare to view such an event in the future.
Create a Scenario
All STK analysis begins with a scenario.
2. Enter the following in the New Scenario Wizard dialog:
TABLE 3-1. New
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 2
OPTION
VALUE
Name
Venus_Transit
Description
Model the rare Venus transit of 2004.
HOW CAN I RECREATE THE VENUS TRANSIT OF 2004?
TABLE 3-1. New
OPTION
VALUE
Location
Analysis Period
8 Jun 2004 07:00:00 UTCG to 8 Jun 2004 22:45:00 UTCG

Close the 2D Graphics Window

Since you will not be looking at any portion of your analysis in 2D, and you
will be working with multiple 3D Graphics windows, close the 2D Graphics
window to minimize clutter.
2. Close ( ) the 2D Graphics window.
Model Stupava
You know that the best views of the Venus transit will be from Europe. Your
grandparents live in Stupava, so you will travel there for a visit. You will have
a free place to stay and eat while viewing Venus, and best of all you will get to
enjoy a long overdue visit with your grandparents.
You need to model the location of your grandmothers house in the village of
Stupava. Youre not simply positioning yourself anywhere in Stupava but
instead at the exact location of your grandmothers house, so you will have to
manually place the facility that will be used to mark your location. Using your
GPS receiver, you found the coordinates.
2. Make the following selections:
Exercise 3 | Page 3
TABLE 3-2. Facility
creation
OPTION
VALUE
Facility
Select a Method:
Define Properties

4. When the facility properties ( ) appear, ensure that the Basic - Position
page is selected.
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Geodetic
Latitude
48.25805
Longitude
17.0275
Altitude
0.400 km
of Stupava
6. Click OK.
7. Rename the new facility ( ) Stupava.
Model Planets
You need to include two planets, Earth and Venus, as well as the Sun in this
scenario. While the Earth is currently at the center of your 3D Graphics
window, it is not an actual object in your scenario until you import it as a
planet object ( ).
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use the Define Properties ( ) method to insert a new planet object ( ).

When the Properties Browser ( ) opens, select the Basic - Definition page.
Select Venus from the Central Body drop down menu.
Click OK.
STK will automatically rename the planet for you.

5. Follow the same procedure to add the Sun and then the Earth.
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 4
Even though the Sun is thought of as a star and not a planet, it is

created in STK using a planet object.
Set the Sun as the Central Body

By default Earth is the center of the 3D Graphics window in STK. In this case,
it makes more sense for the Sun to be the central body. Go ahead and change
the central body in the 3D Graphics window.
2. Click the 3D Graphics Windows Central Body button ( ) on the 3D Graphics
toolbar.
3. Select Sun from the Central Bodies list.
4. Look at the Title bar in the 3D Graphics window.
STK automatically renamed the window based on the central body selected.
FIGURE 3-1.
3D View: 3D Graphics window title bar
The Sun in the 3D Graphics window looks like a plain, yellow disk. Its not very
realistic.
FIGURE 3-2.
3D View: Sun as the central body
Exercise 3 | Page 5
The sun is represented by a model which uses textures to make it seem more
realistic. When the scenario is Earth centered, the sun is far enough away that
you wouldnt see the textures anyway, so they are not applied by default. When
you change the view such that the textures are necessary, you can use the Globe
Manager to enable various elements, such as textures, that will enhance the
objects in the 3D Graphics window. Lets enable the textures that will make the
sun look more realistic.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Open the Globe Manager ( ) if it is not already.
Right-click Sun.
Enable the Texture option.
FIGURE 3-3.
3D View: Sun model with textures
CENTER THE VIEW AROUND THE SUN

By default Earth is the central body in the 3D Graphics window, so STK does
not display planetary orbits around the Sun automatically, nor does it use a
maximum visible distance that is appropriate for viewing planetary orbits.
Since you have changed the central body, you will need to make some
additional adjustments to set the world view to center around the Sun. Once
you do that, you will be able to see the orbits of Earth and Venus around the
Sun.
VISUALIZE ORBITS
First, enable the planetary orbit display.
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 6
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open Venus_Transits ( ) properties ( ).

Select the 2D Graphics - Global Attributes page.
Enable the Show Orbits option in the Planets section.
Click Apply.
MAXIMUM VISIBLE DISTANCE

To view a scenario in 3D, a virtual camera is placed among the objects in the
scenario. The volume of space visible to the camera is called the view volume,
with dimensions that are very small near the camera and progressively larger
away from it.
The viewing options provided by STK allow you to define the minimum and/
or maximum visible distance of objects. The maximum viewing distance for
objects indicates the distance at which an object will no longer be visible in
the 3D Graphics window. If you zoom beyond the specified maximum, objects
will no longer be visible.
Since the default central body is Earth in STK, the default maximum visible
distance for objects is more appropriate for Earth-centered analysis. You will
be working in space, so unless you extend the maximum visible distance you
will not be able to see the planets and their orbits. The maximum visible
distance that you can set for the 3D Graphics window in STK is 1e+027 km.
We will set it to that.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select the Advanced page.
Set the Max Visible Distance to 1e+027 km in the Viewing section.
Click OK.
Use the mouse to zoom out until you can clearly see the orbits of both
planets around the Sun.
Exercise 3 | Page 7
FIGURE 3-4.
3D View: Venus and Earth orbiting the Sun
HIDE THE MOON

At this scale, the Moon is so close to the Earth that it is interfering with your
view in the 3D Graphics window. Since you will not be considering the position
of the Moon in your analysis, go ahead and remove it.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 8
Select the 3D Graphics - Sun window.

Open the Globe Manager ( ).
Disable the Moon options.
Right-click Moon.
Disable the Label option.
FIGURE 3-5.
3D View: Orbits with no Moon
Now, you can clearly see Earths marker along its orbit.
HIDE SUBPLANET LABELS

The subplanet point for the Earth is still interfering with the Sun label in this
view. Go ahead and disable the subplanet labels.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Return to Venus_Transits ( ) properties ( ).

Select the 2D Graphics - Global Attributes page.
Disable the Show Subplanet Labels option in the Planets section.
Click OK.
FIGURE 3-6.
3D View: Orbits with no subplanet labels
Exercise 3 | Page 9
GET MOVING!
If it appears as if the orbits are floating through space instead of orbiting
the Sun, use the View From/To tool to change the Reference Frame to
Sun Inertial Axes.
2. Use the mouse to zoom out until you can clearly see the orbits of both
planets around the Sun.
When you begin to animate your scenario, it may seem as if your planets are
not moving along their orbits at all. While the orbits for the planets are both
full orbits, remember that your scenario spans less than one day. The planets
will make minimal progress in their orbits during your scenario time period.
3. Increase the animation time step ( ) so that you can see the planets
orbiting, at least partially, around a stationary Sun.
5. Decrease the animation time step ( ) to 60.0 seconds before you move
on.
Model Venus In Transit

As you know, a Venus transit occurs when Venus passes between the Earth and
the Sun, crossing the Earth-Sun plane resulting in the alignment of all three
bodies. To help you visualize why a Venus transit is so rare, add Earths ecliptic
plane representing Earths orbit around the Sun.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select the Grids page.
Enable the Show option in the Ecliptic Coordinates area.
Click OK.
Mouse around in the 3D Graphics window until you can clearly see the
inclination of Venuss orbit relative to the ecliptic plane.
While Venus may pass between the Earth and the Sun, a transit will only occur
when Venus is coplanar, or lying on the same plane, with the Earth and the Sun.
When you add the grid you can see that Venuss orbit around the Sun (in blue
below) is inclined, or tilted, a bit compared to Earths orbit around the Sun,
which lines up on the plane of the ecliptic (in purple). While it is possible for
Venus to pass between the Earth and Sun, a transit occurs only if Venuss orbit
intersects the plane of the Earth's orbit.
The ecliptic coordinates illustrate how few opportunities Venus has to cross
the Earth-Sun plane.
FIGURE 3-7.
3D View: Alignment of planes
STORE THAT VIEW!

Quite a bit of careful adjusting was required to get this view just right. Store
this view so that it can easily be recalled later.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click Store Views ( ) from the 3D Graphics toolbar.

Click the New button.
Double-Click view0.
Rename it Plane Alignment.
Click OK.
Vector Geometry Tool

The Vector Geometry Tool (VGT) enables you to define elements used in
constructing coordinate systems, vectors, axes, and points, as well as angles
and planes. These structures and elements are then added to the standard
structure and elements available to display in the 3D Graphics and 3D Attitude
Graphics.
WHEN WILL THE PLANES ALIGN?

The angle between Earth, Venus, and the Sun should be close to 180 degrees
when the transit occurs. Go ahead and create an angle between these objects.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select Venus_Transit ( ) in the Object Browser.

Open on the Vector Geometry Tool ( ).
Click the Create New Angle... button ( ).
Set the following definition values:
TABLE 3-4. Transit
angle definition
OPTION
VALUE
Name
Transit
Description
Angle between Earth, Venus, and the Sun.
Type
Between Vectors
From Vector
Venus Earth
to Vector
Venus Sun
Either instance of Venus can be used to select the From and To vectors.
5. Click OK.
6. Close the Vector Geometry Tool ( ).
GRAPH THE ANGLE

Since you know the objects are in line at the time of the transit, the angle that
you just created (Transit Angle) should be close to 180 degrees. Create a graph
that outlines the value of the angle over time.
TABLE 3-5. Custom
report
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Scenario
Venus_Transit
3. Select the Venus_Transit Styles ( ) directory under Scenario( ) in the list.

4. Click the Create new graph style button ( ).
5. When the new graph style appears in the list, rename it Transit Angle.
6. When Transit Angle graphs ( ) properties ( ) open, click the expand
button ( ) beside Angles.
7. Move ( ) Transit Angle to the Y Axis box.
8. Click OK.
9. Double-click the Transit Angle ( ) graph style to generate the graph.
FIGURE 3-8.
Graph: Transit angle
10. Use the Transit Angle to answer the following:

How close to perfect alignment (180 degrees) does this transit come?
How much variance in angle occurs?
11. When you finish, close the Transit Angle graph.
Model the Telescope View

Lets also model the field-of-regard of your telescope--or what we would see if
we were actually looking through the telescope lens. Attach a sensor whose
field-of-view is comparable to that of your telescope at Stupava and point it
toward the Sun.
1. Use the Define Properties ( ) method to attach a new sensor object ( )
named Telescope to Stupava ( ).
TABLE 3-6. Telescopes
OPTION
VALUE
Sensor Type
Simple Conic
Cone Angle
0.25 degrees
4. Click Apply.
Now, go ahead and point the telescope lens at the Sun.
TABLE 3-7. Targeted
OPTION
VALUE
Pointing Type
Targeted
Boresight Type
Tracking
Assigned Targets
Sun
3. Click Apply.
We do not want to hinder our view of the transits. You can make the sensor
cone transparent, so you will always have a clear view.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Enable the Translucent Lines option.
Slide the% Translucency bar in the Projection area to 100.
Click OK.
You dont need to create any more objects, so you can close the Insert STK
A View from Stupava to the Sun

You need to model what you would see if, in fact, you set up your telescope so
that you focused on the Sun from Stupava. Visualizing what you can see
from Stupava would require that you use an Earth-centered view in the
3D Graphics window, but you do not want to change the Sun centered view in
the current 3D Graphics window.
Fortunately, STK allows for multiple instances of any type of visualization for
just that reason. Creating another 3D Graphics window will ensure that you do
not have to disturb the Sun-centered view that you have worked so hard to
create.
1. Extend the View menu.
2. Select New 3D Graphics Window.
The new window will be set to the default Earth-centered home view. First,
give the new window a unique name so that you can easily distinguish it from
the other 3D Graphics window.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Right-click anywhere in the new window.

Select Properties ( ) from the menu.
Select the Window Properties page.
Change the Title to Stupava To the Sun.
Click OK.
Custom Windows
You may have noticed that the default 3D Graphics window has several
integrated toolbars, but the new window that you created does not. This is
because the default window that is included when you create a new scenario
has been customized to include various elements that we at AGI thought
might be handy to all users. That configuration is saved into a default
workbook file (*.wsp) and installed with the STK software. That workbook
does not include information on how new windows should be configured but
is instead limited to outlining the basic configuration of the default elements
when a new scenario is created. Your new window will be just that--a 3D
Graphics window with no additional bells and whistles.
If thats the case, how will you access 3D graphics tools, such as the central
body selection window and stored views, for the new window? If you know
that you will be using multiple windows of the same type (several 3D Graphics
windows, or several 2D Graphics window) you can either:
Right-click in the visualization window and use the toolbar menu to
integrate window specific toolbars.
Enable the appropriate toolbars anywhere outside of the visualization
window in the STK Workspace. Then you can access windows specific tools
and properties by selecting the window of interest before you launch the
corresponding tool.
Do not move the existing toolbars from the visualization window to the
workspace. If you do, the tools and options will still be linked to the
window from which the toolbar was removed. Instead enable a new like
named toolbar by right-clicking in the toolbars area of the STK
Workspace and selected individual toolbars from the menu.
In this exercise, well be using multiple 3D Graphics windows, so it would make

sense to add 3D Graphics controls that can be used by any window in the
STK Workspace.
Now that we have two different 3D Graphics window, we may want to use
some of the 3D Graphics tools and options in either window. Instead of having
an instance of the toolbar that allows us to access those options in each and
every 3D Graphics window, lets enable those toolbars in the STK Workspace so
that one instance of the tool can be used with whatever 3D Graphics window is
selected.
First, disable the window-specific toolbars.
1. Right-click anywhere in the original 3D Graphics window (3D Graphics 1 Sun).
2. Select Toolbars.
3. Disable all window level toolbars.
Now, enable the toolbars that provide access to 3D Graphics tools and options.
1. Right-click in the toolbars area at the top of the STK Workspace.
2. Enable the 3D Graphics toolbar.
Viewer Position & Direction

Up until now, weve used the Zoom To function to reposition the view on a
single object. STK provides additional tools for changing your perspective in
the 3D Graphics window. One of those tools is the Viewer Position and Direction
tool ( ). Using this tool, you can reposition the view on a single object or
view events in a scenario to or from the perspective of the central body, an
object, or even from a vector associated with the central body or an object.
The Viewer Position and Direction tool can be very handy in setting up more
complex interplanetary visualization like well be doing here.
The Viewer Position and Direction tool ( ) supports two viewing modes--From/
To and Untethered.
VIEW FROM/TO
Using the View From (position)/To (direction) viewing mode, you can set a
specific view from position, view to direction, and view reference point, as
illustrated in the following diagram.
FIGURE 3-9.
Graph: Transit angle
The table following outlines the available views.

TABLE 3-8.
VIEWING MODE
VIEW FROM POSITION
VIEW REFERENCE POINT
VIEW TO DIRECTION
From an object to
another object
The object that you are

looking from
The object you are looking

at
A straight line between the

object you are looking from and
the object you are looking at
From an object to
itself
A software-specified, fixed The object

offset from the object
Along an axes or
vector
The object to which the

axis or vector belongs
A straight line between object

offset and the object
A software-specified, fixed
A straight line between the view
point in space along the axis from position and the view
or vector
reference point. Viewing
inward along an axis or vector
will reverse the 'view from'
position and the 'view reference
point'.
TABLE 3-8.
VIEWING MODE
VIEW FROM POSITION
VIEW REFERENCE POINT
On a specific
coordinate set
A software-specified, fixed The coordinate set

offset from the coordinate
set

from position and the view
reference point
On a specific
terrain or imagery
file
A software-specified
offset from the center
latitude and longitude of
the specified file so that
the entire terrain or
imagery will be in view.

from position and the view
reference point
The center latitude and

longitude of the specified
file
VIEW TO DIRECTION
UNTETHERED
The untethered mode enables you to move freely in space using the keyboard.
When you select this mode, the view is not constrained along any vector or
pointed towards any object. The initial view is set using the selected object,
but you are not attached to these objects thereafter. The directional keys can
be used in combination to perform combined movements. For a full list of
the functions of the keyboard keys in untethered mode see the STK help
system.
Set the View

Now, you can refocus your window so that you are looking from Stupava to
the Sun.
1. Select the 3D Graphics window named Stupava To the Sun.
2. Click the View From/To button ( ) on the 3D Graphics toolbar in the STK
Workspace.
3. Ensure that Viewing Mode is set to From/To.
4. Select Stupava ( ) as the View From object.
5. Select the Sun ( ) as the View To object.
Either instance of the Sun in the View From list will produce the same
results.
6. Enable the Lock In View Direction option.

7. Click OK.
The Lock in View Direction option disables all rotation in the scene.When the
View From direction and View To objects are different, it can be very easy to
disturb the view. Locking the view direction can help prevent you from
getting lost in space.
ADJUST THE VISIBLE DISTANCE

It is obvious that the Sun is small compared to the size of your 3D Graphics
window. You will not change this by zooming in, but rather by decreasing the
field-of-view in the 3D Graphics window.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the Stupava To the Sun window.

Open its properties ( ).
Set the following:
TABLE 3-9. Advanced
3D window properties
OPTION
VALUE
Min Visible Distance
1 km
Max Visible Distance
1e+009
Field of View
1 deg
You also need to adjust the visible distance in this 3D Graphics window. You
created a window in which you will view the Sun from Earth. The distance
from the Sun to the Earth is just over 1.5e+008 kilometers, you can set the
maximum visible distance just above that to ensure that you can see from the
Earth to the Sun.
5. Click OK.
Note that increasing the size of the View From object may require that
you increase the minimum visible distance in order to begin viewing
from outside or above the model itself.
ENABLE SUN TEXTURES

1. Select the Stupava To the Sun 3D Graphics window.
2. Open the Globe Manager ( ) if it is not already.
3. Right-click Sun.
4. Enable the Texture option.
DISPLAY VENUS
Other bodies do not display in the default Earth centered 3D Graphics view.
Go ahead and enable the display of Venus and adjust the display of the Sun.
1. Go back to the Globe Manager ( ).
2. Click the Add Central Body button ( ).
3. Select Venus.
GET MOVING!
Animate the scenario and see if you can see Venus cross in front of the Sun.
1. Ensure that Stupava To the Sun is the active window.
Ensure that you do not zoom in or out, or you will have to reset your
view.

3. Pause ( ) the animation when you see Venus cross the Sun.
You will see Venus approach and then cross the lower portion of the Sun.
Venus appears, and is in reality, very small compared to the Sun!
FIGURE 3-10.
3D View: Venus passing in front of the Sun
STORE THAT VIEW!

Setting up this 3D view took some doing. You want to be able to recall the
view of Venus crossing the Sun at the touch of a button. Ensure that you store
this view.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click Store Views ( ) from the 3D Graphics toolbar.

Double-Click on view0.
Rename it Venus Transit.
Click OK.
Unidentified Object in Transit

While you were viewing the transit, you were also taking high-resolution
photographs of the events. One of those photographs revealed something
unexpected. A black dot appeared briefly during the transit. According to the
photograph, the object appeared at 8 Jun 2004 10:09:18.00. You believe the
object was a satellite. Use STK to determine which satellite appeared at that
time. Then you can recreate the situation.
DECK ACCESS
You know when the satellite appeared, but you do not know which satellite
appeared. Since you do not know which satellite your looking for, you can use
the Deck Access tool to run access calculations against an entire catalog of
objects. In this case, you need to see which satellite your telescope had access
to at 8 Jun 2004 10:09:18.00.
1. Select Telescope ( ) in the Object Browser.
2. Open the Deck Access ( ) tool.
3. Set the following deck access options:
TABLE 3-10. Deck
Input
Select Target Deck
Access search criteria
OPTION
VALUE
Deck Access for
Stupava-Telescope
Start Time
8 Jun 2004 10:08:00.00
Stop Time
8 Jun 2004 10:10:30.00
Class
Satellite
File
C:\Training\STK\VenusTransitSatDB\June8SatDB.tce
TABLE 3-10. Deck
Constraints
Output
Access search criteria
OPTION
VALUE
Specify Constraint Source
Off
Sorting
By Start Time
Data
Create Report
It is crucial that you select the satellite database that corresponds to the
date for which the transit occurs.
4. Click Compute Accesses.

5. When the access report appears, close the Deck Access ( ) tool.
FIND OUT WHAT THE OBJECT WAS

The report shows that three different objects, each with the same time period
and duration, crossed your field-of-view around the time you noted the
suspected satellite passing. Why do they all have the same start and stop
times?
The Deck Access report identifies each satellite by its SSC number. You can
search each of these SSC numbers in the archived satellite database that you
computed the deck access against to determine which satellite corresponds to
each SSC number.
Remember that you are analyzing an event that happened in the past. You
performed Deck Access using a database from the past that was archived and
provided for you. Before you search for the unidentified object, you must
direct SK to search that archived database also; otherwise, STK will, by
default, search the current default database.
1. Open Venus_Transits ( ) properties ( ).
2. Select the Basic - Database page.
3. Click the ellipsis button ( ) beside the Database option in the Database
Defaults area.
4. Locate the archived database in the student files provided for this exercise
(C:\Training\STK\VenusTransitSatDB).
5. Select June8SatDB.tce.
6. Click Open.
7. Click OK.
Now that were sure were searching the same database that provided the
results, lets see to what objects those SSC numbers correspond.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open the Satellite Database Search tool.

Enable the SSC Number search criteria.
Enter 28228, the first Name in your report, in the adjacent textbox.
Click Search.
Note the name of the satellite(s) in the table provided here:
TABLE 3-11. SSC
SSC NUMBER
number lookup results
NAME(S)
28228
28261
25544
6. Do not import the satellites.

7. Use the Satellite Database to find the names of SSC Numbers 28261 and
25544.
8. Leave the Satellite Database Search tool open.
9. Close the Deck Access report.
10. Use the information in Table 3-11 to answer the following question:
Which satellite corresponds to all three SSC numbers?
Each of the SSC numbers correspond to the very same satellite, the
International Space Station (ISS)! As different components of the ISS were
launched and cataloged, they received their own SSC numbers. It appears that
you not only saw Venus transit, but you also saw ISS transit the Sun. Go ahead
and add ISS to your scenario and recreate this transit.
Import ISS
You are recreating events and modeling objects from 2004, so you have to
make sure that the database from which you import ISS contains the
appropriate archived data.
First, change the database.
1. Return to the Satellite Database Search tool.
2. Click the Modify... button in the TLE Source area.
3. Select Import From File.

4. Click the ellipsis button ( ) beside the Database option in the Database
Defaults area.
5. Locate the archived database in the student files provided for this exercise
(C:\Training\STK\VenusTransitSatDB).
6. Select June8SatDB.tce.
7. Click Open.
8. Click OK.
Go ahead and import ISS from the June 8, 2004 satellite database.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Enable the SSC Number search criteria.

Enter 25544 in the adjacent textbox.
Click Search.
Select ISS-01.
Ensure that the TLE Epoch for ISS-01 is close to 7 June 2004.
Click Insert.
Close the Satellite Database Search tool.
ISS PROPERTIES
STK allows you to define distance thresholds at which models are no longer
visible. In this example, you want to see the ISS mode, not just the label, a you
watch the transit. Lets adjust the model detail thresholds for ISS.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open ISS-01_25544s ( ) properties ( ).

Select the 3D Graphics - Model page.
Disable the Use option in the Detail Thresholds area.
Click OK.
VIEW THE ISS TRANSIT THE SUN

You want to set the view to the same time that the photograph was taken.
This will give you an STK view of what is going on.
1. Bring the 3D Graphics window named Stupava To the Sun to the front.
Do not adjust your 3D Graphics window!
2. Change the animation time to 8 Jun 2004 10:09:18.000.
Do not animate! The ISS transit of the Sun takes less than a second.
3. Decrease the Time Step ( ) to 0.10 seconds.

4. Move the animation one step forward ( ).
FIGURE 3-11.
3D View: ISS and Venus transit the Sun
VIEW ISS TRANSIT VENUS

1. Take a look at ISSs orbit (salmon colored line above).
2. Move the animation one step backward ( ) (back to the time of the
photograph).
FIGURE 3-12.
3D View: ISS transits Venus
ISS transited the Sun during the Venus transit, but what else was going on at
the time you snapped the photograph? ISS transited Venus at that very
moment as well!
Your location in Stupava placed you in a rare 4.5 km wide corridor along the
Earth that had an opportunity to simultaneously view the ISS and Venus
transits of the Sun. What a catch!
STORE THAT VIEW!

Setting up this 3D view took some doing. You want to be able to recall the
view of Venus crossing the Sun at the touch of a button. You better store that
view.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click Store Views ( ) from the 3D Graphics window toolbar.

Double-Click on view0.
Rename it ISSTransit.
Click OK.
Additional Analysis
Do you think other satellites also transitted the Sun during the Venus
transit?
How would you find this out?
If they did transit the Sun, why didnt you see these satellites?
Save Your Work

1. Close any remaining report windows.
Can I Communicate With

My Firefighting Crews In
the Field?
EXERCISE 4
In this exercise you will evaluate the REMSAT firefighting system for use in an
area of Colorado with very mountainous terrain. You will use your STK expertise
to assess whether that terrain would impair the effectiveness of the existing
system. Upon completion, you will be able to:
Import terrain data for analysis and visualization.

Convert an image to create an inlay.
Use GIS shapefiles to model areas of interest.
Use the 3D Object Editor to refine a great-arc route.
Can I Communicate With My Firefighting Crews In the Field?
Problem Statement
In 2002, Colorado suffered their worst wild fire in state history. The Hayman
fire burned over 137,000 acres and cost $39 million dollars in damage. A
portion of the Hayman fire extended into Douglas County in Colorado. Because
of this devastating fire, the Colorado State Forest Service received a grant to
investigate new systems to assist them in fighting future forest fires safely and
more efficiently.
One system being considered is a Canadian system called Real-time Emergency
Management via Satellite (REMSAT). You are responsible for developing a test
plan to determine the expected level of performance of the portion of the
REMSAT system that maintains communication between firefighters and
headquarters while crews are in the field. If the system works, it would mean
that headquarters would know where every firefighter is at all times. You will
return to the burn site to test and analyze this system.
BREAK IT DOWN
You will limit your analysis to a twenty-four (24) hour period.
You will limit your analysis to the portion of Douglas County that falls within
the Hayman burn area.

The portion of Douglas County that falls within the Hayman burn area is a
very mountainous region of Colorado; therefore, it is essential that you
consider the effects of the terrain on your communications system.
The field crews will enter and exit the burn area along Highway 67.
Crews in the field will be outfitted with backpack mounted GPS units to
communicate their coordinates back to communication nodes in the area.
The nodes relay this data to Globalstar satellites which, in turn, downlink
the data to headquarters.
Your headquarters is located at Castle Rock, Colorado.
SOLUTION
Build an STK scenario that models the blue arrow communications flow
outlined in Figure 4-1 on page 4-3. This part of system is designed to keep
track of firefighters while they are in the field by communicating firefighter
positional information to satellites that relay that information to headquarters.
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 2
CAN I COMMUNICATE WITH MY FIREFIGHTING CREWS IN THE FIELD?
FIGURE 4-1.
REMSAT firefighting system
Create a Scenario
The first thing you need to do is create a scenario. Youve decided to limit
your analysis to a twenty-four (24) hour (STK default) test period, so you dont
need to change the analysis period.
TABLE 4-1. New
OPTION
VALUE
Name
REMSAT_CrewRelay
Description
Can we communicate with crews in the field despite the local

terrain?
Location
Analysis Period
2 Jul 2009 17:00:00.000 to 3 Jul 2009 17:00:00.000

Exercise 4 | Page 3
Some Highs and Lows

The Hayman fire occurred in a very mountainous area. Because of the
location, the terrain may influence your ability to maintain communications
with crews in the field. In order to produce the most realistic portrayal
possible and the most accurate results, it is critical that your analysis consider
the terrain in the area that you will analyze.
You will use a United States Geological Survey (USGS) Digital Elevation Model
(DEM) file to model the Hayman terrain. A DEM is a digital cartographic/
geographic dataset of elevations in xyz coordinates. The terrain elevations for
ground positions are sampled at regularly spaced horizontal intervals. Using
DEM files you can model terrain in a specific area of interest without having
to model the terrain of the entire world.
USGS DEM files are public domain data available from the U.S.
Geological Survey, EROS Data Center. For more information go to http:/
/seamless.usgs.gov.
1. Double-click REMSAT_CrewRelay ( ) in the Object Browser.

2. Select the Basic - Terrain page.
If the AGI World Terrain is installed, you will see it displayed. You will not
use it for this scenario, but instead use a DEM file.
3. Click the Add button.
4. Set the Files of Type option to USGS DEM (DEM).
5. Locate the DEM file in the student files provided for this exercise
(C:\Training\STK\REMSAT\Terrain).
6. Select the file Hayman_Area.dem.
7. Click Open.
8. Click OK.
Zoom In On the Map

You need to analyze a very specific, concentrated area--the portion of the
Hayman burn area that falls within Douglas County. Before you begin outlining
that area, remove all the stuff that you do not want cluttering up the 2D
Graphics window, and add some outlines that will help you identify your
analysis area.
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 4
1.
2.
3.
4.

Set the following 2D graphics details:
TABLE 4-2. 2D
Graphics window details
OPTION
VALUE
Items
RWDB2_Provincial_Borders
On
Background
Image
Off
Terrain Regions Display
Show Extents
On
5. Click OK.
Turning on Provincial Borders outlines all state and provincial boundaries on the
map in the 2D Graphics window. Turning off the map image removes the land
and sea images from the map and replaces them with a solid black
background.
6. Zoom In ( ) around Colorado on the map in the 2D Graphics window.
TO WHAT EXTENT?
Enabling the Show Extents option will outline the boundary of the terrain data
that you added in Some Highs and Lows on page 4-4 so you can visually
identify the area for which you have terrain data.
FIGURE 4-2.
2D View: Terrain region
Exercise 4 | Page 5
The yellow outline represents the terrain region. As you can see, it only covers
a small portion of Colorado.
Identify the Analysis Area

The terrain data must cover the area of Douglas County that falls within the
burn area. To ensure that your terrain data encompasses that area, you will
also visually identify the boundaries of these two areas on the map in the 2D
Graphics window and the globe in the 3D Graphics window.
WORKING WITH SHAPEFILES

You will start by importing the shapefile for Douglas County as an STK area
target object.
TABLE 4-3. Create
OPTION
an area target
VALUE
Select an Object To Be Inserted
Area Target
Select a Method
From Saved Shapefile (.shp)

4. Click the ellipsis button ( ) beside the Shapefile selection text box.
5. Locate the Douglas shapefiles in the student files provided for this exercise
(C:\Training\STK\REMSAT\Objects\Shapefiles\Douglas).
6. Select cnty.shp.
7. Click Open.
When you loaded the shapefile, STK populated the Shapefile Records list with a
list of the individual records contained in that file. The list displays the records
according to the Name By option you choose. The Name By menu is populated
by the first five record specifier types available in the shapefile.
8.
9.
10.
11.
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 6
Change the Name By option in the Shapefile Records area to COUNTY.

Select DOUGLAS.
Click the Insert button.
Leave the Import Shapefile as STK Object dialog open.
The geographic boundary of Douglas County is now outlined in the 2D Graphics

window. Go ahead and add geographical boundaries for the Hayman burn
area.
1. Return to the Import Shapefile as STK Object dialog.
3. Locate the Hayman shapefiles in the student files provided for this exercise
(C:\Training\STK\REMSAT\Objects\Shapefiles\Hayman).
4. Select hayman.shp.
5. Click Open.
6. Change the Name By option to EVENT_NAME.
7. Select Hayman.
8. Click Insert.
9. Close the Import Shapefile as STK Object dialog.
CLEAN UP
Now that you know where everything is, remove some of the clutter. Object
markers identify the position of objects on the map in the 2D Graphics
window. Area target objects cover an area instead of a point, so their location
is defined by the centroid of the area target. You are not interested in the
centroids position, so turn those markers off.
1. Open REMSAT_CrewRelays ( ) properties ( ).
3. Set the following global attributes:
TABLE 4-4. 2D
Graphics global attributes
AREA
OPTION
STATE
General
Show Labels
Off
Area Targets
Show Centroids
Off
4. Click OK.
GET A BETTER LOOK

2. Zoom Out ( ) until you can see all of the boundaries that you defined.
Exercise 4 | Page 7
FIGURE 4-3.
2D View: Shapefiles outlining Douglas County and Hayman
3. Use the shapefiles to answer the following questions:

Can you see the Hayman burn area?
Can you see Douglas County?
Can you clearly define the portion of Douglas County that falls within
the burn area?
Can you clearly define the area for which terrain data will be taken into
account during analysis?
Does the area for which you have terrain data cover the portion of the
Hayman burn area that falls within Douglas County?
Preview the Imagery

Take a quick look at a satellite image of a portion of the Hayman burn area.
The satellite image shows a distinct difference between the northeastern and
southwestern areas.
1. Navigate back to the terrain directory in the student files provided for this
exercise (C:\Training\STK\REMSAT\Terrain).
2. Double-click the image of the burn area--Hayman_Area.tif.
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 8
FIGURE 4-4.
Hayman area image
The image was provided courtesy of Digital Globe

(www.digitalglobe.com) and was actually downgraded somewhat to
make the file size more manageable for training purposes.
3. Use the visual information in the image to answer the following questions:
Can you see differences in the coloring in different regions?
What do the color differences represent?
What area represents the area of the fire?
4. When you finish, close Hayman_Area.tif.
Create Terrain Inlays

Although you can see the terrain extents and terrain will be accounted for in
your analysis, there is no visual representation of the terrain on your map or
globe. To model the terrain visually, you need to create both an image and a
terrain inlay. To create these inlays, you will use the DEM file and the Hayman
area image (*.tif) file.
1. Select REMSAT_CrewRelay ( ) in the Object Browser.
2. Extend the Utilities menu.
3. Select Image Converter.
Exercise 4 | Page 9
IMAGE CONVERTER FOR MY TERRAIN?

The Image converter will convert a single image, with or without terrain data,
into a format that can be displayed in a 3D Graphics window. The image is
converted to a JPEG 2000 or PDTTX file (image inlay), and the terrain data is
converted to a PDTT file (terrain inlay).
IMAGE INLAY
The Hayman area image (*.tif) file is a GeoTiff file that contains georeferencing
data. You can use the GeoTiff file to create a JPEG 2000 image file for display
in the visualization windows.
You could also have used a BMP or PNG files to create the image of the
terrain, but the resulting inlays would lack georeferencing information,
and you would have to supply it.
1. Select the Single Image page.

2. Set the following image conversion properties:
TABLE 4-5. Image
inlay conversion settings
DATA
OPTION
VALUE
Input
Image Filename
C:\Training\STK\REMSAT\Terrain\Hayman_Area.tif
Image File Format JPEG 2000 Image (jp2)

Output Directory
Filename
C:\My Documents\STK 9\REMSAT_CrewRelay

Hayman_Area.jp2
3. Scroll down, and click Convert.

4. Click Apply.
Be patient. The conversion process may take a few minutes. The
progress indicator at the bottom of the STK Workspace will keep you
updated as to your progress.
TERRAIN INLAY
You have an image inlay; now create the terrain inlay. The Image Converter tool
should still be open.
1. Select the Terrain Region page.
2. Set the following terrain conversion properties:
TABLE 4-6. Terrain
region conversion settings
DATA
OPTION
Input
Terrain Source
C:\Training\STK\REMSAT\Terrain\Hayman_Area.dem
(Use the Drop down menu)
Output
VALUE
Directory
C:\My Documents\STK 9\REMSAT_CrewRelay
Filename
Hayman_Area (STK will automatically add the PDTT file extension)
Delete Intermediate
Terrain File
On
The Delete Intermediate Terrain File option is only available when terrain
is generated and the terrain source is a raw data set.
3. Click Apply.
4. Scroll down, and click Convert.
Be patient. The conversion process may take a few minutes. The
progress indicator at the bottom of the STK Workspace will keep you
updated as to your progress.
5. When the conversion process finishes, click OK.

The JPEG 2000 file is flat when you use it by itself. You will be using this in
conjunction with the larger PDTT file you created. Since STK processes
terrain and imagery files separately you can create multiple terrain files for a
single image file or use a single terrain file for multiple images. You will need
to combine your JPEG 2000 and your PDTT files using the Globe Manager.
Apply Imagery To the Map

First, display the image on the map in the 2D Graphics window.
Select the Images page.
Click the Add... button.
Locate the imagery files that you saved to the default user directory
(C:\My Documents\STK 9\REMSAT_CrewRelay).
5. Change the Files of Type option to *.jp2.
6. Select Hayman_Area.jp2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
7. Click Open.
8. When you return to the Images page, ensure that the Show option is
enabled.
9. Click OK.
10. Zoom In ( ) on the image inlay.
FIGURE 4-5.
2D View: Hayman area imagery
ADD IMAGERY TO THE GLOBE

You have a great representation of the Hayman area, but you are only showing
the imagery in the 2D Graphics window. Now you can add the PDTT and
JPEG 2000 files that you created to the globe in the 3D Graphics window.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Open the Globe Manager ( ).
Click the Add Terrain/Imagery button ( ).
Locate the imagery files that you saved in the default user directory
5. Select both Hayman_Area.pdtt and Hayman_Area.jp2.
6. Click Open.
ZOOM TO IT!
1. Select Hayman_Area.jp2 ( )in the Globe Manager.
2. Click the Zoom To button ( ).

4. Mouse around until you get a good look at the Hayman area imagery.
FIGURE 4-6.
3D View: Hayman area imagery
RAISE THE 3D BOUNDARIES

Take a quick look at your 2D Graphics window. The boundaries of Douglas
County and the Hayman burn area are clearly outlined on the map, but in the
3D Graphics window these outlines are hidden by your imagery. STK allows
you to raise the boundaries above the terrain so they are clearly visible.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select Douglas ( ) and Hayman ( ) in the Object Browser.

Set the following:
TABLE 4-7. 3D
Graphics attributes for area targets
OPTION
VALUES
Show Boundary Wall
On
Upper Edge
Height from Terrain
Height From terrain
0.1 km
5. Click OK.

2. Mouse around to get a good look at the area target borders projecting
above the terrain.
FIGURE 4-7.
3D View: Shapefiles outlining Douglas County and Hayman
The boundaries of your shapefiles now project slightly above the terrain in the
3D Graphics window.
Fight Fire With Firetrucks

You have modeled the terrain in the area of the Hayman fire that will be
accounted for in your data analysis. The firetruck will enter and exit the burn
area along Highway 67 traveling at approximately 35 mph. Model this route
now so you can ultimately determine if the communications link will be
available along the entire route.
A predefined STK ground vehicle that will be used to model your crews in the
field is in the student files provided. When you load that object all associated
route information and constraints are also loaded. Lets load the firetruck into
the scenario. Note that the Fieldcrew object has a azimuth-elevation mask
constraint applied to it.
1. Return to the Insert STK Object Tool ( ).
TABLE 4-8. Create
OPTION
a ground vehicle
VALUE
Ground Vehicle
Select a Method:
From Saved Ground Vehicle File (.gv)

4. Locate the STK objects in the student files provided for this exercise
(C:\Training\STK\REMSAT\Objects).
5. Select Fieldcrew.gv.
6. Click Open.

1. Right-click Fieldcrew ( ) in the Object Browser.
3. Reset ( ) the animation to refresh the view in the 3D Graphics window.
FIGURE 4-8.
3D View: Default ground vehicle object model
3D MODEL PROPERTIES
Your ground vehicle looks more like a military vehicle than a firetruck. You
can change that by bringing in a different model.
1. Open Fieldcrews ( ) properties ( ).
2. Select 3D Graphics - Model page.

4. Locate the models in the student training files provided for this exercise
(C:\Training\STK\REMSAT\Models).
5. Select the Firetruck.mdl model file.
6. Click Open.
7. Click OK.
GET A BETTER LOOK

Now, that is a much better representation of a firefighting crew in the field
than the default ground vehicle model!
FIGURE 4-9.
3D View: New Fieldcrew object model
Fieldcrew ( ) and some portion of its route.
2. Decrease the Time Step ( ).
FIGURE 4-10.
3D View: Fieldcrews route
The crew will travel through the burn area along Highway 67. Fieldcrews route
originates within the burn area and continues along Highway 67 until it is out
of the burn area.
Can you see where Fieldcrew will be inside the burn area?
Can you see where Fieldcrew exits?
Can you see the highway?
Can you tell if Fieldcrew is following the highway for the duration of its
route?
Refine Your Route

A couple waypoints in Fieldcrews route are considerably off the highway.
Fortunately, getting Fieldcrew back on the road is easy using the 3D Object
Editor.
3D OBJECT EDITOR
Use the 3D Object Editor to define and modify the position of an area target,
facility, aircraft, ground vehicle, ship, or target in the 3D Graphics window.
The 3D Object Editor requires that the Selection option on the
3D Graphics Annotation property page for the 3D Graphics window
properties be Enabled.
The Object Editing toolbar allows you to select the object that you wish to edit
and then save or cancel your changes. The Object Editing toolbar includes three
controls:
Object Selection list. Use to select the object to be edited. Once an object
is selected, the Start Editing button is enabled.

Object Edit Start/Accept button (
). Use to start the object editor and
then, after making changes, save your changes.
Cancel Editing button ( ). Use to cancel any unsaved changes and close
the object editor.
EDIT FIELDCREWS ROUTE

Now, you can use the Object Editor to clean up Fieldcrews route.
2. Select GroundVehicle/Fieldcrew in the Object Selection list on the Object Editing
toolbar.
FIGURE 4-11.
3D Object Editing toolbar with Fieldcrew selected
3. Click the Object Edit Start button( ).

4. Take a look at the waypoints that make up Fieldcrews ( ) route in the
3D Graphics window.
What is different?
Where is Fieldcrew?
FIGURE 4-12.
3D View: Fieldcrew is back on the road
5.
6.
7.
8.
Play ( ) the animation.

Follow Fieldcrew ( )as it travels along its route.
When you see Fieldcrew ( ) go off-road, pause ( ) the animation.
Use your mouse to click and drag the waypoints that are off the highway
back onto the highway.
9. When you are happy with Fieldcrews ( ) route, click the Object Edit Accept
button ( ).
SAVE FIELDCREW
When you save the scenario, all objects in the scenario are saved, but you can
also save individual objects. Lets save the changes that you made to the
Fieldcrews route.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select Fieldcrew ( ) in the Object Browser.

Select Save Fieldcrew...
Browse to the scenario directory in your default user area (C:\My
Documents\STK 9\REMSAT_CrewRelay).
5. Click Save.
Model Satellites
Take a look back at Figure 4-1 on page 4-3. The crews in the field must have
access to GPS satellites to pinpoint their whereabouts. The positional data
from the firefighters, along with other crucial data, needs to be transmitted to
communication nodes in the local vicinity. The nodes relay this data to
Globalstar satellites which, in turn, downlink the data to headquarters.
Obviously, satellite communications play a crucial role in the REMSAT
system, and now you can bring them into your scenario.
TABLE 4-9. Create
a GPS network
OPTION
VALUE
Satellite
Select a Method:

You also need to model the Globalstar satellites that will be used to relay to
headquarters.
1. Return to the Insert STK Object tool ( ).
TABLE 4-10. Insert
OPTION
satellite
VALUE
Satellite
Select a Method:

4. Set the following search criteria:
search criteria
OPTION
STATE
VALUE
Common Name
On
Globalstar
SSC Number
Off
N/A
5. Click Search...
6. When the search results appear, select all of the Globalstar satellites.
7. Set the following Insert Options criteria:
TABLE 4-12. Globalstar
constellation creation criteria
OPTION
VALUE
Auto Select Color
On
Create Constellation from Selected Satellites:
On
Name:
Globalstar_Sats
8. Click Insert.
KNOW YOUR LIMITATIONS

Your crew must have access to at least four GPS satellites simultaneously at
any given time in order to accurately determine its position. This might be a
challenge considering the surrounding terrain. You might simply constrain
your GPS constellation to include this requirement. This will simplify the
results for you and ensure only the necessary data is reported.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open GPSConstellations ( ) properties ( ).

Select the At Least N from the Restriction drop down list.
Set the Restriction to 4.
Click OK.
Back At HQ
You need to ensure that the crews in the field will be able to radio back to
headquarters if they were to need help while in the field. The headquarters is
located in Castle Rock, Colorado.
1. Return to the Insert STK Object ( ) tool.
TABLE 4-13. Insert
OPTION
facility
VALUE
Facility
Select a Method:

4. When the City Database Search tool appears, enable the City Name search
criteria.
5. Enter Castle Rock in the adjacent textbox.
6. Click Search.
7. When the search results appear, select the Castle Rock, Colorado entry.
8. Click Insert.
CUSTOMIZE CASTLE ROCK

Before you go any further, make some additional adjustments to Castle Rocks
properties.
First, ensure that Castle Rock is properly positioned above the terrain and not
in the terrain on the surface of the sphere representing the globe. When the
Use terrain data option is on, the objects altitude is updated based on the
altitude for its latitude and longitude as specified by the terrain source file
(*.dem). Then, you can add an azimuth-elevation mask to Castle Rock to
ensure that the terrain does not interfere with your analysis.
1. Open Castle_Rocks ( ) properties ( ).
2. Set the following facility properties:
TABLE 4-14. Castle
PROPERTIES
Basic
Rock basic properties
PAGE
OPTION
VALUE
Position
Use terrain data
On
AzElMask
Use
Terrain Data
3. Click Apply.
The AzEl Mask tool generates static body masking files (.bmsk) which are
used to restrict visibility to a sensor. The term body masking refers to line of
sight obstruction caused by the three dimensional model of the parent object
of the sensor or other objects in the scenario. The body masking files contain
obscuration contours which are generated based on six views generated from
the point of view of an observer at the location of the sensor. The six views
can be thought of as containing projections of the obscuration objects onto
the faces of a cube centered at the sensor. Contours are constructed using an
edge detection algorithm and stored along with information describing the
orientation of the view from which they were constructed. To affect visibility
computations, set the body masking file as the AzEl Mask file for the sensor,
and enable the sensor AzEl.
SET CONSTRAINTS
You also need to constrain Castle Rock such that any accesses to or from the
facility consider the terrain.
2. Set the following basic constraints:
TABLE 4-15. Castle
Rock constraints
CONSTRAINT
VALUE
Line of Sight
On
Az-El Mask
On
3. Click OK.
Import the Relay Nodes

The crews, satellite constellations, and the headquarters location are all in
place, but you need a way to relay position data back to headquarters. To relay
its position and other information, the crews in the field will receive position
information from the GPS constellation, and use a set of nodes to pass the
information to the Globalstar constellation for downlink to headquarters.
The nodes provide the vital link between the crews in the field and Globalstar.
To determine the feasibility and effectiveness of their placement, you will
initially position four nodes at various predetermined locations, and evaluate
their effectiveness. You can also model the nodes and a chain to determine if
the position of the nodes will be adequate for your line of communication.
Four predefined node locations have been provided for you. Each node has
been configured to account for the terrain and the height of the antenna atop
its base, and each object has a az-el mask constraint applied to it.
THE INSERT MENU

Since we want to import several objects at once, well use a slightly different
option to do so. We could import the nodes individually using the Insert STK
Object tool or the Object Catalog, but the object creation process used through
those tools is streamlined such that you import and customize each object
separately. STK, however, offers many ways to introduce one or several
objects into your scenario. The From File option on the Insert menu offers the
ability to introduce a single object as you would using other tools, but it also
offers the ability to import many objects of a particular class at once by multiselecting in an Open dialog. Since the objects that have been provided are all of
the same class and they are all preconfigured and ready for use in STK
without edit, it makes sense to use the From File option here. Lets import all
four preconfigured nodes at the same time, using the From File option.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Extend the Insert menu.

Select the From File... option.
Change the Files of Type to Facility Files(*.f).
Locate the STK objects in the student files provided for this exercise
(C:\Training\STK\REMSAT\Objects).
5. Select all four nodes.
6. Click Open.
Be patient. STK must calculate the azimuth-elevation mask for all four
facilities. It may take a moment for the nodes to load.

1. Right-click Node1 ( ) in the Object Browser.
Node1 ( ).
FIGURE 4-13.
3D View: New node model
The omni directional antenna is a much more realistic representation of the

node that will be used in the field. Instead of the nodes looking like a facility,
which they are not, they look like a simple antennas.
4. Now, mouse around the 3D Graphics window until you can clearly see
Node_1 ( ) as well as the highway along which Fieldcrew ( ) will be
traveling.
6. Pause ( ) the animation when Fieldcrew ( ) comes into view.
FIGURE 4-14.
3D View: Node1 positioned in the terrain
Clearly, the local terrain may impact communications to and from this node.
The other three nodes are also placed at various locations in the hills in the
background.
GROUP THE NODES

You can group all four nodes together into one constellation so that
calculating access will be easier.
1. Create a constellation object ( ).
2. Rename the constellation Nodes.
3. Open Nodes ( ) properties ( ). The Basic - Definition page should already be
selected.
4. Move ( ) all four nodes from the Available Objects list to the Assigned
Objects list.
5. Click OK.
Chain Analysis
Now that you have finished creating all of your analysis objects, you can create
a chain that will include GPS, Fieldcrew, Nodes, Globalstar, and Castle Rock, so
that you can analyze access through the entire system.
1. Create a chain ( ).
2. Rename it Relay_To_HQ.
3. Open Relay_To_HQs ( ) properties ( ). The Basic - Definition page
4. Move ( ) the following objects to the Assigned Objects list in this order.
GPSConstellation ( )
Fieldcrew ( )
Nodes ( )
Globalstar_Sats ( )
Castle_Rock ( )
5. Click OK.
Be patient. Your scenario contains terrain data. It may take a few
minutes for STK to calculate accesses.
When Can I See It?

You want to know when you have access from your crew in the field to
headquarters. You are also interested in seeing the effect terrain has on access,
if any. You can use a Complete Chain Access report to figure this out.
chain access report
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Chain
Relay_To_HQ
Show Reports
On
Show Graphs
Off
Style
Generate as
Report/Graph
4. Use the Access report to answer the following questions:
Do your crews in the field have uninterrupted access to headquarters?
What is the longest access period?
Where do your crews in the field lose access with headquarters? For
how long?
Eventually, you will be presenting your findings to the Colorado State Forestry
Service officials. It is important to know when lines of communication between
crews in the field and headquarters are available at any given time while crews
are in the field. This information is crucial to your presentation. Export and
format the Complete Chain Access data so that you can use it to create a handout
to go along with your presentation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the Complete Chain Access report.

Click the Save as .csv button ( ).
Name the report Remsat_Access.
Save the report in the scenario directory in your default user directory
5. When you finish, close the Complete Chain Access report.

Now, you can clearly assess access to crews in the field visually.
1. Make Fieldcrew ( ) the focal point in the 3D Graphics window.
Fieldcrew ( ).
4. Pause ( ) the animation somewhere where you have a good view of access
from the Fieldcrew to headquarters.
FIGURE 4-15.
3D View: Access from Fieldcrew to Castle Rock
Who Is the Weakest Link?

The Complete Chain Access report and your visual analysis of the events in the
3D Graphics window have helped you determine that the crews in the field
have access to headquarters for the better part of the time that they are in the
burn area. There are, however, a few times where the terrain blocks
communication and you lose access. Examine this closer to find out which
link is the weakest in your chain.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click the Access Tool button ( ) on the STK Tools toolbar.

Set the Access For option to Castle_Rock ( ).
Select all of the Globalstar satellites in the Associated Objects list.
Click Compute.

2. Make Castle Rock ( ) the focal point in the 3D Graphics window.
Castle_Rock ( ).
Initially, Castle Rock has access to both the chain (yellow lines) and the
Globalstar constellation (green lines).
FIGURE 4-16.
3D View: Access from HQ to Globalstar and relay chain
There are several instances when Castle Rock loses access to the Relay_To_HQ
chain (yellow lines) for the first time, but still has access to the Globalstar
satellites (green lines).
FIGURE 4-17.
3D View: 12:06 access from HQ to the Globalstar satellites
If headquarters has uninterrupted access to the Globalstar

constellation, but is not always able to complete then entire relay from
the crews in the field to headquarters, where is the weak link?

It seems logical that access from the crews in the field to the nodes is the
weakest link in the chain. Now, you need to look more closely at the link
between crews in the field and the four nodes. Create a new chain that will
focus on that portion of the analysis.
1. Create a chain ( ).
2. Rename it FieldCrew_To_Nodes.
3. Open FieldCrew_To_Nodes ( ) properties ( ). The Basic - Definition page
4. Move ( ) the following objects to the Assigned Objects list in this order.
Fieldcrew ( )
Nodes ( )
5. Click OK.
You know you have access to some or all of the nodes some of the time.
Determine to which nodes you have access and when.
2. Make the following changes:
chain access report
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Chain
FieldCrew_To_Nodes
Style
Generate As
Report/Graph
Does report match your previous report?
Is this your weakest link?
Save Your Work

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Close the Complete Chain Access report.

Save ( ) your work.
Leave STK ( ) open.
Will Incorporating Aerial

Water Drops Improve My
Firefighting Model?
EXERCISE 5
In this exercise you will use your STK expertise to define and assess the feasibility
and effectiveness of adding aerial water drops to the REMSAT firefighting model.
Upon completion, you will be able to:
Use the Aircraft Mission Modeler (AMM) propagator to create a custom flight
path.
Create a custom aircraft model.
Analyze takeoffs, landings, and flight paths.
Will Incorporating Aerial Water Drops Improve My Firefighting Model?
Problem Statement
After the Hayman fire of 2002, you have been assigned to analyze current and
future methods of combatting forest fires in the area. You previously
modeled and analyzed the REMSAT communication flow, which would allow
you to have communication between headquarters and your crews in the field.
You believe that adding a slurry bomber, an aircraft that can make aerial water
drops on the burn area, would assist your crews on the ground and greatly
enhance the timeliness and effectiveness of your firefighting efforts. You
would like to analyze the response time of a slurry bomber that has been
summoned to make water drops on the burn area.
BREAK IT DOWN
Your slurry bomber will be a C-130A Hercules.
The dump position will be relayed to the aircraft from crews in the field.
This slurry bomber will take off from Peterson AFB in Colorado Springs, fly
to a specified point, circle, and drop the water before landing.

Drops will be made 100-500 feet above the fire.
Exercise specifications mandate that no more than twenty minutes elapse
between initial communication and the actual drop.
SOLUTION
Build an STK scenario that models an aircraft that takes off from Peterson
AFB, flies to a specified location within the Hayman burn area, circles that
point, and makes a water dump on the fire. Analyze how incorporating such
an aircraft would affect the response time of the system.
Reacquaint Yourself With REMSAT

A previously developed scenario that models and analyzes the
communications used in the REMSAT system is available to you. The
REMSAT_CrewRelay scenario analyzes the communications used in the
REMSAT system over the same time-period in the same area. This scenario
also models and considers the mountainous terrain of the burn area that falls
within Douglas County. Use that model as your base.
EXERCISE 5 | PAGE 2
WILL INCORPORATING AERIAL WATER DROPS IMPROVE MY FIREFIGHTING MODEL?
1. Open the REMSAT_CrewRelay scenario if it is not already.

If you do not have the REMSAT_CrewRelay scenario, you can open a
VDF version of the completed scenario at
C:\Training\STK\REMSAT\Scenarios.
scenario file (*.sc) REMSAT_SlurryBomber.

1.
2.
3.
4.
Open REMSAT_SlurryBombers ( ) properties ( ).

Select the Basic - Description page.
Delete the Description.
Enter Will incorporating aerial water drops improve my firefighting model? in either
Description field.
5. Click Apply.
GLOBE SURFACE REFERENCE & MISSION MODELER

In this exercise you will be using Aircraft Mission Modeler (AMM) to design an
aircraft. The globe surface reference is currently set to WGS84-the STK
default setting. AMM performs best in the 3D Graphics window when the
surface reference of the globe is set to Mean Sea Level since most aircraft use
this frame as their reference.
Change the globe surface reference now.
2. Change the Surface At selection in the Surface Reference of Earth Globes area
to Mean Sea Level.
3. Click OK.
4. Save ( ) the scenario ( ).
Model Peterson Air Force Base

The firefighting aircraft will originate from Peterson Air Force Base. The first
step in modeling that airport is to create and position a location on the
ground representing Peterson.
Exercise 5 | Page 3

2. Use the Define Properties ( ) method to insert a new facility ( ) into the
scenario.
3. Rename your facility Peterson_AFB.
POSITION PROPERTIES
1. Select the Basic - Position page is selected.
TABLE 5-1. Peterson
AFB position properties
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Geodetic
Latitude
38.805810
Longitude
-104.700780
Altitude
1.8659 km
3. Click Apply.
MY AIRPORT MODEL
Now, add an airport model.
Return to Peterson_AFBs ( ) properties ( ).
Select 3D Graphics - Model page.
Locate the land models in the default STK install area (C:\Program
Files\AGI\STK 9\STKData\VO\Models\Land).
5. Select airport.mdl.
6. Click Open.
7. Click OK.
1.
2.
3.
4.

1. Using the Zoom To tool reposition the view so that Peterson_AFB ( ) is
the focal point in the 3D Graphics window.
airport model.
EXERCISE 5 | PAGE 4
ORIENT YOURSELF
Go ahead and display a compass so that you can better orient yourself. You
can adjust the position of the compass using the X and Y options, where X=0
and Y=0 will position the compass in the lower left corner of the 3D Graphics
window.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select the Annotation page.
Enable the Show option in the Compass area.
Set the following display options:
TABLE 5-2. Compass
position values
OPTION
VALUE
OPTION
VALUE
X Origin
Left
X Position
60
Y Origin
Top
Y Position
50
5. Click OK.
FIGURE 5-1.
3D View: Airport model of Peterson AFB
The default runway orientation is east to west. This is not the actual
orientation of the runway at Peterson AFB. Lets fix that.
MODEL OFFSETS
You can change the orientation of the runway to correspond to the actual
orientation of Peterson AFB. Model offset properties help you refine the
Exercise 5 | Page 5
position of a model and the marker representing an object in the 3D Graphics

window by offsetting the object from its reference frame.
1. Open Peterson_AFBs ( ) properties ( ).
2. Select the 3D Graphics - Offsets page.
3. Set the following offset criteria:
TABLE 5-3. Peterson
AFB 3D model offsets criteria
OFFSET
OPTION
VALUE
Rotational
45 deg
0.67 km
-0.05 km
Translational
4. Click OK.
Rotational offsets allow you to specify the model rotation about the object body
frame's X, Y, and Z axes.
Translational offsets allow you to specify the model translation in the object
body frame's X, Y, and Z direction.
FIGURE 5-2.
3D View: Airport model of Peterson AFB
With your runway properly aligned, you can begin to model your flight from
Peterson to the burn area.
EXERCISE 5 | PAGE 6
Aircraft Mission Modeler

Aircraft Mission Modeler (AMM) provides an enhanced method for modeling
aircraft - more accurate and more flexible than the standard Great Arc
propagator. With Aircraft Mission Modeler, the aircraft's route is modeled by
a sequence of curves parameterized by well known performance
characteristics of aircraft, including cruise airspeed, climb rate, roll rate, and
bank angle. The precise state of an aircraft at any given time can be computed
analytically - swiftly and without excessive data storage needs.
An aircraft using Aircraft Mission Modeler is defined by the type of aircraft and
by the mission it performs. This structure allows you to utilize an aircraft for
much more than simple linear travel.You will now create a custom aircraft
model for your firefighting airplane using AMM.
ENTER HERCULES
You have to propagate a C-130A aircraft that will take water to the fire and
drop it. Use Aircraft Mission Modeler to propagate the Hercules aircraft that will
be used in the firefighting exercise.
2. Use the Define Properties ( ) method to insert a new aircraft ( ) into the
scenario.
If an aircraft is not in your Insert STK Object tool, use the Edit
Preferences to add it.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Rename your aircraft Hercules.

Bring Hercules ( ) properties ( )to the front.
Ensure that the Basic - Route page for the new aircraft ( ) is selected.
Change the Propagator to Mission Modeler.
The Mission window will appear. The Mission window is used to define the
aircraft's route when Aircraft Mission Modeler has been selected as the
propagator. A Mission encompasses the entire route traveled and all actions
performed by the aircraft within a scenario. Missions are divided into phases,
which are comprised of procedures.
Exercise 5 | Page 7
Design Hercules Mission

Now you can design Hercules mission. Aircraft Mission Modeler utilizes a catalog
structure for the loading and saving of aircraft, runways, and waypoints. Each
of these elements of a mission has an associated catalog in STK. You can add,
modify, and delete items from the catalogs to make it easier to use the same
elements for multiple aircraft and procedures. To model Hercules you will copy
the model that is closest to the profile you want, then make modifications to
that model.
PERFORMANCE MODELS
Performance models define the behavior of the aircraft in flight. By specifying
performance models to use with each phase of the mission, you can vary the
manner in which the aircraft performs based on the priorities of the mission.
The performance models are organized into a tree hierarchy with each type of
performance model available to the aircraft as a top level entry. Expand the
tree for a particular type of performance model to see what specific
performance models are available to it. The default selections are indicated by
a green icon, rather than the normal gray.
AIRCRAFT SELECTION
The first step is to select the type of aircraft performance model that will be
used in the Mission.
1. Click on the Select Aircraft button ( ).
2. Select Basic General Aviation performance model.
3. Click Duplicate ( ).
A new instance of the Basic General Aviation model, Copy Of Basic General
Aviation, will be created. You need to give that new model a unique,
meaningful name.
4. Rename the new model Hercules.
5. Click OK.
When you return to the Mission window, you will notice that Hercules is now
the selected aircraft.
EXERCISE 5 | PAGE 8
Apply a More Accurate Model

You created a new aircraft model, but at this point it is merely a copy of a
generic model. Now you need to customize your model. The Aircraft Properties
window is used to define the global settings and performance models of the
aircraft. The settings and performance models are defined by the aircraft you
have selected from the catalog; any changes you make in this window will be
applied to the aircraft's definition in the catalog.
Take a look at the current properties and make some adjustments.
1. Click on the Aircraft Catalog For Hercules button ( ).
2. Select the Built-In Model under Cruise.
What is the Ceiling value for the Default Cruise Model?
What is the Cruise Altitude for the Default Cruise Model?
Will these values be adequate for flying through the burn area in the
mountainous regions of Colorado?

One of the reasons that you chose the Hercules aircraft is its ability to fly high,
which is crucial in higher altitudes like Colorado. Currently, the ceiling and
cruise altitude values set in the default performance model are too low. Adjust
Hercules ceiling and cruise altitude.
3. Set the Ceiling value to 17,000 ft.
4. Set the Default Cruise Altitude value to 10,000 ft.
5. Click Save. Leave the performance model page open.
If you do not save before you close the properties, your changes will be
lost.
3D MODELS
The 3D Model option below the Performance Models tree allows you to associate
a model with a profile for display in the 3D Graphics window. Ideally, you will
be working with the C-130 Hercules aircraft, so you would like to model your
analysis as such. Change the model that is associated with the Hercules aircraft
catalog object that you created.
1. Click the ellipsis button ( ) beside the 3D Model File option.
2. Locate the air models in the default STK install area (C:\Program
Files\AGI\STK 9\STKData\VO\Models\Air).
Exercise 5 | Page 9
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select c-130_hercules.mdl.
Click Open.
Click Save.
Click Close.
Click Apply.
MODEL HOLDER
There is an option to change the model of the aircraft in the 3D Graphics
window so it relies on the aircraft catalog. When you develop your own
aircraft performance model, and associate a specified 3D model with that
performance model, the 3D Model properties for that object will reflect that
association. Since you have specified a particular model to be used with the
Hercules aircraft, the 3D Graphics- Model properties for the Hercules aircraft
object will reflect the change. While you have Hercules properties open, verify
that the Model page is set to use the catalog model associated with Hercules.
2. Ensure that the Use Catalog Model File option is selected.
Design a Flight Path

You can now begin to create the flight of your Hercules aircraft. You will need
to create phases and procedures that detail what points the aircraft must fly to,
and how the aircraft will reach those points. You can also detail the landing
and takeoff of the aircraft. Your flight path will incorporate:
Takeoff
Fly to the fire
Circle the fire
Return to Peterson AFB for landing
2D ROUTE DISPLAY
Go ahead and turn on the route display so that you can see each piece of the
route as you create it.
2. Set the following 2D graphics attributes:
TABLE 5-4. Hercules
2D Graphics attributes
OPTION
VALUE
Inherit from Scenario
Off
Show Route
On
3. Click Apply.
PHASE ONE
You have modified your aircraft profile to account for the high terrain that
you will encounter in Colorado. Now, create the first phase of your flight
path--the takeoff from Peterson AFB runway.
1. Return to the Basic - Route page.
2. Resize the Route page so that you can see the route chart at the bottom of
the page.
3. Select Phase 1.
4. Click on the Rename Phase button ( ).
5. Rename it Hayman Water Drop.
6. Click OK.
PROCEDURES
A procedure defines an action that the aircraft executes. There are nine
different procedure types that an aircraft can perform, though the exact
selection of procedure types available is dependent on the site of the
procedure and what procedures, if any, were previously performed.You can
create takeoffs, landings, figure eights, point to point flights, circles, etc. As
the aircraft flies through the procedures you create, it will rely on the aircraft
catalog that you created.
TAKE OFF
The first procedure in Hayman Water Drop will be the Hercules take off from
Peterson AFB.
1. Click the Insert Procedure After Phase/Procedure button ( ).
2. Select Runway ( ).
3. Set the following runway values:
TABLE 5-5. Peterson
AFB Runway values
OPTION
VALUE
Name
Peterson
Latitude
38.81150 deg
Longitude
-104.70100 deg
Altitude
6200 ft
Runway Heading Low End
125 deg
Runway Heading High End
305 deg
Length
8 kft
4. Click the Add to Catalog button.

5. An informational message letting you know that the new procedure has
been added will appear. Click OK.
Adding the runway to the catalog will store the information about your
airport in STK. This will allow you to reuse the Peterson AFB runway later
without having to recreate it.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Click Next.
Select Takeoff ( ).
Enable the Use runway heading 305 Mag 314 True option.
Click Finish.
TIMING IS EVERYTHING
In your scenario, you have a firetruck racing to the burn area that leaves at
your analysis start time. That firetruck will transmit information about where
water dumps are needed. For analysis purposes, you are going to plan that this
transmission comes in to the airport about thirty minutes after your analysis
starts. Change the time to make sure your plane takes off at about thirty
minutes after the analysis start time because, as it stands, your plane is leaving
at the same time as the firetruck.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the Takeoff procedure.

Click the Set Time button ( ).
Enable the Set Fixed Start Time option.
Adjust the time thirty minutes forward.
Click OK.
6. Note the Start time for the Takeoff segment.

7. Click Apply.
WHERE IS HERCULES?
Your aircraft should be taking off from the Peterson AFB runway. Go take a
look.
2. Reposition the view so that Hercules ( ) is the focal point in the
3D Graphics window.
Can you see Hercules? If not, why?
ANIMATION CYCLE
Right now, we want to focus on Hercules flight and not the Fieldcrews charge
to the burn area. The animation time is set to mimic the analysis start time so
if you look at your view of Hercules it is blank because he doesnt exist yet.
Lets adjust the animation time to match Hercules time in flight so that we
can view Hercules flight without watching a blank animation through takeoff
time. Change the animation cycle so that Hercules exists when animation
begins.
1. Right-click REMSAT_SlurryBombers ( ), and open its properties ( ) in a
separate window
2. Select the Basic - Time page.
3. Set the following in the Animation section:
TABLE 5-6. Animation
start time values
OPTION
VALUE
Use Analysis Start Time
Off
Start Time
Set the start time equal to the start time that

you noted for the takeoff segment.
4. Click OK.
THERES HERCULES!
1. Reset ( ) the animation to refresh the view in the 3D Graphics window.
Is the time, in the animation toolbar, set to the same time as Hercules
takeoff?

Is Hercules on the runway at Peterson AFB?
Hercules ( ).
FIGURE 5-3.
3D View: Hercules model on Peterson AFB runway
Give Hercules Some Direction

You have a flight taking off from Peterson AFB, but it does not have any
direction. You will need to create a basic point to point route. This will give
the plane some direction. You will enter the waypoints by hand.
AMM allows you to bring in Digital Aeronautic Flight Information Files
(DAFIF). These are catalogs of waypoints and runways from around the
globe.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Return to Hercules ( ) Basic - Route page.

Select the Takeoff phase.
Click the Insert Procedure After Phase/Procedure button ( ).
Set the following:
TABLE 5-7. Hercules
route
OPTION
VALUE
Select Site Type
Waypoint ( )
Name
Waypoint 1
Latitude
38.958 deg
Longitude
-104.855 deg
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Click Add to Catalog.

Click OK on the confirmation message.
Click Next.
Select Basic Point to Point ( ).
Ensure the Altitude is 10,000 ft.
Click Finish.
Click Apply.
SECOND STOP BEFORE THE FIRE

Hercules is not at the fire just yet; however, the Fieldcrew should be at the burn
site. We need another waypoint to get it to the fire and drop. The waypoint
needs to be lower in altitude to get Hercules closer to the fire.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Return to the Basic - Route page.

Select Waypoint 1.
Set the following:
TABLE 5-8. Hercules
route
OPTION
VALUE
Select Site Type
Waypoint ( )
Name
Waypoint 2
Latitude
39.184 deg
Longitude
-105.17 deg
5. Click Next.
This waypoint will be a bit lower in altitude than the previous waypoint to
account for Hercules dropping to the 100 to 500 feet above the fire level.
6. Select Basic Point to Point ( ).

TABLE 5-9. Point
values
OPTION
VALUE
Use Aircraft Default Cruise Altitude
Off
MSL
On
Altitude
9,000
7. Click Finish.
8. Click Apply.
The route that you are creating is being charted as you create it in the graph
below the mission sequence table, which you can see if you scroll down on the
Basic - Route page. Lets take a look.
FIGURE 5-4.
3D View: Hercules model on Peterson AFB runway
AT THE WATER DROP

The previous waypoint brought you closer to the area. You are now ready to
drop the water on the fire, but you have to circle the area while you dump the
water. Go ahead and add a circular holding pattern to the flight path.
1. Select Waypoint 2.
2. Click the Insert Procedure After Phase/Procedure button ( ).
TABLE 5-10. Hercules
route
OPTION
VALUE
Select Site Type
Waypoint ( )
Name
Waypoint 3
Latitude
39.184 deg
Longitude
-105.17 deg
4. Click Next.
5. Select Holding - Circular ( ).
6. Set the following values to constrain Hercules holding pattern:
TABLE 5-11. Circular
route around burn area
OPTION
VALUE
Use Aircraft Default Cruise Altitude
Off
MSL Altitude
9000 ft
Bearing
300 deg Magnetic
Range
1.5 nm
Diameter
3.0 nm
Use Alternate Entry Points
Off
Turn Direction
Outbound Right Turn
Number of Turns
7. Click Finish.
8. Click Apply.
LAST STOP BEFORE LANDING

You will need one final point before landing. Add the waypoint that will point
you back towards Peterson AFB.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select Waypoint 3.
Select Waypoint From Catalog ( ).
Expand ( ) the User Waypoints category in the tree.
Select Waypoint
Select Waypoint 1 on the right.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Click Next.
Select Basic Point to Point ( ).
Ensure that the Altitude is 10,000 ft.
Click Finish.
Click Apply.
CLEARED FOR LANDING

The last thing Hercules needs to do is land. You need to add a procedure that
brings Hercules back to the runway. Then, the aircraft will be set to refuel for
another run, if need be.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Select the newest Waypoint 1.

Select Runway from Catalog ( ).
Expand ( ) the User Runways category in the tree.
Select Peterson on the right.
Click Next.
Select Landing ( ).
Enable the Use runway heading 305 Mag 314 True option.
Click Finish.
Click OK to dismiss Hercules ( )properties ( ).
GET A BETTER LOOK

The landing segment completes Hercules flight path. While individual objects
are more life like in 3D, sometimes it is easier to see the route of an object
against a flat map. Take a look at Hercules flight path in the 2D Graphics
window and make sure you are happy with it.
2. Use the zoom tools (
) to get a better look at Hercules flight path.
FIGURE 5-5.
2D View: Hercules flight path
TAKE A TEST DRIVE

While 2D visualization gives you a nice overall shot of Hercules flight path,
visualizing and animating objects in 3D can give you a better idea of where a
particular object is and what it encounters along the way. Animate the
scenario so that you can see Hercules in motion.
FIGURE 5-6.
3D View: Hercules flight path
Can you see Hercules take off from the runway at Peterson AFB?
Approximately what time does Hercules enter the burn area that falls
within Douglas County?
Can you see Hercules descent and landing?
How quickly does your plane get to the fire?
When Will Hercules Be Where?

The big question is whether or not Hercules can get from the airport to the
burn area within a twenty minute window. You can see approximately what
time Hercules is over the burn area by watching the animation. You could also
look directly at the procedures and see what time Hercules is in the holding
pattern. You can also report detailed data about the aircrafts in-flight status.
Go ahead and do that now.
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Aircraft
Hercules
Show Reports
On
Show Graphs
Off
Style under Installed Styles
Flight Profile by Time
Generate as
Report/Graph
5. When you finish, close the Flight Profile by Time report.
When does the aircraft land?
How much fuel is used during the flight?
What If I Were A C-5 Aircraft?

The flight path that Mission Modeler created is based on the parameters for the
Hercules performance model. If, in fact, you were to use the same route for a
different performance model the flight path could be much different.
See if you can change the aircraft to a military aircraft.

If you had modeled this mission using a C-5 military transport instead
of the C-130 Hercules, would your aircraft have gotten to the burn area
in time?
Save Your Work

When Will My GPS Satellites

Enter an Eclipse Season?
EXERCISE 6
In this exercise you will use your STK expertise to define and assess when each
of six selected GPS satellites representing each of the six GPS planes will enter
an eclipse season. Upon completion, you will have had the opportunity to do
some things that you have not done before, such as:
Use the Vector Geometry Tool (VGT) to create angles and planes.
Display vectors, angles, and planes in the 3D Graphics window.
Constrain access based on an angle.
Compute an access from the Earths center to an object.
Create a custom graph.
When Will My GPS Satellites Enter an Eclipse Season?
Problem Statement
When a satellite is in an eclipse season, it does not receive enough solar
exposure on its solar panels. The GPS satellites will then lose power and begin
to shut down payload operations. The angle between the orbital plane of a
GPS satellite and the Earth-Sun vector, or beta angle, indicates when a given
orbital plane is entering one of its two annual eclipse seasons.
You are a GPS operator. It is your job to know in advance when any one of
the six orbital planes that you are responsible for is entering an eclipse season,
so that you can prevent any possible shut downs. You need to analyze the six
orbital planes for which you are responsible and determine when the beta
angle will be less than five degrees.
BREAK IT DOWN
Orbital planes will enter two (2) annual eclipse seasons.
Each of the six GPS orbital planes for which you are responsible will enter
into an eclipse season in the next six months.

A beta angle is the angle between the orbital plane of a GPS satellite and
the Earth-Sun vector.
A beta angle that is less than five degrees indicates that you need to
intervene.
SOLUTION
Use the Vector Geometry Tool (VGT) to model the beta angle for each GPS
orbital plane over a six month period to determine when each will be in an
eclipse season.

teaches you to create and display geometric elements and then use them for
analysis, a partially developed scenario has been provided for you. This
scenario can be found in the student files area.
EXERCISE 6 | PAGE 2
WHEN WILL MY GPS SATELLITES ENTER AN ECLIPSE SEASON?
3. Locate the starter exercise in the student files provided for this exercise
(C:\Training\STK).
4. Select GPS_Eclipse.vdf ( ).
When you select an object in the Open dialog, information about that object
will display in at the bottom of the panel.
If you scroll through the information at the bottom of the panel, youll see
that scenario provided contains six previously defined GPS satellites named
after and representing their respective orbital planes. The orbital plane of a
satellite is defined as the plane perpendicular to the satellites orbital angular
momentum vector. You will work with one satellite per plane to model each
of the six GPS planes.
5. When you finish, click Open.
The scenario contains six predefined satellites propagated over a six
month period. It may take a few minutes for STK to load the scenario
and repropagate the ephemeris for all six satellites.
Display the Earth Sun Vector

The angle between the orbital plane of a GPS satellite and the Earth-Sun
Vector, or beta angle, for each plane will alert you when a given orbital plane
in the GPS constellation is entering one of the two eclipse seasons. A beta
angle of five degrees or less can be considered an eclipse period.
You need to add the Earth-Sun vector to this scenario as well as the orbital
planes for all six satellites. The Earth-Sun vector is predefined. Since the
Earth-Sun vector will be displayed originating from the Earth, you will add
this vector via your 3D Graphics window properties.
1. Open the 3D Graphics window properties ( ).
2. Select the Vector page.
3. Enable the Show option beside the Earth Sun Vector.
Exercise 6 | Page 3
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Ensure that the Show Label option is enabled.

Scroll down to Common Options.
Set the Scale value for the Component Size section to 4.0.
Click OK.
The Earth-Sun vector is now clearly visible in the 3D Graphics window.

FIGURE 6-1.
3D View: Earth-Sun vector with GPS satellites
Create an Orbital Plane

Use the Vector Geometry Tool (VGT) to create the orbital plane for the first
GPS satellite. You want the plane that you are going to create to be a child of
the Earth rather than the satellite. Having Earth as the parent object will allow
you to duplicate and modify your orbital plane in future steps in order to
represent the other orbital planes in the GPS constellation.
1. Select GPSEclipse ( ) in the Object Browser.
2. Click the Vector Geometry Tool button ( ) on the Tools toolbar.
VGT can also be launched from the Vector page of any objects
3D Graphics properties.
3. Select Earth (
EXERCISE 6 | PAGE 4
) in the elements list.
4. Click the Create New Plane... button ( ).

5. Set the following display criteria:
TABLE 6-1. Plane
A display properties
OPTION
VALUE
Name
GPS_PlaneA
Description
Orbital plane for GPS plane position A
Type
Normal
Remember, the orbital plane is defined as the plane perpendicular to (normal

to) the satellites orbital angular momentum; therefore, you will use the Normal
type for the plane that you create.
In order to properly construct this plane, you need to define two vectors and a
reference point. Go ahead and do that now.
DEFINE A NORMAL VECTOR

First, define a Normal Vector. The Normal Vector will define the plane for your
orbital GPS satellite.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click the Select... button under Normal Vector.

Click the expand button ( ) beside PLANE_POSITN-A4.
Select the Orbit_Normal vector ( ).
Click OK.
The vector is normal to the orbit. Orbit_Normal is a unit vector along the
same direction as Orbit_AngMomentum, so either one of them can be
used to create an orbital plane using the Normal definition.
DEFINE THE REFERENCE VECTOR

The Reference Vector determines where the axes of the plane are positioned, and
sets up how the X and Y axes of the plane are oriented. Now, align the X axis
with the satellites ascending node.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click the Select... button under Reference Vector option.

Click the expand button ( ) beside PLANE_POSITN-A4.
Select the LineOfNodes vector ( ).
Click OK.
Exercise 6 | Page 5
DEFINE THE REFERENCE POINT

Since the orbital plane will pass through the Earth, you can use the Earth
Center as the reference point.
1. When you return to the Add Plane dialog, ensure that Earth Center is the
Reference Point.
2. Click OK.
3. Close the Vector Geometry Tool ( ).
Display the Orbital Plane in 3D

You created the orbital plane, but it is not visible in the 3D Graphics window.
3D Graphics window Vector properties control the display of vectors and other
geometric elements, such as axes and angles, related to the Earth, another
central body or an object in the selected 3D Graphics window.
2. Select the Vector page.
The table at the top of the Vectors page lists all of the default elements
available for display. You created a custom plane so it will not show up in the
table by default, but you can add it to the table and edit its display properties.
DISPLAY PLANE A
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click the Add... button below the available elements table.

Click the expand button ( ) beside
Earth.
Select the GPSPlane_A plane ( ) element from the Available objects list.
Move it ( ) to the Selected objects list.
Leave the component selection window open.
DISPLAY THE LINE OF NODES VECTOR

You used the line of nodes vector as the reference axis for the plane that you
created. It should line up along the x-axis of Plane A when displayed.
1. Click the expand button ( ) beside PLANE_POSITN-A4.
2. Select the Line Of Nodes vector ( ) element from the Available objects list.
3. Move it ( ) to the Selected objects list.
EXERCISE 6 | PAGE 6
4. Click OK.
DISPLAY PLANE A
The plane that you created should now be listed in the available elements table
on the Vector page.
1. When you return to the Vector page, select Earth GPSPlane_A Plane in the
available elements table.
2. Set the following plane definition properties:
TABLE 6-2. Plane
A definition properties
OPTION
STATE
Show
On
Show Label
On
Show Axis Labels
On
Translucent Plane
On
Translucency
50.00
Color
Select any color that is not being used.
Component Size
4.0
3. Click Apply. Leave the 3D Graphics window properties ( ) open.

2. Mouse around until you can clearly see the entire GPSPlane_A in the
3D Graphics window.
Exercise 6 | Page 7
FIGURE 6-2.
3D View: GPS Plane A

Now, take a closer look at how the line of nodes is aligned with GPSPlane_As
x axis.
2. Use the mouse to zoom out in the 3D Graphics window until you can see
Plane_Positn-A4s orbit cross the equator in the northerly direction.
FIGURE 6-3.
EXERCISE 6 | PAGE 8
3D View: Line of nodes X Axis
Use VGT to Create a Beta Angle

You have the two items you need to calculate your beta angle, the Earth-Sun
vector and the orbital plane. Use VGT to create the beta angle between those
two elements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select GPSEclipse ( ) in the Object Browser.

Open the Vector Geometry Tool ( ).
Select
Earth in the elements list.
Click the Create New Angle... button ( ).
Set the following definition criteria:
TABLE 6-3. PlaneA
beta angle definition
OPTION
VALUE
Name
BetaAngle_A
Description
Angle between GPS Plane A and the Earth-Sun vector.
Type
To Plane
The To Plane type is defined as the angle from a vector (reference vector) to a
plane (reference plane).
SELECT A REFERENCE VECTOR

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click the Select... button under Reference Vector.

Earth.
Select the Sun vector ( ).
Click OK.
SELECT A REFERENCE PLANE

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click the Select... button under Reference Plane.

Earth.
Select GPS_PlaneA ( ) from this list.
Click OK.
Click OK to dismiss the Add Angle dialog.
Close the Vector Geometry Tool ( ).
Exercise 6 | Page 9
Display the Beta Angle in 3D

You have created your beta angle and now you want to display this in your
3D Graphics window.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select the Vector page.
Click the Add... button below the available elements table.
Earth.
5. Select BetaAngle_A ( )from the Available objects list.

6. Move it ( ) to the Selected objects list.
7. Click OK.
ENABLE THE DISPLAY

1. Select Earth BetaAngle_A Angle.
2. Set the following display properties:
TABLE 6-4. Beta
angle A display properties
OPTION
VALUE
Show
On
Show Label
On
Show Angle Value
On
Color
Select any color that is not being used.
Angle Size Scale
1.0
3. Click OK.

2. Mouse around until you can clearly see the beta angle displayed in the
3D Graphics window.
FIGURE 6-4.
3D View: GPS Beta angle

4. Play ( ) the animation again.
This value changes steadily over time. You may wish to increase the animation
time step ( ), as the beta angle varies by season.
5. Watch the animation and answer the following questions:
Does an eclipse season occur in GPS plane A?
If so, approximately when does it begin and end?
Visualize All Six Orbital Planes

In the interest of time, the elements that are used to calculate the beta angle
for the other five satellites have been created for you, and saved in VGT.
Although they will be considered in the analysis that you will do, they will not
display in the 3D Graphics window in an effort to keep window clutter to a
minimum. If you were to display all six planes and their corresponding beta
angles, they would look something like Figure 6-5 on page 6-12.
FIGURE 6-5.
3D View: All six GPS beta angles
Access To a Plane
By watching the change in the beta angle in the 3D Graphics window as the
scenario animates, you can tell that the satellites are in an eclipse period a
small percentage of the six month period that you are analyzing. It is,
however, obvious that there are one or more eclipse seasons in the GPS
planes during those six months.
How can you find out how often and for how long each plane is in an eclipse
season? To determine exactly how often and for how long each plane is in an
eclipse season, you need to report data on the planes, but planes are not STK
objects. How can you report data on a plane?
You can compute access from the center of the Earth to the satellites
representing the plane. Since the satellites are in orbit around the Earth, line
of site access from the center of the Earth to the satellite would always exist;
however, in this case we only want accesses reported during the times when
our beta angles are less than five degrees. The five degree beta angle
constraint will be the sole limiting factor in access between the center of the
Earth and the satellites, and will, therefore, result in reporting the times when
the beta angle falls between zero and five degrees, which is exactly what you
want!
CONSTRAIN THE BETA ANGLE

The first step in calculating access to a plane is to constrain your GPS
satellites such that they will require the beta angle defined for each satellite to
fall within your desired range of zero to five degrees (0-5).
1. Open PLANE_POSITN-A4s ( ) properties ( ).
2. Select the Constraints - Vector page.
3. Set the following Angle constraint criteria:
TABLE 6-5. Beta
angle constraints
OPTION
STATE
VALUE
Min
On
0 deg
Max
On
5 deg
4. Click the Select... button.

5. Click the expand button ( ) beside
Earth.
6. Select BetaAngle_A ( )from the Available objects list.

7. Click OK to dismiss the angle selection dialog.
8. Click OK to dismiss PLANE_POSTIN-A4s ( ) properties ( ).
The vector constraint has been set for you on the other five satellites.
MODEL EARTH
You want to compute an access from the center of the Earth to each satellite,
but Earth is not yet an object in your scenario. Add Earth to the scenario now.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Insert a new Planet ( ).

Open the Planet1s properties ( ).
Select the Basic - Definition page.
Select Earth from the Central Body drop down.
Click OK.
STK will automatically rename the planet for you.
GROUP THE GPS SATELLITES

You now have the Earth in your scenario and are ready to ask STK when
Earth has access to each of the satellites (representing planes) with their
associated constraints. You can simplify the task of calculating access to

multiple objects by grouping them in a constellation and assigning a
constraint of Any Of to that constellation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Insert a new constellation ( ).

Rename it GPS_Sats.
Open GPS_Satss properties ( ).
Enable the Satellite ( ) Selection Filter.
Click to move all six GPS satellites to the Assigned Objects list.
Click Apply.
Ensure that Any Of is selected.
Click OK.
DISABLING LINE OF SIGHT

The Line of Sight basic constraint allows objects to see beyond the surface of
the Earth. In order to calculate access from the Earths center to each satellite,
you must allow STK access through the sphere of the Earth. You have to
disable the Line of Sight constraint for both the Earth and the satellites.
You do not want to open each satellites properties again. It would be really
convenient if you could highlight all satellites and make the change globally.
Well you can!
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select the first GPS satellite in your Object Browser.

Hold down the Shift key.
Select the last GPS satellite in your Object Browser.
Open the Properties Browser ( ).
Scroll down, and disable Line of Sight.
Click OK.
Now, disable the line of sight constraint for Earth.

1.
2.
3.
4.
Open Earths ( ) properties ( ).

Disable the Line of Sight option.
Click OK.
GET EARTH IN THE LOOP

Here is where it gets tricky. You want to calculate access from the center of
the Earth to the constellation of GPS satellites. You modeled Earth in your
scenario, but a planet is not a valid from object for access. How will you
calculate access from Earth to anything?
You can define a chain that is required to consider the planet object for the
chain to be complete. Go ahead and do that now.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Insert a new chain ( ) named EclipseSeasons.

Open EclipseSeasons properties ( ).
Move ( ) Earth to the Assigned Objects list.
Move ( ) GPS_Sats to the Assigned Objects list.
Click OK.
Ensure that the objects are added in the order specified above.
GRAPH INDIVIDUAL STRAND ACCESS

Use an Individual Strand Access graph to show you the access times from Earth
to each of your GPS planes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Select EclipseSeasons ( ) in the Object Browser.

Open the Report & Graph Manager ( ).
Ensure the Object Type is set to Chain.
Ensure the EclipseSeasons chain is selected.
Turn off Show Reports.
Turn On Show Graphs
Select Individual Strand Access Graph from the Styles list.
Click Generate...
FIGURE 6-6.
Graph: Individual strand access of eclipse seasons
REPORT INDIVIDUAL STRAND ACCESS

The Individual Strand Access graph shows the relationship between the various
planes eclipse seasons, but you need precise times for each eclipse season.
Create an Individual Strand Access report to identify the exact time and length of
each eclipse season.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Turn On the Show Reports option.
Turn Off the Show Graphs option.
Select Individual Strand Access from the Styles list.
Click Generate...
Use the individual strand access report to answer the following questions:
Which satellite has the longest eclipse season?
When does this occur?
Which satellite has the shortest eclipse season?
7. Close the report and the graph.
Custom Reports & Graphs

You would like to know how the individual beta angles change over the
season, but there is not a default graph style that will return this data. You
could create a customized graph. Try it!
To customize graphs you need to have a fully functional license of STK
Professional Edition.
When creating or editing a report or graph, you generate or modify the

content by selecting from a list of data providers for a particular object.
Content properties allow you to select the data elements to be included in a
graph or strip chart. The options available will depend on the data provider
you're using. Think about what should be in your graph.
CREATE A NEW CUSTOM GRAPH

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Change the Object Type to Scenario.
Ensure GPS_Eclipse is selected.
Select the MyStyles folder.
Click the Create New Graph Style button.
Name the new graph Beta Angles.
Open the properties for this graph.
DEFINE CONTENT
You need to create a graph that shows the change in the beta angle for each
plane over the six month analysis period.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
On the Content page, click the expand button ( ) beside

Select BetaAngle_A Angle.
Move ( ) it to the Y Axis box.
Click Options...
Change the Title to Plane A.
Click OK.
Repeat steps 3-7 for the remaining planes.
Click Apply.
Angles.
LABEL THE GRAPH

Your graphs axes need to be labeled. Go ahead and do that now.
1. Enter Date in the Time Axis Title field at the top of the Content page.
2. Enter Beta Angle by Plane in Degrees in the Axis Title field.
3. Click Apply.
EDIT THE GRAPHS PROPERTIES

You know you will be graphing six planes over a six month period. The
default time increment is one minute. This will result in over 1.5 million data
points! You know the beta angle changes seasonally so there is no need to
compute it frequently. You can tell STK to compute this value once a day
instead of every minute.
1. Enter 24 hr in the Step Size box.
Be sure you include the units for hour or it will default to 24 seconds.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the Layout page.

Name the graph GPS Beta Angles.
Enable the Hide Day Lines and Labels option.
Click OK.
Click Generate...
FIGURE 6-7.
Graph: Beta angle by plane
MODIFY THE GRAPH

The graph is difficult to read. Add some grid lines.
1. Right-click anywhere in the graph.
2. Select Grid Options.
TABLE 6-6. Azimuth
and elevation Grid Options
OPTION
STATE
Show Y Axis Grid Lines
On
Thin Grid Lines
On
4. Now, take another look at the graph.
FIGURE 6-8.
Graph: Beta angles by plane with gridlines
This graph shows how the beta angles for each plane vary over the six month
period.
5. Use the data in the beta angles graph to answer the following questions:
Which GPS plane has the greatest variation in beta angle?
Which has the least?
All GPS planes have very similar inclinations and altitudes. What orbital
parameter do you think could cause the obvious variation in beta
angles?
Save Your Work

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Save ( ) your work.

Close any open graph windows.
Leave STK ( ) open.
Use What You Know

Use what youve learned over the past couple of days to complete some
independent analysis, and then share your results with the group.
CAN I SEE THE ISS ON MY VACATION?

You are planning a trip to Breckenridge, Colorado. You plan on arriving next
week and staying for two weeks. During your trip, you wanted to view the
International Space Station overhead. Using your knowledge of what
conditions must be met to watch the ISS, as well as the knowledge that you
are in high terrain region, model a scenario that will determine if you can view
the ISS during your vacation, as well as how long of a duration you have
visibility and where you should watch for the ISS.
WHY CANT I SEE IT?

Use what you know to identify the highest elevation blockage in
Breckenridge?
Analyzing Mission Situations

Version 9

800.220.4785 610.981.8000
2010-04
Overview
Welcome to the Analyzing Mission Situations training course.This course is a
objects and their environments, but how to accurately model, analyze, assess,
and plan all aspects of a mission, including, attitude simulation, communications
platforms, global and custom ground and object coverage, and much more.
STK Basic Edition

STK Integration Module
STK Terrain Imagery, & Maps Module
STK Standard Analysis Modules including:
STK/Analyzer
STK/Attitude
STK/Communications
STK/Coverage
Conjunction Analysis Tool (CAT)
Table Of Contents
Where On Earth Will Three Different Satellites Provide

Simultaneous Coverage?............................................................... 1-1
What Is Coverage?.................................................................................................1-4
Coverage Definition ...............................................................................................1-4
Coverage Graphics.................................................................................................1-6
Manage Your Resources........................................................................................1-8
How Will I Constrain My Coverage? .....................................................................1-8
Identify Your Assets.............................................................................................1-10
Compute Coverage! .............................................................................................1-11
Define the Quality of Coverage ...........................................................................1-12
Measure Simple Coverage ..................................................................................1-12
Static Coverage Graphics ....................................................................................1-13
Dynamic Coverage Graphics................................................................................1-14
N Asset Coverage ................................................................................................1-15
Graph Coverage By Latitude ................................................................................1-18
Coverage Over Time.............................................................................................1-20
Contour Graphics .................................................................................................1-21
Static Contours ....................................................................................................1-22
Dynamic Contours................................................................................................1-24
Table Of Contents
Measure Coverage Time......................................................................................1-27

Report Coverage Time By Grid Point ...................................................................1-32
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................1-32
How Will I Determine the Accuracy of My In-Flight
Navigation Solution? ..................................................................... 2-1
Narrow Your Focus ................................................................................................2-3
Model Ground Locations........................................................................................2-6
Model an Aircraft...................................................................................................2-7
Model the GPS Network........................................................................................2-9
Get a Better Look ...................................................................................................2-9
How Will I Measure DOP?...................................................................................2-10
Coverage Definition .............................................................................................2-10
Compute Coverage! .............................................................................................2-12
Dilution of Precision.............................................................................................2-13
Define the Quality of Coverage ...........................................................................2-16
Grid Stats Over Time............................................................................................2-17
Dynamic Contours................................................................................................2-17
Single Object Coverage .......................................................................................2-20
Single Object Contour Graphics...........................................................................2-22
De-Assign Assets.................................................................................................2-25
When You Finish..................................................................................................2-29
How Can I Analyze the Quality of My Link Budgets? ................. 3-1
STK/Communications ............................................................................................3-4
Model Anik.............................................................................................................3-5
Antenna Gain .........................................................................................................3-8
Displaying Contours...............................................................................................3-9
Receivers As Children of Children .......................................................................3-13
Define Castle Rocks Receiver.............................................................................3-14
What Can I See? ..................................................................................................3-16
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Scenario Environment Properties ........................................................................3-17

Rain Loss Effects on Comm Links ........................................................................3-19
Dynamic Link Budgets..........................................................................................3-20
Computing A Dynamic Link Budget .....................................................................3-21
Working With Comm Constraints........................................................................3-22
When You Finish..................................................................................................3-23
How Will I Survey Yachts In All of the Worlds Seas? ................ 4-1
Walker Constellations ...........................................................................................4-3
Create a Constellation ...........................................................................................4-7
World Water Coverage..........................................................................................4-8
Compute Coverages...............................................................................................4-9
Measure The Quality of Coverage.........................................................................4-9
Parametric Study Analysis...................................................................................4-11
STK/Analyzer .......................................................................................................4-11
Launch Analyzer...................................................................................................4-13
The Parametric Study Tool...................................................................................4-14
Define Your Design Variables..............................................................................4-15
Define Your Responses........................................................................................4-17
Review Your Results............................................................................................4-19
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................4-21
How Can I Monitor and Communicate With a
Decaying Satellite?......................................................................... 5-1
Create a Walker Constellation ..............................................................................5-4
Attitude Coverage..................................................................................................5-6
Attitude Figure Of Merit ......................................................................................5-10
Decaying Satellite................................................................................................5-13
High-Precision Orbit Propagator ..........................................................................5-14
Force Models .......................................................................................................5-15
Errant Satellite Display........................................................................................5-17
III
Table Of Contents
Lifetime Tool ........................................................................................................5-18

Modeling Attitude in STK ....................................................................................5-22
Attach a Sensor ...................................................................................................5-23
AER Report...........................................................................................................5-24
Satellite Attitude .................................................................................................5-24
Maximizing Data Transmission ...........................................................................5-27
Maximizing Power Generation ............................................................................5-30
When You Finish..................................................................................................5-32
How Can I Assess the Threat of My Satellite Colliding
With Space Debris? ........................................................................ 6-1
SOCRATES, CSSI, and STK/CAT............................................................................6-2
Preparing Internet Explorer....................................................................................6-3
Open SOCRATES....................................................................................................6-4
STK and SOCRATES...............................................................................................6-6
3D Conjunction Display..........................................................................................6-7
AdvCAT in STK.....................................................................................................6-12
Reporting Close Approaches ...............................................................................6-14
Analyzing Multiple Conjunctions.........................................................................6-16
Using Pre-Filters...................................................................................................6-18
Display Ellipsoids.................................................................................................6-19
Compute! .............................................................................................................6-20
Report Close Approaches ....................................................................................6-20
The Big Picture.....................................................................................................6-21
When You Finish..................................................................................................6-22
Use What You Know.............................................................................................. A-i
iv
Where On Earth Will Three

Different Satellites Provide
Simultaneous Coverage?
EXERCISE 1
In this exercise you will use STK/Coverage to model and analyze the quality and quantity
of coverage provided by the Earth observing payloads attached to satellites in three
different orbits. Using that model, you will determine if, when, and for how long two or
more of the satellites can simultaneously survey the surface of the Earth during daylight
hours. Upon completion, you will be able to:
Find and calculate coverage.

Assess the quality of your coverage.
Report statistical data based on your coverage.
Set up a Figure of Merit for a Coverage Definition object.
Add a legend to a 2D Graphic window.
Where On Earth Will Three Different Satellites Provide Simultaneous Coverage?
Problem Statement
As a university student, your senior design team has worked in conjunction
with a consortium of two other universities in designing a new space-based
Earth observing payload. Your payload was designed to be an on-orbit space
shuttle experiment rather than a stand-alone satellite. The space shuttle has
just lifted off with your payload onboard! The other two universities built
small satellites carrying this new payload (SunSync and TestSat). Their satellites
launched previously on two separate space launches. Because the three earth
observing payloads were all piggybacked to space as secondary missions of
other launches, they ended up in three different orbits.
You need to know when any or all of the three satellites can see the portion
of the Earths surface that falls between 60 degree and -60 degrees latitude.
Additionally, you would like to know if any areas of the earth will be covered
by two or even three sensors simultaneously, during daylight hours, and if so,
for how long.
Manually calculating point-to-point access to an object positioned at every
point on the Earth individually would be time consuming. How will you
determine the extent and quality of coverage provided by the three satellites
that you are assessing?
BREAK IT DOWN
The Earth observing payload is attached to three different satellites (Shuttle,
SunSync, and TestSat).

The shuttle is flying in a low earth orbit with a 51.6 degree inclination.
One of the university satellites is in a sun synchronous orbit (SunSync).
The other satellite is in a circular orbit with an altitude of 1400 km and an
inclination of 70 degrees (TestSat).
The earth observing mission that these satellites are performing requires
the earth to be in sunlight in order for data collection to occur.
You are only interested in the area on the surface of the Earth that falls
between 60 degrees north latitude and -60 degrees south latitude.
SOLUTION
Use STK/Coverage to model and analyze the quality and quantity of coverage
provided by the Earth observing payloads attached to satellites in three
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 2
WHERE ON EARTH WILL THREE DIFFERENT SATELLITES PROVIDE SIMULTANEOUS COVERAGE?
different orbits. Using that model, you will determine if, when, and for how
long two or more of the satellites can survey the surface of the Earth during
daylight hours.

teaches you to analyze and display coverage, a partially developed scenario has
been provided for you. This scenario can be found in the student files area.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ensure that the Welcome to STK! dialog is visible in the STK Workspace.
Click the Open a Scenario.
Locate the student files provided for this exercise (C:\Training\STK).
Select SimSat_Cov.vdf ( ).
If you scroll through the information at the bottom of the panel, youll see
that scenario provided contains three previously defined satellites described in
Break it Down on page 1-2. Each satellite is equipped with a sensor used to
model the field of view of the attached data collection instrument.
5. When you finish, click Open.
FIGURE 1-1.
3D View: Three predefined orbits
Exercise 1 | Page 3
created in the default user directory (C:\My Documents\STK 9) and STK
will unpack the contents of the VDF into that directory. The scenario will not
be saved automatically.
What Is Coverage?
The STK/Coverage module allows you to analyze the global or regional
coverage provided by one or more assets (facilities, vehicles, sensors, etc.)
while considering all access constraints. Specific results are generated based
on detailed access computations performed to user-defined grid points within
an area of coverage. Using STK/Coverage you can:
Define areas of interest

Define coverage assets (satellites, ground facilities, etc.)
Define the time period of interest
Determine and report measures of coverage quality
STK/Coverage provides the necessary tools, but you have some work to do too.
Lets get started.
Coverage Definition
You know what your region-of-interest is--the portion of the Earths surface
that falls between 60 degree and -60 degrees latitude. You need to tell STK to
use that area as your region-of-interest. Use a coverage definition object to define
an analytical area that will limit itself to user defined boundaries. A coverage
definition object is defined by:
Selecting the area(s) of interest
Identifying the assets that may provide coverage to those areas
Setting the time period over which coverage statistics are to be analyzed
Once the coverage definition object is defined, access periods to the coverage
area can be computed to determine the availability of an asset or set of assets
that satisfy all geometric, lighting, temporal and other user-specified
constraints within that area.
1. Select the scenario ( ) in the Object Browser.
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 4
2. Use the Object Catalog to insert a coverage definition object ( ).

You can also add a Coverage Definition to the Insert New Object tool.
Just click the Edit Preferences... button and add the Coverage
Definition.
3. Rename the coverage definition Stereo_Cov.

4. Open Stereo_Cov's ( ) properties ( ). The Basic - Grid page should
DEFINING A COVERAGE GRID

Coverage analyses are based on the accessibility of assets (objects that provide
coverage) and geographical areas. For analysis purposes, the geographical
areas of interest are further refined using regions and points defined by STK.
Points have specific geographical locations and are used in the computation
of asset availability. Regions are closed boundaries that contain points.
Accessibility to a region is computed based on accessibility to the points
within that region. The combination of the geographical area, the regions
within that area, and the points within each region is called the coverage grid.
The default Grid Definition type is set to Latitude Bounds. This definition results
in a coverage region that is a band circling the globe between your defined
latitude boundaries.
1. Ensure that the Bounds Type is Latitude Bounds.
2. Set the Min Latitude to -60.
3. Set the Max Latitude to 60.
GRID RESOLUTION
While the area to be considered in the coverage analysis is specified by a set of
regions within the defining bounds, the statistical data computed during a
coverage analysis is based on a set of locations, or points, which span the
coverage area. You can determine the spacing between grid points using the
options in the Grid Granularity area of the Grid page. These options help you
define the fineness or coarseness of the grid. The exact location of the grid
points are computed based on a specified granularity.
Finer grid resolution typically produces more accurate results but
requires additional computational time and resources.
Exercise 1 | Page 5
1. Ensure that Lat/Lon is selected in the Grid Definition - Grid Granularity area.
2. Change the Point Granularity to 4 deg.
3. Click Apply.
Coverage Graphics
You can define how the coverage grid displays in the 2D and 3D Graphics
window using the graphics Attributes properties for the coverage definition
object. The fields on the 2D Graphics - Attributes page allow you to specify grid
attributes as well as the way in which the progress of coverage computations
display.
Lets turn on the 2D and 3D grid region display now.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Return to Stereo_Cov's ( ) properties ( ).

Enable the Show Regions option in the Static Graphics area.
Click Apply.
GET A BETTER LOOK

The sections and lines outlined on the globe represent coverage regions and
individual points within those regions. The points have a specific geographical
location and are used in the computation of assets available. Accessibility to a
region is computed based on accessibility to the points within that region.
2. Mouse around in the 3D Graphics window to get a good look at the
coverage grid.
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 6
FIGURE 1-2.
3D View: Stereo Covs grid display
3. Mouse around in the 3D Graphics window to get a good look at the north
and/or south pole.
Notice that there is no grid covering either of these areas. When you limited
the boundaries of your coverage region, STK excluded these areas from the
grid.
FIGURE 1-3.
3D View: Stereo Covs grid extents
Exercise 1 | Page 7
Manage Your Resources

By default, STK is set to automatically recompute access every time an object
on which the coverage definition depends (such as an asset) is updated. You
will be computing access to a large area, which could take some time. You still
have several changes to make. In an effort to manage your resources more
efficiently, lets not tie up STK recomputing access automatically every time
you make a change. Lets turn that off.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select the Basic - Advanced page.
Disable the Automatically Recompute Accesses option.
Click OK.
How Will I Constrain My Coverage?

Your first objective is to determine what areas of the earth, at some time in a
twenty-four hour period, will be examined by at least one of the sensors
during daylight hours. If coverage is based on access to every point in the grid,
how will you ensure that the grid points are constrained based on the lighting
conditions in that geographical area?
Once you have defined the grid area and resolution, you can customize the
definition of points within the grid, by specifying a type of object or a specific
object for the points within the grid. The template object can be used to
associate three types of information with the grid points: access constraints,
basic object properties and, in some specialized cases, the altitude of the
points in the grid.
By default, the grid points are located on the surface of the Earth and accesses
to grid points are constrained to a line of sight not obstructed by the Earth. If
you select a template object, the constraints set for the template object are
also used by all the points within the grid.
CREATE THE CONSTRAINTS TEMPLATE

Since you want to constrain your analysis based on the lighting conditions on
the ground, apply the constraints to a facility object and then use that facility
as your template.
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 8

TABLE 1-1. Create
OPTION
VALUE
Facility
Select a Method:
Define Properties

4. Rename the facility Const_Template.
APPLY CONSTRAINTS
Any constraints or characteristics that you want to impose on points in the
coverage grid must be applied to a template object. You can set a lighting
constraint on Const_Template, which once associated with the coverage
definition, will be used by every point in the coverage grid.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Enable the Lighting option.
Select Direct Sun from the list of lighting constraints.
Click Apply.
The location and display of the constraints template is unimportant. Take a

moment to turn off the object label in the 2D and 3D Graphics windows.
TABLE 1-2. Const_Template
OPTION
VALUE
Marker Style
None
Off
Show Label
Off
display options
7. Click OK.
Exercise 1 | Page 9
ASSOCIATE THE CONSTRAINTS

Youve applied the appropriate constraint to the template object
(Const_Template), but you still need to associate that object with the Coverage
Definition (Stereo_Cov).
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open Stereo_Cov's ( ) properties ( ).

Ensure that the Basic - Grid page is selected.
Click the Grid Constraint Options... button.
Set the following:
TABLE 1-3.
OPTION
VALUE
Reference Constraint Class
Facility
Use Object Instance
On
<Object Instance>
Const_Template (highlight)
5. Click OK to return to the Grid page.

6. Click Apply.
Identify Your Assets

Youve defined and constrained the area within which youd like to analyze
coverage. The next step is to identify your assets. Coverage Assets specify which
objects, or assets in the scenario will be used to provide coverage over the
specified region.
The Earth observing payloads attached to each satellite (Shuttle, SunSync, and
TestSat) are modeled using an STK sensor object in this scenario; therefore,
the sensors attached to each satellite will be your assets. Lets assign those
assets now.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select the Basic - Assets page.
Expand ( ) each satellite object ( ) to unnest the attached payloads.
Hold down the Ctrl key, and select all three sensors ( ).
Click the Assign button.
The display in the Assets list will change to visually indicate which objects in
the scenario have been assigned as assets.
FIGURE 1-4.
Assigned assets for Stereo Cov
6. Click OK.
Compute Coverage!
You have a coverage definition (Stereo_Cov), which covers the surface of the
Earth between 60 degrees and -60 degrees, and youve assigned assets (the
earth observing payload on each satellite) that will provide access to that area-ofinterest.
Now that the coverage definition object is defined and properly contained,
access periods to the coverage area can be computed to determine the
availability of an asset or set of assets that satisfy all geometric, lighting,
temporal, and other specified constraints. Lets do that now.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Right-click Stereo_Cov ( ) in the Object Browser.
Select Coverage Definition from the context menu.
Select Compute Accesses.
Coverage graphics display in the 2D Graphics window while coverage is being

computed. When you compute coverage, all access calculations between the
coverage assets (all three sensors) and the coverage area (Stereo_Cov) are
computed.
FIGURE 1-5.
2D View: Coverage computation display
Define the Quality of Coverage

While the coverage definition defines the problem, the figure(s) of merit
allows you to evaluate the quality of coverage provided by the selected set of
assets (defined for the coverage definition object) over the coverage area and
then provide a method for summarizing and viewing the resultant data.
To evaluate coverage quality, you will first need to set basic parameters that
determine the way in which quality is computed. This involves choosing the
method for evaluating the quality of coverage provided, setting measurement
options and identifying the criterion needed to achieve satisfactory coverage.
Measure Simple Coverage

Simple Coverage measures whether or not a point is accessible by any of the
assigned assets. An evaluation of the dynamic behavior of simple coverage
computes a value of 1 for points that are currently in an access period and 0
for points that are not. The static behavior of simple coverage computes a
value of one (1) for grid points that have access to an asset at any point in the
analysis time period and zero (0) for points that are not accessible.
Lets evaluate the quality of coverage within your coverage region using a
simple coverage type figure of merit (FOM).
1. Select Stereo_Cov ( ) in the Object Browser.
2. Attach a Figure of Merit ( ) using the Object Browser

3. Rename the figure of merit Simple_Cov.
STK creates a Simple Coverage figure of merit by default. Since you will
be evaluating simple coverage there is no need to change Simple Covs
properties.
Static Coverage Graphics

Graphics are used to represent the static and dynamic value of simple coverage.
When displaying static graphics, grid points are highlighted if they are covered
by at least one asset at any time during the analysis time period. The figure of
merit display shows you where, during daylight hours, you have coverage by at
least one asset during the coverage interval.
FIGURE 1-6.
3D View: Simple coverage quality for Stereo Cov
In this case, the entire coverage region is shaded (red). This tells you that, at
some point during the twenty-four analysis interval, each point in your
coverage region did have access to at least one asset during daylight hours.
CLEAN UP!
In an effort to minimize clutter and more clearly visualize periods of access,
lets remove the grid from the visualization windows and focus on the
coverage quality display.
1. Open Stereo_Cov's ( ) properties ( ).
TABLE 1-4. Stereo
Cov 2D Graphics attributes display options
OPTION
VALUE
Show Regions
Off
Show Points
Off
3. Click OK.
Dynamic Coverage Graphics

Lets look at coverage graphics in the 2D Graphics window. In the 2D Graphics
window we can see the entire globe as a flat map, whereas in the 3D Graphics
window, the sunlit portion of the globe may be hidden when accesses occur.
FIGURE 1-7.
2D View: Simple Coverage quality dynamic display
By default the solar terminator as well as the subsolar point have already been
enabled for you so you can tell which portion of the Earth is in sunlight at any
given time. Notice that throughout the twenty-four hour period not all of the
satellites are in sunlit regions at the same time, and often only a portion of the
field-of-view for a given satellite is in a sunlit region.
Its obvious that each of your assets has access for some portion of the
twenty-four hour period, but how many of those assets have coverage in the
same area simultaneously during daylight hours? A second FOM can be used
to answer that very question.
CLEAN UP
First, turn the Simple_Cov FOM graphics off, so that they dont interfere with
the display of the new FOM.
1. Open Simple_Covs ( ) properties ( ).
TABLE 1-5. Simple
Cov FOM display clean up options
ATTRIBUTE
OPTION
VALUE
Static Graphics
Show
Off
Animation Graphics
Show
Off
3. Click OK.
N Asset Coverage
N Asset Coverage measures the number of assets available simultaneously
during coverage, where N is between zero and the total number of assets
defined in the coverage definition. The dynamic definition of N Asset Coverage
computes the number of assets currently accessible to each grid point.
Lets add a second FOM object that will analyze the quality of your coverage
based on the number of available assets.
1. Attach a second Figure of Merit ( ) to Stereo_Cov ( ) using the Object
Catalog.
2. Rename the figure of merit NAsset_Cov.
3. Open NAsset_Covs ( ) properties ( ).
DEFINITION
2. Set the following Definition criteria:
TABLE 1-6. NAsset
FOM definition criteria
OPTION
VALUE
Type
N Asset Coverage
Compute
Maximum
Selecting maximum will compute the maximum number of assets available over
the entire coverage interval. In this case, for every grid point the static value
of the FOM is the maximum number of sensors (assets) simultaneously
providing coverage during the analysis interval.
3. Click Apply.
GET A BETTER LOOK

2. Reset ( ) the animation to refresh the display in the 2D Graphics window.
FIGURE 1-8.
2D View: NAsset FOM coverage graphics
The graphics indicate that you have access over the entire coverage grid. Lets
change the criteria that will indicate which access are considered valid.
SATISFACTION
You can restrict the figure of merit behavior so that STK only applies the
graphical properties of the figure of merit when a chosen satisfaction criterion
is met.
1. Return to NAsset_Covs ( ) properties ( ).
2. Set the following Satisfaction criteria:
TABLE 1-7. NAsset
FOM satisfaction criteria
OPTION
VALUE
Enable
On
Satisfied If
At Least
Threshold
In this case, you want the satisfaction criteria to be that at least two (the
selected threshold) of the assets (sensors) have access to a point in the grid
simultaneously during daylight hours.
3. Click OK.
GET A BETTER LOOK

Adding the satisfaction criteria has greatly reduced your area of coverage as
evidenced by the 2D and 3D Graphics display.
FIGURE 1-9.
3D View: NAsset FOM satisfaction graphics

FIGURE 1-10.
2D View: NAsset FOM satisfaction graphics
Notice that as the scenario animates a single sunlit sensor no longer shows
dynamic coverage graphics. With the satisfaction criteria applied, you only see
dynamic coverage graphics if there is double or triple coverage.
Graph Coverage By Latitude

Lets create a graph to confirm what you are seeing in the 2D Graphics window.

OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Coverage Definition
Stereo_Cov
Show Reports
Off
Show Graphs
On
Style
Coverage by Latitude
Generate as
Report/Graph
COVERAGE BY LATITUDE DATA PROVIDER

The Coverage by Latitude data provider reports coverage for each latitude in the
selected range (-90 degrees to 90 degrees if Global Coverage is chosen), at
intervals depending on the selected resolution. A point is considered to be
covered if it has access to one or more of the assigned assets. The reported
values for each latitude are the average value for all grid points at that latitude.
FIGURE 1-11.
Graph: Stereo Cov percent of time covered by latitude
The graph clearly coincides with what you see on the map. As your latitude
increases, so does your coverage.
Use the graph to answer the following questions:
Where would be the best to place to put a ground station for data
collection?
Would you have access to multiple assets at the same time?
4. Close the Coverage by Latitude graph.

Coverage Over Time

You have determined that the northern latitudes provide the best coverage,
and it would, therefore, be beneficial to put a data collection ground station
somewhere in a northern latitude. Your analysis, up to this point, has
illustrated our instantaneous coverage, but, you would also like to determine
what areas, at some time during the day, had single, double or triple coverage.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open NAsset_Covs ( ) properties ( ).

Select Up to Current in the Accumulation drop down.
Click Apply.
The accumulation options for animation graphics allow you to control the
sense and persistence of the animation graphics. By default, STK is set to
highlight grid points that meet the satisfaction criteria at the current time.
When you change the accumulation value to Up To Current, grid points that
have met the satisfaction criterion based on the dynamic definition of the
figure of merit from the start time to the current time are highlighted during
animation. This can help you determine not only where you have the best
coverage but also when you have the best coverage.
GET A BETTER LOOK

Because we have made no changes to the 2D Graphics properties for the
NAsset_Cov FOM, by default both static and animation graphics display in the
visualization windows. Whenever an assigned asset passes through the
coverage area it leaves a footprint that indicates where the quality criteria (at
least two assets) was met at a specific point in time.
In Figure 1-12, the pink shading (the static graphics) show the sum of what
has been covered by at least two assets at some time during the entire coverage
interval. The purple shading (animation graphics) shows how coverage is
accumulated. If you animate the scenario, the animation graphics will
accumulate as additional areas of the earth are covered by at least two assets
over time until they match the total static coverage for the coverage interval.
Since the static coverage is the sum of the accumulated coverage it will
eventually equal or add up to the static graphics.
FIGURE 1-12.
2D View: NAsset FOM up to current coverage
Contour Graphics
You can specify how levels of coverage quality display in both the 2D and 3D
Graphics windows using contours graphics. Contour levels represent the
gradations in coverage quality and can be displayed for both static and
animation values of the figure of merit.
Before you display contour graphics, lets turn off the display of the Animation
graphics for NAsset_Cov.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Return to NAsset_Covs ( ) properties ( ).

Disable the Show option for Animation Graphics.
Click Apply.
Static Contours
Static Contour levels display coverage data for all points based on evaluation
over the entire coverage interval (in this case the analysis period).
2. Select the 2D Graphics - Contours page.
3. Set the following options:
TABLE 1-9. NAsset
FOM static contour display options
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Static
Show
On
Style
Smooth Fill
4. Click the Remove All button in the Level Attributes page.

5. Enter the following values in the Level Adding area:
TABLE 1-10. NAsset
FOM static contour level adding values
OPTION
VALUE
Add Method
Start, Stop, Step
Start
Stop
Step
6. Click Add Levels.

7. Enter the following values in the Level Attributes area:
TABLE 1-11. NAsset
FIELD
VALUE
Color Method
Color Ramp
Start Color
Red
End Color
Blue
8. Click Apply.
9. Click the Legend... button.
contour graphics level attribute values
FIGURE 1-13.
Static contours legend for NAsset coverage
The map graphics will be colored according to the number of available assets
as outlined in the static contours legend.
GET A BETTER LOOK

1. Reset ( ) the animation to refresh the visualization windows.
FIGURE 1-14.
2D View: NAsset FOM static contours display
FIGURE 1-15.
3D View: NAsset FOM static contours display
Dynamic Contours
The static contour display tells you where you have access to at least one (red),
two (green), or three (blue) assets at some point during the entire coverage
interval. Lets take contours a step further. Lets display contours that will tell
you how many assets you have access to based on the scenario time.
TABLE 1-12. NAsset
FOM graphics attributes display options
TYPE
OPTION
VALUE
Static Graphics
Show
Off
Animation Graphics
Show
On
Accumulation
Current Time
4. Click Apply.
TABLE 1-13. NAsset
FOM display clean up options
TYPE
OPTION
Type
Static
Style
Block Fill
Show
Off

TABLE 1-14. NAsset
TYPE
OPTION
Type
Animation
Show
On
Use Static Contours
On
Enabling the Use Static Contours option will ensure that the same contour levels
and colors are used for both static and animation graphics.
8. Click Apply.
GET A BETTER LOOK

As your scenario animates areas in the coverage grid that have access to all
three assets will be blue, the areas with double coverage will be green, and
those with single coverage will be red.
FIGURE 1-16.
2D View: NAsset dynamic contours display
Contour graphics have shown you that you do, in fact, have coverage from
one, two, and even three assets at various times throughout your coverage
analysis, but how long do you have that coverage, and exactly where? You can use
yet another FOM to help answer that very question.
CLEAN UP
Before you create another FOM, turn the NAsset_Cov FOM graphics off, so
that they dont interfere with the coverage quality display of the new FOM.
TABLE 1-15. NAsset
TYPE
OPTION
VALUE
Animation Graphics
Show
Off
Static Graphics
Show
Off

TABLE 1-16. NAsset
FOM contours display clean up options
TYPE
OPTION
Static Contours
Show
Off
Animation Graphics
Show
Off
6. Click OK.
7. Close the contours legend window.
Measure Coverage Time

Coverage Time measures the amount of time during which grid points are
covered. Because Coverage Time does not have a dynamic definition, no timedependent information is computed.
1. Attach a third Figure of Merit ( ) to Stereo_Cov ( ) using the Object
Browser.
2. Rename the figure of merit Cov_Time.
3. Open Cov_Times ( ) properties ( ).
TABLE 1-17. Cov
Time FOM definition options
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Coverage Time
Compute
Total Time Above
Min Assets
The Total Time Above option computes the amount of time (over the entire
coverage interval) during which a point is covered by the minimum number of
assets specified.
6. Click Apply.
GET A BETTER LOOK

The shaded points on the 2D Graphics window are those that have some
amount of time when they are covered by two assets simultaneously.

FIGURE 1-17.
2D View: Cov Time FOM graphics display
REPORT COVERAGE TIME

The FOM display shows that you have at least two assets viewing the globe
over the entire coverage interval. But what are the maximum, minimum, and
average values over the entire coverage region?
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Figure of Merit
Cov_Time
Show Reports
On
Show Graphs
Off
Style
Grid Stats
Generate as
Report/Graph
The Grid Stats report summarizes the minimum, maximum and average static
value for the figure of merit over the entire grid. The values in the Grid Stats
report are a great way to determine the start and stop values to specify when
enabling graphics contours.
What are the minimum, maximum, and average values for the figure of
merit?
4. Note these values to help you define your contour levels.

6. Leave the Grid Stats report open.
COVERAGE TIME CONTOURS

Now that you have the values for your coverage time, you can use them to set
the intervals for FOM contour graphics.
1. Return to Cov_Times ( ) properties ( ).
3. Set the following display options:
TABLE 1-19. Cov
Time FOM static contour display options
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Static
Show
On
Style
Smooth Fill

5. Set the following values in the Level Adding area:
TABLE 1-20. Cov
Time FOM static contour level adding values
FIELD
VALUE
Add Method
Start, Stop, Step
Start
200 sec
Stop
<Nearest 100 above max found in Grid Stats

report>
Step
200 sec

TABLE 1-21. Cov
Time FOM contour level attribute values
FIELD
VALUE
Color Method
Color Ramp
Start Color
Red
End Color
Blue
8. Click Apply.
CHANGE THE LEGEND LAYOUT

Lets change the legend so that it displays in the 2D Graphics window instead
of in a separate window as before.
1. Click the Legend... button.
2. Click the Layout... button.
3. Enter the following values in the Figure of Merit Legend Layout.
TABLE 1-22. Contour
legend layout options
CATEGORY
OPTION
VALUE
2D Graphics Window
Show At Pixel Location
On
Text Options
Number of Decimal Digits
Color Square Width
50
Color Square Height
20
Range Color Options

5. With the Figure of Merit Legend Layout dialog open, click the location where
youd like to position the upper left corner of the legend in the
2D Graphics window.
6. When you finish, click OK to dismiss the Figure of Merit Legend Layout
dialog.
7. Close the floating Legend window.
8. Click OK to dismiss Cov_Times ( ) properties ( ).
9. Close the Grid Stats report.
GET A BETTER LOOK


FIGURE 1-18.
2D View: Cov Time FOM static contour display with legend
The legend is now embedded in the 2D map display for easy reference. The
map graphics will be colored according to the length of time that assets are
available as outlined in the static contours legend.
4. Mouse around to see how the contours cover the globe.
FIGURE 1-19.
3D View: Cov Time FOM static contour display with legend
Report Coverage Time By Grid Point

The contours display provides a general overview of when you have coverage
by two or more assets for how long, and the animation time can serve as a
reference for when you the extended periods of coverage occur. To get a
more thorough outline of the exact length of time each point in the grid is
covered by two or more assets, lets create a report.
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Figure of Merit
Cov_Time
Show Reports
On
Show Graphs
Off
Style
Value By Grid Point
Generate as
Report/Graph
The Value by Grid Point data provider returns a detailed list which includes the
geodetic coordinates of each point in the grid, and the length of time that
each point is covered by at least two assets (the minimum assets specified in
the FOM definition) while in direct sunlight (the constraint imposed on the
grid points using the Const_Template facility object).
Are there any grid points in the southern hemisphere that have values?
Which latitude/longitude has the highest value (most time covered)?
4. When you finish, close the Value By Grid Point report.
Save Your Work

How Will I Determine the

Accuracy of My In-Flight
Navigation Solution?
EXERCISE 2
In this exercise, you will take the values of Coverage Definition Objects and Figures of
Merit, and apply those directly to an object rather than an area. Upon completion, you will
be able to:
Compute coverage for a region at an altitude

Analyze Dilution of Precision (DOP) for an area
Analyze Dilution of Precision (DOP) for an object
Deactivate an asset assigned in a coverage calculation
How Will I Determine the Accuracy of My In-Flight Navigation Solution?
Problem Statement
The FAA is testing a new experimental radar system which is designed to
provide highly accurate location of aircraft as they fly through United States
airspace. In order to test the quality of this new system, you will be making a
test flight from which you will be monitoring your aircraft's location via GPS,
and also be tracked by the new radar system. The GPS determined location
information will be compared to the radar tracking information to determine
the fidelity of the new radar system. In order to accurately test the radar
system, you need to know how accurate you can expect the GPS position
information to be over the aircraft route.
BREAK IT DOWN
You have some information that may be helpful. Here is what you know:
A positional DOP value of less than 3.0 will yield results good enough to
use as a reference for your radar.

You must measure GPS dilution of precision (DOP) over the continental
United States at the altitude of your flight.
You must also measure the GPS dilution of precision over the path of a
test flight, which will fly from Long Beach to Philadelphia at an altitude of
10,000 feet.
SOLUTION
Build a scenario that will examine DOP over a large area (the entire airspace
of the continental United States) to determine if there are any areas at any
times which would provide a DOP value so unacceptable that you would not
be able to use your GPS-reported position to provide a meaningful baseline
for a comparison of the radar system's tracking data. Then examine the DOP
values for a specific aircraft route as well.
Create a Scenario
First, you need to define the times during which the conditions that you set
for your world, and the objects in your world, will be relevant. Since you are
not concerned with examining the DOP over US airspace on a specific day at
a specific time, but instead just doing some general analysis, you can accept
the STK default twenty-four (24) hour time period for this example.
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 2
HOW WILL I DETERMINE THE ACCURACY OF MY IN-FLIGHT NAVIGATION SOLUTION?

TABLE 2-1. New
OPTION
VALUE
Name
Navigation
Description
How will I determine the GPS DOP of my in-flight navigation

solution?
Location
Analysis Period
3. Click OK.
4. Save ( ) the scenario ( ). Ensure your scenario is being saved to the
proper location. (C:\Documents and Settings\Student\My
Documents\STK 9\Navigation.
Narrow Your Focus

Take a look back at Break it Down on page 2-2. You are flying across the
continental United States from Long Beach, California to Philadelphia, PA.
CLEAN UP
Before you begin to visually define your analysis area, lets remove all the stuff
that you dont want cluttering up the 2D Graphics window.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Disable the Image option in the Background area.
Click OK.
Exercise 2 | Page 3
FIGURE 2-1.
2D View:2D Map with only borders and outlines
DEFINE THE ANALYSIS AREA

Lets outline the United States on the map so that you can more easily identify
and focus on that area of the map.
2. Use the Select Countries And US States ( ) method to insert an area target
object ( ) representing the continental United States.
4. Select the United_States.
5. Ensure the Primary Areas Only option is selected.
6. Click Insert.
7. Click Close to dismiss the area target introduction dialog.
Selecting Primary Areas Only during the creation process, will ensure
that only the continental US is included. If you had selected All Areas,
an area target representing each one of the Hawaiian islands, Alaska,
etc. would have been imported.
8. Close the Insert STK Object Tool.
GET A BETTER LOOK

2. Zoom In ( ) around the continental United States ( ).
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 4
The United States should now be clearly outlined in the 2D and 3D Graphics
windows.
FIGURE 2-2.
2D View: Area target of the continental US
REMOVE THE AREA TARGET LABEL

You dont really need to label the area target or mark the center point of the
continental United States for your analysis. Lets remove the area target
marker from United_States.
1. Open United_Statess ( ) properties ( ).
TABLE 2-2. United_States
area target 2D display properties
OPTION
VALUE
Off
Show Label
Off
Show Centroid
Off
4. Click OK.
Exercise 2 | Page 5
Model Ground Locations

Take a look back at the list you made in Break it Down on page 2-2.
According to what you know you need to model two locations--the
origination and destination locations of your aircraft.
See if you can find a database entry for Philadelphia and Long Beach, and use
them to model STK facility objects representing the city from which your
aircraft will depart (Long Beach) and the aircraft's destination location
(Philadelphia).
2. Use the Select From City Database method to insert two separate facility
objects ( ) representing the following cities:
Long Beach, California
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania
3. When you finish, close the City Database Search tool.

Your departure and destination locations should now be clearly visible on the
map in the 2D Graphics window.
FIGURE 2-3.
2D View: Philadelphia and Long Beach on the map

Hows that look in 3D?
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 6
2. Reposition the view so that United_States ( ) is the focal point in the

3D Graphics window.
When you set an area target as the focal point in the 3D Graphics window, STK
sets the centroid of the area target as the focal point. You will have to zoom
out to see the entire area target.
3. Use the mouse to zoom out until you can see the entire continental United
States.
FIGURE 2-4.
3D View: Philadelphia and Long Beach on the globe
Now, both of your visualization windows are focused on your defined area of
interest.
Model an Aircraft
Take a look back at Break it Down on page 2-2. You are flying across the
continental United States. Your flight takes off from Long Beach and flies to
Philadelphia. You have modeled these two cities and now you can model your
aircraft and its route.
2. Use the Define Properties ( ) method to insert a new aircraft ( ).
3. Rename it Test_Flight.
DEFINE TEST FLIGHTS ROUTE

Now you can model Test_Flights flight from Long Beach to Philadelphia.
Exercise 2 | Page 7
1. Bring the new aircrafts properties ( ) to the front.

2. Ensure that the Basic - Route page is selected.
3. With the Basic - Route page open, click Long Beach on the map in the
2D Graphics window.
4. Click Philadelphia on the map in the 2D Graphics window.
The default altitude of 3.048 km equals 10,000 ft.
6. Click OK.
GET A BETTER LOOK

1. Position the 2D and 3D Graphics windows so that you can clearly see them
both.
4. Reset ( ) the animation when done.
You can watch Test_Flight fly its route equally well in either 2D or 3D.
FIGURE 2-5.
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 8
2D View: Test Flights route
FIGURE 2-6.
3D View: Test Flights route

You also need to model the GPS satellite constellation.
2. Use the Load GPS Constellation ( ) method to insert a constellation object
containing all of the satellites that make up the GPS network and insert
those objects into the active scenario.
Get a Better Look

2. Click the Home View button ( ) on the 3D Graphics toolbar to restore the
default Earth-centered view.
3. Use the mouse to zoom out until you can see the satellites orbit around
the globe.
Exercise 2 | Page 9
FIGURE 2-7.
3D View: GPS satellite ground tracks
By default, the GPS Constellation Orbit tracks are disabled.
How Will I Measure DOP?

You need to assess the accuracy with which you will be able to determine your
current position while in route from Long Beach to Philadelphia. You want to
assess coverage over, or your ability to see, the appropriate number of
defined assets throughout the duration of Test_Flights flight.
To do this you will assess coverage of the continental United States based on
the boundaries of the area target that is being used to outline that area. You
will need to specify the region being examined (United_States), how each grid
point should be treated, and what assets will be used to examine the region
(GPSConstellation).
Coverage Definition
The first thing you need to do is define the coverage area. Instead of entering
the latitude and longitude bounds of the coverage region, you can have STK
use the boundaries of your area target to define the boundaries of the
coverage definition. Lets do that now.
1. Insert a coverage definition object ( ) named ContUS_Cov into the
scenario ( ) using the Object Catalog.
2. Open ContUS_Cov's ( ) properties ( ). The Basic - Grid page should

3. Change the Grid Area of Interest to Custom Regions.
4. Click the Select Regions button.
5. Select United_States in the Area Targets list.
6. Move ( ) United_States to the Selected Regions list.
8. Change the Point Granularity to Lat/Lon 1.5 deg.
9. Click Apply.
GET A BETTER LOOK

1. Bring the 2D and/or 3D Graphics window to the front.
FIGURE 2-8.
2D View: Coverage grid over continental United States
The coverage grid is limited to the boundaries of the United_States area target.
DEFINE THE ALTITUDE OF THE GRID POINTS

For your analysis, you want to assess the quality of the navigation solution for
an airborne vehicle (Test_Flight) within the continental United States. That
means the points to which you want to calculate access will not be on the
surface of the Earth. Currently, the coverage grid is on the surface of the
Earth. How will you compute coverage to grid points at the same altitude as
Test_Flight?
You can associate the properties and constraints of an airborne vehicle, such
as Test_Flight, with points in the grid just as you would if you wanted to
associate the properties and impose the constraints of a ground-based object,
such as a facility, to points on the surface of the Earth. You can associate
Test_Flight with the coverage grid, and have points in the grid defined
according to Test_Flights altitude.
The altitude entered is the altitude used for the coverage definition grid
points, not the altitude of the template object. Using a template object, would
apply any constraints or properties, excluding positional information to each
grid point. Since Test_Flight has no constraints, we do not need to use this
option.
ASSIGN ASSETS
The GPS satellites are the assets with which you want to assess the quality of
your coverage. Lets assign them now.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select the GPSConstellation ( ) constellation.
Click Assign.
Click Apply.
DONT CALCULATE ACCESS TIL I SAY

In an effort to manage your resources more efficiently, lets not tie up STK
recomputing access automatically every time you make a change. Lets turn
that off. Well tell STK when to compute accesses.
1. Select the Basic - Advanced page.
2. Disable the Automatically Recompute Accesses option.
3. Click OK.
Compute Coverage!
Now that the coverage definition object is defined, you can compute access to
points in the grid. Lets do that now.
2. Right-click ContUS_Cov ( ) in the Object Browser.
3. Select Coverage Definition from the context menu.
4. Select Compute Accesses.

FIGURE 2-9.
2D View: Progress of coverage computations over ContUS
Dilution of Precision
Dilution of Precision (DOP) measures the relative degradation or reduction in
the certainty of a navigation solution based on one-way range measurements
from a set of transmitters. Most often, the transmitters are those on board
Global Positioning System (GPS) satellites. If four or more of these satellites are
in view of a ground receiver, a navigation solution consisting of the position
of the receiver and the offset between the receiver clock and the GPS clock
can be computed.
The DOP figure of merit measures the effects of the number of
measurements and the geometry of the transmitters on the uncertainty in the
navigation solution. The reported value can be multiplied by the uncertainty
in the range measurements (assumed to be the same for all transmitters) to
provide the uncertainty in the navigation solution.
When using Dilution of Precision to measure the quality of coverage, you need to
specify:
1. the specific DOP to be measured (Method)
2. the maximum number of assets that can be used to produce navigation
solutions (Type)
3. the method for computing a static DOP value over the entire coverage
interval (Compute)
4. the Time Step to be used when computing the static value of DOP across
the coverage interval
The dynamic definition of dilution of precision is specified through items 1
and 2 and computes the corresponding value for each grid point at the
current time. The static definition of dilution of precision is specified through
items 3 and 4 and is computed via sampling of the dynamic definition.
METHOD
Dilution of precision can be calculated in a number of ways, depending on
your task. The methods available to you are discussed in the following table.
TABLE 2-3. DOP
METHOD
Methods
DESCRIPTION
Measures the dilution of precision for the entire

GDOP (Geometric Dilution navigation solution. GDOP combines the dilution
of Precision)
of precision of the position and clock-related
components of the navigation solution
PDOP/PDOP(3)* (Position
Dilution of Precision)
Measures only the dilution of precision associated

with the positional portion of the navigation
solution
HDOP/HDOP(3)*
(Horizontal Dilution of
Precision)
Measures the dilution of precision for the

horizontal (latitude/longitude) components of the
positional portion of the navigation solution
VDOP/VDOP(3)* (Vertical
Dilution of Precision)
Measures the dilution of precision for the vertical

(altitude) components of the positional portion of
the navigation solution
TDOP (Time Dilution of

Precision)
Measures the dilution of precision of the time

portion of the navigation solution
*If PDOP(3), HDOP(3), or VDOP(3) is selected, the DOP value is

computed even if only three (3) navigation sources are available. This is done
by ignoring the clock component of the navigation solution. If four (4) or
more sources are available, the clock component is included.
The DOP method you choose affects the dynamic and static DOP
definition of the figure of merit.
TYPE
Although four satellites are needed for the navigation solution, additional
satellites can be used to improve the accuracy of the solution. Options in the
Type field are discussed in the following table.
TABLE 2-4. Type
options
OPTION
VALUE
Over Determined
Computes the DOP based on all of the currently available

assets.
Best Four
Computes the DOP based on the set of four satellites that

yields the minimum GDOP.
Best N
Computes the navigation accuracy based on the specified

number of satellites that yields the minimum GDOP. If you
select this method, you also need to specify a value for Best
N
The DOP type you choose affects the dynamic and static DOP definition
of the figure of merit.
COMPUTE
You also need to set the method for computing the static definition for
dilution of precision using the options in the Compute field. Options are
discussed in the following table.
The reported values depend on the specific DOP selected and the
allowed number of assets.
TABLE 2-5. Compute
options for dilution of precision FOM
OPTION
DESCRIPTION
Minimum
Minimum DOP at each point over the entire coverage interval
Maximum
Maximum DOP at each point over the entire coverage interval
Average
Average DOP at each point over the entire coverage interval
% Below
The value of the DOP is less than the computed value X% of the
time where X is a Percent Level that you specify
This option only affects the static definition of the figure of merit.
TIME STEP
In the Time Step field, enter the value to be used during the sampling of the
dynamic definition for use in the static definition.
Define the Quality of Coverage

You have defined the boundaries of the coverage area, set the resolution or
location of the grid points used to fill the bounded area, specified an altitude
for the grid, assigned assets, and adjusted the display of coverage graphics.
Now, its time to determine the quality of that coverage.
1. Attach a Figure of Merit ( ) to ContUS_Cov ( ).
2. Rename the figure of merit PDOP.
3. Open PDOPs ( ) properties ( ). The Basic - Definition page should
TABLE 2-6. PDOP
figure of merit definition properties
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Compute
Maximum
Method
PDOP
Type
Over Determined
4. Click OK.
KEEP IT CLEAN
Lastly, turn off the display of the coverage grid so that the visualization
windows dont get cluttered. You dont need to know where every point is, do
you?
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open ContUS_Covs ( ) properties ( ).

Disable the Show Points option.
Click OK.
The coverage grid should be removed from the visualization windows and
you should, again, have a clear view of Test_Flights route.
Grid Stats Over Time

The Grid Stats Over Time report summarizes the minimum, maximum and
average of the figure of merit's dynamic value over the entire grid as a
function of time.
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Figure of Merit
CoverageDefinition/ContUS_Cov/PDOP
Show Reports
On
Show Graphs
Off
Style
Generate as
Report/Graph
In this lesson, a value of 1 is our best value and a value over 3 is considered
unacceptable. Scroll through the report and note the minimum and maximum
values. Remember, you can save the report as an Excel spreadsheet and sort
the column to facilitate finding the minimum and maximum values.
4. Leave the Grid Stats Over Time report open.
Dynamic Contours
Lets display the quality of coverage based on the scenario time using dynamic
contours.
1. Return to PDOPs ( ) properties ( ).
TABLE 2-8. PDOP
TYPE
OPTION
VALUE
Static Graphics
Show
Off
Animation Graphics
Show
On
Accumulation
Current Time
3. Click Apply.
TABLE 2-9. PDOP
FOM dynamic contour display options
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Animation
Show
On
Style
Block Fill

TABLE 2-10. PDOP
FOM dynamic contour level adding values
OPTION
VALUE
Add Method
Start, Stop, Step
Start
Stop
Integer above maximum grid stats report value
Step
0.2

TABLE 2-11. PDOP
FIELD
VALUE
Color Method
Color Ramp
Start Color
Blue
End Color
Red
9. Click Apply.
FOM dynamic contour graphics level attribute values
GET A BETTER LOOK

Youve set your color ramp such that blue will represent a low DOP
(preferred) and red will represent a high DOP. Lets see what DOP values
look like over the continental United States.
You may occasionally see holes in your coverage. This indicates a
PDOP of less than one (1). While a PDOP of one (1) is the best you can
achieve on the ground, at altitude it is possible to have a PDOP of less
than one.
FIGURE 2-10.
2D View: Dynamic contours for positional DOP
CLEAN UP
First, turn the PDOP FOM graphics off, so that they dont interfere with the
display of a new FOM.
1. Return to PDOPs ( ) properties ( ).
TABLE 2-12. PDOP
ATTRIBUTE
OPTION
VALUE
Static Graphics
Show
Off
Animation Graphics
Show
Off
3. Click OK.
Single Object Coverage

Now, you need perform a single object coverage on your test flight to
determine the PDOP value along the actual path from Long Beach to
Philadelphia. To evaluate the quality of coverage to a single object in STK,
you can use the Coverage tool. This tool is available for all types of vehicles,
facilities, targets and sensors. Use the single-object coverage method to
determine coverage if you are interested in coverage of a small number of
well-defined locations or along the trajectory of a moving object.
The main differences between normal and single-object coverage are:
Single-object coverage can be used to analyze objects with time-dependent
positions.
You can only analyze one figure of merit at a time using single-object
coverage.
To determine the accuracy of the GPS position throughout Test_Flights flight,
you need to assign the GPS satellites as assets for that object. To assess the
quality of that coverage, in this instance, you would choose a dilution of
precision (DOP) figure of merit type, then review the value of the DOP as
Test_Flight flies from Long Beach to Philadelphia.
ASSIGN ASSETS TO A SINGLE OBJECT

To determine coverage for a single object, you must assign one or several
assets to be used in coverage computations. For single-object coverage, it is
important to have a clear understanding of the asset time periods. The time
period for the coverage analysis is constructed as the inter of the reference
object time period and the asset time period. Assets are used to calculate
whether coverage to the object can be achieved. If you define a figure of merit
for the coverage, coverage to the object from the assets is measured by the
figure of merit values.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Test_Flight ( ) in the Object Browser.

Open the Coverage Tool ( ).
Select GPSConstellation from the Assets list.
Click the Compute button.
DEFINE A SINGLE OBJECT FIGURE OF MERIT

Position Dilution of Precision (PDOP) is a DOP method that measures only
the DOP associated with the positional portion of the navigation solution. In
your case, the portion you are interested in is the flight path for Test_Flight.
1. Click the Define... button in the Figure of Merit section.
TABLE 2-13. PDOP
FOM properties for Test Flight
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Compute
Maximum
Method
PDOP
Type
Over Determined
Time Step
60 sec
3. Click OK to return to the Coverage Tool ( ).
REPORT PDOP
The FOM Value report shows the PDOP value in meters at one minute
intervals for the entire coverage interval. Create that now.
1. Click the FOM Value... button in the Reports section.
Does the data reflect what you saw when you computed PDOP over
the continental US airspace?
Is it better? worse?
2. Close the FOM Value report window.
GRAPH PDOP
You can also graph the FOM value over time.
1. Click the FOM Value... button in the Graphs section.
The graph shows how Test_Flights dilution of precision changes as it travels.
FIGURE 2-11.
Graph: Test Flights navigational accuracy over time
Your graph may differ depending on the time of analysis used.
2. Note the minimum and maximum FOM values.

3. Close the FOM Value graph window.
Single Object Contour Graphics

Now, lets visualize the quality of coverage as Test_Flight flies from Long
Beach to Philadelphia.
1. Return to the Coverage Tool ( ).
2. Click the Contours... button in the Graphics area.
TABLE 2-14. PDOP
static contour display options
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Static
Show
On

TABLE 2-15. PDOP
static contour level adding values
OPTION
VALUE
Add Method
Start, Stop, Step
Start
Integer below minimum FOM graph value
Stop
Integer above maximum FOM graph value
Step
0.2
5. Click Add.
TABLE 2-16. PDOP
static contour graphics level attribute values
FIELD
VALUE
Color Method
Color Ramp
Start Color
Blue
End Color
Red
7. Click OK to return to the Coverage Tool ( ).

8. Enable the Save Configuration option.
The Save Configuration will save the single-object coverage definitions when the
scenario is saved to disk, if a compute has been done. Otherwise, coverage
data for individual objects is lost when the scenario is closed.
GET A BETTER LOOK

Test_Flights route is colored to reflect the navigational accuracy at that point
in his flight.
As Test_Flight travels along its path his label will also reflect the navigational
accuracy at that point in time.
FIGURE 2-12.
2D View: Contour graphics for Test Flights PDOP

2. Reposition the view so that Test_Flight ( ) is the focal point in the
3D Graphics window.
FIGURE 2-13.
Test_Flights object label and flight path also change color based on the PDOP
values in 3D.
De-Assign Assets
Uh oh! You just received a Notice of Advisory to Navstar Users (NANU) which
states that GPS_BIIA_23 has been taken offline for some maintenance work.
How will that impact your PDOP values? Will you have to recreate your STK
scenario? Fortunately, coverage objects allow you to keep an asset assigned
but switch its status to inactive. This will essentially remove it from
calculations. With GPS_14_SVN41 no longer in the picture, will you still
meet your design criteria of never exceeding a PDOP value of three (3)?
RECOMPUTE PDOP FOR TEST FLIGHT

Since youre already looking at the aircrafts route, lets start with recomputing
that.
1. Return to the Coverage Tool ( ).
2. Click the expand button ( ) beside GPSConstellation to unnest the
satellites.
3. Select gps_23_svn60 from the list.
4. Select Inactive from the status drop-down menu below the Assets list.
5. Click the Compute button.
6. Click the FOM value... button in the Graphs section.
FIGURE 2-14.
Do you still meet your PDOP requirements for this flight?
EXCLUDE BIIRM
Your maximum PDOP has not decreased though some of your values might
have changed slightly. This is because GPS is such a robust constellation. In
order to receive a noticeable increase in PDOP values, we will exclude several
GPS satellites from our analysis.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bring the Coverage Tool ( ) to the front.

Click the expand button ( ) beside GPSConstellation.
Select all individually GPS satellites one through ten (1-10) from the list.
Select Inactive from the status drop-down menu below the Assets list for
each.
6. Bring the FOM Value graph to the front.
7. Refresh your graph.
FIGURE 2-15.
Your values might be different due to different scenario times.
Did your maximum PDOP values increase noticeably?

Do you still meet your PDOP requirements for this flight?
If your FOM values have changed significantly, you may need to adjust your
FOM contour values. Refer back to Single Object Contour Graphics on
page 2-22 for instructions on how to do this.
8. Close the FOM Value graph.
9. Click OK to close to the Coverage Tool ( ).
RECOMPUTE PDOP FOR THE CONTINENTAL US

You have re-examined your PDOP requirements for this flight, but what
about the rest of the continental United States?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open ContUS_Covs ( ) properties ( ).

Click the expand button ( ) beside GPSConstellation.
Select GPS satellites one through ten (1-10) from the list.
Select Inactive from the status drop-down menu beside the Assets list.
Click OK.
RECOMPUTE COVERAGE
Earlier you turned off the option to automatically recompute accesses, so you
will have to recompute access to ensure that the changes that youve made to
your assigned assets will be reflected in your analysis.
1. Right-click ContUS_Cov ( ) in the Object Browser.
2. Select Compute Accesses from the CoverageDefinition tools menu.
REPORT GRID STATS OVER TIME

Lets run a new Grid Stats Over Time report and see if the minimum and
maximum static values for the figure of merit over the entire grid are still
within your target range (PDOP < 3).
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Figure of Merit
PDOP
Show Reports
On
Show Graphs
Off
Style
Generate as
Report/Graph
Did your maximum PDOP values increase noticeably?
Does the maximum static value for the figure of merit exceed three (3)
over some portion of the continental United States?
5. Right-click the first time that the PDOP maximum exceeds three (3) in
the Grid Stats Over Time report.
6. Select Time --> Set Animation Time from the context menu.
7. Close the Report & Graph Manager.
ADJUST THE DISPLAY OF CONTOURS

Lets turn on the FOM contours so that you can see where or if the PDOP
values exceed three (3) because you wont want to fly your aircraft in that area.
1. Open PDOPs ( ) properties ( ).
TABLE 2-18. PDOP
TYPE
OPTION
VALUE
Static Graphics
Show
Off
Animation Graphics
Show
On
Accumulation
Current Time
3. Click Apply.
TABLE 2-19. PDOP
FOM dynamic contour display options
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Animation
Show
On
Style
Block Fill
If your FOM values have changed significantly since setting the satellite to
inactive, you may need to adjust your FOM contour values. Based on your
grid report, you may adjust your values as needed.
5. Click OK.
GET A BETTER LOOK

Are there areas along Test_Flights path where the maximum PDOP is
exceeded?
If so, where? when?

2. Reposition the view so that United_States ( ) is the focal point in the
3D Graphics window.
3. Use the mouse to zoom out until you can see the entire continental
United States.
FIGURE 2-16.
When You Finish

1. Close the Grid Stats Over Time report.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Return to the Report & Graph Manager ( ).

Save ( ) your work.
Leave STK ( ) open.
How Can I Analyze the

Quality of My Link Budgets?
EXERCISE 3
In this exercise you will explore some basic STK communications analysis capabilities.
You will set up transmitters and receivers and use these objects in link budget
calculations. Upon completion of this exercise you will be able to:
Model transmitters and receivers in STK.

Compute a simple and a detailed link budget.
Take atmospheric effects into account when computing a link budget.
Constrain a link budget.
View communication contours in the 2D and 3D Graphics windows.
How Can I Analyze the Quality of My Link Budgets?
Problem Statement
After the Hayman fire of 2002, you were assigned to analyze current and
future methods of combatting forest fires in the area. Youve already modeled
and analyzed the REMSAT communications flow. Youve also experimented
with the idea of adding an aircraft that can make aerial water drops on the
burn area to assist crews on the ground and greatly enhance the timeliness
and effectiveness of your firefighting efforts.
Your analysis thus far has been somewhat favorable, but you feel that it is
necessary to do a more thorough analysis of the link between a LEO
Globalstar satellite and a communication node as well as the link budget
between the Anik F2 geostationary satellite and the command center in Castle
Rock (Figure 3-1), which youve yet to examine.
BREAK IT DOWN
Anik F2 downlinks via a 2 m parabolic dish at a frequency of 12 GHz with
a data rate of 16 Mbps and a transmit power of 10 dBW.

The headquarters at Castle Rock is equipped with a 3.7 meter receive dish.
The downlink frequency for Globalstar is 16 MHz (HF) with an EIRP of 15
dBW.
SOLUTION
Build a scenario that allows you to model and analyze the communication link
budgets between the Anik F2 satellite and Castle Rock as well as a LEO
Globalstar satellite and one of the existing communications nodes as outlined
in Figure 3-1.
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 2
HOW CAN I ANALYZE THE QUALITY OF MY LINK BUDGETS?
FIGURE 3-1.
REMSAT firefighting system

previously created scenario was used to analyze the communications used in
the REMSAT system over the same time-period in the same area. This
scenario also models and considers the mountainous terrain of the burn area
that falls within Douglas county. Use that model as your base.
2. Click the Open a Scenario.
3. Locate the REMSAT_CrewRelay scenario that you saved earlier (C:\My
4. Select REMSAT_CrewRelay.sc.
Save that scenario with a different name to preserve the integrity of the
previously developed analysis
Exercise 3 | Page 3
scenario file (*.sc) REMSAT_Comm.

1. Open REMSAT_Comms ( ) properties ( ).
3. Change the description so that it says something like, How can I analyze the
quality of my link budgets for two different communications links?.
4. Click OK.
STK/Communications
STK/Communications allows you to define and analyze detailed
communications systems. You can incorporate detailed rain models,
atmospheric losses, and RF interference sources in their analyses and generate
detailed link budget reports and graphs.
Communications modeling in STK includes:
Modeling communications links under dynamic conditions.
Performing communications link budget analysis.
Presenting parameters, analysis, link behavior, and antenna patterns
graphically in 2D and when possible 3D.

Dynamically animating link parameter behavior.
Determining objects geometric or refractive/radio line-of-sight visibility.
Performing system level engineering.
These capabilities can be expanded upon by integrating STK/Communications
with commercially available Network Modeling and Simulation applications.
Such integrations allow for communications analysis down to the protocol
layer to be fused into an entire mission construct modeled in STK. You can
model and assess network-protocol-level aspects such as:
Buffering
Routing
Rate control
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 4
Quality-of-service frameworks
Model Anik
Lets add the geostationary satellite Anik F2 into your scenario.
1. Open the Insert STK Object tool ( ) if it is not already.
2. Use the Select from Satellite Database method to insert a satellite representing
Anik F2.
3. Turn on the Common Name search criteria.
4. Search for Anik.
5. Select Anik_F2.
ANIK TRANSMITTER
You need to model a transmitter on Anik so that it can downlink to your
headquarters in Castle Rock. A transmitter (like a sensor, receiver, and/or
radar) will always be the child of some host or parent object. It can not be
added at the scenario level, and will not be available in the Object Catalog unless
an appropriate host is selected in the Object Browser. In this case, Anik F2 will
be the host, or parent for the transmitter object.
1. Select ANIK_F2_28378 ( ) in the Object Browser.
2. Attach a Transmitter ( ) using the Object Catalog.
3. Rename the transmitter DL_To_HQ.
STK/Communications makes available a variety of models for transmitters. Take
a look at Table 3-1. Transmitter Types in STK below.
TABLE 3-1. Transmitter
Types in STK
RECEIVER TYPE
DEFINITION
Simple Source Transmitter
User-definable specs (frequency, EIRP, and data

rate), polarization, post-transmit gains and losses,
and modulation.
Medium Source Transmitter
User-definable specs (frequency, gain, power, data

rate), polarization, post-transmit gains and losses,
and modulation.
Exercise 3 | Page 5
Types in STK
RECEIVER TYPE
DEFINITION
Complex Source Transmitter
User-definable specs (frequency, power, data rate,

antenna selection and configuration), polarization,
post-transmit gains and losses, and modulation.
Multibeam Source Transmitter
User-definable specs (selection and configuration

of multiple antenna beams, data rate), posttransmit gains and losses, and modulation.
Laser Source Transmitter
Options available for Medium Source Transmitter

model, plus transmitter optics parameters.
Plug-in Source Transmitter
Source transmitter defined in user-supplied script.
Simple Re-transmitter
User-definable specs (saturation flux density,

saturated EIRP), polarization, post-transmit gains
and losses, and backoff and frequency transfer
functions.
Medium Re-transmitter
User-definable specs (saturation flux density, gain,

saturated output power), polarization, posttransmit gains and losses, and backoff and
frequency transfer functions.
Complex Re-transmitter
User-definable specs (saturation flux density,

saturated output power, antenna selection and
configuration), polarization, post-transmit gains
and losses, and back-off and frequency transfer
functions.
DEFINE THE TRANSMITTER

The transmitter that you intend to use to downlink to headquarters has a very
specific and complex design. The downlink frequency for Anik F2 is 12 GHz
with a data rate of 16 Mbps and transmit power of 10 dBW. Lets model that
now.
1. Open DL_To_HQs ( ) properties ( ).
3. Set the following transmitter definition properties:
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 6
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Complex Transmitter Model
OPTION
VALUE
Frequency
12 GHz
Power
10 dBW
4. Click the Antenna... tab.

5. Ensure that the Model Specs tab is selected.
6. Set the following Antenna definition options:
antenna definition properties
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Parabolic
Use Diameter
On
Diameter
2m
7. Leave all other default values on the Model Specs tab.

Anik_F2 points its boresight so that it provides coverage over North
America. If you accepted the default azimuth and elevation for this antenna,
its boresight would point straight toward the equator. You need to change
direction of the antenna on your transmitter so that it covers North America.
8. Select the Orientation tab.
antenna orientation properties
OPTION
VALUE
Method
Azimuth Elevation
Azimuth
-73 deg
Elevation
84 deg
9. Leave all other default values on the Orientation tab.

The antenna boresight azimuth and elevation is measured in terms of the
azimuth and elevation in the local coordinate frame of the parent object. The
azimuth of an antenna is measured in a right-handed sense about the +Z axis
(nadir) with zero azimuth on the +X axis (velocity). The elevation angle is
measured from the X-Y plane toward the +Z axis.
10. Click OK.
Exercise 3 | Page 7
Antenna Gain
You have defined your transmit antenna. Lets find out what the antenna gain
is.
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Transmitter
Satellite/ANIK_F2_28378/DL_To_HQ
Show Reports
Off
Show Graphs
On
Style
AntGain Azi Cut Vs Elevation
Generate as
Report/Graph
4. When the Az/El Limits dialog appears, set the following:
TABLE 3-6. Az/El
Limits for antenna gain
OPTION
VALUE
Azimuth Cut
On
Minimum Elevation
-2.0 deg
Maximum Elevation
2.0 deg
Elevation Step
0.1 deg
5. Click OK.
This will graph the antenna gain for a cross-section of two degrees elevation
off boresight.
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 8
FIGURE 3-2.
Graph: Antenna gain
Notice how the transmitter concentrates the majority of its energy along the
boresight and some side lobes rather than evenly distributing it spacially.
6. Use the Antenna Gain graph to answer the following questions:
What is the maximum antenna gain?
At what elevation?
7. Close the Antenna Gain graph.
Displaying Contours
STK allows you to plot several different types of contours on the 2D and 3D
Graphics windows. Four types of contour graphics are available depending on
the type of object selected:
Gain - communication receivers, transmitters and radars.

EIRP - communication transmitters and radars.
Flux Density - communication transmitters and radars.
RIP - communication transmitters and radars.
Exercise 3 | Page 9
CLEAN UP
Before you display contour graphics, youll need to turn off the display of the
various vehicle tracks in the scenario, so that you can easily identify the
contours.
3. Set the following in the Vehicles area:
TABLE 3-7. Vehicle
OPTION
STATE
Show Ground Tracks/Routes
Off
Show Orbits/Trajectories
Off
Show Ground Markers
Off
Show Orbit Markers
Off
graphics display
4. Click OK.
GAIN CONTOUR GRAPHICS

Lets use contours to display those antenna gain values on the map in the
2D Graphics window.
1. Open DL_To_HQs ( ) properties ( ).
contour graphics display options
OPTION
VALUE
Show Graphics
On
Type
Antenna Gain
Relative To Maximum
Off
4. Set the following values in the Level Adding area:
TABLE 3-9. Antenna
gain contour level adding values
OPTION
VALUE
Add Method
Start, Stop, Step
Start
24
Stop
45
Step
5. Click the Add Level button.

The maximum gain was the high point in the graph. You are working in dB
units so each loss of three (3) dB means the power has been halved.
6. Enable the Show option in the Level Labels area.
7. Ensure that following values are set in the Level Attributes area:
TABLE 3-10. Antenna
gain contour graphics level attribute values
FIELD
VALUE
Color Method
Color Ramp
Start Color
Red
Stop Color
Blue
8. Set the following in the Azimuth area:

TABLE 3-11. Antenna
gain contour details
OPTION
VALUE
Set azimuth and elevation resolution together
On
Azimuth - Resolution
0.1 deg
9. Click Apply.
When you click the OK button STK will generate contour values beginning
with the start value and incrementing by the step specified until the stop value
is reached or exceeded.
Be patient. It may take a few minutes for STK to refresh the gain
contours.
3D CONTOURS DISPLAY
Contours will automatically display in the 2D Graphics window but youll need
to turn on their display in 3D.
2. Enable the Show Lines option in the Contour Graphics area.
When the Show Lines option is on contour graphics display in the 3D Graphics
window using contour settings defined for the 2D Graphics window.
3. Click OK.
MARK CASTLE ROCK

First, well turn Castle Rocks label back on so that the location will be marked
in 2D and 3D.
1. Open Castle_Rocks ( ) properties ( ).
TABLE 3-12. Stupavas
OPTION
VALUE
Inherit from Scenario
Off
Show Label
On
4. Click OK.
CHECK IT OUT!
Now, take a moment to analyze the visual display of transmitters gain values,
and see where Castle Rock in the gain contours.
2. Click the Home View ( ) button.
3. Mouse around to see how gain contours display on the globe.
FIGURE 3-3.
3D View: DL_To_HQ Gain contour graphics

5. Zoom out ( ) until you can see the gain contours surrounding your
analysis area.
Where does Castle Rock fall within the gain contours?
Can you identify the side lobes represented in the contours?
It looks like you have a pretty high gain in the Castle Rock area. Thats good.
Now lets set up your receive antenna there.
Receivers As Children of Children

Headquarters at Castle Rock will communicate with Anik F2 using a 3.7 meter
receiver dish. You need to point this dish towards Anik F2, however, receivers
and transmitters do not have pointing properties. What can you do?
You can mount your receiver on a sensor, which does have pointing
properties, and target it at Anik. When an antenna (transmitter or receiver) is
the child of a sensor, the sensor essentially acts as a steering mechanism for
the antenna.
MODEL THE POINTING MECHANISM

1. Attach a sensor ( ) to Castle_Rock ( ) using the Define Properties ( )
method using the Object Browser.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
When the sensor ( ) properties open, select the Basic - Pointing page.
Select Targeted as the Pointing Type.
Move ( ) Anik_F2_28378 ( ) to the Assigned Targets list.
Click Apply.
Rename the new sensor ( ) Target_Anik.
SENSOR DISPLAY
The sensor is only being used as a pointing mechanism for the receiver in this
case. We do not need to see the sensors field-of-view, so lets turn off its
graphics. Note that the sensors graphics control the graphics display of the
child antenna (receiver or transmitter).
1. Select the 2D Graphics - Display Times page.
2. Set the Display Status to Always Off.
3. Click OK.
Define Castle Rocks Receiver

Receivers, like transmitters, in STK can be modeled to different levels of
detail. You will use the Complex Receiver type to model Castle Rocks dish. Take a
look at Table 3-13. Receiver Types in STK below.k
TABLE 3-13. Receiver
Types in STK
RECEIVER TYPE
DEFINITION
Simple Receiver
User-definable specs (g/T, frequency and

bandwidth), polarization, rain model and prereceive and pre-demod gains and losses.
Cable Receiver
User-definable specs (BER, extra cable factor,

propagation speed factor)
Medium Receiver
User-definable specs (gain, frequency, and

bandwidth), system temperature, polarization,
rain model, and pre-receive and pre-demod
gains and loses.
Complex Receiver
User-definable specs (antenna selection and

configuration, frequency and bandwidth),
system temperature, polarization, rain model,
and pre-receive and pre-demod gains and
losses.
Types in STK
RECEIVER TYPE
DEFINITION
Multibeam Receiver
User-definable specs (selection and

configuration of multiple antenna beams),
system temperature, polarization (for each
beam), rain model and pre-receive and predemod gains and losses.
Laser Receiver
Options available for Medium Receiver model,

plus receiver optics and detector parameters.
Plugin Receiver
Receiver defined in user-supplied script.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Use the Define Properties method to attach a receiver ( ) to Target_Anik.

Rename it HQ_Receive.
Go to HQ_Receives ( ) properties ( ).
Set the following:
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Complex Receiver Model
Auto Track
On
6. Select the Antenna... tab.

7. Set the following antenna properties:
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Parabolic
Use Diameter
On
Diameter
3.7 m
antenna properties
Notice that the frequency used for calculations (Design Frequency) is a read only
field and currently does not match Anik F2s transmit frequency of 12 GHz.
Auto Track allows a receiver to track and lock onto the transmitters carrier
frequency to which it is currently linking via an access. In this case that will be
the 12 GHz downlink from Aniks transmitter. The Auto Scale option on the
Filter tab allows the receiver to adjust its bandwidth to the current transmitter,
as you switch from one transmitter to another.
8. Click OK.
What Can I See?

The transmitter and receiver that you added are now defined to the
specification of the equipment that is available for you to create a downlink.
Its time to examine the quality of the communication link between these two
by generating a link budget. Before the quality of the link can be determined,
STK must first determine if a geometric line-of-sight between the transmitter
and receiver exists. The link budget is generated using the Access Tool.
1. Open the Access Tool ( ).
2. Ensure that HQ_Receive is the Access for object.
3. Click expand button ( ) beside Anik_F2 ( ) to unnest the DL_to_HQs
transmitter ( ).
4. Select DL_to_HQ.
5. Click the Link Budget... button in the Reports area.
6. Review the values in this report with your instructor.
Anik_F2 is a geostationary satellite, so you will notice some variation in values
due to the slight figure eight motion of Anik_F2. The values are generally
stable though. You should be able to operate quite well using this
communications link.
The link budget calculations represented here are intended for example
purposes only. The values used should not be construed as the actual,
operational communications system values for either Anik or Globalstar.
Take a look at the bit error rate (BER) values. You have only two bits per
billion in error. This indicates a good quality communications link.
7. Close the Link Budget report.
DETAILED LINK BUDGET

This link budget report does not provide you with all the information
available in STK for communications links. Lets run a more detailed link
budget report and get additional information.
1. Click the Report & Graph Manager button below the Reports area in the
Access Tool.

TABLE 3-16. Detailed
link budget report
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Access
HQ_Receive to DL_To_HQ
Show Reports
On
Show Graphs
Off
Style
Link Budget - Detailed
Generate as
Report/Graph
What is the transmitter gain value (Xmtr Gain dB)?
How does the transmitter gain value in the report compare to the gain
contours surrounding headquarters (Castle Rock) in your 2D Graphics
window?
What is the Atmospheric (Atmos) Loss and Rain Loss value?
Does this mean that the atmosphere/environment isnt diminishing
your signal?
4. Leave the Detailed Link Budget report open. We will use it later.
6. Close the Access Tool ( ).
Scenario Environment Properties

As your detailed link budget analysis clearly shows, you have not told STK to
take environmental factors into account when analyzing the link between
Anik and headquarters. A number of environmental factors can affect the
performance of a communications link or a radar system. STK/Communications
and STK/Radar model rain fade, gaseous absorption, clouds and fog, and
tropospheric scintillation. A scenario's Environment properties page (a subset
of RF properties) enables you to apply these models to your analyses. When
enabled, the models will affect all RF phenomena in the scenario except
where overridden or varied locally.
RAIN MODELS
Rain models are used to estimate the amount of degradation (or fading) of the
signal when passing through rain. The degradation is primarily due to
absorption by the water molecules and is a function of frequency and
elevation angle. Generally speaking, the rain loss will increase with increasing
frequency. The loss will also increase with decreasing ground elevation angle
due to a greater path distance through the portion of the atmosphere where
rain occurs. The rain will also cause an increase in the antenna noise
temperature.
The rain models used in the STK/Communications and STK/Radar modules are
global annual statistical models. The annual rainfall rate and probability of the
rate for a particular location are determined from historical measurements. In
general, the world is divided up into different rain regions, each with its
associated rainfall rates and probabilities. The rain models provide statistical
data on rainfall in given regions. They determine how often various rain rates
occur. Smaller rain rates (drizzle) occur more frequently than large rain rates
(torrential downpour). You must allow for extra power in the link budget to
accommodate these higher rain rates if the communications link is to stay
viable during these downpours.
2. Select the RF - Environment page.
TABLE 3-17. Rain
Rain Model
model properties
OPTION
VALUE
Use
On
Type
Crane 1985
ATMOSPHERIC ABSORPTION MODELS

Gaseous absorption models are employed to account for signal attenuation
caused by atmospheric gaseous absorption.
1. Return to the RF - Environment page.
TABLE 3-18. Atmospheric
Atmospheric Absorption Model
absorption model properties
OPTION
VALUE
Use
On
Type
Simple Satcom
3. Click OK.
Now that STK is taking into account your environmental factors, you can
refresh your Link Budgets report and see if those factors will affect your
analysis.
1. Bring the Detailed Link Budget report to the front.
2. Refresh (F5) the Report Data window.
What are the Atmospheric (Atmos) Loss values, now?
What is the Rain Loss value, now?
Has your bit error rate degraded (BER) considering atmospheric
effects?
If both the transmitter and receiver are located above the rain height
threshold, the rain loss is zero. Rain loss is computed for facilities,
targets and for all vehicles except satellites. The rain height is specified
on the objects RF-Atmosphere page.
Rain Loss Effects on Comm Links

When you select the Rain Model option in the scenario's Environment
properties, rain model parameters can then also be set in the receiver object or
the radar system properties.
Outage values and range are rain model-dependent. To include the rain
margin as part of your RF analysis, turn the Use Rain Model option on at the
object level, then select the desired annual outage figure. All calculations will
then include the appropriate rain margin values based on the frequency,
elevation angle and location of the ground segment. STK also includes the
rain noise contribution in the calculation if the Rain option is selected as part
of the System Temperature calculation.
Several rain model's rain zones are available as map backgrounds for
the 2D graphics window.
You have asked STK to consider rain in your scenario, and the link budget
showed loss due to rain. How was this rain loss computed?
1. Open HQ_Receives ( ) properties ( ).
3. Notice that the Use Rain Model option is on, and the Outage is set to 0.100.
A default Outage of 0.100 means that your communications link will be viable
99.9% of the time and you must account for the rain loss to your signal which
only occurs 0.100% of the time.
When it is not raining, rain loss will obviously be zero, but the detailed link
budget can tell you what rain loss would be under the rain rates that occur
0.100% of the time (or at another rate if you change the Outage value).
4. Click OK.
5. Close the Link Budget report.
Dynamic Link Budgets

In the Anik example, we had a fairly constant link budget since we were
computing the link between a geostationary satellite and a point on the
ground. However, Globalstar satellites are in low earth orbit. Their orientation
with respect to a ground site is constantly changing, hence the link budget is
constantly changing. This can be considered a dynamic link budget.
RECEIVE FROM NODE

Now you can examine a link between one of your ground nodes and a
Globalstar satellite. Before you examine this link, you need to place a receiver
on one of your Globalstar satellites. The receiver has been predefined and
provided for you.
2. Use the From Saved Receive r File(*.r) option to attach the receiver object
provided (RcvFromNode.r) to GlobalStar-M004_25163 ( ).
3. Browse to the location of your receiver file. (Typically,

C:\Training\STK\Remsat\Objects)
4. Select the RcvFromNode.r file.
5. Click Open.
6. Take a moment to go over the receiver properties with your instructor.
7. When you finish, close RcvFromNodes ( ) properties ( ).
TRANSMITTER ON NODE
Now that your receiver has been placed inside STK, lets attach a transmitter
to Node2. This will take the information from the firefighters and send it to
the receiver on Globalstar. The transmitter has also been predefined and
provided for you.
1. Use the From Saved Transmitter File(*.x) option to attach the transmitter
object provided (UL_To_Globalstar.x) to Node2 ( ).
2. Browse to the location of your receiver file. (Typically,
C:\Training\STK\Remsat\Objects)
3. Select the UL_to_Globalstar.x file.
4. Click Open.
5. Take a moment to go over the transmitter properties with your instructor.
6. When you finish, close UL_To_Globalstars ( ) properties ( ).
Computing A Dynamic Link Budget

You are not dealing with a geostationary satellite anymore, you are dealing
with Globalstar. Globalstar is a LEO satellite so you would expect several passes
in your twenty-four (24) hour analysis period. Lets take a look at this dynamic
link budget.
1. Open the Access Tool ( ).
TABLE 3-19. Access
link budgets
Access For
UL_To_Globalstar ( )
Associated Objects
RcvFromNode ( )
3. Click the Link Budget... button in the Reports area.
You will notice that there are multiple access periods represented.
What are the Recvd Iso Power values?
Are these values consistent from one access period to another?
What could these variations mean?
4. Take a look at Received (Recvd) Isotropic (Iso) Power values.
This value does vary by several dBW for each access period. The orientation
and distance between the antenna and receiver are constantly changing as the
satellite passes overhead.
5. Leave the Link Budget report open.
Working With Comm Constraints

Suppose your system requires that the received isotropic power be at least
-112 dBW. You are not interested in the link budget when this requirement is
not met. Just like STK allows you to place various constraints on objects, STK
also accounts for comm constraints when computing a link budget. You can
tell STK to disregard any portion of your link budget when your received
isotropic power does not measure at least -112dBW.
1. Open UL_To_Globalstars ( ) properties ( ).
2. Select the Constraints - Comm page.
Rcvd Istotropic Power
comm constraints
OPTION
VALUE
Min
On
Value
-112 dBW
4. Click OK.
5. Refresh ( or F5) the Dynamic Link Budget report.
STK now disregards the time periods during which your received isotropic
power requirement of -112 dBW is not met.
6. Close the Dynamic Link Budget report.
7. Close the Access Tool ( ).
When You Finish

How Will I Survey Yachts In

All of the Worlds Seas?
EXERCISE 4
In this exercise you will use your STK expertise to analyze and survey the number and location of
yachts in the open seas all over the world. Upon completion, you will have had the opportunity to
practice the following skills:
Use STK Analyzer to perform parametric analysis

Create custom outputs
How Will I Survey Yachts In All of the Worlds Seas?
Problem Statement
Your customer, the International Association of Yacht Manufacturers (IAYM),
needs updated information on yacht usage. The IAYM wants to have an
accurate count and location of all yachts greater than fifteen (15) meters in
length operating on the open seas on any given day. Your manager has tasked
you with providing a back-of-the-envelope design of a space-based system to
satisfy these requirements.
BREAK IT DOWN
You need to survey all open seas on the surface of the Earth.
You would like to cover the entire open seas in a single 24-hour period.
You must be cost-conscious. You will consider a maximum of three (3)
low-earth orbiting (LEO) satellites.

You have some leeway with altitude of the satellites. You want to do some
trade studies to determine how adjusting the altitude will impact the
coverage.
You will attach a conical sensor to each satellite that can track up to thirty
(30) degrees off-boresight.
SOLUTION
Build a scenario to determine what your coverage of the open seas will be
over a 24-hour period, considering different variations of altitude on your
satellites.
Create a Scenario
The first thing you need to do is create a scenario. You are modeling a twentyfour (24) hour (STK default) surveillance mission, so you dont need to
change the time period.
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 2
HOW WILL I SURVEY YACHTS IN ALL OF THE WORLDS SEAS?
TABLE 4-1. New
OPTION
VALUE
Name
Yacht_Watch
Description
How will I survey the number and location of yachts in seas all
over the world?
Location
Analysis Period
3. Click OK.
5. Ensure the file path is C:\Documents and Settings\Student\My
Documents\STK 9\Yacht_Watch.
6. Click Save.
Walker Constellations
A Walker constellation consists of a group of satellites (t) that are in circular
orbits and have the same period and inclination. The pattern of the
constellation consists of evenly spaced satellites (s) in each of the orbital
planes (p) specified so that t=sp. The ascending nodes of the orbital planes are
also evenly spaced over a range of right ascensions (RAAN).
The Walker tool makes it easy to generate a Walker constellation using the Two
Body, J2, J4, or SGP4 orbit propagators. The way in which spacing between the
ascending nodes that define the orbital planes is calculated depends on the
type of Walker constellation you choose--Delta or Modified Delta. In addition to
specifying the number of satellites in each plane, you must also specify the
location of the first satellite in each plane relative to the first satellite in
adjacent planes. The way that you specify the position of the first satellite will
depend on the type of Walker constellation you choose. The different types of
Walker constellations are outlined in Table 4-2, Walker Constellation Types,
on page 4
Exercise 4 | Page 3
TABLE 4-2. Walker
Constellation Types
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
Delta
For a Walker Delta constellation type, the relative along-track

position of two satellites in adjacent planes is determined by a phase
parameter (f) where f is an integer from 0 to p-1. The value of f
represents the number of slots of angular measure (360 degrees/t)
by which the more easterly satellite leads the more westerly satellite.
Modified
Delta
The Modified Walker Delta option allows more flexibility in defining

the spacing in RAAN and relative phase of the satellites in adjacent
planes. The Number of Planes, Number of Sats per Plane, and Color
by Plane options are the same as those for the Delta Type, but the
modified delta creation also allows you to define the True Anomaly
Phasing and RAAN increments.
CREATE A SEED SATELLITE

The original satellite that is used to create the Walker constellation is referred
to as the Seed satellite, while the satellites generated using the Walker tool
are referred to as children. Well use the Orbit Wizard to create the seed
satellite from which the other satellites will be derived.
TABLE 4-3. Create
OPTION
satellite
VALUE
Satellite
Select a Method:
Orbit Wizard

TABLE 4-4. Yacht
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 4
Watcher properties
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Circular
Satellite Name
Yacht_Watcher
Inclination
98 deg
TABLE 4-4. Yacht
Watcher properties
OPTION
VALUE
Altitude
400 km
RAAN
0 deg

6. Click OK.
GET A BETTER LOOK

Lets animate the scenario and see how the low-earth repeating ground trace
orbit that Yacht Watcher is in covers the surface of the Earth.
FIGURE 4-1.
3D View: Yacht Watchers orbit
ATTACH THE PAYLOAD

We have our parent satellite, but we must add the radar with which well be
detecting the yachts. Attach a sensor to Yacht_Watcher and use it to model your
radar.
1. Select Yacht_Watcher ( ) in the Object Browser.
2. Use the Object Catalog (
) to attach a sensor ( ) to Yacht_Watcher ( ).
Exercise 4 | Page 5
3. Rename the sensor ( ) Eyes.
CUSTOMIZE THE PAYLOAD

Take a look back at the list you made in Break it Down on page 4-2. Each
radar should slew 30 degrees off boresight. Edit the sensors properties to
model such a field-of-regard for the radar.
1. Open Eyes ( ) properties ( ).
2. Set the following sensor definition properties:
TABLE 4-5. Senor
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Simple Conic
Cone Angle
30 deg
3. Click OK.
CREATE A WALKER CONSTELLATION

Take a look at the list you made in Break it Down on page 4-2. According
to what you know, there are cost constraints that limit you to three (3)
satellites. Use the Walker tool to create a simple, single-plane constellation
consisting of three satellites for your analysis.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Right-click Yacht_Watcher ( ) in the Object Browser.

Extend the Satellite menu.
Select the Walker item.
Enter the following values on the Walker tool dialog:
TABLE 4-6. Walker
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 6
constellation properties
OPTION
VALUE
Seed Satellite
Yacht_Watcher
Type
Delta
Number of Planes
Number of Sats per Plane
Inter Plane Spacing
RAAN Spread
360 deg
5. Leave all other default values.

6. Click Create Walker.
Give STK a minute to create the constellation and update your Object Browser.
7. Close the Walker Tool.
WALKER SATELLITE RELATIONSHIPS

When a Walker constellation is created, each child has the same base name as
the seed satellite plus two numbers. The first number identifies the plane in
which the satellite resides and the second identifies the satellite's position in
the plane. For instance, here we define a Walker constellation with one plane
and three satellites per plane, Yacht_Watcher12 would be the second satellite in
the first plane.
If you keep the seed satellite in the scenario, two identically configured
satellites (the seed satellite and the first satellite in the first plane) will be
considered in your analysis. To prevent duplicate analysis, lets remove the
seed satellite, now.
WARNING: When you save the scenario, all objects in the scenario are
also saved. It is important that you save the scenario before you remove
Yacht Watcher as we need to reload it later for further analysis.
2. Remove ( )Yacht_Watcher ( ) from the scenario.
Create a Constellation
Each resulting Walker satellite has an instrument, represented by a sensor
object in STK, associated with it. You will be using these radars to examine
your coverage of the open seas. We need to group the sensors together in a
constellation so that they can be considered as a group for analysis purposes.
1. Insert a constellation ( ) using the Object Browser.
2. Rename the constellation All_Eyes.
3. Open All_Eyess properties ( ). The Basic - Definition page should already
be selected.
4. Move ( ) all of the sensors in the scenario to the Assigned Objects list.
Exercise 4 | Page 7
5.
6.
7.
8.
Click Apply.
Ensure that Restriction is set to Any Of.
Click OK.
World Water Coverage

You want to assess coverage over, or your ability to detect yachts in, the open
seas. To do this you will assess coverage of the open seas that is based on the
boundaries of a shape file (.shp) that can be pulled into your coverage grid.
You will need to specify the region being examined, how each grid point
should be treated, and what assets will be used to examine the region.
1. Insert a coverage definition object ( ) using the Object Catalog.
2. Rename the coverage definition WorldWater_Cov.
3. Open WorldWater_Cov's ( ) properties ( ). The Basic - Grid page should
4. Change the Grid Area to Custom Regions.
If we had area targets in our scenario we could use those as the outline of our
grid. Since we dont, we can use a shape file (.shp) as the outline for our grid.
Lets bring one for our oceans in now.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Click Load Region File.

Ensure the File of Type is set to a shape file (.shp).
Browse to C:\Program Files\AGI\STK 9\Data\Shapefiles\Water.
Open WorldWater_Cov.shp.
Your grid boundary has now been directly brought into your Coverage
Definition Object.
11. Change the Point Granularity to Lat/Lon 5 deg.
12. Click Apply.
ASSIGN ASSETS
1. Open the Basic - Assets page.
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 8
2. Select All_Eyes ( ) from the Asset list.

3. Click Assign.
4. Click Apply.
MANAGE YOUR RESOURCES

Since we have a lot going on here, lets not tie STK up recomputing access
before we need it.
1. Open the Basic - Advanced page.
3. Click OK to accept all changes, and dismiss WorldWater_Covs ( )
properties ( ).
Compute Coverages
Thus far, you have outlined all the seas of the world, defined them as a regionof-interest for coverage analysis, constrained points in the coverage grid,
created and cloned your surveillance satellites, modeled and grouped
surveillance radars, and defined the relationship between these objects.
Lets move forward and see if well be able to locate yachts in the open seas.
1. Right-click WorldWater_Cov ( ) in the Object Browser.
2. Extend the Coverage Definition menu.
3. Select Compute Access.
It may take a moment for STK to compute coverage. The progress indicator
at the bottom of the STK Workspace will indicate when computations are
complete.
Measure The Quality of Coverage

While access has already been computed, wed like to measure whether or not
each point is accessible by any of the assigned assets. Add a Figure of Merit so
that we can determine the quality of coverage.
1. Position the 2D and 3D Graphics windows so that they are both clearly
visible.
2. Attach a Figure of Merit ( ) to WorldWater_Cov ( ) using the Object Catalog.
Exercise 4 | Page 9
3. Rename it Hows_My_Cov.
The default figure of merit is Simple Coverage, so we dont need to change the
properties for Hows_My_Cov ( ).
As soon as you introduce the new object, figure of merit graphics will display
in the 2D and 3D Graphics windows. Based on the graphics display, you can
see that there are visible gaps in your coverage, but what percentage of the
worlds oceans are covered?
FIGURE 4-2.
3D View: World water coverage quality
HOWD I DO?
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Figure of Merit
Hows_My_Cov
Show Reports
On
Show Graphs
Off
Style
Percent Satisfied
Generate as
Report/Graph
The Percent Satisfied report simply tells you what percent and what area of your
coverage region (WorldWater_Cov) had access at some point during the defined
time period to at least one sensor in All_Eyes ( ).
4. When you finish, close the Percent Satisfied report.
Parametric Study Analysis

You can see that the Walker constellation that we created has left us short of
our goal of covering the entire ocean in a day. Wouldnt it be nice if you could
determine how to get 100% coverage? For instance, would you have better
coverage if you boosted the altitude of your satellites? Maybe, but what
altitude would be the best? Should you adjust your satellites and redo your
analysis at a variety of altitudes?
It would be tedious to repeat the entire scenario time and time again for each
altitude that you want to test. Fortunately, you dont have to! STK/Analyzer is
a tool that can automate such a study for you. The Parametric Study tool is used
to run a scenario through a sweep of values for some input variable. The
resulting data can be plotted to view trends. Lets use STK/Analyzer to
perform a parametric analysis that will tell you what altitude will give the most
complete coverage.
STK/Analyzer
The STK/Analyzer module is an integrated software solution that automates
STK trade studies and parametric analyses by blending the engineering
analysis capabilities of Phoenix Integration, Incs Model Center with the STK
software suite from AGI. STK/Analyzer enables STK users to easily perform
trade and optimization studies, as well as post-processing functions. This
module provides engineers with the tools to understand the design space of
their system through an easy to use GUI style interface, eliminating the need
of scripts or programming. STK/Analyzer provides a set of analysis tools that:
Enable you to understand the design space of your systems.
Enable you to perform analyses in STK easily without involving
programming or scripting.
Introduce trade study and post-processing capabilities.

Can be used with all STK scenarios, including those with STK/Astrogator
satellites, to perform the following types of analyses.
ANALYSIS TOOLS
TABLE 4-8. STK/Analyzer
tools
TOOL
DESCRIPTION
Parametric
Study
Vary one item over a range and study the effects on various
figures of merit defining performance.
Carpet Plot
Vary two items over ranges and study the resultant behavior of
another parameter.
Design of
Experiments
Vary multiple parameters, creating a table of runs, using various

design type algorithms, to study the effects on various
parameters.
Probabilistic
Analysis
Run studies in Monte Carlo fashion, wherein input parameters

are set up to follow certain distribution methods and study the
resultant behavior. Output data can be analyzed and presented
in histogram fashion.
Optimizer
Systematically modify variables in a scenario until some

objective is achieved
CLEAN UP
As we perform our parametric analysis, STK/Analyzer will create new Walker
constellation and associated sensors for us. Take a moment to remove the
existing Walker satellites.
1. Select all of the Yacht_Watcher satellites (
2. Right-click, and select Delete ( ).
) in the Object Browser.
WHAT HAVE I DONE!?

Take a moment to review what happened when you removed the Walker
satellites:
Each satellite was removed from the scenario.
All of the sensors attached to the satellites were also deleted.
Those sensors made up a constellation of objects that we assigned as
assets for our coverage definition.
Does that mean that our constellation will be empty?

No. When you use Analyzer to generate a series of Walker constellations, you
can tell it to place the resulting sensors into the empty constellation.
All of your coverage assets have been deleted, yet the coverage
graphics remain the same.--Why?
Coverage graphics didnt change because our option to Automatically Recompute

Access for WorldWater_Cov is turned off. If we recomputed the accesses, our
graphics would disappear because there is no coverage anymore. Computing
coverage again now, just to clear our windows would be a waste of time and
resources as STK/Analyzer will recompute a series of coverages for us.
RELOAD THE YACHT WATCHER SATELLITE

The first thing you need to do is reload the original Yacht_Watcher satellite that
you created because you will need it to create the new Walker constellation.
TABLE 4-9. Create
OPTION
an area target
VALUE
Select an Object To Be Inserted
Satellite
Select a Method
From Satellite File (.sa)

4. Locate the directory where you saved the Yacht_Watch scenario (C:\My
Documents\STK 9\Yacht_Watch).
5. Select Yacht_Watcher.sa.
6. Click Open.
7. Before you go any further, save ( ) your work.
Launch Analyzer
Now, you can launch STK/Analyzer.
1. Select Analysis in the menu bar.
2. Select Analyzer...
3. When the Analyzer window appears, click the Parametric Study link.
FIGURE 4-3.
STK/Analyzer interface
The Parametric Study Tool

You may have to wait a few moments for Analyzer to ingest all of the STK
objects in your scenario. When the Parametric Study tool appears, examine it for
a moment.
The left side of the interface has a components list, which outlines the objects
that Analyzer found in your scenario. Each item in the components list can be
expanded to view its details and properties. The right side of the Analyzer
window is used to modify a selected components parameters and specify
output.
FIGURE 4-4.
STK/Analyzer Parametric Study tool interface
Define Your Design Variables

You need to tell Analyzer that you want to:
Adjust the altitude of our seed satellite, Yacht_Watcher
Use the resulting Yacht_Watcher to generate a Walker constellation, and
Place the resulting Walker sensors into a constellation that can be used to
calculate coverage.
Whew! Thats a lot. Lets take it step at a time.
NEW WALKER
1. Expand Yacht_Watchers ( ) properties in the Components list.
2. Expand Propagator.
3. Drag the Semi-major Axis variable and drop it in the design variable ( )
box on the right side of the Analyzer window.
Our initial Yacht_Watcher altitude was 400 km, and we know the resulting
coverage for that altitude. Lets try adjusting the altitude up to 600 km in
increments of 50 km to see what coverage is provided at various altitudes.
4. Set the following values below the design variables box:
TABLE 4-10. Semi-major
axis design variable values
OPTION
VALUE
Starting Value
6828 (do not enter units)
Ending Value
6978 (do not enter units)
Number of Samples
Asking for four (4) samples will automatically set the step size to 50 (450, 500,
550 and 600 km).
The original semi-major axis displayed in Analyzer is 6778 km (the
altitude of the satellite, 400 km, plus the radius of the Earth, 6378
km=6778 km). You want your first altitude sampling to be 450 km--50
km above the original semi-major axis.To set the first sampling you
need to add 50 km to the original value (400 km + 50 km + 6378
km=6828 km). To determine the ending value number of samples (4) X
sample size (50) = 600 km + the radius of the Earth (6378 km)=6978
km.
NEW CONSTELLATION
Now, tell Analyzer to create a Walker constellation and put the resulting
sensors into our All_Eyes constellation.
1. Expand Walker located on the left side of the Parametric Study panel.
2. Edit the following values:
TABLE 4-11. Analyzer
OPTION
VALUE
Enable
True
Type
Delta
numPlanes
numSatsPerPlane
RAANSpread
360
Walker configuration
TABLE 4-11. Analyzer
Walker configuration
OPTION
VALUE
walkerParam
constellation
All_Eyes
ConstellationType
Sensor
walkerParam would be the equivalent of interplane spacing if you were

using the Walker tool.
Define Your Responses

Youve told Analyzer what to put in, now lets tell it what data you want it to
return. You decided earlier that you want to know the percent satisfied based
on the simple coverage figure of merit.
JUST THE DATA, PLEASE

While the Percent Satisfied report that we created back in Howd I Do? on
page 4-10 gives us a summary information about the coverage definition,
Analyzer is only interested in results, or numbers. Lets create a report style
that will return only results.
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Figure of Merit
Hows_My_Cov
Show Reports
On
Show Graphs
Off
Style
Percent Satisfied
Generate as
Report/Graph
4. Click the Duplicate Style button.
You will automatically be presented with the design view of the Percent Satisfied
report style.
5. Select Section 1 (Coverage Definition - Coverage Properties) and Section 2 (FOM
Definition - FOM Properties) in the Report Contents area.
6. Click Remove.
The remaining report contents should consist of a single section and single
line containing Percent Satisfied and Area Satisfied, which is all you need.
7. Click OK.
8. When you return to the Report & Graph Manager ( ), the new Percent
Satisfied report will show up under My Styles.
9. Rename the new report Just The Data.
RUN IT!
Now, you have a report style that contains only the data we want Analyzer to
report on.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Return to the Parametric Study tool.

Expand ( ) Standard.
Select Report Name.
Enter Just The Data in the Value column. Your must enter the report name
exactly as it appears in STK. Analyzer IS case sensitive.
5. Select Object in the Components tree.
6. Change the Value to WorldWater_Cov/Hows_My_Cov. This tells Analyzer
that the previously specified report is associated with this particular
object.
7. Move up a few lines, and expand ReportValue1.
The new report that you created, Just The Data, contains only two output
values: Percent Satisfied (report value 1) and Area Satisfied (report value 2). For
this run, lets output on percent satisfied. We have the option to report
minimum, maximum, average, etc. values. It wont make a difference what we
select, since the overall percent coverage for the entire 24 hour period is what
is being reported, so any of the those options would return the same value.
Lets just use average.
8. Drag Report Value1/ave to the Responses section on the right side of the
Analyzer window.
9. Click Run
It will take several minutes to analyze the different scenarios. Take a look at
the Object Browser and the 2D and 3D Graphics windows. You will see the
various Walker constellations being created and the coverage calculations
progressing.
Review Your Results

When the analysis is completed, you can view the results in the Data Explorer
that appeared when run was initiated. The Data Explorer is a tool used by Trade
Study tools to display data while they are being collected from STK. While
data is being collected, the Data Explorer displays a progress meter, a halt
button, and the data.
FIGURE 4-5.
STK/Analyzer Data Explorer
DATA EXPLORER TOOLBAR

Once the trade study is complete and all data has been collected, the Data
Explorer toolbar becomes active.
FIGURE 4-6.
STK/Analyzer Data Explorer toolbar
The toolbar buttons perform the following functions:

TABLE 4-13. Data
BUTTON
Explorer toolbar buttons
NAME
FUNCTION
Save Trade Study...
Saves the data and associated trade study tool setup information a trade study
file.
Print Data
Prints the currently displayed data (either the graph or the table).
Export Data...
Saves the data to a comma-separated (.csv) text file.
Basic Settings...
Displays the basic settings dialog for the selected page.
Cut
Removes the selected page and puts it on the clipboard.
Copy
Copies the selected page to the clipboard.
Paste
Adds a page on the clipboard to the Data Explorer, if one is present.
Help...
Brings up the ModelCenterModelRunner help page about the Data Explorer.
The Data Explorer will display a graph that plots the resultant data. Take a look
at the graph in the Data Explorer. Because we selected ReportValue 1 as our
output, our graph shows the Percent Satisfied.
TABLE DATA
If you want more specific data about the points on the graph, click 1 - Table on
the left side of the Data Explorer.The Table view gives a summary of the
parameters used for each run, like so:
FIGURE 4-7.
Data Explorer: Variables summary in table data view
Additionally, it lists all the input and output values in our Just The Data report,
like so:
FIGURE 4-8.
Data Explorer: Results summary in table data view
10. Use the data provided in the Data Explorer to answer the following
questions:
Do you achieve 100% coverage of the oceans with any of the
constellations created?
If not, how close do you come to 100% coverage?
Between which two altitudes did you gain the greatest % coverage?
Between which two was your gain the least?
How would you change your Analyzer set up if you wanted to see Area
Satisfied instead of Percent Satisfied?
Now you are armed with some preliminary design information. You can meet
with your customer and discuss the pros and cons of higher orbit insertion
costs versus coverage. You could also use Analyzer to consider numerous
other design options such as different types of Walker orbits, perhaps three
planes of one satellite each might yield more favorable results, etc.
Save Your Work

In the event that your customer wants you to consider other design options
for this scenario, you can save this Analyzer set up for future use.
1. Close the Data Explorer.
2. In the --favorites list-- drop down menu at the top of the Analyzer window,
select Add Current Configuration as a Favorite.
3. Name this configuration Yacht Watch: Just The Data.
4. Click OK.
5. Close the Parametric Study tool.
7. Close Analyzer.
How Can I Monitor and

Communicate With a
Decaying Satellite?
EXERCISE 5
In this exercise you will create a scenario that will help you monitor a decaying satellite
and update its attitude to optimize the satellites data transmission and/or power
generation. Upon completion, you will be able to:
Use advanced attitude profiles

Use the High Precision Orbit Propagator (HPOP)
Use the Satellite Lifetime tool
Perform an attitude coverage analysis
Use the Walker tool
How Can I Monitor and Communicate With a Decaying Satellite?
Problem Statement
A situation has arisen. A new satellite malfunctioned during launch. The
satellite was unable to achieve the appropriate orbit, and will eventually decay,
unless corrective action is taken. While the engineers try to figure out how to
correct the situation, you are in charge of tracking the satellite.
You are currently stationed on the USS Nimitz, off the west coast of Central
America. Your ship houses a mobile tracking center for the constellation of
MEO satellites to which the errant satellite should have belonged. Under
normal conditions, you would be mainly concerned with tracking the existing
MEO satellites. However, considering the dire situation at hand, you now
want to assist in any possible recovery of the errant satellite.
First, you need to determine if your antenna can monitor the decaying satellite
without pointing directly at the sun and still track the other usual MEO
satellites. Next, you need to model the decaying satellite as accurately as
possible and determine its lifetime. Finally, you need to examine the
possibility of changing the decaying satellite's attitude to maximize either data
transmission or power generation.
BREAK IT DOWN
You are on the Nimitz, an aircraft carrier off the west coast of Central
America.
You normally monitor the MEO sats using a sensor that cannot point
directly at the sun and must avoid it by ten (10) degrees.
You need to determine how much time exists before the errant satellite
decays in order to determine how much time you have to take corrective
action.
You will examine several different attitude profiles for the decaying
satellite.
You need to determine what opportunities you will have to relay
commands to the errant satellite.
The decaying satellite has rotating solar panels and a moveable sensor.
Three attitude profiles will be modeled:
A stable satellite with rotating solar panels and a rotating sensor to the ship.
A satellite which is stable unless in range of the ship. Then the satellite shifts to
target the ship. The solar panels will rotate.
EXERCISE 5 | PAGE 2
HOW CAN I MONITOR AND COMMUNICATE WITH A DECAYING SATELLITE?
The satellite targets the sun unless in range of the Nimitz. Then the attitude is
overwritten to target the ship. Nothing rotates.
SOLUTION
Build a scenario that will model the ship and its relationship between the
MEO sats and the decaying satellite. Use STK to examine various possible
attitude profiles for the satellite, as well as access times between the ship and
satellite (during which time commands can be sent).

teaches you to analyze and display vehicle attitude, a partially developed
scenario has been provided for you. This scenario can be found in the student
files area.
3. Locate the partially developed scenario in the student files provided for
this exercise (C:\Training\STK).
4. Select New_Attitude.vdf ( ).
5. Click Open.
When you open a VDF a corresponding scenario file is created and saved in a
folder of the same name in the default (C:\My Documents\STK 9)
6. Click Save ( ).
WHATS IN MY SCENARIO?
The scenario encompasses a one day period in April 2007. The New_Attitude
scenario contains two objects--a ship named Nimitz and a sensor named
MEOSensor which is attached to Nimitz.
NIMITZ
Nimitz has been partially configured for you. Lets go over whats already
done.
Nimitz is sailing off the west coast of Central America.
Exercise 5 | Page 3
Nimitzs sun vector is turned on. This will be useful in ensuring that the
sensor attached to Nimitz (MEOSensor) avoids the sun by at least ten (10)
degrees.
Nimitz has a five (5) degree minimum elevation constraint because it is
unable to track anything lower than five (5) degrees above the horizon
from aboard the ship.
MEO SENSOR
A sensor called MEOSensor is attached to Nimitz. Lets go over MEOSensors
configuration.
MEOSensor will be used to track the constellation of satellites of which the
errant satellite was intended to be a member.

MEOSensors projection is set to 100%, so that is will be invisible. If
MEOSensors field-of-view were visible, the projection would interfere with
the graphics of the attitude coverage analysis that you will perform in this
exercise.
GRAPHICS
Some general graphics properties have also be configured for you. Lets go
over them now, too.
Your 3D Graphics window is centered on Nimitz.
Ground tracks graphics for vehicles are turned off at the scenario level.
Later, you will load the constellation to which the errant satellite was
supposed to belong. That constellation contains twenty-four (24) satellites.
If the satellite ground tracks were on, they would clutter up the 2D Graphics
window.
Create a Walker Constellation

You want to model the constellation of MEO satellites of which our errant
satellite was intended to become a member. Well create the seed satellite
and then use it to create a Walker constellation.
CREATE THE SEED SATELLITE

Use the Orbit Wizard to create the seed satellite from which the other
satellites will be derived.
EXERCISE 5 | PAGE 4
1. Bring the Insert STK Object tool ( ) to the front.

TABLE 5-1. Create
satellite
OPTION
VALUE
Satellite
Select a Method:
Orbit Wizard

TABLE 5-2. Create
satellite
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Circular
Satellite Name
MEO_Sat
Altitude
6000 km

6. Click OK.
CREATE A WALKER CONSTELLATION

Now, create a Walker constellation of six (6) planes with four (4) satellites each
using the satellite that you just created as the base, or seed from which all
others will be configured.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Right-click MEO_Sat ( ) in the Object Browser.

Extent the Satellite menu.
Select the Walker item.
Enter the following values to define your Walker constellation:
TABLE 5-3. Walker
FIELD
VALUE
Seed Satellite
MEO_Sat
Type
Delta
Number of Planes
Number of Sats per Plane
Exercise 5 | Page 5
TABLE 5-3. Walker
FIELD
VALUE
Create Constellation
Enable
Constellation Name
MEO_Sats
5. Leave all other default values.

6. Click Create Walker.
Give STK a minute to create the constellation and update your Object Browser.
7. Close the Walker Tool.
REMOVE THE SEED

If you keep the seed satellite in the scenario two identically configured
satellites (the seed satellite and the first satellite in the first plane) will be
considered in your analysis. To prevent duplicate analysis, lets remove the
seed satellite, now.
WARNING: When you save the scenario, all objects in the scenario are
also saved. It is good practice to save your scenario before you remove
the seed satellite as you may need to reload it later for further
analysis.
2. Remove ( )MEO_Sat ( ) from the scenario.
Attitude Coverage
With Nimitz and your sensor in place you can now track your MEO_Sats. You
need to determine the most advantageous location to point your sensor. You
will use Attitude Coverage to determine this.
ATTITUDE SPHERE
In order to visualize attitude coverage, we need to turn on an Attitude Sphere
around Nimitz. Lets display the Attitude Sphere while we have Nimitzs
properties open. The Attitude Sphere is a visualization aid that can be made to
appear in the 3D Graphics window and 3D Attitude Graphics windows. When
EXERCISE 5 | PAGE 6
combined with the vector display it constitutes a powerful tool for displaying
the objects attitude and for tracking attitude changes over time.
1. Open Nimitzs ( ) properties ( ).
2. Select the 3D Graphics - Attitude Sphere page.
TABLE 5-4. Nimitz
attitude sphere properties
OPTION
VALUE
Show
On
Scale Value
2.5
Scale Relative to Model
Off
4. Click OK.

Can you see the Attitude Sphere surrounding Nimitz.
FIGURE 5-1.
Nimitz with Attitude Sphere
Attitude Coverage combines features of STK/Attitude and STK/Coverage to

enable you to analyze coverage in various directions over time, using several
attitude-dependent figures of merit. You are interested in the points and
Exercise 5 | Page 7
regions defined for attitude coverage that represent directions in which the
attitude-dependant object (your sensor) can be pointed.
1. Attach an Attitude Coverage ( ) object to Nimitz ( ) using the Object
Catalog.
2. Rename it MEO_Cov.
You are not concerned about determining your sensor average under the
water since your decaying satellite is in space. You are only concerned when
the satellite is five (5) degrees above the horizon to ninety (90) degrees above
your ship. Well use those boundaries to define the limits of the Attitude
Coverage grid.
3. Open MEO_Covs ( ) properties ( ).
4. Select the Basic - Grid page.
TABLE 5-5. MEO
Covs grid definition properties
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Latitude Bounds
Min Latitude
5 deg
Max Latitude
90 deg
1. Ensure that Lat/Lon is selected in the Grid Definition - Point Granularity

area.
2. Change the Point Granularity to 4 deg.
3. Click Apply.
POINT DEFINITION PROPERTIES

In contrast to point definition in the STK/Coverage module, here you are
defining the properties of the object pointing of which depends on the
directions represented by points on the coverage grid. That object must be a
sensor -- or, if you have appropriate licenses, a transmitter, receiver or radar -whose parent object is the one for which Attitude Coverage is being defined.
The basic properties of that object (such as a sensor's field of view), including
its position at each time step in the coverage interval, as well as any
constraints imposed on it, help determine its access or lack thereof to the
selected assets. Similarly, these properties are taken into account in figure of
merit computations.
1. Click the Grid Constraints Options... button.
EXERCISE 5 | PAGE 8

TABLE 5-6. Point
OPTION
VALUE
Use Object Instance for Constraints
On
Object Type
Sensor
<Object>
Nimitz/MeoSensor

4. Click Apply.
ASSIGN ASSETS
You need to assign coverage assets just as you would if you were computing
traditional coverage.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select MEO_Sats ( ) from the Asset list.
Click Apply.

before we need it.
3. Click Apply.
COVERAGE GRAPHICS
Lets minimize clutter in our attitude sphere by turning off the graphical
display of points and regions in the attitude coverage grid.
Exercise 5 | Page 9
TABLE 5-7. MEO
Covs 3D Graphics display properties
OPTION
VALUE
Show Regions
Off
Show Points
Off
3. Click OK.
Attitude Figure Of Merit

You have defined attitude coverage. Now you need to determine the best
direction in which to point your sensor, in an effort to maximize access from
the sensor to the satellites in the constellation. To do that you can add a Figure
Of Merit (FOM) to your AttitutdeCoverage object that will define the quality of
coverage that you require.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select MEO_Cov ( ) in the Object Browser.

Add an AttitudeFigureOfMerit ( ) object using the Object Catalog
Rename it N_Asset.
Open N_Assets ( ) properties ( ).
Set the following Definition criteria:
TABLE 5-8. Attitude
FOM definition criteria
OPTION
VALUE
Type
N Asset Coverage
Compute
Minimum
7. Click Apply.
We will be examining the lowest number of satellites we can track by pointing
our sensor at various locations. By selecting the location with the highest
minimum, we can maximize our tracking of the MEO_Sats.
FOM GRAPHICS
Lets set your graphical display option to only show the static coverage.
2. Disable the Show option in the Animation Graphics area.
3. Click Apply.
You may notice that the 2D Graphics window options is missing. That is
because Attitude Coverage Object is only visible in the 3D Graphics window (it is a
3D spherical object).
FOM CONTOURS
You can display coverage contours on the attitude sphere for attitude just as
you can on the map and globe for traditional coverage.
2. Set the following options:
TABLE 5-9. N
Asset FOM static contour display options
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Static
Show
On

TABLE 5-10. N
Asset FOM static contour level adding values
OPTION
VALUE
Add Method
Start, Stop, Step
Start
Stop
Step
4. Click the Add Levels button.

TABLE 5-11. N
Asset contour graphics level attribute values
FIELD
VALUE
Color Method
Color Ramp
Start Color
Red
End Color
Blue
6. Click Apply.
7. Click the Legend button.
8. Click OK.
FIGURE 5-2.
Static contours legend for N Asset coverage
The Compute option for the Attitude Figure of Merit definition is set to Minimum.
Static contours based on this figure of merit will indicate the minimum
number of satellites to which the sensor has access at any time during the
analysis interval in each direction included in the coverage definition.
The map graphics will be colored according to the number of available assets
as outlined in the static contours legend. Areas that have access to no assets
will be red, and areas that have access to the maximum number of assets will
be blue.
COMPUTE COVERAGE
1. Right-click MEO_Cov ( ) in the Object Browser.
2. Expand the AttitudeCoverage menu.
3. Select Compute Accesses.
It may take a few minutes for STK to compute accesses on the attitude
sphere.

2. Use the mouse to zoom out until you can see the entire Attitude Sphere.
FIGURE 5-3.
Nimitzs attitude sphere with static contours
The small green areas have a coverage level of three (3), i.e. if the sensor is
pointed in any direction within that area, it will always have access to at least
three satellites. The path in red shows a coverage level of zero (0). This is
because of the solar exclusion angle constraint. At some point in the scenario,
aiming the boresight in this area would have resulted in it being within ten
degrees of the sun. If you animate, you should be able to see the sun vector
trace a path right through this red swath.
You have now determined where the most ideal locations would be to aim
your sensor boresight under nominal circumstances in order to maximize
your tracking of the MEO_Sats. However, this recent errant launch was
anything but nominal. You must now make a significant departure from
nominal procedures and determine how you can best assist in recovering this
satellite.
3. When you finish, close the Legend window.
Decaying Satellite
Next, lets add the decaying satellite to the scenario. You know you need to
determine when Nimitz can communicate with the errant satellite in order to
transmit the attitude commands. You want the best attitude commands that
will help to maximize power generation and still allow the satellite to point
towards Nimitz.
It is important for us to model the orbit of our decaying satellite as accurately

as possible. It will be encountering increased drag as its altitude is continually
decreasing. Its orbit is changing far more quickly than a satellite in a stable
orbit. We want to make sure we are able to take effects such as drag into
account when we propagate the orbit of this satellite. In order to do this, we
will use STKs High-Precision Orbit Propagator (HPOP).
High-Precision Orbit Propagator

The High-Precision Orbit Propagator (HPOP) uses numerical integration of the
differential equations of motions to generate ephemeris. Several different
force modeling effects can be included in the analysis, including a full
gravitational field model (based upon spherical harmonics), third-body
gravity, atmospheric drag and solar radiation pressure. Several different
numerical integration techniques and formulations of the equations of motion
are available. The different formulations aid in computational efficiency while
preserving accuracy. Because of the many parameter settings available for the
user, a precise model of the force model environment for almost any satellite
can be specified, and thus a highly precise orbit ephemeris can be generated.
High precision is not without costs: (1) the user is responsible for
choosing force model settings appropriate to the situation being
modeled; and (2) ephemeris generation takes more computational time
and effort than analytical propagation (which simply evaluates a
formula).
HPOP can handle circular, elliptical, parabolic and hyperbolic orbits at

distance ranges from the lower atmosphere of the Earth, to the Moon and
beyond. The propagator uses the same orbital elements as those used by
TwoBody, J2Perturbation and J4Perturbation propagators.
1. Bring the Insert STK Object tool ( ) to the front.
TABLE 5-12. Create
OPTION
VALUE
Satellite
Select a Method:
Define Properties
satellite
4. When the new satellites properties open, enter the following values to
define the initial state of the satellite:
TABLE 5-13. Orbital
Parameters (HPOP)
ELEMENT
VALUE
Propagator
HPOP
Start Time
2 Apr 2007 00:00:00.00
End Time
3 Apr 2007 00:00:00.00
Orbit Epoch
2 Apr 2007 00:00:00.00
Semimajor Axis
6640 km
Eccentricity
0.003
Inclination
52 deg
Argument of Perigee
325 deg
RAAN
350 deg
True Anomaly
106 deg
5. Click Apply.
Force Models
Force models can be used to define a precise representation of a satellite's
force environment for use in HPOP analysis. Additionally, individual force
model components can be visualized using vectors with the Vector Geometry
Tool (VGT). The force models that you can define and apply using HPOP are
as follows:
Central Body Gravity

Solar Radiation Pressure
Drag
Third Body Gravity
CENTRAL BODY GRAVITY MODEL

The HPOP propagator uses the Central Body Gravity force model automatically.
We, however, need to use a more complete model of the variation of the
earths gravitational field then the default model provides. Lets change the
gravity model being used.
1. Click the Force Models... button on the Orbit page.
2. Change the following options in the Central Body Gravity area:

TABLE 5-14. Central
body gravity properties
OPTION
VALUE
Gravity
EGM96.grv
Maximum Degree
70
Maximum Order
70
These values represent the maximum degree and order of geopotential

coefficients to be included when computing the central body gravity. Valid
range is from 0-90, depending on the gravity model. EGM96 allows a
maximum of 70.
SOLAR RADIATION PRESSURE

Since our orbit is already low and only getting lower, we really dont need to
concern ourselves with Solar Radiation Pressure. That is more applicable for
orbits roughly 800 km or above the earth. Our satellite does not fit into this
category.
1. Locate the Solar Radiation Pressure force model options.
2. Disable the Use option.
DRAG
Since our satellite is in a decaying orbit, drag is certainly of concern to us.
Since our orbit is decaying, our altitude continues to decrease. Youll need to
use an Atmospheric Density model which will be valid in very low altitudes. The
NRLMSISE2000 model is valid from a range of 0-1000 km altitude. Lets use
that model.
1. Locate the Drag model options.
2. Change the Atm. Density Model to NRLMSISE 2000.
Solar Flux and Geomagnetic activity can both cause changes to the Earths
atmosphere which can impact drag. Youll also want to consider them when
modeling the errant satellite.
1. Locate the Solar Flux/Geo Mag force model options.
2. Use the drop-down list to select Use File.
3. Accept SpaceWeather-v1.2.txt.
The Space Weather files, as well as numerous other data files, can be
updated using the Data Update Utility accessible via the Utilities menu.
THIRD BODY GRAVITY

HPOP also allows you to model the effects that gravity will have on the
behavior of your satellites orbit.
The HPOP propagator is set to consider the gravitational effects of the Sun
and the Moon. Lets take a minute to ensure that these options are enabled.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Locate the Third Body Gravity options.

Ensure that the Use options for the Sun and the Moon are enabled.
Click OK to dismiss the Force Models dialog.
Click Apply.
Errant Satellite Display

Remember, the display of vehicle ground tracks was disabled in the scenario
provided for you in an effort to minimize the clutter that the Walker
constellation would have caused. You do, however, want to see the errant
satellites track, so lets override the scenario level settings for the errant
satellite.
TABLE 5-15. Errant
Sats graphics display properties
OPTION
VALUE
Off
Show Ground Track
On
3. Click OK.
Be patient. It may take a moment for the HPOP propagation to generate
ephemeris.
4. Rename the new satellite Errant_Sat.
Lifetime Tool
You now have an accurate representation of the errant satellites decaying
orbit. You have not yet determined when this satellite is likely to deorbit. You
can generate such an estimate using STKs Lifetime tool. The Lifetime tool
estimates the amount of time a satellite can be expected to remain in orbit
before atmospheric drag and other perturbation cause it to decay. Decay
predictions are just that--predictions. Their results may also vary based on the
atmosphere density and solar flux files used, as these data sources vary from
one another. None the less, you need to make your best attempt to determine
when the errant sat will deorbit
1. Right-click Errant_Sat ( ) in the Object Browser.
2. Extend the Satellite menu.
3. Select Lifetime.
SATELLITE CHARACTERISTICS
The Lifetime tool allows users to define and customize Satellite Characteristics.
The default drag coefficient (cd) here is 2.2, which is the same drag coefficient
we used in our HPOP properties. You can accept the default drag coefficient
and all of the other default Satellite Characteristics.
ATMOSPHERIC DENSITY
Since you need to use an Atmospheric Density model that is valid at low
altitudes, you can use the same model that you used in HPOP.
1. Locate the Atmospheric Density Model properties.
2. Change the Atmospheric Density Model to NRLMSISE 2000.
SOLAR DATA
Solar Data options allow you to apply predicted values of solar flux and
geomagnetic activity from a properly formatted Solar Flux file (*fxm, *.dat, or
*.txt). In this exercise, you need to use the same Solar Flux/Geomag file that we
used in our propagation.
1. Locate the Solar Data properties.
2. Use the ellipsis button ( ) beside the Solar Flux File option to locate the
Dynamic Earth Data directory installed with STK (C:\Documents and
Settings\All Users\Application Data\AGI\STK 9\DynamicEarthData).
3. Change the Files of Type to *.txt.

4. Select the SpaceWeather-v1.2.txt file in that directory.
5. Click Open.
ADVANCED OPTIONS
The Advanced button leads to options which define the speed and accuracy of
lifetime calculations.
1. Click the Advanced... button.
LIMIT METHOD & ORBIT COUNT

The Limit Method indicates the method for limiting the run time of the orbit
lifetime computation. The Limit Method limits by a maximum duration of the
orbit, by a maximum number of orbit revolutions or by the violation of either
limit. Partial results are available for reporting and graphing when the lifetime
computation ends due to reaching either limit.
Because of the low altitude of our satellite, it is safe to assume that we are well
within the default limits provided for Duration and Orbit Count (the maximum
number of days and orbits for which the Lifetime tool will analyze before
stopping). Our satellite will likely decay before these limits are met.
ORBITS PER CALCULATION

The Orbits per Calculation option allows you to directly control the
performance of the Lifetime tool. The fewer orbits per calculation, the more
precise the lifetime estimate is, but at the expense of compute time. The
higher number of orbits per calculation, the less precise the lifetime estimate
will be, but calculations are completed much faster. In general, set this
parameter to ten (10) for a quick estimate and one (1) for the greatest
accuracy.
GAUSSIAN QUADRATURES
Like the previous parameter, this parameter directly affects the performance
of the Lifetime tool as well as the accuracy of its results. The drag integration
routine is performed by n 9-point Gaussian quadratures per orbit, where n is
the number set here. Set this parameter to at least 6 for increased accuracy or
lower it for increased speed.
The integration of one (1) orbit is done over n sub-arcs, where:

n
= Gaussian quadratures
The sub-arcs are of constant angular measure (in true anomaly, not time). To
increase accuracy, make n larger. Each sub-arc is integrated using a 9-point
Gaussian quadrature (ie., there are nine (9) sample points within each sub-arc).
You are more interested in accurate results than speed.
1. Set the following values in the Advanced options:
TABLE 5-16. Advanced
lifetime options for Errant Sat
OPTION
VALUE
Orbits per Calculation
Gaussian Quadratures
DECAY ALTITUDE
The Decay Altitude option allows you to specify the altitude at which the
satellite's orbit is determined to be decayed. Lifetime calculations stop at this
altitude. You can keep the default Decay Altitude (65 km).
1. Click OK to return to the Lifetime tool.
When is your satellite estimated to decay if no corrective action is
taken?
3. When you finish, click OK to dismiss the message box.

4. Click the Graph... button.
FIGURE 5-4.
Graph: Errant Sat lifetime
5. Use the Lifetime graph to answer the following questions:

Can you see how the rate of altitude change increases as the altitude
decreases?
Can you also notice how the orbit becomes more circular as it decays?
Notice how the apogee and perigee heights become more similar and the
eccentricity decreases. The drag at perigee causes the apogee to lower. The
spike in eccentricity toward the end of the graph results from the
complications associated eccentricity approaching zero. Since negative values
are generally not accepted for eccentricities, as the line of apsides rotates 180
degrees and the eccentricity would become negative, the reported
eccentricity (non-negative) would appear to spike up and apparently
increase. Note that the end plummets quickly. The official decay occurs at
65km, which occurs between the last altitude input and the end of the graph.
6. Close the Lifetime graph.
7. Close the Lifetime tool.
You now know that you do have at least several days to attempt to send
commands to the satellite in hopes of salvaging this mission. It is time to
interface with the satellite engineers who have been analyzing the various
possible attitude profiles which might be beneficial for the recovery efforts.
Modeling Attitude in STK

We will examine several different attitude profiles for Errant_Sat in STK.
First, lets make a few additions to Errant_Sat to better enable us to visualize
these profiles.
ERRANT VIEW
Nimitz is the focal point of the original 3D Graphics window, and you dont
want to lose that view. Lets create another 3D Graphics window in which you
will concentrate on the errant satellite.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Extend the View menu.

Select the Duplicate 3D Graphics Window option.
Select 3D Graphics1 - Earth.
Open the 3D Graphics 2 - Earths properties (the new 3D Graphics
window).
5. Select the Window Properties page.
6. Change the Title to Errant Sat View.
7. Click OK.
DISPLAY VECTORS
To assist in orienting yourself in the 3D Graphics window. Lets use some
vectors pointing to the Sun and the Earth.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open Errant_Sats ( ) properties ( ).

Select the 3D Graphics - Vector page.
Enable the Show option for the Body Axes vector.
Enable the Show option for the Sun Vector.
Click OK.

1. Bring the Errant Sat View window to the front.
2. Reposition the view so that Errant_Sat is the focal point in the 3D Graphics
window.
3. Mouse around until you can clearly see Errant_Sat and its associated
vectors.
FIGURE 5-5.
3D View of Errant Sat with body axes and sun vectors
Attach a Sensor
Now, lets model the field-of-view for the communications antenna aboard
Errant_Sat which will be used to communicate with Nimitz.
1. Add a sensor object ( ) to Errant_Sat ( ) using the Object Catalog.
2. Open the new sensors ( ) properties ( ).
TABLE 5-17. Comm
Sensor definition properties
OPTION
VALUE
Type
Simple Conic
Cone Angle
5 deg
4. Click Apply.
SENSOR POINTING
Now, lets point the onboard sensor Errant_Sat at Nimitz.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the Basic - Pointing page.

Change the Pointing Type to Targeted.
Move ( ) Nimitz to the Assigned Targets list.
Click the Target Times... button below the targets lists.
When is the first access between Comm_Sensor and Nimitz?

Go ahead and make a note of the first access time. Later you will set the
animation time so that you can visualize the access between your
communications sensor and Nimitz.
5. Click OK to close the Target Times dialog.
6. Click OK to close the new sensors properties ( ).
7. Rename the new sensor Comm_Sensor.
AER Report
The Target Times provided us the access periods between Nimitz and
Comm_Sensor. Now, you know WHEN to point the Comm_Sensor at Errant_Sat
so that you can transmit commands from Nimitz to Errant_Sat. But where
should you point the sensor at those times? Lets run an AER report to
determine WHERE Nimitz can find Comm_Sensor.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Select Nimitz ( ) in the Object Browser.

Open the Access Tool ( ).
Ensure that Nimitz is the Access for object.
Click expand button ( ) beside Errant_Sat ( ) to unnest the
Comm_Sensor ( ).
Select Comm_Sensor ( ).
Click the AER... button in the Reports section.
Review the values in this report with your instructor.
Leave the AER report open.
Close the Access Tool ( ).
Satellite Attitude
Now you know when and where to point your antenna in order to send
commands to Errant_Sat. Reestablishing communication with Errant_Sat
allows you to adjust its attitude, but what is the desired attitude? It is time to
look at some attitude profiles in STK.
DEFAULT ATTITUDE
Errant_Sat has moveable solar panels and sensors onboard. Before you start
sending data to Errant_Sat, you need to determine how this attitude is
affecting data transmission and solar power generation.
1. Open Errant_Sats ( ) properties ( ).
2. Select the Basic - Attitude page.
The default attitude profile, which is being used for Errant_Sat, is Nadir
Alignment with ECF velocity constraint. What does that mean?
3. Click on the Help button at the bottom of the Attitude page.

4. Click the Basic link.
5. Click the Nadir alignment with ECF velocity constraint link in the profiles table.
The nadir alignment with ECF velocity constraint aligns the Z-axis of the
body of Errant_Sat with nadir and constrains the X-axis of the body of
Errant_Sat to the ECF velocity.
6. Close Help.
DISPLAY VECTORS
Since the vehicles Z axis is aligned with the nadir direction and its X axis is
constrained in the direction of the ECF velocity vector, lets display the nadir
vector to Errant_Sat to better visualize this. We also want to determine how
this attitude profile impacts our solar panels to the sun, and our sensor
targeting Nimitz.
1. Select the 3D Graphics - Vector page.
TABLE 5-18. Nimitz
VECTOR
STATE
Nadir (Centric) Vector
On
Velocity Vector
On
vector display
3. Click OK.
GET MOVING!
1. Bring the Errant_Sat View window to the front.
FIGURE 5-6.
3D View: Errant Sat with Nadir alignment

4. Watch Errant_Sats Body X vector and the velocity vector
The X vector seems to sway back and forth across the velocity vector. Thats
because this profile is not the most ideal profile for our satellite. The Nadir
alignment with ECF velocity constraint profile may not be appropriate for
satellites in synchronous or highly eccentric orbits since the ECF velocity
vector may be poorly defined and/or alternating in direction. Instead, use the
Nadir Alignment with ECI Velocity constraint profile. While Errant_Sat is not
in a highly eccentric orbit, we can still clearly see the impact that our
eccentricity has on this profile.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bring the AER report to the front.

Right-click on the first time in the report.
Open the Time object.
Select Set Animation Time. This will set the time in the report as the
animation time.
You should be able to see access from Comm_Sensor to Nimitz.
FIGURE 5-7.
3D View: First access from Errant Sat to Nimitz

Does the attitude of the satellite adjust at all during access to Nimitz?
Depending on the orientation of Nimitz to Errant_Sat, there may be times
when appendages such as the nadir-pointing antenna on Errant_Sat interfere
with the sensor. It is critical that you be able to communicate with Errant_Sat.
That being the case, this is definitely not the ideal attitude for communicating
with Nimitz.
Maximizing Data Transmission

You want to maximize the duration of your transmissions from Errant_Sat to
mission control on Nimitz. This requirement tells you that you need to target
the sensor on Errant_Sat to Nimitz. Your sensor is already targeted, but you
need to apply an attitude to your Errant_Sat so the sensor is not obscured.
1. Return to Errant_Sats ( ) properties ( ).
3. Enable the Override Basic attitude for selected targets in the Target Pointing
section.
4. Click the Select Targets... button.
5. Move ( ) Nimitz ( ) to the Assigned Targets list.
6. Click OK to dismiss the Target Segment dialog.
7. Click Apply.
Targeting the satellite will adjust its attitude so that the sensor is always
projecting perpendicular from the satellite, rather than slewing, as it tracks
Nimitz.
GET MOVING!
Lets take a look at this new attitude profile. It will take some time for
Errant_Sat to adjust its attitude to target Nimitz. So you want to begin your
animation about one (1) minute prior to the time of the first access.
2. Reverse ( ) the animation until you are approximately one minute prior to
access.
Targeting the sensor at Nimitz ensures that it wont be blocked during
transmission to Nimitz and provides us with an attitude profile that is ideal for
data transmission. Notice that during the times that Errant_Sat does NOT
have access to Nimitz, its attitude defaults back to Nadir Alignment with ECF
velocity constraint. However, we still need to look at the issue of our solar panels
not always being perpendicular to the sun.
You wonder if there isnt a better attitude profile to maximize the power
generated by your solar panels.
FIGURE 5-8.
Errant Sat Pointing to Nimitz
Are the solar panels always pointing perpendicular to the sun?

Your solar panels rotate to always point toward the sun. That is because the
solar panels are a pointable element on our satellite model.
1. Open Errant_Sats ( ) properties ( ).
2. Select the 3D Graphics - Model Pointing page.
Notice that the solar arrays are currently targeted at the sun.
In order for a pointable element to be available, it must be built into the
model file.
While the solar panels rotate, they are not always perpendicular to the sun.
Since you are not always pointing your panels perpendicular to the sun, this
would not be the ideal attitude for power generation. While the solar panels
point toward the sun, this profile prevents the satellites attitude from
adjusting as necessary to maintain perpendicularity of the solar panels to the
sun.
FIGURE 5-9.
3D View: First access from Errant Sat to Nimitz
Maximizing Power Generation

The solar arrays on Errant_Sat are already adjusting to track the sun. In the
current configuration, the normal vector to the solar panels tries to get as
close as possible to the sun vector, considering they may only rotate about a
single axis. If you change Errant_Sats attitude profile to Sun Alignment with
Nadir Constraint, the attitude of the satellite would better allow for alignment
of the solar panels normal vector and the sun vector.
If we maintain our Override Basic Attitude for Selected Targets (Nimitz), the
resulting attitude should give us the best of both worlds: unobstructed
transmission to Nimitz during access and maximum solar exposure on our
solar panels during period of non-access.
1. Return to Errant_Sats ( ) properties ( ).
3. Select Sun alignment with nadir constraint.
You can also disable the solar panel rotation.
4. Select the 3D Graphics - Model Pointing page.
5. Set the Assigned Target Object to be None in the Solar Arrays field.
6. Click OK.
GET MOVING!
Again, you need to begin your animation about one (1) minute prior to the
time of the first access if you wish to see Errant_Sat override its basic attitude
in preparation for access with Nimitz.
2. Reverse ( ) the animation until you are approximately one minute prior to
access.
Notice that once an access to Nimitz is over, Errant_Sat adjusts its attitude to
maintain perpendicularity between the solar panels and the sun vector.
The satellite engineers have decided this is the attitude profile they would like
to assign to Errant_Sat during the time period in which they hope to be able
to salvage the mission. With the AER data you previously generated, you
know when and where to aim your sensor at Errant_Sat in order to send it the
proper attitude commands. Hopefully, this attitude will keep Errant_Sat
functioning well enough for the satellite engineers to determine whether or
not this mission can be salvaged.
FIGURE 5-10.
Errant Sat solar panels pointing to Sun
When You Finish

1.
2.
3.
4.
Close any open reports.

Save ( ) your work.
Close STK ( ).
How Can I Assess the Threat

of My Satellite Colliding
With Space Debris?
EXERCISE 6
In this exercise you will use various tools to determine what satellites are at risk of
collision, and then assess the threat to a satellite. Upon completion, you will be able to:
Use SOCRATES to identify satellites that are at risk of collision

Use SOCRATES to model a selected threat in STK
Use STK and STK/CAT to visualize and analyze possible collisions
How Can I Assess the Threat of My Satellite Colliding With Space Debris?
Problem Statement
As a space buff, you have always been interested in the topic of space debris.
You examine daily online conjunction analysis results from the Center for Space
Standards & Innovations (CSSI) Satellite Orbital Conjunction Reports Assessing
Threatening Encounters in Space (SOCRATES). Now that you have acquired STK
licenses, you wish to examine one of these reported close approaches in STK.
You know that a Chang Zheng 4 (CZ-4) Chinese space launch vehicle came in
close proximity to a Defense Meteorological Satellite Program (DMSP) satellite. You
want to view and analyze their ranges from each other inside STK. You also
want to know if there are any other objects close by that might be threatened.
BREAK IT DOWN
Your SOCRATES analysis period will begin May 9 2007 12:00:00.000.
You will be using archived data instead of the live SOCRATES Internet
site
After looking at the SOCRATES results, you will examine a conjunction
analysis using STK.
SOLUTION
Use SOCRATES to model the threat of a potential collision in STK, and then
visualize and analyze the potential collision using the tools and data providers
in STK.
SOCRATES, CSSI, and STK/CAT

Daily automated predictive conjunction analysis is performed via the
SOCRATES Web site (http://celestrak.com/SOCRATES). As a service to
the satellite operator community, the Center for Space Standards &
Innovation (CSSI) offers SOCRATES. This service provides regular
information on pending conjunctions in orbit over the coming week. Because
of the potentially catastrophic consequences of such conjunctions going
unnoticed, it is hoped that this service will help satellite operators avoid
undesired close approaches through advanced mission planning.
Twice each day, CSSI runs a list of all satellite payloads on orbit against a list
of all objects on orbit using the catalog of all unclassified NORAD two-line
EXERCISE 6 | PAGE 2
HOW CAN I ASSESS THE THREAT OF MY SATELLITE COLLIDING WITH SPACE DEBRIS?
element sets (TLEs) released to the public to look for satellite conjunctions
over the next seven days. The reason for limiting the search to conjunctions
with payloads is to give satellite operators an opportunity to plan - or obtain
planning services - to move their satellites out of harms way (if their satellite
is maneuverable), or to take other appropriate measures. Since there is no way
of knowing which payloads are still active, all payload are considered.
CSSI uses STKs Conjunction Analysis Tools (STK/CAT) and the SGP4
propagator in STK to make the runs. Using STK/CAT, they look for all
conjunctions which are within five (5) km at time of closest approach (TCA)
and reports both minimum distance and maximum probability for the
conjunction. Because the minimum distance method ignores position
covariance information and can lead to an exaggerated assessment of the true
risk, CSSI believes the maximum probability method provides a more
reasonable (although still conservative) assessment of the true risk.
Preparing Internet Explorer

With increasing security awareness on the Internet, Microsoft has now
configured Internet Explorer, by default, so that it will not allow the launching
of ActiveX clients. Unfortunately, you will need to do so in order to run STK
from SOCRATES. To prevent Internet Explorer from blocking your interaction
between SOCRATES and STK, you will need to change a few settings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Launch Internet Explorer ( ).

Extend the Tools menu.
Select Internet Options.
Select the Security tab.
Select Internet.
Click Custom Level...
Enable the Initialize and Script ActiveX controls not marked as safe for scripting
option.
8. Click OK.
9. Click Yes when prompted to verify that you want to change your security
settings.
Since you are working locally from our machine, you must change an
additional setting.
10. Select the Advanced tab.
Exercise 6 | Page 3
11.
12.
13.
14.
Scroll down to the Security setting.

Enable the Allow active content to run in files on My Computer.
Click OK.
Close Internet Explorer ( ) to refresh the Internet Options.
Open SOCRATES
To ensure that you are using the same data used in this exercise and you can
repeat all process and results, you will be using and archived version of the
SOCRATES site for May 9, 2007, which is stored on you local machine. Lets
take a look at the archived version of SOCRATES now.
1. Exit STK if it is open. SOCRATES will automatically launch STK later.
2. Locate the student files provided for this exercise
(C:\Training\STK\CAT).
3. Open index.html.
4. Close the CAT directory.
FIGURE 6-1.
SOCRATES home page
CONJUNCTION SUMMARY
On the SOCRATES home page, links that allow you to generate a list of
conjunctions by maximum probability of conjunction or by minimum range.
Lets take a look at the close encounters by minimum range.
EXERCISE 6 | PAGE 4
1. Click the Top 10 Conjunctions by Minimum Range link.

2. Go over the table of information presented with your instructor.
A security information bar may appear even though you set your
security settings. You can right-click on the information bar and allow
blocked content.
The resulting page gives you summary data on both the parameters included
in your conjunction analysis as well as the close approaches identified.
TABLE 6-1. Summary
Table of Conjunctions
CONJUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
NORAD Catalog Number
NORAD Catalog Numbers of the two conjuncting objects. These are assigned
chronologically as additional objects are cataloged.
Name
Common names of the two conjuncting objects. Our conjunction of interest

occurs between a DMSP satellite and a piece of debris from a CZ-4 launch vehicle
(this is a Chinese launch vehicle).
Days Since Epoch
The number of days from the epoch of the NORAD two-line element set used to
produce the prediction until the time of closest approach for the conjunction. The
older the epoch, the less accurately the TLE provides a representation of the
satellites position.
Max Probability
Given fixed spherical object radii and relative distance at the time of closest
approach (TCA), the projected covariance ellipse is sized and oriented to produce
the maximum probability. For these reports the ratio of major-to-minor axes of the
projected covariance ellipse is set to one (AR=1, no orientation is necessary). If the
combined object radius is greater than the relative distance, the maximum
probability will be one; such occurrences are not addressed here.
Dilution Threshold (km)
The standard deviation that produces the maximum probability defines the
threshold of dilution. A smaller or larger standard of deviation will produce a
smaller probability. In the case of computing true probability with a smaller
standard deviation, the data is of sufficient quality to associate low probability with
low risk. For a larger standard deviation, this is not the case and the resulting true
probability calculation becomes diluted. If operating in this dilution region, the
recommendation is to obtain better data and reassess the encounter. If time or
resources do not permit, then the maximum probability should be used in place of
the true probability.
Min Range (km)
The distance between the two conjuncting objects at the time of closest approach.
Start (UTC)
Time when the two conjuncting objects come within the computation threshold
from each other (5 km)
TCA (UTC)
Time of closest approach
Exercise 6 | Page 5
TABLE 6-1. Summary
Table of Conjunctions
CONJUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
Stop (UTC)
Time when the two conjuncting objects move beyond the computation threshold
from each other (5 km)
Relative Velocity (km/sec) Relative velocity of the two conjuncting objects at the time of closest approach.
For more details on the maximum probability method, see Dr. Sal
Alfanos paper titled Relating Position Uncertainty to Maximum
Conjunction Probability at http://www.celestrak.com/SOCRATES/
AIAA-03-548.pdf
Lets examine the first conjunction in the list.

3. Using the summary information at the top of the page, answer the
following questions:
For what time period were conjunctions analyzed?
What was the distance between objects for which conjunctions were
reported?
How many payloads were included in the analysis (payloads are
considered primary objects)?
STK and SOCRATES

There is an Analysis button for each conjunction. When you click the Analysis
button for a selected conjunction, it will launch a separate browser window.
That window will identify the TLEs (and any other data, such as size or
covariance) used to generate that portion of the SOCRATES report along
with buttons to launch STK, create a scenario, and perform various analysis.
Initially, only the Launch STK button is enabled since this step must be done
first.
Additional information for running STK with SOCRATES can be found at
http://www.celestrak.com/SOCRATES/STK-SOCRATES.asp.
1.
2.
3.
4.
EXERCISE 6 | PAGE 6
Click on the Analysis button for the first conjunction.

Ensure that the STK 9 option is selected.
Click the Launch STK button.
If you receive an ActiveX warning from Internet Explorer, click Yes.
BUILD SCENARIO
Once STK has launched, the only button enabled will be the Build Scenario
button. Clicking the Build Scenario button will create the STK scenario, set the
appropriate time parameters, create the conjuncting satellitesincluding
selecting the appropriate models and attitude, if knownand then create the
AdvCAT object.
1. Click the Build Scenario button.
During this process, you must select a directory to save the scenario (you will
be prompted to do so), so that the AdvCAT object will have access to the two
satellites.
2. When prompted to do so, set the temporary file path to the C:/Training/
STK/CAT directory in your student area.
Ensure that you are using forward slashes in your file paths.
Since you may not want to keep this scenario, the default is to save the files to
the temp directory; however, since you are not modeling the current date, it is
important that the scenario objects have access to the archived data, which is
stored in your student area. That being the case, you need to direct the
temporary files to the same location.
3. Click OK.
Once you click OK on the directory prompt, STK will finish creating the
AdvCAT object and perform the necessary computations. When STK is
ready, your browser window will show only the time selection buttons
enabled.
3D Conjunction Display
The data display provides information on the status of the conjunction, but
right now youre zoomed out too far to really see whats going on.
SOCRATES also automates some views of the conjunction. Lets take a look
at some of them.
3. Maximize the 3D Graphics window.
Exercise 6 | Page 7
THRESHOLD START
1. Bring the SOCRATES Conjunction TLEs and STK/AdvCAT page to the
front.
2. Click the Threshold Start button.
This will set the view in STK to the time when the two objects enter the
minimum distance threshold that was used to identify the conjunction in
SOCRATES (5 km).
3. Use the mouse to zoom out until you can clearly see two green ellipsoids
if necessary.
FIGURE 6-2.
3D View: Threshold start
These ellipsoids represent threat volumes the two objects involved in the
conjunction.
GET MOVING!
1. Reset ( ) the animation
2. Play ( ) the animation
3. Watch the conjunction unfold!
The ellipsoids turn yellow when they are closer than the minimum threshold
defined in the SOCRATES analysis, in this case, five (5) km.
EXERCISE 6 | PAGE 8
FIGURE 6-3.
3D View: CZ-4 and DMSP conjunction

Of course, you can also change your viewpoint and manipulate STK as you
would with any scenario. Lets change the view and take a quick look at the
object models for the two satellites before you move on.
1. Reposition your view so that DMSP ( ) is the focal point in the
3D Graphics window.
2. Mouse around in the 3D Graphics window to get a good look at
DMSPs ( ) model.
Exercise 6 | Page 9
FIGURE 6-4.
3D View: DMSP model
As you zoom in and out, you will notice that the DMSP, the satellite, is
represented by the appropriate STK model. At first glance, it may not appear
that the conjuncting piece of debris, the CZ-4 launch vehicle, is represented at
all. It is much smaller than the full payload. It is represented by a simple
attitude sphere. Lets try to get a look at the attitude sphere representing the
piece of space debris.
3. Reposition your view so that CZ-4_DEB ( ) is the focal point in the 3D
Graphics window.
4. Mouse around in the 3D Graphics window to get a good look at CZ4_DEB ( ).
You will see an attitude sphere representing the debris. It will just look like a
white mesh ball.
FIGURE 6-5.
3D View: CZ-4 model
CLOSEST APPROACH
1. Bring the SOCRATES Conjunction TLEs and STK/AdvCAT page to the
front.
2. Click the Closest Approach button.
5. Zoom out a bit if necessary to see both ellipsoids.
FIGURE 6-6.
3D View: CZ-4 and DMSP closest approach
The ellipsoids represent the threat volumes for these satellites. That is,
because the TLE data does not provide an exact representation of the
positions of the objects, that positional uncertainty must be represented in
some way. By using a threat volume, you assume that the satellite falls
somewhere within this region, but you cant be certain exactly where in the
region it is. TLEs do not generate covariance data; therefore, you must specify
the dimensions of the threat volume, using the AdvCAT object.
Use the 3D Graphics window and the data display to answer the following
question:
How far apart are the objects at closest approach?
Do you see how the ellipsoids have intersected?
Does that mean our objects have collided?
AdvCAT in STK
The Advanced CAT tool provides a convenient way for you to carry out close
approach analyses for multiple satellites and two-line element (TLE) sets.
After applying user-selected filters, Advanced CAT performs close approach
analyses between primary objects (e.g. satellites owned by or otherwise of
interest to the user) and secondary objects (those presenting a risk of
collision), with reference to a threshold -- a minimum acceptable distance -between the ellipsoidal threat volumes of the objects.
1. Take a look at the Object Browser.

Do you see the AdvCAT object?
Lets take a closer look at the AdvCAT object, now.
2. Double-click the AdvCAT ( ) object in the Object Browser to open its
properties ( ).
3. Select the Basic - Main page.
Notice that our two conjuncting objects are listed as the Chosen objects for
both the Primary (the payload) List and Secondary List.
4. The Class type for each object is set to Fixed.
That means the threat volume will remain constant in size throughout the
analysis.
5. Locate the Tangential, Cross-Track, and Normal values for each object.
These three values, or axes, make up the threat volume--Tangential (along the
velocity vector), Cross-Track (perpendicular to the velocity vector), and Normal
(the radial direction from Earth). The threat volumes for our two objects are
300 meters (Tangential) by 100 meters (cross-track) by 100 meters (radial). The
uncertainty along the velocity vector tends to be the greatest.
Notice that these three components are also listed in the data display. In the
data display, these numbers do not represent threat volume parameters, but
rather display the distance between the two objects along these directions.
If you adjusted the animation time, you can reset it by clicking the
Closest Approach button from the SOCRATES Conjunction TLEs and
STK/AdvCAT page.
7. Using the data display, answer the following questions:

At closest approach, in which direction are the two objects the closest
(tangential, cross-track, or normal)?
Can you visualize the three ranges across the three axes in the 3D
Graphics window?
Reporting Close Approaches

Lets run a report on this conjunction to obtain more detailed information.
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Advanced CAT
AdvCAT
Show Reports
On
Show Graphs
Off
Style
Close Approach By Min Range
Generate as
Report/Graph
Take a look at the results. The report includes both minimum separation and
minimum range. However, both these values are the same. Why is that? What
is the difference?
4. Bring AdvCATs ( ) properties ( ) front.
5. Locate the Use Range Measure option.
When this option is enabled, STK performs the close approach computation
using range between objects as the criterion rather than the ellipsoid
separation. Therefore, both the range and the separation between the objects
is the same. Now lets take a look at an option that will consider the spacing
between the ellipsoids.
6. Disable the Use Range Measure option.
7. Make a note of the Threshold value (5 km).
In this configuration STK provides a visual warning whenever the distance
between the threat volumes of the primary and secondary objects falls below
the threshold. Additionally, the range is considered the minimum spacing
between ellipsoids, and the separation is computed between the objects. Lets
look at our conjunction using this option.
9. Bring the 3D Graphics window front.

10. Step Forward ( ) or Step in Reverse ( ) as necessary to watch the ellipsoids
approach and then intersect each other.
FIGURE 6-7.
3D View: Close approach with range measure off
In this case the ellipsoids become red when they intersect. Lets refresh the
report that you created a minute ago, and see what effect the changes have
made on your data.
11. Bring the Close Approach By Min Range report to the front.
12. Refresh ( or F5) the Report Data window.
Now, the Min Separation column reads Intersect. Remember, this does NOT
mean that the object intersected. It means that the ellipsoids representing the
threat volume intersected.
Now, look at the Min Range column. This value is the same as it was in our last
report. That is because this number is the distance between the objects, based
on their TLEs. This should not have changed since the last calculation, as the
same TLEs are being used.
WHEN YOU FINISH

1. Close the report.
Analyzing Multiple Conjunctions

This example displayed a conjunction between one primary object and one
secondary object. STK can be used to run conjunction analysis between one
primary object and an entire database of secondary objects, or it can use
databases for both primary and secondary objects. Lets run an analysis
between the DMSP payload and the entire satellite database.
Before you run the analysis, lets review a couple of things that youll need to
consider:
The time span of our scenario is miniscule because you are only looking at
the very brief moment that our two objects are in close proximity. In fact,
our scenario currently spans only one (1) second! If you expect to see any
other possible conjunctions, you will need to expand our time span.
Because you are not modeling the current date, it is important that the
satellite database used for this analysis be from the appropriate date. This
archived database is stored in your training directories.
REPROPAGATE OBJECTS
First, reset the propagation for our objects.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open CZ-4_DEBs ( ) properties ( ).

Select the Basic - Orbit page.
Set the Step Size to 1.0 second.
Click OK.
Repeat steps 2-4 for the other satellite object.
ADVANCED CAT TIME PERIOD

Now, lets extend the time period for the close approach analysis.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open the AdvCAT ( ) properties ( ).

Disable the Use Scenario Interval option in the Time Period area.
Add two hours to the Stop Time.
Click Apply.
Open AdvCATs ( ) properties ( ).
Scroll down to the Secondaries list.
The Secondaries List should now include an available database named

May13Satdb.tce, in addition to the regular satellite databases. This database
contains the TLEs for the satellite database as of May 13, 2007 which is the
day within which our analysis period falls. When AdvCAT searches for
possible databases, it begins by searching the directory in which the scenario
was saved. Since the May13Satdb was previously stored in the same directory
as this scenario (set back in Build Scenario on page 6-7), AdvCAT
automatically found this database for you.
7. Select May13Satdb.tce in the Available Secondary List.
8. Use the button to move the satellite database to the Chosen Secondary
List.
9. Ensure the threat volume values for the satellite database are:
TABLE 6-3. Threat
volume values for satellite database
OPTION
VALUE
Tangential
20 km
Cross-Track
10 km
Normal Threat Volume
5 km
These values are significantly larger than the values used in the first
conjunction analysis. The larger values will increase our chances of identifying
a conjunction. Expanding the threat volume for our DMSP satellite will also
increase your chances of identifying a close approach.
10. Scroll up to the Primary List.
11. Set the threat volume values for the DMSP satellite as follows:
TABLE 6-4. Threat
volume values for the DMSP satellite
OPTION
VALUE
Tangential
20 km
Cross-Track
10 km
Normal Threat Volume
5 km
12. Ensure the Use Range Measure is off.

13. Click Apply.
You are asking STK to perform a large number of calculations, some of
which common sense tells us are unnecessary. For example, DMSP is in a
LEO orbit. Does it really make sense for STK to propagate TLEs and range
calculations for any of the geostationary satellites? Of course not! There is no

danger of a conjunction between a LEO and a GEO.
Using Pre-Filters
The basic idea behind close approach processing is to start with all catalogued
orbiting objects and efficiently eliminate members of the population that do
not come within the specified distance of the reference object. The basic
approach consists of first eliminating as many members of the population as
possible via geometric properties, which takes considerably less time than
fully propagating these satellites and then computing close approaches. The
final determination of the existence of close approaches is always done by
sampling the ephemeris of the candidate and reference objects, but some set
of pre-filters is usually applied to limit the amount of ephemeris generation
that is required.
Several pre-filters are available as part of close approach processing. These
filters are computationally inexpensive methods for limiting the number of
objects and the periods of time for which brute force searching is needed. The
proper use of the pre-filters can greatly reduce the amount of time needed for
close approach processing. In this example, you will use all four of the
available pre-filters.
2. Locate the Pre Filter options.
3. Take a moment to review the available pre-filters with your instructor.
TABLE 6-5. Advanced
CAT pre-filters
FILTER
DESCRIPTION
Out of Date Filter
Allows you to determine how CAT will handle twoline element sets with epoch dates that do not fall
within the time period chosen for the close
approach analysis
Apogee/Perigee Filter
Used to eliminate candidate close approach objects

having a range of altitude that does not overlap
with that of the reference object.
TABLE 6-5. Advanced
CAT pre-filters
FILTER
DESCRIPTION
Object Path Filter
Used to eliminate any candidate object whose

orbital path does not come within a specified
distance of the orbital path of the reference
satellite.
Time Filter
Works in two stages. Stage one determines when

each candidate satellite will be within a specified
distance of the path (not the position on the path)
of the reference satellite and vice versa. Stage two
determines the overlaps of these intervals. Any
candidate satellite at the same time that the
reference satellite is close to the candidates
trajectory is eliminated.

TABLE 6-6. Prefilter
settings
FILTER
STATE
VALUE
Out of Date TLE
On
15 days
Apogee/Perigee
On
Accept Default
Object Path Filter
On
Accept Default
Time Filter
On
Accept Default
Now, in addition to the filters described above, TLEs older than fifteen days
will be considered inaccurate and eliminated from the analysis.
5. Click Apply.
Display Ellipsoids
Possible close approaches havent been computed yet. Lets set one final
property before you do. This setting will allow us to see the ellipsoids for all
the secondary objects included in our scenario. This will give us an idea of just
how crowded it is up there.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Enable the Show Secondary Ellipsoids option.
Enable the All option.
Click Apply.
Compute!
Since your analysis will be considering a lot of different close approaches, it
could take some time to compute. Lets turn on the option that will display a
message box appear when close approach computation is completed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the Basic - Main page.

Enable the Display Acknowledgement when done option.
Click Compute. This will take a few moments.
Click OK when the Acknowledgement message appears.
Report Close Approaches

Now, lets generate some hard data.
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Advanced CAT
AdvCAT
Show Reports
On
Show Graphs
Off
Style
Close Approach By Min Range
Generate as
Report/Graph
4. Use the report to answer the following questions:
Were there any additional close approaches during the new two (2)
hour period? If so, did the ellipsoids intersect?
What was the span of ranges of the conjunctions?
You may notice TLE 28074 has nearly identical conjunction times as our
piece of debris, yet the range is different. TLE 28074 is the piece of debris you
previously examined. The difference in times/range results from SOCRATES
and this scenario using TLEs with different epochs.
WHEN YOU FINISH

1. Close the report.
The Big Picture

By using the View From/To button and adjusting the animation time, you
could examine any of these conjunctions in detail, as you did with our initial
conjunction. However, lets look at the big picture. You want to see all of the
objects you initially considered in our analysis (this will include those objects
which were eventually eliminated by our filters).
2. Reset ( ) the animation. This may take a few minutes.
Wow! That is a busy scene! This view gives you an idea of what is up there. Of
course, keep in mind that each green ellipsoid you are seeing is magnitude
larger than the object inside it. Still, space is a busy place!
Be sure to zoom out far enough that you can clearly see the geostationary belt!
GET MOVING!
Lets quickly animate to see what things look like in space.
1. Increase the Time Step ( ).
FIGURE 6-8.
3D View: All Objects in Space
When You Finish

1. Close the scenario ( ) without saving.
2. Close STK ( ).
3. Close SOCRATES.
Use What You Know

Use what youve leaned over the past couple of days to complete some
XM OR SIRIUS?
Suppose that SIRIUS an XM were still two different providers. Use what you
know to develop an analysis that will answer the following questions:
Which satellite service provides access to service the longest?
Does either provide service all the way to Nagasaki?
Which satellite service provides more extensive coverage in the continental
US? The world?
LETS GO OFF ROAD!

Youre planning a snowmobiling trip. On this trip, you and your friends plan
to be off road a lot, and going through some steep terrain areas. You want to
have your GPS should you encounter any problems such as avalanches or
breakdowns. You need to analyze your GPS coverage to make sure youll
never be without coverage. Then they can make as crazy a path as they
wantdeep into areas that a road would never cover.
COLLISION AVOIDANCE
Use SOCRATES and STK to model the near collisions for today. Model their
range and range rates using the Vector Geometry Tool as well.
Optimizing Mission Planning

Version 9

800.220.4785 610.981.8000
2010-04
Overview
Welcome to the Optimizing Mission Planning training course.This course is a
collection of instructor-led exercises the provide hands-on experience with a
objects and their environments, but how to model, analyze, assess, plan, and
optimize missions, including orbits optimization, ground station placements,
sensor scanning, connecting to other external applications, and real- time data
transfer optimization.
STK Basic Edition

STK Integration Module
STK Terrain Imagery, & Maps Module
STK Standard Analysis Modules including:
STK/Analyzer and the Optimizer Extension
STK/Astrogator
STK/Scheduler
STK/AMM
Table Of Contents
Which Two Communications Nodes Will Provide the Most

Extensive Coverage? ...................................................................... 1-1
Identify the Analysis Area .....................................................................................1-4
Where Am I? ..........................................................................................................1-6
Node Coverage ......................................................................................................1-8
Measure The Quality of Coverage.......................................................................1-12
What Do I Want to See?......................................................................................1-12
Set Up the Analyzer Experiment..........................................................................1-14
Design Variables..................................................................................................1-14
Run Analyzer!.......................................................................................................1-16
Further Analysis ...................................................................................................1-19
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................1-19
Can I Image Locations On the Ground From a Predator?........... 2-1
Outline an Area of Interest ....................................................................................2-4
What Is Connect?...................................................................................................2-6
Message Formats ..................................................................................................2-7
Use Connect To Model the Hot Spots .................................................................2-12
Table Of Contents
The Button Tool....................................................................................................2-15

Adjust the Model Scale .......................................................................................2-19
Get the Hot Spots Above Ground ........................................................................2-21
Automate Properties Definition...........................................................................2-22
Did I Do It? ...........................................................................................................2-22
Declutter Labels...................................................................................................2-24
Add an Az/El Mask ..............................................................................................2-25
Clone the SetConstraints Command....................................................................2-26
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................2-29
Import the Predator..............................................................................................2-29
Constrain the Predator.........................................................................................2-31
What Can the Predator See? ...............................................................................2-31
On Your Own........................................................................................................2-34
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................2-34
How Can I Optimize My Data Collection Schedule? ................... 3-1
STK/Scheduler .......................................................................................................3-3
Have Scheduler Ingest STK Objects ......................................................................3-5
Resources...............................................................................................................3-6
Creating A New Resource in Scheduler ................................................................3-9
Targeting Versus Scheduling...............................................................................3-11
Tasks ....................................................................................................................3-11
Deleting a Task ....................................................................................................3-15
Using Resource Groups in a Task ........................................................................3-15
Generate a Schedule ...........................................................................................3-17
How the Schedule is Computed ..........................................................................3-18
Changing Priorities...............................................................................................3-20
Maximizing Duration............................................................................................3-21
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................3-23
At What True Anomaly Should I Perform a Burn If I Want
To Minimize Fuel Usage?............................................................... 4-1
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
What Is Astrogator?...............................................................................................4-4
Mission Control Sequence.....................................................................................4-4
Initial State ............................................................................................................4-5
Target Sequence....................................................................................................4-6
Target Maneuver Variables .................................................................................4-17
MCS Controls.......................................................................................................4-18
Carpet Plot ...........................................................................................................4-20
Examining the Results .........................................................................................4-22
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................4-24
How Can I Model My Mission Battlespace & Analyze Access
To Tactical Broadcasts? ................................................................. 5-1
GIS Analyst Extension............................................................................................5-5
GIS Data As STK Objects.....................................................................................5-12
Model Boundaries................................................................................................5-12
Custom Workflows ..............................................................................................5-14
Area Displays.......................................................................................................5-15
Model Enemy Forces............................................................................................5-17
Model Task Force Omega ....................................................................................5-20
Forward Line of Troops ........................................................................................5-23
Access To Tactical Report Broadcasts ................................................................5-24
RivetJoint to Rescue............................................................................................5-26
Model the GPS Network......................................................................................5-28
Model the Chain of Events ..................................................................................5-29
Who Else Can See Rescue?.................................................................................5-30
When You Finish..................................................................................................5-32
How Can I Simulate & Analyze a Tactical Rescue Operation
In Real-time? ................................................................................... 6-1
Reacquaint Yourself With Battlespace .................................................................6-3
Real Time Tracking Tool (RT3) ...............................................................................6-5
III
Table Of Contents
Prepare For the Simulation ....................................................................................6-6

RT3 Display Manager ............................................................................................6-7
Select a Provider....................................................................................................6-8
Create a Query .....................................................................................................6-10
Query Ships..........................................................................................................6-13
DIS Log.................................................................................................................6-16
Start the Simulation.............................................................................................6-17
Entities & Objects ................................................................................................6-18
Promoting Entities................................................................................................6-20
Restart the Simulation.........................................................................................6-22
3D Display............................................................................................................6-22
Who Else Can See Rescue?.................................................................................6-25
When You Finish..................................................................................................6-26
Use What You Know.............................................................................................. B-i
iv
Which Two Communications

Nodes Will Provide the Most
Extensive Coverage?
EXERCISE 1
In this exercise you will use your STK expertise to determine which combination of two ground
communications nodes (of 4 possible locations) will provide the greatest coverage over an area.
Upon completion, you will have had the opportunity to practice:
Loading a custom report style.

Perform coverage analysis that accounts for the impact of terrain.
Set up and run a Design of Experiment (DOE) analysis in Analyzer.
Which Two Communications Nodes Will Provide the Most Extensive Coverage?
Problem Statement
After the Hayman fire of 2002, you were assigned to analyze current and
future methods of combatting forest fires in the area. Youve already modeled
and analyzed the REMSAT communications system, which would allow you
to have extensive communication between headquarters and your crews in the
field.
You need to do some additional analysis on the area to either side of Highway
67 within southern Douglas County. Firefighters equipped with backpack
mounted antennas will fan across an area to either side of the highway up to
the top of the first ridgeline. It is crucial that you know where your firefighters
will have communication with headquarters (and where they wont) as they
spread through the exercise area.
The system that you modeled earlier included four (4) ground-based nodes
that relay critical data between the firefighters and the Globalstar satellites and
ultimately headquarters. Now some concerns over budget have arisen. You
may have to cut two of your nodes from the exercise. You will only be able to
use two nodes, rather than four, in your system. You need to determine which
combination of two nodes (of the 4 possible locations) will provide the
greatest coverage over the exercise area. Should the budget cuts materialize,
you will know which two nodes would provide you the greatest coverage over
the exercise area.
BREAK IT DOWN
You will limit your analysis to a twenty-four (24) hour period.
Highway 67 runs through a very mountainous region of Colorado;
therefore, it is essential that you consider the effects of the terrain on your
communications system.
Firefighters will be outfitted with backpack mounted antennas to
communicate their coordinates and other information back to
headquarters via communication nodes in the area.
You only have funding to support two of these nodes.
The exercise area being considered is a small subset of Douglas County
spanning east and west of Highway 67 up to the first ridgeline.
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 2
WHICH TWO COMMUNICATIONS NODES WILL PROVIDE THE MOST EXTENSIVE COVERAGE?
SOLUTION
Build an STK scenario that uses the four node locations to analyze
communications between crews in the field and the nodes. Use STK/
Analyzer to perform a coverage analysis of the exercise area using all possible
combinations of two of the four different node locations. Determine which
combination of two nodes provides the greatest percentage coverage of a
defined portion of the Hayman burn area.

REMSAT_CrewRelay scenario analyzes the communications used in the
REMSAT system over the same time-period in the same area. This scenario
also models and considers the mountainous terrain of the burn area that falls
within Douglas County. Use that model as your base.
3. Locate the REMSAT_CrewRelay scenario that you saved earlier (C:\My
4. Select REMSAT_CrewRelay.sc.

1. Open REMSAT_CrewRelays ( ) properties ( ).
3. Change the Description to Which two communications nodes will provide the most
extensive coverage..
4. Click OK.
REMOVE ACCESSES
Removing accesses will improve performance and ensure that the access
display is not obstructing your view.
Exercise 1 | Page 3
1. Select REMSAT_CrewRelay ( ) in the Object Browser.

2. Extend the Analysis menu.
3. Select Remove All Accesses.
SAVE THE SCENARIO

scenario file (*.sc) REMSAT_WhichNodes.
Identify the Analysis Area

The previous scenario used the entire area of Douglas County that falls within
the burn area as its analysis area. This analysis requires that you analyze
coverage in a subset of that area--the area along Highway 67 within southern
Douglas County. Well create a simple area target object to outline the area that
we want to analyze.
1. Open the Insert STK Object tool ( ) if it is not already.
TABLE 1-1. Create
OPTION
an area target
VALUE
Area Target
Select a Method:
Area Target Wizard

When you click the Insert... button, the Area Target Wizard will appear.
THE AREA TARGET WIZARD

The Area Target Wizard is used to insert an area target, define its perimeter,
and set its graphic properties.
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 4
FIGURE 1-1.
Area Target Wizard
The Area Target Wizard can define the boundaries of an area target using one
of the two area types outlined below.
TABLE 1-2. Area
types
AREA TYPE DESCRIPTION

Ellipse
Define an elliptical area boundary by specifying the semi-major axis,

semi-minor axis, bearing, and centroid.
Pattern
Define the boundary of an area target by clicking on the map or

manually entering the coordinates for perimeter points.
In this example, you will define a pattern area around the area where the
nodes are located.
4. Go back to the Area Target Wizard.
5. Enter the following:
Exercise 1 | Page 5
TABLE 1-3. Area
target creation parameters
OPTION
VALUE
Name
Exercise_Area
Area Type
Pattern
DEFINE THE BOUNDARY

Define perimeter points by clicking on the Area Target Wizard's map or
entering coordinates directly in the Points table. Each time you click on the
map, latitude and longitude values for that point will be added to the points
table and that point will be displayed on the map. You must insert at least
three points to define an area target.
1. Click the Insert Point button beside the boundary points list.
2. Enter the following values:
of first exercise boundary point
POINT
COORDINATE
VALUE
COORDINATE
VALUE
Point 1
Latitude
39.223
Longitude
-105.19
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 above to enter the rest of the points that will outline
the boundary of the exercise area:
of additional exercise boundary point
POINT
COORDINATE
VALUE
COORDINATE
VALUE
Point 2
Latitude
39.1605
Longitude
-105.175
Point 3
Latitude
39.1609
Longitude
-105.15
Point 4
Latitude
39.223
Longitude
-105.167
Where Am I?
Lets take a look at the analysis area that youve defined in both 2D and 3D.
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 6
FIGURE 1-2.
2D View: Boundary of the analysis area
Notice that the new analysis area (yellow outline) covers only a small portion
of the burn area (red outline) that falls within Douglas County (gray outline).
Now, lets get a better look at the analysis area in 3D.
1. Make Exercise_Area ( ) the focal point in the 3D Graphics window.
2. Use the mouse to zoom out until you can see the entire area target.
The terrain and the outline for the burn area and Douglas County are visible,
but the boundaries of the exercise area are not. The area target is buried
beneath the terrain. Lets raise the are target boundaries a bit.
RAISE THE 3D BOUNDARIES

STK allows you to raise the boundaries above the terrain so they are clearly
visible.
1. Open Exercise_Areas ( ) properties ( ).
TABLE 1-6. 3D
Graphics attributes for area targets
OPTION
VALUES
Show Boundary Wall
On
Upper Edge
Height from Terrain
Height From terrain
0.1 km
Exercise 1 | Page 7
4. Click OK.
6. Take a look in the 3D Graphics window. You can now see the area in which
your training exercise will be conducted
FIGURE 1-3.
3D View: Boundary of the analysis area
Take a good look at the 3D Graphics window and answer the following
questions:
Can you see the outline of the area around the exercise area?
Can you see the portion of the exercise area that runs through the area
target?
Node Coverage
You want to assess the coverage of any two (2) of the four (4) nodes within
the area that youve outlined along Highway 67. To set up your coverage
analysis, you will need to specify the region being examined, how each grid
point should be treated, and what assets will be used to examine the region.
EXERCISE AREA COVERAGE

The first step is to define the area over which youd like to analyze coverage.
Since the area that you want to consider is already outlined by an area target,
we can use that to set the boundaries of your coverage definition.
1. Use the Object Catalog to insert a new coverage definition object ( ).
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 8
2. Rename the new coverage definition Node_Cov.

3. Open Node_Covs ( ) properties ( ). The Basic Grid page should
4. Change the Type to Custom Regions.
6. Move ( ) Exercise_Area to the Selected Regions list.
7. Click OK.
8. Change the Point Granularity to Distance.
9. Enter 0.5 mi in the adjacent text box.
STK will convert this to kilometers for you.
10. Click Apply.
GRID RESOLUTION
The typical Lat/Lon option determines the location of grid coordinates by
applying the resolution value at the equator. STK stretches grid points in
longitude at higher or lower latitudes in an attempt to preserve the area of the
grid point. Calculating the grid resolution by distance determines the location
of the grid coordinates by using the specified distance to determine a latitude/
longitude spacing scheme at the equator.
CONSTRAIN COVERAGE IN THE EXERCISE AREA

In order for your analysis to be accurate, each point in your coverage grid
needs to take the local terrain in an azimuth-elevation mask constraint into
account when computing access to the nodes within the defined area. Create
an object whose constraints can be applied to your coverage definition.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bring the Insert STK Objects tool to the front.

Use the Define Properties method to insert a new facility ( ).
Rename the facility Constraints.
In the Constraints ( ) properties ( ), the Basic Position page should
SETTING OBJECT PROPERTIES WITH THE MOUSE

The new facility will act as a constraints source for points in your coverage
grid. The location of the constraints template is unimportant so long as it is
Exercise 1 | Page 9
somewhere on the terrain within the Exercise_Area boundary. You can use
your mouse in the 2D Graphics window to set several object properties that
would otherwise require you to enter numerical position data. Positioning a
facility objects is one of those instances. Lets do that now.
2. With the Basic - Position page open, click anywhere on the terrain within
the Exercise_Area boundary.
Notice that when you click the mouse in the 2D Graphics window, the facility
is moved to the location that you clicked and the Geodetic coordinates are
recorded on the Basic - Position page.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Enable the Use terrain data altitude option.

When you finish, click Apply.
Select the Basic - AzElMask page.
Select Terrain Data in the Use drop down field.
Enable the Use Mask for Access Constraint option.
Click Apply.
GRAPHICS
The new facility will act as a constraints source for points in your coverage
grid. It is not a point of interest in your scenario. You dont need to see it at
all, so lets turn off its graphics properties.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Change the marker type to None.
Click Apply.
Disable the Show option in the Model section.
Click OK.
INTRODUCE THE EXERCISE AREA TO HIS LIMITATIONS

Now, you have a constraints source and you have a defined coverage area.
You need to associate the constraint that youve set with the points in the grid
to which the constraint will be applied.
1. Go back to Node_Covs ( ) properties ( ).
2. Select the Basic - Grid page.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Click the Grid Constraint Options... button.

Select Facility as the Reference Constraint Class option.
Enable the Use Object Instance option.
Select Constraints ( ).
Keep all other defaults.
Click OK.
Click Apply, and leave Node_Covs ( ) properties ( ) open.
GRID POINT ALTITUDE

We want to evaluate coverage at terrain height.
1. Set the Point Altitude to Altitude Above Terrain.
2. Set the value to zero (0) km to set the points at the terrain heights.
3. Click Apply, and leave Node_Covs ( ) properties ( ) open.
ASSIGN ASSETS
Assets properties allow you to specify the STK objects used to provide
coverage. You want to know how much coverage your nodes have along
Highway 67. We will use Analyzer to group these four (4) nodes into
combinations of two later.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the Assets page.

Select the Nodes constellation ( ).
Click Assign.
Click Apply.

before we need to.
1. Open the Basic - Advanced page.
3. Click OK.
Advanced properties allow you to adjust the manner in which access
information is stored and computed. These properties can be used for large
coverage problems where access computations are time-consuming and much
memory would be needed to store access data. They can also be useful when,
as is the case here, you will be making changes so you want to control when
access is computed.
Measure The Quality of Coverage

For this exercise you are only concerned about determining the amount of
area in the exercise area that has coverage by at least one node. This type of
coverage analysis requires only a Simple Coverage calculation. You need to
measure whether or not each point in the coverage grid over the analysis area
is accessible by any of the assigned assets (either of the two nodes assigned for
that particular coverage run). Add a Figure of Merit so that we can see where in
the analysis you do and dont have coverage.
1. Attach a Figure of Merit ( ) to Node_Cov ( ) by using the Object
Catalog.
2. Rename it HowsMyCov.
3. Open HowsMyCovs ( ) properties ( ). The Basic - Definition page should
4. Ensure that Type is set to Simple Coverage.
5. Click OK.
What Do I Want to See?

When you compute coverage, you will be interested in only one result--the
percent coverage that the nodes provide in the analysis area. You will be
looking for a single value. The existing Percent Satisfied report would include
several values that are not of interest to your analysis.
STK offers users the ability to create their own report and graph styles. When
you create a new report or graph in STK, the style file (.rst for reports and.rsg
for graphs) is stored in your default working directory, not the C:\Program
Files\AGI\STK 9\STKData\Styles directory. Templates stored in the default
working directory will be automatically loaded into STK when working in that
directory. A previously created report style has been created for you and
stored in the scenario directory in your student area. You need to load that
style to run that report.
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Figure of Merit
CoverageDefintion/Node_Cov/HowsMyCov
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select the MyStyles folder.

Click Import Style button ( ).
Browse to C:\Training\STK\REMSAT\ReportStyles.
Select SimpleCoveragePercent.rst.
Click Open.
Now you can access and edit this report style thorough the Report & Graph
Manager interface.
8. Select SimpleCoveragePercent ( ) from the Styles list.
9. Click the Properties button ( ) to open the design view for this report.
What value will this report style return?
What will it tell you about node coverage in the analysis area?
The SimpleCoveragePercent report will return one line of data--Static Satisfaction Percent Satisfied.
Static Satisfaction is the amount of the coverage analysis grid which satisfies
satisfaction criteria defined in the figure of merit based on the static definition
of the figure of merit. Percent Satisfied is the percentage of coverage grid area
which is satisfied. It is computed by summing the areas associated with all
satisfied grid points, dividing by the total grid area and multiplying by 100.
10. When you finish, click Cancel.
Your scenario seems to contain all of the necessary elements. Now you can
use Analyzer to squeeze out some real data.
12. Before you go any further, save ( ) the scenario ( ).
When using Analyzer, it is important to have all of your objects already

created in STK. Analyzer ingests these objects. If an object is added to
or deleted from your STK scenario after Analyzer has been initiated, a
manual re-synchronization should be executed to ensure Analyzer is
using the same objects as the STK scenario itself.
Now youre ready to use Analyzer to perform coverage analysis of the region
using all possible combinations of two nodes.
Set Up the Analyzer Experiment

The DOE (Design of Experiments) tool is used to create and perform tables of
runs for a scenario.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select REMSAT_WhichNodes ( ) in the Object Browser.

Extend the Analysis menu.
Select Analyzer...
When the Analyzer window appears, click the Design of Experiments (DOE)
trade study link.
Be patient! It will take Analyzer a few minutes to ingest all of the STK
objects.
Design Variables
Input and output variables must be specified for the DOE tool. The inputs are
used to build the design table that will be run. Once values have been
specified for each input variable, the DOE tool will automatically construct
the table from each of the values.
In this experiment the design variables will be the four (4) nodes assigned as
assets in the coverage definition. We must work with the assets of the
coverage definition, rather than the facility objects representing the nodes.
1. Expand the component tree as follows:
... Scenario
... Node_Cov
... Assets
The four nodes from your scenario will be listed here. Currently, each nodes
value is True, meaning they are all currently assigned as assets for the
coverage and will all be considered in your analysis. What youd like is to
examine coverage using every possible combination of nodes where two
nodes set to True and two to False.
INPUT VARIABLES
The four nodes will be your input variables.
1. Select the four nodes listed as Assets for Node_Cov ( ).
2. Drag them individually (Node1, Node2, Node3, Node4) to the Design
Variables window.
OUTPUT VARIABLES
Now, lets define the output variable.
1. Click the beside Standard ( ).
2. Set the Value for reportName to SimpleCoveragePercent.
Analyzer is case sensitive. The report name must be exactly the same
as the style name in STK.
3. Change the Object Value to Node_Cov/HowsMyCov.

4. Expand ( ) ReportValue1 beneath Standard.
5. Drag ave (average) to the Response section.
Since our ave, min and max values would be the same for our overall
coverage, we could have used any of these values.
TABLE OF RUNS
Once the Design Variables and Responses are in place, you can set up the table of
runs.
1. Select the Design Table tab.
Notice that a table already exists for us. It shows all possible combinations for
using 4 nodes (everything ranging from 4 trues to 4 falses). However, we only
want to combine our 4 nodes into pairs of two. There are only 6 possible
combinations.
2. Delete rows 7-16 in the table.

3. Adjust the remaining six (6) rows in your table to reflect the combinations
that you want to analyze. They should look like this:
TABLE 1-8. Design
table values
NODE 1
NODE 2
NODE 3
NODE 4
true
true
false
false
true
false
true
false
true
false
false
true
false
true
true
false
false
true
false
true
false
false
true
true
SAVING AN ANALYSIS CONFIGURATION

Before you run the analysis, lets save the setup. When a configuration is saved
in Analyzer, it is not actually saved until the STK scenario is saved.
1. Click the Add to Favorites ( ) button at the top of the window.
You will be prompted to provide a name.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Enter a name like REMSAT Node Analysis.

Click OK.
Move the Analyzer window so the STK interface is visible.
Run Analyzer!
The DOE experiment is ready to execute. You should expect this to take
some time, as you are computing six different coverage analyses, each one
taking terrain into account for all of the grid points and nodes in your
scenario.
1. Slide the DOE tool off to the left where it is not obstructing your view of
the STK Workspace, but the Run... button is still available.
2. Bring the 2D and 3D Graphics windows to the front.
3. Click the Run button.
4. When the Data Explorer window pops up, move it off to the left too.
As your coverage computations compute, you can watch the progress on your
2D or 3D Graphics windows. It will take a few minutes for the various
coverage runs to complete.
5. Move the Data Explorer window back to where you can see it on the
desktop.
Notice that left side lists a table and a graph. We will examine the table first.
6. Take a look at the resulting table to answer the following questions:
Which combination of nodes resulted in the greatest percent coverage
of the analysis area?
Which combination of nodes resulted in the least percent coverage of

the analysis area?
What was the greatest percent coverage?
Which two nodes would you keep?
MAIN EFFECTS PLOT

Every time the DOE tool is run, a Main Effects chart is automatically created in
the Data Explorer. The Main Effects plots can help understand how each input
variable affects a specific output variable. The Main Effects chart computes the
Main Effect for a given input parameter in a rather simple manner: the average
value of a response variable when the input parameter is at its lower bound is
subtracted from the average value of the response variable when the input
parameter is at its upper bound.
A simple example of how to compute main effects with two factors (input
variables) and response (output variable) is shown below:
|Avg. value of response when Factor A is at its high value - Avg.
value of response when Factor A is at its low value|
= |(40 + 60)/2 - (30 + 20)/2|
= |50 - 25|
= 25
|Avg. value of response when Factor B is at its high value - Avg.
value of response when Factor B is at its low value|
= |(30 + 60)/2 - (20+40)/2|
= |45 - 30|
= 15
Main Effect A = 100*(A / (A + B)
= 100*(25/40)
= 62.5%
Main Effect B = 100*(B / (A + B)
= 100*(15/40)
= 37.5%
A slightly more complicated example of how Main Effects are calculated can
be seen in our REMSAT Node example.
In this case, there are four factors (Node1, Node2, Node3, Node4) and a single
response (ave). A factor is at its high value when it has a value of true. A Factor
is at its low value when it has a value of false. This table of data results in the
following calculation.
Node1 = |(42.9 + 28.6 + 28.6)/3 - (36.7 + 44.9 + 34.7)/3| = |33.4 38.8| = 5.4
Node2 = |(42.9 + 36.7 + 44.9)/3 - (28.6 + 28.6 + 34.7)/3| = |41.5 30.6| = 10.9
Node3 = |(28.6 + 36.7 + 34.7)/3 - (42.9 + 28.6 + 44.9)/3| = |33.3 38.8| = 5.5
Node4 = |(28.6 + 44.9 + 34.7)/3 - (42.9 + 28.6 + 36.7)/3| = |36.1 36.1| = 0
Node 1 + Node 2 + Node 3 + Node 4 = 21.8
Main Effect Node1 = 100*5.4/21.8 = 25%
Main Effect Node2 = 100*10.9/21.8 = 50%
Main Effect Node3 = 100*5.5/21.8 = 25%
Main Effect Node4 = 100*0.0/21.8 = 0%
These results can be seen in the main effects plot in your results. Note that in
this calculation/plot, Node4 is shown to have a value of zero (0). This does not
mean that Node4 never has an effect on the response, but that when the values
of the other factors are considered, the net average affect on the response is
zero (0).
7. Click on the graph on the left side of the Data Explorer window.
Take a look at the resulting graph. It shows the relative amount that each
node contributed to providing coverage to the region.
STK/Analyzers Main Effects calculation does not accurately account for
Interaction Effects (how combinations of design variables affect a
response) or nonlinear functions, so caution should be used when
interpreting results.
The Variable Influence Profiler (available with STK/Optimizer) utilizes a
more sophisticated analysis for calculating Main Effects and Interaction
Effects, but it only supports numerical data (boolean data is not
supported at this time). More information on the Variable Influence
Profiler is available in STK/Analyzers help file).
Further Analysis
Now you know which two nodes would provide the greatest coverage of the
exercise area. To determine WHERE you have coverage in the exercise area,
you could simply assign these two nodes as assets in your coverage definition
in STK and then compute the coverage accesses. This would then provide you
with the data that is so critical to ensuring the safety of your firefighters-where would fire fighters be in a communications black out?
Save Your Work

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Close the Data Explorer window.

Close Analyzer.
Save ( ) your work.
Leave STK ( ) open.
Can I Image Locations On

the Ground From a Predator?
EXERCISE 2
In this exercise you will use Microsoft Excel and STK/Connect to help plan an UAV
mission. Upon completion you will be able to:
Use STK/Connect to load and position several targets that are provided for you in an
Excel spreadsheet
Format the cell contents from an Excel spreadsheet into Connect commands
Create a Button Tool to execute a series of Connect commands
Create an HTML interface from a Button Tool file
Can I Image Locations On the Ground From a Predator?
Problem Statement
Intelligence sources have revealed potentially dangerous activity in several
caves in Afghanistan. Your commanding officer has forwarded you the
coordinates for those sites in an Excel spreadsheet. He wants you to get a
closer look at any or ideally all of those locations. Without knowing what
exactly is going on at these sites, sending men in is far too dangerous. How
will you survey the caves up close?
The Predator B is an Unmanned Aerial Vehicle (UAV) that is being evaluated by
military and civil government agencies for everything from battlefield
visualization and logistical supply to emergency response systems and package
delivery. You would like to send the Predator UAV into Afghanistan to gather
more detailed information about movement in and around the caves,
specifically photo imagery.
BREAK IT DOWN
There are ten (10) identified hot spots in and around the caves.
An Excel spreadsheet detailing the location of the hot spots has been
provided for you.

You must load the target locations that are in the Excel spreadsheet into
STK.
You want to image the area in and around the caves from a UAV.
Your analysis needs to consider the mountainous terrain of Northern
Afghanistan.
The Predator will be ready to go on 2 July 2009.
SOLUTION
Use STK and Connect to model the enemy sites in a scenario and model the
effectiveness of sending in the Predator to survey the area in and around the
caves of Afghanistan.

Previously, you used a starter scenario that provided a based model of the
terrain at the camp in northern Afghanistan to determine the impact that it
would have on the ground based radar that you set up at that location. You
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 2
CAN I IMAGE LOCATIONS ON THE GROUND FROM A PREDATOR?
can use that same scenario as your starting point again. This scenario can be
found in the student files area.
3. Locate the student files provided for this exercise in the training files area
(C:\Training\STK\Afghan\Scenarios).
4. Select Afghan_Starter.vdf ( ).
5. Click Open.
The starter scenario provides an outline of Afghanistan, but all of the hot
spots are in North East Afghanistan within the boundaries outlined in Table 22. Lets remove the Afghanistan area target. Later you will create an area target
that will outline the area within which the hot spots are concentrated and
make it more obvious where you want to focus.
1. Select Afghanistan ( ) in the Object Browser.
2. Delete ( ) Afghanistan ( ).
ANALYSIS TIMES
The Predator will be available and ready to roll on 2 July 2009. Ideally, you
would like to surveil the area for about seven hours. Lets change the analysis
period to reflect that.
1. Open Afghan_Radars ( ) properties ( ).
2. Select the Basic - Times page.
3. Set the following Analysis Period options:
TABLE 2-1.
OPTION
VALUE
Start Time
2 Jul 2009 17:00:00.000 UTCG
Stop Time
+ 7 hours
Epoch Time
Use Analysis Start Time
Exercise 2 | Page 3
Since you will only be looking at the Predators surveillance mission in this
exercise, you can also limit the animation time to the length of the Predators
flight.
4. Ensure that the Use Analysis Start Time option is enabled in the Animation
area.

2. Change the Description to Can I survey ten different locations from a UAV?.
3. Click Apply.
GLOBE SURFACE REFERENCE & MISSION MODELER

In this exercise you will be using an aircraft that was designed in Aircraft
Mission Modeler (AMM). The globe surface reference is currently set to
WGS84--the STK default setting. AMM performs best in the 3D Graphics
window when the surface reference of the globe is set to Mean Sea Level.
Change the globe surface reference now.
2. Change the Surface At selection in the Surface Reference of Earth Globes area
to Mean Sea Level.
3. Click OK.
SAVE
Before you make any more changes to the scenario, save it with a different
name to preserve the integrity of the previously developed analysis.
4. Save ( ) the new scenario in your default user directory
(C:\My Documents\STK 9). In doing so, create a unique folder and
rename the new folder and the scenario file (*.sc) Afghan_Predator.
Outline an Area of Interest

Now, create an area target that outlines your area of interest within which all
of the hot spots fall.
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 4
1. Open the Insert STK Objects tool ( ) if it is not already.

2. Use the Area Target Wizard method to insert a new Pattern area target ( )
named Hot_Area whose boundaries are as follows:
TABLE 2-2. Area
target boundary points
LATITUDE
LONGITUDE
Point1
37.0952
70.8405
Point2
37.093
71.2089
Point3
36.7487
71.194
Point4
36.7366
70.8277
Lets ensure that the hot area is outlined in a color that will show up well
against the terrain.
3. Change the Color in the Graphics area to Red.
4. Click OK.
RAISE THE BOUNDARY

You took the time to outline the hot area so that you would know where it
is on the globe, but the terrain and imagery are covering it up. Change the
boundary of Afghanistan so that it extends above the top of the terrain.
1. Open Hot_Areas ( ) properties ( ).
TABLE 2-3. 3D
Graphics attributes for area target
OPTION
VALUE
Show Boundary Wall
On
Upper Edge
Height From Terrain
Upper Edge Value
0.1 km
4. Click OK.

2. Make Hot_Area ( ) the focal point in the 3D Graphics window.
Exercise 2 | Page 5
Hot_Area ( ).
If you do not see your boundary above the terrain, go to the scenarios
Basic - Terrain properties and ensure terrain data has been loaded here.
FIGURE 2-1.
3D View: Hot area
What Is Connect?
Before you get started on your scenario, take some time to get acquainted
with Connect and learn how to properly send and receive data.
The Connect module provides you with an easy way to connect with STK and
work in a client-server environment. You can use the library shipped with
Connect to easily build applications that communicate with STK. This library
contains functions, constants and other messaging capabilities that you can
use to connect third-party applications to STK. With Connect, optional
diagnostic messages can be generated. Additionally, Connect allows you to
override the standard messaging and modify it or use your own messaging
format for compatibility with third-party applications. These features allow
you to better control the messaging environment. Connect allows the user to
control STK from an external program.
Connect communicates with STK and 3D Graphics so you can visualize
events in real-time. For instance, you can use Connect to feed real-time
telemetry data from the launch and early orbit of a mission. As a scenario, the
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 6
data can be viewed in 2D or 3D to visualize the mission and assist in

understanding and resolving any issues that may arise.
Message Formats
That explains how your application will send Connect commands to the STK
analytical engine, but it doesnt explain the commands themselves. Lets switch
gears for a minute and take a closer look at Connect command input formats.
Each command follows a basic format for data sent to and from Connect. The
command syntax specifies the order in which you must generate a Connect
command as well as any parameters and switches associated with the
command.
Single commands sent to Connect use the following format:
<CommandName> <ObjectPath> [<CommandData>]
Although the <CommandName> field isn't case sensitive, the

<ObjectPath> is. <CommandData> may or may not be case sensitive.
COMMAND NAME
The name of a particular command.
In the examples below, the command name is
highlighted in bold.
New /Application/STK Scenario Basic
New / */Satellite BasicLeo
Unload / *
Lighting * Umbra ShowLine On LineColor blue LineWidth 3
WHAT KIND OF COMMAND IS THAT?

Connect allows you to use some shorthand in the form of symbols representing
common objects like the application (/) and scenario (*). That being the case,
the command above tells the STK application (/) to unload the current
scenario (*). Since you can only have one scenario per STK session, the
wildcard can be used in leu of the real scenario name because STK will only
have one choice--the active scenario. Youll learn more about using wildcards
(*) in object paths later.
Exercise 2 | Page 7
PATHS TO OBJECTS IN A SCENARIO

Each STK Object has an object path in the browser hierarchy.
TABLE 2-4. Object
paths
COMMAND NAME
COMMAND MEANING
EXAMPLES
<ApplicationPath>
This is the path to the instance of the current

application. Since only one application can be
opened at a time, the <Application Path> can
also be abbreviated as /.
/Application/STK
or
/
<Scenariopath>
This is the path to the instance of the current

Scenario/<ScenarioName>
scenario. Since only one scenario can be opened or
at a time, the scenario path or name can also be *
represented by a wildcard character * (asterisk)
which indicated the currently loaded scenario.
<ObjectPath>
This is the path to an object instance in the

current scenario. The Scenario/
<ScenarioName> portion of the object path
can be abbreviated with a wildcard character.
Scenario/<ScenarioName>/
<ObjectClass>/<Instance Name>
or
*
Look at the Object Browser in Figure 2-2. Use it as a model as we outline the
command format and object paths for the objects used in this scenario.
FIGURE 2-2.
STK Object Browser
Now, look at the outline of the paths for the objects in the browser in
Figure 2-2 on page 2-8.
TABLE 2-5. Basic
object paths
OBJECT NAME
OBJECT CLASS
OBJECT PATH
Basic
Scenario
Scenario/Basic
Aircraft1
Aircraft
Scenario/Basic/Aircraft/Aircraft1
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 8
TABLE 2-5. Basic
OBJECT NAME
object paths
OBJECT CLASS
OBJECT PATH
Transmitter
Scenario/Basic/Aircraft/Aircraft1/Transmitter/
Transmitter1
Santiago
Facility
Scenario/Basic/Facility/Santiago
BasicLeo
Satellite
Scenario/Basic/Satellite/BasicLeo
BasicConic
Sensor
Scenario/Basic/Satellite/BasicLeo/Sensor/BasicConic
Transmitter1
WILDCARDS (*) IN OBJECT PATHS

The wildcard character (*) can be used in an <InstanceName> in a Connect
<ObjectPath>. The wildcard can only be used in the <ObjectPath> for which
the command is being sent, it can not be used in an <ObjectPath> (or
<TruncatedPath>) that is one of the command parameters. The wildcard
character can not be used in any <ObjectClass> name.
If the wildcard is used in a command returns data, the returned data for each
object represented by the path, will be separated with a keyword,
MDATA@DataLength@, where DataLength is the number of characters in
the returned data for that object.
The wildcard should not be used with commands that write to a file. Only one
file will be written and it will contain the data for the last path found.
When a command is entered using a wildcard in the <ObjectPath>, the path
is expanded into all possible instances and the command is called for each
instance. If any of the commands NACK, then a Back will be returned, even
though some commands may have completed successfully.
For example:
This command would affect all satellites in the active scenario whose name
begins with GPS.

*/Satellite/GPS*
This command would affect all sensors, on the satellite espSat, whose
name ends with Test

Scenario/stkDemo/Satellite/espSat/Sensor/*Test
Exercise 2 | Page 9
This command would affect all sensors on all satellites in the active
scenario whose name begins with Sat.

Scenario/stkDemo/Satellite/Sat*/Sensor/*
This command would affect all sensors on all satellites in the active
scenario.
*/Satellite/*/Sensor/*
Now, look at the outline of the paths for the same objects in the browser in
Figure 2-2 on page 2-8 using wildcards.
TABLE 2-6. Basic
object paths
OBJECT NAME
OBJECT CLASS
OBJECT PATH
Basic
Scenario
Aircraft
*/Aircraft/Aircraft1
*/Aircraft/*
Transmitter1
Transmitter
*/Aircraft/*/Transmitter/*
Santiago
Facility
*/Facility/Santiago
BasicLeo
Satellite
*/Satellite/BasicLeo
BasicConic
Sensor
*/Satellite/BasicLeo/Sensor/*
Aircraft1
COMMAND DATA
fields modify a <CommandName> and may or may not be
required. Please refer to the format of the individual commands for additional
information. In the example below, the command data is highlighted in bold.
<CommandData>
New /Application/STK Scenario Basic

New / */Satellite BasicLeo
Rename * MyScenario
Lighting * Umbra ShowLine On LineColor blue LineWidth 3
Access */Facility/Santiago */Satellite/BasicLeo On On On
COMMAND SYNTAX ELEMENTS

The following table outlines the use of markings in command format.
TABLE 2-7. Command
MARKING
<IndividualValues>
markings
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLE
Descriptions of individual values for

parameters that must be specified are
enclosed in angle brackets.
<Value>
This example indicates that a single value
is entered, the command description will
provide more detail of what the value can
be, for example: a real number between
0.0 and 99999.9.
{Options}
Values surrounded by curly brackets

{ColorName | ColorNumber}
indicate a choice between any number of To indicate the color of something, you
available parameters.
can use either the ColorName OR the
ColorNumber, but not both.
{Option | Option}
Bars are used between options to indicate {Primary | Secondary | Compute}

OR.
In this example, enter the word Primary
OR Secondary OR Compute.
{<Value> | StartTime StopTime}
In this example, the options are <Value>
OR StartTime AND StopTime.
[OptionalValues]
{Option [|] Option}
Values surrounded by square brackets

indicate optional parameters. These
options can be used in addition to the
required parameters but are not required.
{SphereOption1} <Value1>
[<WindowID>]
In this example, you must specify
{SphereOption} and <Value> pair and
you may specify <WindowID>.
Square Brackets around a Bar indicates

AND/OR.
{<Name> [|] StartTime}

In this example enter, <Name> OR
StartTime OR <Name> AND
StartTime
TABLE 2-7. Command
MARKING
[OptionalValues...]
<Values In Quotes>
markings
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLE
Ellipses indicate that multiple values of

the same type may be entered. Values
surrounded by square brackets indicate
optional parameters. These options can
be used in addition to the required
parameters but are not necessary.
{SphereOption1} <Value1>
[{SphereOption2} <Value2>...]
In this example, you must specify one
{SphereOption} <Value> pair and you
may optionally specify any number of
additional {SphereOption} <Value>
pairs.
The value entered must be enclosed in

double quotation marks.
<FilePath>
This example indicates that a file path
must be entered, and the value must be
enclosed in double quotation marks. For
example: c:/Temp/MyFile.txt
Use Connect To Model the Hot Spots

You have the coordinates for the ten caves that you need to scan in an Excel
spreadsheet. Lets open that spreadsheet now.
1. Locate the Excel spreadsheet in the student files provided for this exercise
(C:\Training\STK\Afghan).
2. Open HotSpots.xls.
Each cave has been identified as a hot spot. You need to use the
coordinates for each cave to create a target object in STK. You can use Connect
commands to create, position, and define each site.
CLONE THE NEW CONNECT COMMAND

The New command will create and rename a target object in STK. The generic
format for the New command is as follows:
New <ApplicationPath> <ClassOfObjectToCreate> <NewObjectName>
Now, lets use that format combined with the information in your Excel
spreadsheet to write a command that will create ten facilities, named
HotSpot_01-10, and add them to the active scenario. To create the commands,
you need to take the data out of each cell, format the data and then
concatenate the data into a Connect command
1. Select cell B2 in the HotSpots spreadsheet.

2. Enter an equals sign (=) in the formula (fx) bar at the top of the
spreadsheet.
3. Enter, or copy and paste from cell A13, the following in the formula (fx)
bar at the top of the spreadsheet:
"New" & " " & "/" & " " & "Target" & " " & A2
You can copy the desired text (contents from A13, for example) from
the formula (fx) bar than from the cells.
A2 is the cell containing the site name that you want to use, HotSpot_01, and
the equal (=) sign preceding the string tells Excel that you are entering a
formula.
4. Push Enter on your keyboard.
Once you push Enter, the cell will contain a correctly formatted Connect
command that looks like this:
New / Target HotSpot_01
If you want to see the entire contents of column B, you can expand the
width by placing the cursor directly on the divider between columns B
and C and double-click.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Select cell B2 again.

Click Copy ( ).
Select cells B3 through B11.
Click Paste ( ).
You can also highlight B2 and double-click the square at the lower
right corner of the highlighted cell. This will allow you to copy the rest of
the cells.
When you paste the string that creates the command to the other cells it
should automatically create correctly formatted Connect command for each
target.
This makes it easy for us to create commands using a tool like Excel.
CLONE THE POSITION CONNECT COMMAND

The New command creates an object at a default location, so if you simply
entered these New commands, you would have ten facilities all at the same
location. You need to position each object using the geodetic coordinates
provided.
Use the SetPosition (Facility) command to move the hot spots to their proper
locations. The generic format for the SetPosition command is as follows:
SetPosition <ObjectPath> {CoordType} <Parameters>
Each target will have the same coordinate type but different coordinates. To
create each SetPositon command, you need to concatenate the latitude and
longitude into a command.
1. Select cell F2 in the HotSpots spreadsheet.
spreadsheet.
3. Enter, or copy and paste from cell C15, the following in the formula (fx)
"SetPosition" & " " & "*/Target/" & A2 & " " & "Geodetic" & " "
& D2 & " " & E2 & " " & "Terrain"
A2 is the cell containing the site name that you want to reposition, and D2
and E2 are the cells containing the latitude and longitude at which the object
specified should be positioned.
SetPosition */Target/HotSpot_01 Geodetic 36.934959 70.876781
Terrain
5.
6.
7.
8.
Select cell F2 again.

Click Copy ( ).
Select cells F3 through F11.
Click Paste ( ).
When you paste the string that creates the command to the other cells it
should automatically create a correctly formatted SetPosition command for
each target.
9. Save the Excel spreadsheet (HotSpots.xls) to your scenario directory
(C:\My Documents\STK 9\Afghan_Predator).
The Button Tool

The Button Tool is a program written in Perl with a graphical user interface that
allows you to execute actions in STK using Connect commands. Use the Button
Tool to pass the Connect commands that you just created to STK.
1. Double-click the Button Tool shortcut ( ) on your Desktop.
STK does not create a Button Tool shortcut on your desktop. This
shortcut must be created manually. You can find the executable for the
Button Tool in C:\Program Files\AGI\STK 9\Connect\Button_Tool\bin\PC.
2. When the Button Tool opens, click the Connect radio button.
3. When the Connect to STK dialog appears, ensure that the appropriate
Socket (5001) and Host Name (localHost) are specified.
4. Click Connect.
FIGURE 2-3.
Connecting the Button Tool to STK
To provide a clear visual indicator of your connection status, the border

around the Button Tool when not connected is RED, but when it is
connected the border will turn GREEN.
MOVE THE NEW COMMANDS TO THE BUTTON TOOL

You need to create a button that will pass all of the commands that will create
the different targets in STK.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Go back to HotSpots.xls.
Select cells B2 through B11.
Click Copy ( ).
Bring the Button Tool interface to the front.
Click the Clear Output button.
Right-click in the Output window.
Select Edit - Paste from the floating menu.
MOVE THE SETPOSITION COMMANDS

Now, add the commands that will position each object once it is created.
1. Go back to HotSpots.xls.
2. Copy ( ) cells F2 through F11.
3. Paste them in the Output window of the Button Tool interface below the
New commands.
All of the commands should be listed in the Output window.
The scroll bar is located on the left side of the Button Tool Output
window.
CREATE A BUTTON
The Button Tool is named for its ability to create buttons that can execute a
series of Connect commands. While you are using a convenient utility to create
our button, buttons can also be created by manually editing a Button Tool file
(*.btip) in a text editor. The Button Tool can be very useful for executing
repetitive tasks and eliminating typographical errors in command syntax.
Once a button is created, it can be associated with one or more Connect
commands, text strings, or system calls.
1. Extend the Tools menu.

2. Select the Command btn from Output window option.
FIGURE 2-4.
Pasting commands into the Button Tool interface
3. Enter Create Hot Spots in the Label text box.

4. Click Create. You should see your new button appear above the command
text box.
The button youve created is a command button. Command buttons execute a
single action or a series of commands. They are useful when you have to
execute the same command or series of commands repeatedly - like building a
scenario that always contains the same objects, opening a report, or setting a
constraint.
FIGURE 2-5.
Button Tool with Create HotSpots button
Now lets test your new button.

5. Clear the Output window again by clicking the Clear Output button.
6. Click the Create HotSpots button.
DID I DO IT?
Lets see how you did.
What objects are in the Object Browser?
3. Zoom In ( ) around the target objects in the 2D Graphics window.
FIGURE 2-6.
2D View: Hot Spots
Adjust the Model Scale

Lets see how the targets look in the 3D Graphics window.
FIGURE 2-7.
3D View: Hot Spots at 2.5 scale
The targets created here use the default target model which is a simple bulls
eye used to mark a position on the surface of the Earth. You cant even see
the bulls eye markers in the 3D Graphics window. Besides being partially
hidden by the terrain, they are also too small to be visible at a distance
appropriate to view the entire hot area, and are therefore being marked with a
generic marker (X) in the 3D Graphics window. Lets use Connect again to
adjust the size of the target models. Changing the size of the target will not
affect your analysis. STK knows the location by its latitudinal and longitudinal
coordinates, not by the surface area covered by the model.
CLONE THE VO SCALELOG COMMAND

Use the VO ScaleLog command to set the scale for the targets display in the
3D Graphics window. The generic format for the VO ScaleLog command is as
follows:
VO <ObjectPath> ScaleLog <Value>
Each target needs to be scaled to the same size. You can use the same
command for each target, but you need to concatenate the object name into
each command.
1. Go back to the HotSpots spreadsheet.
2. Select cell G2 in the HotSpots spreadsheet.
spreadsheet.
4. Enter, or copy and paste from cell G16, the following in the formula (fx)
"VO" & " " & "*/Target/" & A2 & " " & "ScaleLog" & " " & "1.5"
Where A2 is the cell containing the name of the site that you want to scale.
VO */Target/HotSpot_01 ScaleLog 1.5
6.
7.
8.
9.
Select cell G2 again.

Click Copy ( ).
Select cells G3 through G11.
Click Paste ( ).
Get the Hot Spots Above Ground

The camera onboard the Predator will be focusing several meters above the
ground because the objects that it will be imaging are not flat on the surface.
Lets raise the targets representing the hot spots slightly so that they are not
flat on the ground and they represent the caves, camps, people, vehicles, etc.
more realistically. This will also help raise them visually so that they dont look
like theyre sinking into the terrain quite as much. Even when raised, the
targets will still intersect the terrain somewhat, but that is to be expected
when you lay a flat, large, horizontal bulls-eye on the ground and surround it
by hills
CLONE THE SETHEIGHTABOVEGROUND COMMAND

Use the SetHeightAboveGround command to set the value for the height above
ground that you want the targets to display. The generic format for the
SetHeightAboveGround command is as follows:
SetHeightAboveGround <ObjectPath> <Height>
Each target needs to be set at the same distance. You can use the same
command for each target, but you need to concatenate the object name into
each command.
1. Select cell H2 in the HotSpots spreadsheet.
spreadsheet.
3. Enter, or copy and paste from cell H17, the following in the formula (fx)
"SetHeightAboveGround" & " " &
"*/Target/" & A2 & " " &
"3"
Where A2 is the cell containing the name of the site whose height you want to
adjust.
The default Connect distance unit is meters, so the height above
ground value specified here will set each target 3 meters.

SetHeightAboveGround */Target/HotSpot_01 3
5. Copy ( ) the command from cell H2.

6. Paste ( ) the command in cell H2 into cells H3 through H11.
Automate Properties Definition

Now, add the commands that you created to the Output window in the Button
Tool and create another button that will set all properties for all of the hot
spots at once.
MOVE THE COMMANDS

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Go back to HotSpots.xls.
Copy ( ) cells G2 through G11.
Go back to the Button Tool interface.
Paste the ScaleLog commands in the Output window of the Button Tool
interface.
6. Go back to HotSpots.xls.
7. Copy ( ) cells H2 through H11.
8. Paste the SetHeightAboveGround commands into the Output window below
the ScaleLog commands.
CREATE ANOTHER BUTTON

Now, create a button that will automate the properties definition for the hot
spots.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Extend the Tools Menu.

Select Command btn from Output window.
Enter Set HotSpot Properties in the Label text box.
Click Create.
Click the Set HotSpot Properties button.
Did I Do It?
Lets check and see if STK has been recording your changes.

3. Zoom in one or more of the hot spots.
How do the target markers look now?
Have they been scaled?
Are they above the terrain?
FIGURE 2-8.
3D View: Hot Spots after scaling and lighting
4. Select all of the HotSpots ( ) in the Object Browser.

5. Open their properties ( ).
What is the scale value?
7. Select the Basic - Position page.
Whats the height above ground?
Remember you set the height above ground value in meters. The
default unit for entering distance in the GUI is kilometers. Three meters
would convert to 0.003 km.
8. Click Cancel to close the Properties Browser ( ) without making any

changes to the scenario properties.
Its still very difficult to see the target markers and their labels. It makes sense
that the target marker would intersect with the terrain since they are marked
locations on the surface of the Earth and the terrain isnt level. Lets see if we
cant raise the labels above the terrain so that you can tell which hot spot is
which.
Declutter Labels
STK has an option to declutter all objects in the 3D Graphics window. You
can adjust the display of all ten hot spots labels at once using that option.
Lets use the Button Tool to issue a single Connect command (VO Declutter) to
reposition the labels on objects that are close together so they don't obstruct
one another. The generic format for this VO Declutter command is as follows:
VO <ScenarioPath> Declutter {DeclutterOption} <DeclutterValue>
[{DeclutterOption} <DeclutterValue>]
1. Go back to the Button Tool interface.

2. Click the Clear Output button.
3. Enter the following command in the Command window:
VO * Declutter Enable On ShowLines On AvoidTerrain Auto
4. Click Send.
GET A BETTER LOOK

Lets see how the adjustments that you made to the 3D Graphics window
properties effected your target labels.
3. Mouse around in the 3D Graphics window until you can see the labels
elevated above the terrain.
FIGURE 2-9.
3D View: Hot Spots after declutter
Add an Az/El Mask

Use the Set AzEl mask command to set the azimuth-elevation mask for the
targets based on terrain data. The generic format for this Set AzEl mask
command is as follows:
SetAzElMask <ObjectPath> {UseOption} [<Parameters>]
Each target will have an azimuth-elevation mask applied to it based on the

terrain three (3) meters above the ground.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Go back to the Button Tool interface.

Select cell I2 in the HotSpots spreadsheet.
Enter an equals sign (=) in the formula (fx) bar at the top of the
spreadsheet.
5. Enter, or copy and paste from cell I19, the following in the formula (fx)
bar.
"SetAzElMask" & " " & "*/Target/" & A2 & " " & "Terrain 3"
Where A2 is the cell containing the name of the site who will have an
azimuth-elevation mask applied.
SetAzElMask */Target/HotSpot_01 Terrain 3
7. Copy ( ) the command from cell I2.

8. Paste ( ) the command in cell I2 into cells I3 through I11.
Clone the SetConstraints Command

Use the SetConstraint command to impose an AzEl mask constraint that will
ensure each target contains an azimuth-elevation mask. The generic format
for the SetConstraint command is as follows:
SetConstraint <ObjectPath> {ConstraintName} <Parameters>
1. Select cell J2 in the HotSpots spreadsheet.

spreadsheet.
3. Enter, or copy and paste from cell J20, the following in the formula (fx)
bar.
"SetConstraint" & " " & "*/Target/" & A2 & " " & "AzElMask On"
Where A2 is the cell containing the name of the site whose height you want to
adjust.
SetConstraint */Target/HotSpot_01 AzElMask On
5. Copy ( ) the command from cell J2.

6. Paste ( ) the command in cell J2 into cells J3 through J11.

the azimuth-elevation and then apply the azimuth-elevation mask constraint
to all targets in STK.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Select cells I2 through I11.

Click Copy ( ).
Select cells J2 through J11.
Click Copy ( ).
Enter Set AzEl Mask in the Label text box.
Click Create.
Click the Set AzEl Mask button.
DID I DO IT?
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bring STK to the front.

Select all of the HotSpots ( ) in the Object Browser.
Select the Basic - AzEl Mask page.
Do you see the terrain data?

Do you see an AzEl mask applied?
DIRECT SUN CONSTRAINT

The Predator can only take images during direct sun. You will need to use the
SetConstraints command to set the direct sun constraint on the Hot Spots.
The generic format for the Set Constraints command is as follows:
SetConstraint <ObjectPath> {ConstraintName} <Parameters>
1. Go back to the HotSpots spreadsheet.

2. Select cell K2 in the HotSpots spreadsheet.
spreadsheet.
4. Enter, or copy and paste from cell K21, the following in the formula (fx)
SetConstraint */Target/HotSpot_01 Lighting DirectSun
6.
7.
8.
9.
Select cell K2 again.

Click Copy ( ).
Select cells K3 through K11.
Click Paste ( ).

the azimuth-elevation and then apply the azimuth-elevation mask constraint
to all targets in STK.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Select cells K2 through K11.

Click Copy ( ).
Enter Set Sun Constraint in the Label text box.
10. Click Create.

11. Click the Clear Output button.
12. Click the Set Sun Constraint button.
DID I DO IT?
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bring STK to the front.

Select all of the HotSpots ( ) in the Object Browser.
Do you see the Direct Sun contraint enabled?

Save Your Work

1. Save ( ) your scenario ( ).
2. Close HotSpots.xls.
SAVE THE BTIP

Lets save your BTIP so you can use it in the future.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Select Save As...
Browse to the C:\My Documents\STK 9\Afghan_Predator directory.
Enter the name Hot_Spots.
Click Save.
Select Quit to close the Button Tool.
Import the Predator

Youve used the intelligence data that you have to model the hot spots that
you want to scan from the Predator UAV, but you havent modeled the UAV
yet. The flight path for the Predator has also been provided for you. Lets load
the Predator now.
3. Use the From Saved Aircraft File (*.ac) method to insert the aircraft object ( )
provided for you.
4. When the Open dialog appears, browse to
C:\Training\STK\Afghan\Objects.
5. Select Predator.ac.
6. Click Open.

FIGURE 2-10.
2D View: Predator route over hot area
Can you see the route that the Predator will follow to surveil the hot
spots?
THE PREDATORS FLIGHT PATH

1. Open Predators ( ) properties ( ).
2. Scroll down and take a look at the Predators flight path.
Notice how a portion of the Predators flight path follows the terrain.
Constrain the Predator

Typically, you would use a sensor object to model the Predators onboard
camera. When using a sensor to model a camera you can adjust the field-ofview using the sensor properties. In this instance, you intend to use Scheduler,
not STK, to determine the order of accesses and the best time to image the
hot spots, but you know you cannot image the targets at too great an angle.
You must limit the maximum off boresight angle from Predator to each hot
spot. You can do that by constraining the Predators visibility.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Set the Min. Elevation Angle to -90.
Set the Max. Elevation Angle to -50.
Click OK.
What Can the Predator See?

Now that you have your hot spots and your properly constrained Predator, lets
see if Predator has access at some point to each of our targets.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select Predator ( ) in the Object Browser.

Click Access ( ).
Select all Hot Spots.
Click Access... in the Graphs area.
The accesses are all bunched up on top of each other. Lets take a closer look
at that section of the graph.
5. Zoom In ( ) around the accesses.
FIGURE 2-11.
Graph: Hot spot viewing opportunities
Wow! That is a lot of information to interpret. Some targets have multiple

accesses. Some access times for different targets overlap each other.
To which hot spot does the Predator have access first?
For how long?
FIGURE 2-12.
Graph: First viewing opportunities
Lets advance the animation to the time that the Predator is approaching the
hot spots, so you can look at the accesses in the 3D Graphics window. Use
the information in the graph to set the animation time equal to the start of the
first access.
GET A BETTER LOOK

2. Make the Predator ( ) the focal point in the 3D Graphics window.
If a pop-up appears that indicates that there is no data for the object at the
selected time, click OK.
3. Find the first access.
Predator ( ).
5. Play ( ) your animation.
Watch as the Predator gains and loses access with the various hot spots.
FIGURE 2-13.
3D View: Predator access to hot spots
When would you want to start imaging?

Could Predator image all of the hot spots in one flight?
In what order should the Predator image the various hot spots?
From this data it would be challenging to determine in what order the Predator
should image the various hot spots.
Wouldnt it be great if there were a tool that could schedule all of the
imaging for you?
CLEAN UP
Lets remove the access graphics. This will clean up the visualization windows.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Close the Access graph.

Bring the Access tool ( ) to the front.
Click Remove All.
Close the Access tool ( ).
On Your Own
There are several utilities that ship with STK, yet are exterior utilities. Let's
take a look at one of the utilities and see how it might assist us in this scenario.
Lets take a look.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Extend the View menu.

Select HTML Viewer.
Click the Browse button ( ).
When the Open dialog appears, click the Example HTML Utilities button
on the left.'
This area is home to some helpful utilities that can assist you as you do your
analysis in STK. One example is the Convert BTIP to HTML utility in the STK
Automation directory. This HTML utility can convert a Button Tool btip into
HTML page that can be integrated into the STK user interface.
Why not try to convert the Button Tool that you made in this exercise.
Save Your Work

3. Close STK ( ).
How Can I Optimize My

Data Collection Schedule?
EXERCISE 3
In this exercise you will use STK and STK/Scheduler to create a UAVs collection schedule
for imagery of ten (10) different hot spots on the ground. Upon completion, you will be
able to:
Import STK objects into Scheduler

Define Resources in Scheduler, both those that exist as objects in STK and those that
do not.
Define Tasks in Scheduler
Prioritize tasks in Scheduler
Define consumable resources in Scheduler
Generate a collection schedule and review summary data on this schedule
Validate a schedule
How Can I Optimize My Data Collection Schedule?
Problem Statement
You need to monitor potentially dangerous activity in and around several hot
spots in Afghanistan. To monitor the hot spots, you will image them from
a UAV. You will be flying a mission which gathers high resolution images. It is
not feasible to relay these images due to their size and the data rates available.
You must store them onboard. In order to do this, you need to plan an actual
collection schedule. You would like to know when you can image each target,
and if you can record and save those images.
The UAV entered this area of Afghanistan directly from an earlier mission in a
different area. The UAV has already stored some high resolution images on its
hard drive from this earlier mission, so disk space will be a consideration. This
particular UAV can operate in an alternate mode in which it gathers video at a
much lower resolution than is used to take still images. The video requires a
lower data rate to link to a relay satellite, so if, in fact, you want to video the
hot spot you could relay it rather than stored it on board. You need to plan
a collection schedule for images and then consider one for video.
BREAK IT DOWN
The UAV has 100 GB hard drive.
Each high resolution image consumes 5 GB.
The UAV enters this flight coming from an earlier mission. 60 GB of hard
drive is already used.

Ten (10) seconds time-on-target is required to take an image.
You wish to image as many targets as possible. Initially each target has the
same priority as all others. However, as additional intelligence is gathered,
this might change.
SOLUTION
Use STK and STK/Scheduler to create a collection schedule that will help you
prioritize image captures for each hot spot and determine when it is
optimal to survey each location.
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 2
HOW CAN I OPTIMIZE MY DATA COLLECTION SCHEDULE?
STK/Scheduler
STK/Scheduler is a fully integrated Satellite Toolkit (STK) add-on module
provided by Orbit Logic Incorporated that provides a powerful scheduling and
planning application for mission designers and operations engineers alike.
Users can define tasks and resources, request de-conflicted schedule solutions,
and analyze the results through a variety of graphical or tabular GUI displays
or ASCII reports. STK objects, access calculations, and event reports are easily
imported from a STK scenario to define task scheduling windows and
resource availability times.
STK/Scheduler is powered by a scheduling engine from Optwise Corporation that
finds better solutions in a shorter amount of time than traditional heuristic
algorithms. The global search algorithm within this engine is based on neural
network technology that not only outperforms traditional scheduling engines,
but also finds solutions to larger and more complex problems. STK/Scheduler
allows system planners to maximize the value of limited resources.
LAUNCH SCHEDULER
1. Launch Scheduler ( ).
2. Take a look at the Main Display.
The STK/Scheduler Main Display is the primary working area viewed while
using STK/Scheduler. It consists of several working areas.
STK PROPERTIES
The STK Properties tab contains the controls that allow the user to specify a
STK scenario from which STK objects may be imported and STK event
reports may be retrieved.
1. Extend the Schedule menu.
2. Select STK - Load Scenario.
SCHEDULE PROPERTIES
The Schedule Properties form contains all of the controls necessary to define all
of the attributes of a STK/Scheduler scenario. When a new scenario is being
created the controls of the schedule properties form will either be blank or
filled with default data. When an existing scenario is edited, the controls of the
Exercise 3 | Page 3
schedule properties form will contain data corresponding to the attributes of

that scenario.
PREDATOR SCENARIO
Previously, you modeled and analyzed simple point to point access between a
UAV and several previously defined hot spots on the ground.
If you did not complete the Afghan Predator scenario previously, unpack
the VDF provided in the student files to the appropriate directory in
yiour default user area (C:\My Documents\STK 9\)
1. Ensure that Absolute Path is selected.

2. Click the Change Scenario button, on the STK Properties tab.
3. Locate and open the Afghan_Predator scenario in the default user directory
4. Select Afghan_Predator.sc ( ).
5. Click Open.
6. Click OK to load the scenario.
When you load an STK scenario into Scheduler, the STK application will also
launch.
7. When STK launches and the scenario loads, minimize STK.
START/STOP TIMES
The Start/Stop Times Tab contains the controls that allow the user to define the
start and stop times of the schedule. This times define the scheduling period.
If the schedule has an associated STK scenario and the schedule start and stop
times are changed, STK/Scheduler will automatically change the times of the
associated STK scenario.
Youre interested in optimizing the scanning schedule for the UAV passes, so
it makes sense to schedule only the times during which the Predator will be in
flight. You can find the start and stop time for the Predators flight in its Route
properties in STK.
2. Select Define Start/Stop Times.
3. Enter the following values:
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 4
TABLE 3-1. Time
Period
OPTION
VALUE
Start Time
2 Jul 2009 17:00:00.000 UTCG (Predator takeoff)
Stop Time
2 Jul 2009 24:00:00.000 UTCG
4. Click OK.
Have Scheduler Ingest STK Objects

Scheduler needs to ingest the Predator and all the hot spots from STK in
order to include these objects in the scheduling plan. The Predator needs to be
considered as a single object, so you can import it alone. However, you will
also need to consider the hot spots, but you want to consider them
together. Scheduler allows you to create whats called a resource group made up
of STK objects. Using resource groups makes it easier to create tasks that
schedule imaging of all the hot spots.
An associated STK scenario must be defined for this option to work.
The associated STK scenario may be defined on the STK Properties Tab
of the Schedule Properties Form.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Extend the Resource menu.

Select the Ingest from STK option.
Select Aircraft from the object type list.
When the Resource Creation dialog appears, select Predator.
Click OK.
When you select an object class from the menu, all object of that class that are
in the selected STK scenario are listed in the Resource Creation dialog.
You should see that Predator is now listed as a Resource in the lower left-hand
portion of your Scheduler window. Now, lets create a Resource Group that
contains all of the hot spots.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Extend the Resource menu.

Select the Ingest from STK option.
Select Point Targets from the object type list.
Enter the name AllHotSpots in the Add to Resource Group box.
When the Resource Creation dialog appears, click the Select All button.
Exercise 3 | Page 5
6. Click OK.
FIGURE 3-1.
Scheduler Main Display with resources
All ten (10) hot spots as well as the Predator aircraft are now listed in the
Resource area (bottom left) of the Scheduler window. The green bar extending
across the window for each object shows that, currently, each object is
available for the entire period of our scheduling analysis.
All of the resources that we need to consider in order to image the hot
spots from the ground have been ingested, but you still have some
customizing to do in order to properly define these resources.
Resources
You need to define the resources for each object that you imported from
STK. All ten hot spots will have the same resources defined. Lets walk
through the first one.
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 6
1. Extend the Resource menu.

2. Select Edit Resource.
3. Select HotSpot_01 in the available resources list.
The Resource Definition form contains all of the controls necessary to define a
resource.
GENERAL RESOURCES
The General tab provides the controls to define the general attributes of the
resource.
1. Select the General tab.
The Priority options assign a priority to a selected resource. The priority range
displays in the Priority area. The default priority of a newly created resource
will be the center of the defined schedule resource priority range. When
defining the Priority value, STK/Scheduler will accept only numbers that fall
within that priority range.
2. Leave the default priority of five (5), since all of the hot spots are of
equal importance in your analysis.
The Setup Time options define the default amount of time necessary to ready
the resource for each task. The targets in this scenario do not need to be set
up, so you can leave this time set to zero (0).
Take a look at the Resource Group section. The AllHotSpots group that you
created when you ingested the hot spots of which HotSpot01 is a member,
is included in the AllHotSpots resource group listed as an available resource.
This resource group will make it easier for us to set up our tasks (taking
pictures of the various hot spots) when we get to that point.
AVAILABILITY RESOURCES
The Availability tab provides the controls to determine the time in which a
resource is available to be tasked. Availability may be defined as a single
window of time or as several windows of time. By default, STK/Scheduler
defines a resource as being available for the entire scheduling period.
Exercise 3 | Page 7
Your analysis requires the hot spots be available only when they are
illuminated by the sun since they are being imaged. This availability can be
modeled in Scheduler through two different methods.
Any constraints used in STK will automatically carry over to Scheduler
because access is being passed between the applications and access is already
limited if the constraint was applied in STK.
1. Select the Availability tab.
2. Ensure the Define Blackout Times - Default Available option is enabled.
This choice means that, by default, our target(s) will be available for imaging.
If we were to limit this availability, the time periods on this page would
represent those times of Unavailability.
Since we accepted all the defaults for Hot Spot 01, it will not be necessary to
adjust any of the other hot spots. They will have the same resource
definition profile as HotSpot_01.
Resource Availability times can also be defined based on report data. If you
wanted, you could associate reports on desired criteria (for example lighting
time, in this exercise) and ingest these times from STK. We will not use this
option.
ACCOMMODATIONS
Lets edit the Predators resources.
1. Select Predator in the available resources list.
2. Click OK.
3. Select the Accommodation tab.
The Accommodation tab is a resource attribute that defines the number of tasks
that can simultaneously use that resource. For example, lets say the imaging
instrument onboard Predator can only image one ground target at a time,
which is normal. This would translate to an accommodation value of one
since it can only support one task at a time. A ground target, however, can
support an infinite number of UAV and/or satellites taking its picture. It
would have an unlimited accommodation value. The default setting for our
hot spots was Unlimited Accommodation (the default setting for Point Targets).
4. Ensure that Predators Maximum Accommodation is set to 1.
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 8
5. Browse Predators General and Availability tasks. We will accept the defaults.
Creating A New Resource in Scheduler

STK/Scheduler can use resources from STK, or the user can create generic
resources that arent modeled in STK. For example, a specific task may use
battery power, but STK doesnt track this as an object in STK. The battery is in
the same physical location of the predator aircraft. You may also want to
charge the batteries, in which case you will need to have a sunlight resource.
The sunlight resource can be fed from the STK sunlight reports. In some
cases, you may want to track personnel as well. If an operations group has
three people on night shift and one person is required for each task, then
scheduler will limit the number of simultaneous tasks to three. The schedule
can be as detailed as you would like as there arent any limitations to the
number of resources or tasks that one can enter. However, application
performance will vary based on the number of objects.
CAPACITY RESOURCES
In this example, you need to model the capacity of the hard drive onboard
Predator, which is being used to store the high resolution images. This resource
is not available in STK. We still need to create the hard drive resource. We
have properly defined our existing resources.
1. Click Create New Resource in the Resource editor.
2. Enter Hard Drive as the Resource ID.
3. Select the Capacity tab.
Predators hard drive is considered a consumable resource. It has a finite size and
each image that is stored on the hard drive will consume some of the free
space. Recall, these high resolution images are stored onboard the UAV and
will be accessed upon its landing. If the hard drive is used up entirely, we
cannot store any additional images, hence Scheduler would not schedule any
additional imaging tasks.
We could define capacity in one of two ways--how much space has been used
or how much space is available. You will define the amount of hard drive that
has already been used.
4. Enable the Is Applicable option.
5. Enter GB for units.
Exercise 3 | Page 9
6. Set the Type Definition to Consumable. This means that any free space can be
used.
TABLE 3-2. Limit
OPTION
VALUE
Init Capacity
60
Min Capacity
Max Capacity
100
Definitions
According to the properties that you set here, the UAV comes into the
mission with 60 GB already used out of a total capacity of 100 GB. Each
image taken will use more hard drive. Tasks can be completed until the
maximum capacity is reached.
We could have chosen to define the amount of free space on the hard drive.
In that case our initial capacity would be 40 GB and each task would reduce
the capacity by 5 GB until the minimum capacity is reached. It is important to
remember which way you have set up your capacity, because when you define
a task you must specify whether that task is replenishing the capacity (adding
data or using up the hard drive space) or depleting capacity (subtracting
from the amount of remaining free space). You may wish to clarify your
chosen approach in the Resource Description field.
STATUS RESOURCES
The Status tab contains a group of controls that informs the user of the basic
information about a resource and how it is used in a schedule.
1. Click the Status tab.
Since we havent assigned any resources to tasks yet, nor have we generated a
schedule, there are no task assignments listed on this tab.
2. Click Update to save your Resource.
3. Close the Resource Definition Form.
The Hard Drive resource should now be listed with the other resources in the
lower left of the Scheduler window.
We now have our Hot Spots, our Predator UAV, and our hard drive defined as
resources. If we are imaging, why dont we use a sensor to represent a camera
and assign it as a resource?
Targeting Versus Scheduling

The scenario that we imported did not model the camera attached to the
Predator. Thats because, you don't want to force a schedule by allowing STK
to predetermine where a targeted camera will look. In STK, a targeted sensor
will point at the first target it sees and stay there until that target is no longer
visible. This would result in 0 access time given to other targets. That
wouldnt tell us when the Predator could image how many of the hot spots
on the ground.
Instead, you want to allow Scheduler to determine the camera slewing schedule
by scheduling with a field of view from Predator. If any targets are in view,
Scheduler will create opportunity times for scheduling the specific task and it
will be allowed to schedule using priority and other constraints placed on the
problem. After scheduling, you may choose to point the camera based on the
optimal schedule generated by Scheduler to visualize the mission plan in STK.
Tasks
A task is a virtual entity that represents the use of resources to perform a duty.
In STK/Scheduler, tasks have attributes that allow the user to define them such
that all the limitations that would prevent a task from being accomplished can
be taken into account. It is then the job of the schedule deconflictor to ensure
that as many of the tasks as possible get executed while avoiding resource and
time conflicts.
All of a task's attributes are in the Task Definition form. This form can be used
to define new tasks as well as to modify existing tasks.
We want to create tasks that use the UAV to take an image of the targets and
store the resulting image on the hard drive. Let's look at how we would set up
an individual task for imaging a single hot spot. Then we can see how our
resource group, AllHotSpots, will save us from having to create 10 different
tasks (for 10 different hot spots!).
GENERAL
The options on the General tab defines a tasks priority. Based on the target
priority, you may want to increase the priority of specific tasks to try an
perform higher priority tasks first. We want to use the same priority for each
task (5) in this example.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Extend the Task menu.

Select NewTask...
Ensure that the General tab is selected.
Enter the following:
TABLE 3-3. Task
properties
OPTION
VALUE
Task ID
Image HotSpot_01
Description
Schedule imaging for a single hot spot.
SCHEDULING
The options on the Scheduling tab sets up the frequency of a resource. In this
case, the frequency is going to be single instance because we will image the
target and the task will not repeat. An example of a recurring task would be a
satellite downlink to a network. This may happen several times per day.
1. Select the Scheduling tab.
2. Select the Single Instance Task option.
DURATION
The options on the Duration tab specify how long a task will take and if
handovers are allowed to complete the task. When handovers are allowed, a
task may be assigned multiple timeslots and/or resources. During task
execution the task may switch between timeslots and resources as necessary to
maximize its duration. It is just like making a cell phone call as you drive down
a highway. As you travel down the road, your call is transferred from cell
tower to cell tower.
According to what you know, ten (10) seconds time-on-target is required to
take an image. That means that this task will have a fixed duration. You will
not be using handovers.
1. Select the Duration tab.
2. Select Fixed Duration.

3. Set the Fixed Duration to 10 seconds (00:00:10).
This time is in seconds. The default time is ten (10) minutes.
RESOURCES
The options on the Resources tab define which resources are needed to
perform a task. You can also deplete or replenish capacity on a resource from
this tab. This tab also interfaces with STK to grab visibility information and
populate Scheduler with all available opportunities to complete a task. For this
resource, we are using Predator AND HotSpot1 AND HardDrive. Resources are
defined by building logic statements containing AND/OR string.
1. Select the Resources tab.
2. Select the Resources Required tab.
3. Double-click Hard Drive in the Resources/Constraint Groups/Template List to
move it up to the Resource Constraints area.
4. Click the AND button.
5. Double-click HotSpot_01.
7. Double-click Predator.
Now, you have a logic statement that tells Scheduler to consider the following:
Hard Drive AND HotSpot_01 AND Predator
8.
Click the Create Possibilities button.
Clicking the Create Possibilities button executes a routine that validates the
contents of Resource Constraints option. If the validation is successful, a routine
will create the task's possibilities. If the validation is not successful, you will
error messages indicating the nature of the problem.
You must click the Create Possibilities button to successfully create a
task. Creating Possibilities will remove any existing assignments for the
task. Possibility-specific settings under the Timeslots and Resource
Usage tabs will be retained when possible.
TIMESLOT DEFINITION
Let's look at the times it would be possible to schedule this task. The white
blocks adjacent ImageHotSpot1 in the Task section of the Scheduler window
show when this task is possible. You can also get this information from the
Task Definition Form.
1. Click the Timeslot Definitions tab.
2. Click Update.
3. Look at the Time Slots of Possiblity #1 list.
Once the possibilities are calculated, the times during which it would be
possible to schedule this task are listed in the table here.
RESOURCE USAGE
That last thing that you need to do is tell Scheduler that every time a target is
imaged, that task will use 5 GB of the hard drive resource. If the hard drive
becomes full, we will not be able to schedule additional imaging opportunities.
1. Select the Resource Usage tab.
The initial capacity (60 GB) and the maximum capacity (100 GB) of the hard
drive onboard the UAV was defined when the resource was created, and you
told Scheduler to continue to complete tasks until the maximum is met, or the
hard drive is used up. Each time a hot spot is imaged, one task is complete,
and the hard drive capacity increases. Each time you take a picture, youre
adding to the hard drives capacity (adding to amount of used space).
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Ensure the Define Per Task option is selected.

Double-click Hard Drive in the Capacity Usage Per Task section.
Select Replenish.
Select Fixed as the Capacity Replenish Amount.
Enter 5 as the GB value for the Fixed amount.
Click OK.
Click Update.
Click Close.
Based on this resource usage, will we be able to image all ten (10)
targets?
Deleting a Task
So far we have only created one task; youve defined the task for imaging
HotSpot_01. If we were to create tasks for the nine (9) remaining targets, you
would have to repeat the steps above in order nine different times to create a
new task for each target. That would be very time consuming. Fortunately,
you don't have to do this. You can use the resource group, AllHotSpots, that
you created earlier to make our job much easier. Since you won't be needing
the Image HotSpot_01 task, you can delete it.
1. Right-click on Image HotSpot_01 in the Tasks list that is part of the Scheduler
Main Display.
2. Select the Delete option.
3. Click Yes when asked if you really want to delete the task.
Now, lets create tasks that use the resource group.
Using Resource Groups in a Task

1. Extend the Task menu.
2. Select NewTask...
TABLE 3-4. Task
properties
OPTION
VALUE
Task ID
Image All Hot Spots
Description
Schedule imaging for all hot spots.
DURATION
Ten (10) seconds time-on-target is required to take an image, so that will be
the task duration.
1. Select the Duration tab.
2. Select Fixed Duration.
3. Set the Fixed duration to be 10 seconds (00:00:10).
This time is in seconds. The default time is ten (10) minutes.
RESOURCES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Select the Resources tab.

Ensure that the Resources Required tab is selected.
Select AllHotSpots from the Resource group list.
Use the Add arrow to move it to the Constraint Group/Template List Builder
list.
Enable the Template List option.
Click the Create Group/List button.
When prompted for a Template Variable Group Name, enter Hot Spots.
Click OK.
The new template will now be available in the Available Resources list. You can
include the resource group in your logic statement.
BUILD A LOGIC STRING

Now you can build your logic string using this template list.
1. Double-click the Hard Drive instance in the Resource/Constraints Group/
Templates list. It should appear in the Resource Constraints field.
3. Double-click the Hot Spots Template List.
5. Double-click the Predator instance in the Resource/Constraints Group/
Templates.
6. Click the Create Possibilities button.
RESOURCE USAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Select the Resource Usage tab.

Ensure the Define Per Task option is selected.
Double-click Hard Drive in the Capacity Usage Per Task section.
Select Replenish.
Select Fixed as the Capacity Replenish Amount.
Enter 5 as the GB value for the Fixed amount.
Click OK to return to the Task Definition form.
Click Update to update the tasks.
9. Click Close.
You will see each hot spot being processed individually. When the
processing is finished, you will see a task for each hot spot in the Template
List that has been created. This was much easier than creating ten (10)
different tasks!
Generate a Schedule
Now the possible times for each task have been created. This should not be
confused with an actual schedule. You have not yet created a schedule. If you
examine the possibilities that were created, you will notice that multiple tasks
may span the same time period. In the finished schedule, this will not be the
case. Let's go ahead and create a schedule.
1. Click the Go button ( ).
2. Click OK when the Scheduling Progress window indicates that it is done.
Scheduler will automatically produce a Summary Report. The Summary Report
provides a quick glimpse of whether or not your goal was met. Look at the
Summary Report to answer the following questions.
Were all ten (10) targets scheduled?
If not, which hot spots were not scheduled?
3. Close the Summary Report.
4. Look at the Scheduler Main Display.
MAIN VIEW
The default data main view is a Gantt chart. It visually shows the time slot for
each scheduled event. The tasks listed in green text were scheduled.
1. Scroll down below the green tasks.
The tasks listed in black were not scheduled. Because we prioritized each of
our targets the same, Scheduler essentially went down the list of targets and
scheduled as many as it could. You knew that the hard drive only had 40 GB
of free space to fill, so at 5 GB per image, it was safe to assume that not all of
the hot spots would be imaged. As expected, only eight (8) tasks were
scheduled (8 targets and 5 GB each is 40 GB).
Lets take a look at the schedule from a slightly different view.

3. Select the Main View option.
4. Select the Table view.
Now the schedule is listed in a simple table format. Again, the scheduled tasks
are in green and the unscheduled tasks are in black. It is easy to see the start
and stop times of the scheduled collection opportunities for each target. Use
the table view to answer the following question:
What is the duration of each task?
Why is this the duration?
6. Select the Main View option.
7. Select the Gantt view.
How the Schedule is Computed

Scheduler has a variety of algorithms that may be used to generate a schedule.
2. Select the Select Algorithm --> option.
Look at the available algorithms. The current selection is One Pass. This is the
fastest of the algorithms but implicitly assumes that task priority, timeslot
desirability, and scheduling tasks as early as possible are important. Table 3-5
provides a summary of each available algorithm.
TABLE 3-5. Schedule
ALGORITHM
One-Pass
Sequential
Multi-Pass
algogithms
DESCRIPTION
The One-Pass algorithm makes a single pass through the task list assigning task start times
to the earliest possible time within a task timeslot. The order in which tasks and task
timeslots are considered is dependant primarily on the task priority and secondarily on the
timeslot desirability. Tasks with the same priority are taken in list order. Timeslots with the
same desirability are taken in list order. One-Pass is the fastest of the algorithms but
implicitly assumes that task priority, timeslot desirability, and scheduling tasks as early as
possible are important. Decisions made early in the task list cannot be un-done to improve
later performance.
The Sequential algorithm is based on the One-Pass algorithm but uses timeslot start
time as its secondary task consideration sorting order (instead of timeslot
desirability). This seemingly minor change makes a major improvement in solution
quality for scheduling problems that include repetitive consumable resource
depletions and replenishments. An example of this type of problem is satellite
imagery collection planning where images are stored onboard a recorder and later
downlinked to ground stations to free recorder space for additional collections.
The Multi-Pass algorithm uses the core deconfliction processing routines used in the OnePass algorithm, but in each of its multiple passes modifies the task order and the timeslot
order prior to each assignment pass. A set of expert system rules is used to generate the
possible task and time order lists. Each pass is graded based on a Figure Of Merit (FOM)
and the best solution is returned. This algorithm will require more time than the One-Pass
algorithm since it has to run through the One-Pass algorithm multiple times. The actual
number of times it is run is based on the complexity of the problem. The multi-pass
algorithm will usually produce a better result than the one-pass algorithm.
TABLE 3-5. Schedule
ALGORITHM
Neural Network
Random
algogithms
DESCRIPTION
The neural algorithm uses a competition model in which all of the possible assignment
possibilities compete to be assigned subject to the constraints just as many potential bidders
compete for products at an auction. In this unique algorithm the order of the task and
timeslots are unimportant, but task priority and timeslot desirability affect the probability
that a particular assignment will be chosen through the use of the Figure Of Merit. Since the
algorithm does not bias the solution toward earliest time, a repair algorithm is run at the end
to move tasks to the earliest possible time and then tests to see if any additional unassigned
tasks can be added. Multiple runs can generate a family of solutions.
WARNING: The Neural Network algorithm has a solution fidelity of greater than 1 second
for schedules that have a duration longer than 11 days, 13 hours, 46 minutes, and 39
seconds.
The random algorithm searches for solutions in an un-biased manner to seed a random
solution (and available options) and uses a repair algorithm to repair it. While the initial
random solution will probably be invalid (in violation of constraints and having tasks with
duration far less than desired) the repaired schedule will be valid. This algorithm's strength
is that it is unbiased and can find solutions that cannot be predicted by rules. It is useful
when a very unusual Figure Of Merit is used to grade the performance. While constraints
are obeyed they are not used to help find the best solution.
Changing Priorities
Two of your ten hot spots were not imaged in our initial schedule because
you ran out of hard disk space--HotSpot_02 is one of them. What if you
received intelligence which indicated that you should ensure that HotSpot_02
is imaged? How would you adjust the priority of that site so that it has a better
chance of being imaged?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Right-click on one of the unscheduled tasks.

Select Edit.
Select the General tab.
Set the Priority to 1.
Click Update.
Click Close.
Click the Go button to reschedule the task.
Click OK when the Scheduling Progress window indicates that it is done.
Your schedule will be recomputed. Take a look at the results and answer the
following question:
Is HotSpot_02 included in the schedule now?

What hot spot was sacrificed so that your prioritized Hot Spot could
be imaged?
You now have a schedule that satisfies your intelligence folks.

9. Close the Summary Report.
Maximizing Duration
Suppose your UAV limited hard disk space or it could relay images instead of
storing them onboard. In this case, our hard drive would not be required as a
resource. Lets also suppose we were collecting video instead of still images. If
we were gathering video, we wouldnt need to limit our time-on-target. We
want the UAV to capture as much video per target as possible. Lets adjust the
task template to reflect this possibility.
1. Right-click on the Image All Hot Spots task.
2. Click Edit Task.
Lets remove the hard drive from the list of resources.
3. Select the Resources tab.
4. Select Hard Drive AND from the Resource Constraint String.
5. Click the Delete button on your keyboard.
The string should now read:
HotSpots AND Predator.
6. Click the Create Possibilities button.

7. Click OK when the warning appears.
Now lets set up the durations of the tasks to be maximized.
8. Click the Duration tab.
9. Select Maximize Duration - No handovers.
We must also specify a minimum duration. Lets assume that we dont want a
target filmed if we cannot gather at least sixty (60) seconds worth of video.
10. Enter one minute (00:01:00) in the Minimum Duration Definition field.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Go back to the Resources tab.

Click the Create Possibilities button.
Click OK when the warning appears.
Click Update.
Click Close.
Click Yes when the warning appears.
Once new tasks have been created, you can generate a schedule.
17. Click GO.
18. Click OK when the message appears telling you the schedule is complete.
Use the resulting Summary Report, Gantt View, and Table View to answer the
Were all ten (10) targets filmed?
Which target was filmed for the longest duration? What was the
duration?
Do all accesses meet our sixty (60) second minimum duration

requirement?
What is the priority of each target?

Knowing what you now know about STK/Scheduler, how would you modify
the task to create a schedule for the previous situation (maximize duration) in
which the video was not uplinked to a satellite but rather stored on the
Predator's UAV? Assume the rate at which video is stored is 0.2 GB/sec.
ADDITIONAL SCHEDULER CAPABILITIES

Scheduler offers a wide range of capabilities in addition to those we have
examined. Tasks may be deferred to a later time, high priority tasks may be
locked to a certain time and other tasks scheduled around these, deconfliction
algorithms can be run to eliminate task conflicts (which often arise when a
manual change or lock-in is made to the schedule) and schedule validations
can be run to determine is any such conflicts exist.
EXPORT YOUR SCHEDULE

Your Gantt and/or Report View can be exported. The Gantt View may be
exported as an image file and your Report View exported as an Excel file.
These options are available from the File menu.
Save Your Work

1. Extend the File menu in the Scheduler Main View.
2. Select Save As...
3. Locate the Afghan_Predator directory in the default user directory
4. Change the File name to HotSpotScanSchedule.
5. Click Save.
6. Close STK/Scheduler.
7. Bring STK ( ) front.
At What True Anomaly Should

I Perform a Burn If I Want
To Minimize Fuel Usage?
EXERCISE 4
In this exercise you will create a scenario that will help you change the orbit of a satellite
that is not at the proper altitude. To do this you will use STK/Astrogator and STK/Analyzer.
Upon completion, you will be able to:
Examine the basics of an Astrogator mission control sequence.

Adjust the timing of a satellite maneuver to minimize the fuel usage during a raise of
the perigee radius (rp) of the satellite
Use STK/Analyzer to create a carpet plot, analyzing multiple orbit variables at multiple
values, at the same time
At What True Anomaly Should I Perform a Burn If I Want To Minimize Fuel Usage?
Problem Statement
A satellite has recently been launched into orbit around the Earth. The launch
was not entirely successful and now the orbit is not at the right altitude. It
needs to be raised. You will have to raise the perigee radius (rp) of the satellite
to 10,000 km using a single burn. This is the distance from the Earths center
to the point of the closest approach to the Earth. You will want to minimize
the amount of fuel burned. You will need to find the perfect time to burn
while minimizing the change in velocity (V). This will correlate to the
amount of fuel used.
BREAK IT DOWN
You must raise the perigee radius (rp) of the satellite to 10,000 km using a
single burn.
You must minimize the amount of fuel used.
You want to burn in the direction of the satellites motion, in the direction
of velocity.
You have to find the True Anomaly value that tells you when the burn
should occur.
True Anomaly is measured in degrees in the direction of the satellites
motion, from the perigee radius (rp) to the position of the satellite.
SOLUTION
Build a scenario that will help you determine when to perform the satellite
burn. You will first design a maneuver that the satellite can make, adjusting its
orbit from one to another. You will use Astrogator with the use of its new
optimizing routine to determine the true anomaly (v) value to optimize your
burn. You will then use STK/Analyzers Carpet Plot to determine what
influence small variations from the optimal will have on the fuel requirement,
as well as which parameters affect the fuel usage more drastically.

uses the Astrogator propagator, a partially developed scenario has been
provided for you. This scenario can be found in the student files area.
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 2
AT WHAT TRUE ANOMALY SHOULD I PERFORM A BURN IF I WANT TO MINIMIZE FUEL USAGE?
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ensure that the Welcome to STK! dialog is visible in the STK Workspace.
Click the Open a Scenario button.
Locate the student files provided for this exercise (C:\Training\STK).
Select WhatsGator.vdf.
5. Click Open.
When you open the scenario, a directory with the same name as the scenario
will be created in the default user directory (C:\My Documents\STK 9) The
scenario will not be saved automatically.
WHATS IN MY SCENARIO?
When the scenario loads, you will notice that your scenario contains one
predefined satellite. You will also notice that there are two 2D Graphics
windows. One of the 2D Graphics windows looks different from what youve
seen thus far. Thats because the default 2D Graphics view uses a Equidistant
Cylindrical projection; however, one of the windows here is using an
Orthographic projection. An orthographic projection depicts a hemisphere of
the Earth as it would appear from deep space. This is often helpful when
viewing orbit segments used in Astrogator.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Select the Basic - Projection page.
Ensure the Type is set to Orthographic.
Click Cancel.
The satellite that was provided for you is using an Astrogator propagator. Lets
take a look at the Astrogator propagator.
5. Open Satellites ( ) properties ( ).
6. Select the Basic - Orbit page.
7. Notice that the Propagator selected is an Astrogator propagator.
Exercise 4 | Page 3
What Is Astrogator?
STK/Astrogator is an interactive orbit maneuver and space mission planning
tool for use by spacecraft operations and mission analysis staff that offers
wide flexibility through the use of customized thrust models, finite and
impulsive maneuvers, and the ability to solve for solutions with a differential
corrector targeter. You can use Astrogator for a variety of space mission
analyses, such as:
For formation flying, rendezvous planning, constellation design, space
based intercept.
For interplanetary, lunar, and libration point trajectories.
For GEO, LEO, HEO, Sun-Sync orbit maintenance requirements.
For automated planning of event-driven maneuvers.
For Monte Carlo and other script driven analyses.
To incorporate fully customizeable force, engine, and atmospheric models.
For high, low, and variable-thrust trajectories.
Mission Control Sequence

One of the first things that you will notice on the Astrogator propagator is the
Mission Control Sequence (MCS). The MCS is the core of your space mission
scenario. The MCS functions as a graphical programming language, utilizing
mission segments that dictate how Astrogator will build the trajectory of the
spacecraft.
FIGURE 4-1.
Mission Control Sequence
By adding, removing, rearranging, and editing MCS Segments, you can define a
mission of any desired level of complexity. The MCS is represented
schematically by a tree structure appearing in the left pane of the Orbit page of
the satellite's basic properties.
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 4
Lets take a closer look at the MCS options in your scenario. This will give you
an idea of what each of the mission control segments contain.
Initial State
Initial state represents your starting position. In the Initial State ( ) segment,
you can select a coordinate system, enter orbital elements of several different
types, and configure the spacecraft's physical values.
1. Locate the MCS tree under the MCS controls.
2. Select the Initial State ( ) segment.
The name of the currently selected coordinate system is displayed in a readonly field. The Initial State segment lets you select from among the following
element types:
TABLE 4-1. Coordinate
systems
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
Cartesian
Specifying an orbit by three position elements and three velocity elements in a

rectangular coordinate system.
Keplerian
The classical system, specifying an orbit by six elements describing its size, shape
and three-dimensional orientation in space.
Modified Keplerian
A modification of the classical system, using radius of periapsis instead of

semimajor axis. Recommended for very elliptic or hyperbolic orbits.
Spherical
A system in which positions are specified as a radial distance form the origin and
two angles relative to a fundamental plane.
Target Vector
Incoming Asymptote
Used for hyperbolic arrival trajectories.
Target Vector
Outgoing Asymptote
Used for hyperbolic departure trajectories.
You know that you want to raise the periapsis to 10,000 km.
Is the current periapsis less than 10,000 km?
FUEL MASS
Lets take a look at the fuel mass before the maneuver.
1. Select the Fuel Tank tab.
2. Make a note of the Fuel Mass value.
Exercise 4 | Page 5
This value represents the original fuel mass. The fuel mass will change after
the maneuver based on the fuel used for the maneuver.
Target Sequence
Now that our initial state is clear to us, lets look at what were asking Astrogator
to do. The Target Sequence ( ) segment provided here gives Astrogator the
target or goal of a sequence of events for a satellite.Within this Target, you
can set the goal as a value condition or an Optimization.
1. Expand( ) TargetMnvr1 ( ).
TargetMnvr1, is made up of three separate components: a propagate segment
ProptoMnvrStart ( ), a maneuver segment Mnvr1 ( ) and a second propagate
segment PropToPerigee ( ).
1. Take a look at each segment.
What color is the background of each segments icon?
2. Bring the Orthographic 2D Graphics window to the front.
FIGURE 4-2.
2D View: Mission control sequence display
The color of each segment of the orbit coincides with the color of the
segment in the Target Sequence propagator.
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 6
FIGURE 4-3.
3D View: Mission control sequence display
Notice that in 3D the orbit is also colored to match the segments in the
Mission Control Sequence.
Lets look at each of the three segments that make up the TargetMnvr1 ( )
sequence provided here, in more detail.
VARIABLES
The targeting profile sets up the goal (target) for the Astrogator maneuver. Lets
see an example of one.
1. Select TargetMnvr1 ( ).
2. Click Properties buton in the Profiles area.
At the top of the TargetMnvr1 window there are Control Parameters. The selected
Control Parameter includes a final value because this Astrogator run has
previously been initiated. When you set up your mission control sequence,
this data would not exist! It would be nice if you could see Astrogator actually
compute the maneuver for you. You can!
3. Look at the Equality Constraints (Results) section.
A desired RMag value of 10,000 km is set for the PropToPerigee segment. By
telling Astrogator to use this value, were defining our desired outcome.
Exercise 4 | Page 7
Astrogator will begin the maneuver at apogee, using the engine we specified
and will burn until we raise our perigee radius (rp) to 10,000km. We dont
know long the burn will take or what the resulting fuel used will be. Astrogator
will determine these.
4. When you finish, click Cancel to dismiss the Targeting Profile window and
return to the Astrogator propagator.
PROPAGATE
Propagation of an orbit is handled by the Propagate ( ) segment, the central
feature of which is a mechanism for defining one or more conditions for
stopping the propagation or initiating a automatic sequence.
ProptoMnvrStart ( )(the green portion of the orbit) takes the initial orbit
conditions and propagates it to the point where the maneuver begins.
Lets take a closer look at the first Propagate segment.
1. Select ProptoMnvrStart ( ) in the MCS tree.
When you select a segment in the MCS tree, its properties display in the panel
to the right.
FIGURE 4-4.
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 8
PropToMnvrStart properties
In this segment, the propagation is set to STOP at a specified value for true
anomaly. The desired value for the stopping condition is specified in the Trip
field. This tells Astrogator to propagate the initial orbit until the true anomaly is
180 degrees (or the satellite is at its apogee point).
2. Click the target beside the Trip value( ) to enable the stopping condition.
Doing so will tell Astrogator to use this as a target stopping condition.
3. Take a look at the 3D Graphics window or the Orthograhic 2D Graphics
window.
Does the green orbit segment end at the satellites apogee?
Once we have arrived at 180 degrees, we will have Astrogator perform a
maneuver for us. Lets take a look at what information will be considered
when calculating this maneuver.
MANEUVER
Astrogator provides two basic types of maneuvers ( ) -- impulsive and finite -- for
use in constructing your space mission scenario. Each maneuver segment
must be defined as either an impulsive or finite maneuver. The impulsive
maneuver segment models a maneuver as if it takes place instantaneously and
without any change in the position of the spacecraft. This is the classic
velocity (V). In an impulsive maneuver, the final state vector is calculated by
applying the specified velocity (V) vector to the initial velocity vector
(respecting the coordinate system). On the other hand, a finite maneuver
segment takes into account changes that occur throughout the duration of the
maneuver by numerically integrating the effect of the acceleration from the
engine. We will be modeling a finite maneuver.
1. Select Mnvr1 ( ).
Notice there are three properties categories associated with this segment:
Attitude, Engine, and Propagator. Lets look at the Attitude properties first.
2.
Ensure that the Attitude tab is selected.
The options on the Attitude tab are specific to the Attitude Control selected, so
the attitude parameters that you must specify will depend on the Attitude
Control selected. The Thrust Vector Attitude Control is selected because in this
exercise, you need to perform the burn in the direction of the satellites
motion. You can select the total thrust vector in cartesian or spherical form
Exercise 4 | Page 9
with respect to the thrust axes. The Thrust Vector for this maneuver is along
the satellitess X (Velocity) vector (indicated by the number one beside that
option).
FIGURE 4-5.
3. Now, select the Engine tab.
Mnvr1 Attitude properties
FIGURE 4-6.
Mnvr1 Engine properties
The options on the Engine tab allow you to select an engine model or a
thruster set. This maneuver uses an engine model with a constant thrust and
specific impulse (Constant Thrust and Isp) for this maneuver.
But what are the thrust and specific impulse values that will be used?
The specific values used to define components in the Mission Control Sequence
can be found in the Astrogator Component Browser.
THE ASTROGATOR COMPONENT BROWSER

The Astrogator Component Browser is a powerful tool that enables you to redefine
components of your space mission analysis and create new ones. The
components are organized into groups listed in a tree structure.
1. Select the Component Browser option from the Utilities menu in the STK
Workspace to open the component browser.
2. Take a look at the components in the Component Browser.
The components are organized into groups listed in a tree structure in the left
pane of the component browser. Individual components in a given group or
subgroup are displayed in the right pane when you click the corresponding
folder or subfolder in the left pane.
The show option allows you to filter the display of components. You can
restrict the display so that only user-created, hard-coded, all
components.
3. Select Engine Models in the Component Tree.

When you select Engine Model in the tree, all of the available components will
display on the right side of the window.
FIGURE 4-7.
Constant Thrust and Isp Engine Model components
4. Double-click the Constant Thrust and Isp component.
FIGURE 4-8.
Constant Thrust and Isp Engine Model properties
The dialog that appears will outline the characteristics of the selected engine
model. If the default values differ from the desired values, you can duplicate
the component and adjust them.
What is the specific impulse for this engine?
What is the thrust used for this engine model?
5. Click OK to close the characteristics of this engine model.
6. Click OK again to close the Component Browser.
PROPAGATOR
Once you define the engine characteristics and the thrust vector, you need to
give Astrogator a starting point initial guess for how long to propagate using
this maneuver model.
1. Finally, select the Propagator tab.
FIGURE 4-9.
Mnvr1 Propagator properties
The options on the Propagator tab tell Astrogator to implement the maneuver
burn for a specified time period. Lets start with the Trip Value. The trip value
allows you to set the desired value for the selected stopping condition, i.e. the
value to be achieved in order for the condition to be deemed satisfied.
What is the current Trip Value?
What does a trip value of 1200 seconds tell Astrogator to do?
In this case, the Trip Value indicates the duration of the burn. Setting the trip
value tells Astrogator to burn for 1200 seconds in order to attempt to raise the
perigee radius (rp) to 10,000 km. We dont know how long the burn will take.
We want Astrogator to determine that, so we entered an initial value--a
ballpark figure.
Notice that the target icon beside the trip value option has a check mark
through it. By checking the target value, you are telling Astrogator that it can
vary this value in the Target Sequence as needed in order to achieve your target,
that is, in order to raise the perigee radius (rp) to 10,000 km by using the
engine we have specified and by beginning the burn at apogee. In a moment
we will see what value Astrogator computed.
FIGURE 4-10.
Mnvr1 Propagator properties
PROPAGATE
Now that we have set up the criteria for the maneuver, we need to tell STK to
propagate the orbit once again following this burn. That is exactly what the
last segment of the MCS, the PropToPerigee ( )segment, does.
1. Select the PropToPerigee ( )segment.
FIGURE 4-11.
PropToPerigee properties
In this segment, the propagation is set to STOP this propagation when

perigee is reached. We, of course, would like verification that our maneuver
achieved its purpose--that the perigee radius (rp) is 10,000 km.
How will you tell Astrogator that this requirement must be met?
Defining this requirement is a two part process. The first part of the process
tells Astrogator when to stop propagating the orbit. In this case, you want to
stop propagation at perigee, which would be the most logical stopping point
since you want to raise your perigee radius.
The second part tells Astrogator what value(s) you want to report on when
propagation stops. In this case, you are interested in the magnitude of the
radius at the stopping point (perigee), RMag, and fuel used. For the first value,
RMag you are setting the desired value. You want Astrogator to use this value as
a factor in determining the maneuver. The second value, fuel used, is a
dependant value that will depend on the maneuver that Astrogator computes.
Youre not setting a fuel use requirement. You are instead interested in the
resulting value.
2. Click on the Results button below the MCS tree.
The Results... button opens the User-Selected Results window where you can
select components to include in the summary report ( )for the currently
selected segment. These results will be displayed at the end of the summary
report under the User-selected results header.
3. Notice that the RMag components is selected here.
4. Click OK to close the User-Selected Results window.
Target Maneuver Variables

Lets go back and look at the Target Maneuver ( ) component. We previously
looked at the Targeting Profile that was not set up to run a target of 10,000
km RMag. We didnt tell if it should optimize the True Anomaly and fuel used
while still hitting that goal. Lets create a new Targeting Profile to accomplish
all of that.
1. Select TargetMnvr1 ( ) in the MCS tree.
OPTIMIZE FOR FUEL

You want to optimize the location of your burn to optimize fuel. You will tell
STK to adjust the true anomaly to optimize the fuel. Lets do that now.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click New... in Profiles.

Select the Design Explorer Optimizer profile.
Click OK.
Select the Properties of the profile. You can choose variables that the
Astrogator Optimizer should adjust and their ranges.
5. Enable the following stopping conditions
TABLE 4-2. Design
explorer optimizer control parameters
CONTROL PARAMETER
STATE LOWER BOUNDS UPPER BOUNDS
StoppingConditions.True_Anomaly.TripValue
On
160 deg
180 deg
FiniteMnvr.StoppingConditions.Duration.TripValue On
900 sec
1500 sec
6. Keep all other defaults.

The uppper and lower bounds for true anomaly represent a range of true
anomaly values. The anticipated result of 180 degrees. The duration values
represent a range around our desired stopping condition of 1200 sec.
7. Locate the Objectives and Constraints (Results) area:

9.
TABLE 4-3. Design
explorer optimizer control parameters
CONTROL PARAMETER
STATE LOWER BOUNDS
UPPER BOUNDS
GOAL
Fuel Used
On
0 kg
500 kg
Minimize
R_Mag
On
10,000 km
10,000 km
Constraint
These fuel used bounds represent the minimum (0 kg) and maximum amount
of fuel that can be used. You want to use fuel in this range.
For the R-Mag, you have a specific singular goal of 10,000 km. You need to
set both the lower and upper bound to 10,000 km so you reach that radius.
10. Click OK.
11. Select the first Targeting Profile.
12. Click the Remove button in the Profiles area. You no longer need it.
MCS Controls
The Astrogator propagator includes a full set of controls that can be used for
inserting, deleting, copying, and editing segments.
FIGURE 4-12.
Mission Control Sequence (MCS) controls
RUN!
Lets use those controls to run the MCS and then generate summary data.
1. Click the Reset button in the Profiles and Corrections section.
2. Click Run ( ).
When you run the mission control sequence, a status dialog appears. The
status of each iteration of the run until covergence or failure displays in this
status dialog. Use the information in the status box to answer the following
questions:
Did your solution converge?
If so, how many iterations did it take?
Take a look at the resulting panel. Find the True Anomaly trip value that is
optimized for this scenario.
What is the value?

How much fuel is used?
Do you meet your goals?
3. When you finish, close the status dialog.
SUMMARY
The maneuver is computed and you now know where to burn to minimize
fuel lost. Lets create a summary report that will give us the resulting fuel used.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select TargetMnvr1 ( ) in the MCS tree.

Click the Summary ( ) button.
Scroll down to the section titled MCS Segment Type: Maneuver: Finite.
Scroll down to Maneuver Summary.
Note the Fuel Mass value.
How much fuel was used for the maneuver?

How much fuel mass remains?
6. When you finish, close the Summary report.
SWITCH PROFILES
Since you will not need the optimizer within Astrogator. Lets delete that from
Astrogator and reformulate Astrogator to let us vary the radius and True
Anomaly for the next round.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select TargetMnvr1 ( ) in the MCS tree.

Select the Design Explorer Optimizer profile.
Click Remove.
Click Yes when the confirmation message appears.
Click New to add a new profile.
Select Differential Corrector.
Click OK.
This will let you set the two variables you want to change externally.
1. Select the Differential Corector profile.

2. Click Properties.
3. Select Finite Mnvr.Stopping.Condition.DurationTripValue as the Control
Parameter and the R_Mag as a constraint.
4. Set the desired value for R_Mag to 10,000 km.
5. Click OK.
6. Click OK to dismiss the Orbit page.
Carpet Plot
You have determined your solution for raising the perigee radius (rp) to
10,000 km, but now your curious about what the impact on fuel mass would
be if you tweaked the resulting perigee radius (rp). Lets study the effects of
both true anomaly and final desired radius on fuel usage. You will vary the
values of the true anomaly and the radius of final orbit and see how it affects
the remaining fuel using a Carpet Plot analysis.
This analysis can be done externally to STK with the help of STK/Analyzer.
1. Select the scenario in the Object Browser.
2. Select Analyzer from the Analysis menu.
3. Click the Carpet Plot link.
Now lets set up your carpet plot. We will be varying two variables, true
anomaly and perigee radius. Lets set those up as the Input Variables first.
INPUT VARIABLES
Select your first input variable, true anomaly.
... Scenario
... Satellite
... Propagator
... TargetMnvr1
... SegmentList
... PropToMnvrStart
... StoppingConditions
true_Anomaly
2. Drag the true_Anomaly variable and drop it in the design variable ( ) box
on the right side of the Analyzer window.
Your previous analysis says that the minimum fuel usage occurred at a true
anomaly approximately 173 degrees. Lets make that the mid point of our
value range for this analysis.
OPTION
VALUE
From
170
To
175
Num Steps
Step Size
Analyzer will calculate this value.
This will vary true anomaly over a smaller range, but youre also wondering if
burning to a radius of 10,000 km is the best option. Would 9,000 km or
11,000 km be a better radius? Lets check the range between 9,000 km to
11,000 km.
... Scenario
... Satellite
... Propagator
... TargetMnvr1
... Differential_Corrector
... PropToPerigee___R_Mag
desired
5. Drag the desired variable and drop it in the design variable ( ) box on the
right side of the Analyzer window.
OPTION
VALUE
From
9,000
To
11,000
OPTION
VALUE
Num Steps
Step Size
Analyzer will calculate this value
Now, lets tell Analyzer what data to return.
RESULTS
Now you need to tell Analyzer to tell you what the fuel mass value is at each of
those steps.
... Scenario
... Satellite
... Propagator
... TargetMnvr1
... SegmentList
... Mnvr1
... Results
fuel_Used
8. Drag the fuel_Used variable and drop it in the Responses ( ) box on the
right side of the Analyzer window.
9. Click Run...
Examining the Results

On the left side of the Data Explorer window, you will see several graphs and
charts. The table page shows every point that was generated and the values
generated for each. There is a general carpet plot of how the values of true
anomaly and radius magnitude both increase over time. This increase causes
fuel usage to increase as well.
The Data Explorer window also includes several 2D and 3D carpet plot
graphs. Lets look at the surface plot.
1. Select the Plot Variable:response2 graph.
2. Maximize ( ) the Data Explorer window.
A couple of the axes on the surface plot are very difficult to read.
ADJUST THE GRAPH DISPLAY

Lets make some adjustments to the markers along the different axes so that
the graph will be more useful.
1. Click the Basic Settings ( ) button.
2. Click the Axes tab.
TABLE 4-6. Graph
display options
AXIS
OPTION
VALUE
X Axis: true_anomaly (deg)
Automatic
Off
Increment
0.5
Automatic
Off
Increment
200
Z Axis: Desired (km)
4. Click OK.
Now it is much easier to see all of the increments in radius increase. You can
see that even setting your true anomaly optimally, the greatest effect on fuel
usage is the perigee radius (rp).
MANIPULATE THE GRAPH

The 3D graph display includes a set of controls that let you manipulate its
display in the Data Explorer. You can use the controls to rotate, move, zoom,
or even add depth to 3D graphs.
FIGURE 4-13.
Analyzer graph controls
1. Click the Rotate ( ) button on the graph control toolbar.

2. Use the mouse to drag the graph in the direction that you want to rotate
it.
3. Try using some of the other controls to manipulate the graph.
4. When you finish, close the Data Explorer (Carpet Plot) window.
5. Close the Carpet Plot Tool window.
Save Your Work

2. Close the scenario ( ) without saving.
3. Close STK ( ).
How Can I Model My Mission

Battlespace & Analyze Access
To Tactical Broadcasts?
EXERCISE 5
In this exercise, you will take the tools in STK to create and analyze a fictional battlespace
situation. Upon completion, you will have had the opportunity to:
Predict Access and intervisibility.

Incorporate terrain for both visualization and analysis.
Import, display, and analyze Geospatial Intelligence Data (GIS).
Analyze real-time data in STK.
How Can I Model My Mission Battlespace & Analyze Access To Tactical Broadcasts?
Problem Statement
The Republic Of Khaliforn (Khaliforn) has been struggling with a growing Maoist
insurgency sponsored by the Peoples Republic of Mhalibu (Mhalibu) an isolated
communist nation that borders Khaliforn to the south and east. The Khaliforn
Peoples Army (KPA) is a group of insurgents living in Khaliforn who are backed
by the Mhalibu Army of People (MAP).
Members of the KPA have attacked multiple western embassies inside
Khaliforn and have taken a number of diplomats hostage. These hostages are
being held inside a village in west-central Khaliforn (Hunter-Liggett Village). The
hostage situation has attracted international attention. The United Nations
(UN) has authorized a task force to assist the Khaliforn government--Task Force
Omega (TFO).
Intelligence reports suggest that MAP and KPA forces are massing in
southern Khaliforn. The enemy forces consists of three divisions equipped
with Soviet-era weaponry. They are not considered a significant threat,
however, if they move the hostages south to one of these divisions before the
TFO can go in and get them, the rescue will become much more complicated.
The TFO needs to act while the hostages are still in the village and the entire
rescue can be executed while the attackers are out of range and without
protection from the rest of their division.
TFO, a division sized force comprised of multinational forces, has been
assembled. The TFO operations base is situated in a coastal city in northern
Khaliforn. The task force (TFO) has successfully established a secure perimeter
approximately 20 kilometers inland from the port. They have also established
themselves in key Khaliforn towns and have placed troops along Khaliforns
southern border.
The exercise will involve reconnaissance missions and a search-and-rescue
(SAR) effort to extract the hostages. As the mission planner, you must not
only have a thorough awareness of all the players in the exercise (both
friendly and unfriendly), but you must also plan the various missions. You will
need to consider the impact of terrain and distance on your communication
links and jamming efforts.
BREAK IT DOWN
EXERCISE 5 | PAGE 2
HOW CAN I MODEL MY MISSION BATTLESPACE & ANALYZE ACCESS TO TACTICAL BROADCASTS?
You are the mission planner for this exercise.

You need to gain an overview of the expected performance of all the
players in the simulation.

Situational awareness is your main objective for this exercise.
You are scheduled to execute your mission on 9 Oct 2009 at 10:00:00.000
UTCG.
The entire mission should take no longer than two hours.
The hostages are being held inside a village in west-central Khaliforn.
Intelligence has provided GIS shapefiles that outline land boundaries, blue
(TFO) and red (MAP and KPA) ground forces, and the location of the
hostage.
The three enemy sites are mobile SA-8 Gecko TELAR (GECKO) equipped
with SA-8 TELAR surface-to-air missiles (SAM).
TFO consists of seven strategically placed battle stations throughout the
northern half of Khaliforn, as well as a headquarters, which is located in
northwestern Khaliforn (TFO_HQ).
A single RC-135 Rivet Joint SIGNET aircraft (Rivet Joint) will be used for
reconnaissance.
An EC-130H Compass Call airborne tactical weapon system aircraft
(Compass Call) will be attempting to jam enemy communications.
An MH-53J Pave Low IIIs heavy lift helicopter (Rescue) will be flying to The
Village to rescue the hostages, and then back home with the hostages
(RTB). The Rescue and the RTB (Return to Base) helicopters are technically
the same helicopter. This helicopters flight modeling is simplified by using
two different models. The first model (Rescue) represents the first portion
of the rescue journey from the point of origin to the village destination
where it pauses for a specified period of time (in a holding pattern) which
accounts for the 15 minutes or so that it will take to load the hostages into
the helicopter, etc. When the crew and the newly released hostages are
loaded, the helicopter that models the return portion of the trip (RTB) is
swapped out. RTB originates at the hostage site and flies the hostages back
to safety. The start time for the RTB aircraft is set the the time when the
rescue ends.
An AH-1W SuperCobra attack helicopter (Cobra) to assist the rescue
helicopter by suppress enemy ground fire.
Cobra takes off from a blue forces controlled airstrip in the southern
boundary of The Village and performed an armed reconnaissance of the
local mountains and The Village itself before Rescue comes in.
Exercise 5 | Page 3
Both rescue helicopters will need constant access to any tactical report
broadcasts by Rivet Joint.

Cobra has the capability to relay tactical report broadcasts from Rivet Joint to
the rescue helicopters if that becomes necessary.
A naval task force is located approximately 50 nautical miles off the coast,
performing reconnaissance and surveillance operations.
The naval task force consists of two ships: (1) A Ticonderoga class guided
missile cruiser (CG-52) equipped with an advanced command and control
(Command and Decision, or C&D, in Aegis parlance), and Weapon
Control System (WCS) that uses powerful computers and radars to track
and guide weapons to destroy enemy targets (Aegis Combat System), and (2) a
Nuclear-powered aircraft carrier combat vessel (CVN-65).
SOLUTION
Using STK, TIM, GIS you will design the battlespace as described above. You
will create a battlespace visualization scenario to obtain situational awareness
of this international crisis. You will then use STK to analyze the rescue
attempt and assess the impact of terrain on blue force communications and
include jamming.

Wow, the problem statement contains a lot of information! To speed things
up and allow you to focus on some important new skills, a partially developed
files area.
3. Locate the student files provided for this exercise (typically,
C:\Training\STK\BattlespaceMgmt\Scenarios).
4. Select Battlespace_Starter.vdf ( ).
5. Click Open.
scenario file (*.sc) Battlespace_Analysis.
The scenario that was provided for this exercise is little more than a shell that
organizes and makes accessible the various elements and tools that you will
EXERCISE 5 | PAGE 4
use to complete your analysis. The scenario doesnt include any objects.
Instead, the workspace is organized so that you have a view of the area of
operations for the rescue mission. The workspace has also been organized
such that an HTML based custom workflow is integrated, the Globe Manager
and Object Browser, which you will use often, are always visible, and toolbars
that you will use to access a variety of tools are enabled. Take a moment to
formularize yourself with the scenario environment now.
GIS Analyst Extension

The GIS Analyst Extension integrates STK with ESRIs ArcGIS engine
runtime. ESRI ArcGIS is an application for map-based tasks including
cartography, map analysis, and editing. Integrating these two products enables
STK users to connect to any GIS format that ESRI supports. STK leverages
the map document which permits all of the properties of the document to be
preserved in the users scenario.
With the GIS Analyst Extension you can integrate ArcGIS map document files
into STK analyses using Globe Manager. You can use this extension to
incorporate geospatial data into your mission analysis and easily manage
terrain, imagery and geospatial layers.
1. Ensure that you have an unobstructed view of the 3D Graphics window.
2. Bring the Globe Manager ( ) to the front, if it is not already.
LOAD GIS DATA

Globe Manager uses three tabbed windows to help you manage the terrain,
imagery and ArcGIS data on your globes. The ArcGIS window displays the
table of contents for ESRI ArcGIS data files (MXD, LYR, PMF and MXT)
allowing you to incorporate GIS information into your scenario and manage
its display in the 3D Graphics window.
As mentioned, intelligence sources have provided GIS data that outlines land
boundaries, ground forces, and the location where the hostage are being held.
You can add these using STKs ArcGIS capabilities.
1. Select the ArcGIS tab in the Globe Manager ( ).
If this tab is not present, you need to install the ArcGIS software and
obtain a license.
Exercise 5 | Page 5
2. Click Open Map Document ( ).

3. Browse to the GIS data directory in the student files provided for this
exercise (C:\Training\STK\BattlespaceMgmt\GISdata).
4. Select the BSM.mxd file.
5. Click Open.
It may take a moment for the GIS data to load. Be patient.
ARCGIS LEGEND
When the GIS data loads, the ArcGIS tab will be populated with the various
layers available. Each layer that is enabled adds an additional level of detail to
the globe in the 3D Graphics window. Below each layer you will see an example
of how each object or boundary is defined in the 3D Graphics window--a
legend corresponding to each layer if you will.
1. Ensure that the ArcGIS tab is selected in the Globe Manager ( ).
2. Expand the various GIS elements in the Layers tree.
Objects and boundaries should be outlined as follows:
EXERCISE 5 | PAGE 6
FIGURE 5-1.
Globe Manager: ArcGIS data layers
3. Experiment with enabling and disabling the various layers.

TABLE 5-1. ArcGIS
ITEM
layer legend
MARKER
friendly_points
Task Force Omega (TFO) headquarters

and other ground locations
enemy_points
Areas occupied by Khaliforn Peoples

Army (KPA) and Mhalibu Army of the
People (MAP).
Hunter_Liggett_Village
Small village inside the Khaliforn

boundary where the hostages are being
held.
kaliforn_province
Boundaries marking various regions of

the Republic of Khaliforn and the
forward line of troops (FLOT) for the
TFO.
Exercise 5 | Page 7
TABLE 5-1. ArcGIS
ITEM
layer legend
MARKER
AreaOfOperations
The entire are being considered and

monitored during the hostage rescue.
intl_boundaries
Boundaries outlining the neutral Republic

of Meridia to the north and the hostile
Peoples republic of Mhalibu to the south
and east.
GET A BETTER LOOK!

GIS layers display only in the 3D Graphics window. Lets take a look at the GIS
display in the 3D Graphics window.
1. Right-click the Area_of_Operation layer.
2. Select Zoom To from the context menu.
FIGURE 5-2.
3D View: GIS boundaries and markers
Take a moment to get a feel for the general location of the entire area of
operations (outlined in black) Khaliforn (outlined in purple), its international
boundaries which include the Republic of Meridia to the north and the Peoples
Republic of Mhalibu to the south and east (outlined in green), the location of
TFO (blue) and MAP and KPA (red) forces, and the Hunter-Liggett Village
(outlined in orange). The line dividing northern and southern Khaliforn
represents the divide between friendly (blue) and unfriendly (red) forces or
the forward line of troops (FLOT).
EXERCISE 5 | PAGE 8
4. Use the feature layers to answer these questions:

How many TFO ground locations are involved?
How many MAP and KPA units?
Have any MAP and KPA units established ground locations within the
borders of Khaliforn?
Where in Khaliforn is the hostage village located?
Manage Terrain & Imagery Displays

The GIS data provided is extremely useful for getting a visual perspective of
where all the various elements in the scenario are and how they relate to each
other, but you also need to visualize and analyze the terrain within the area of
operations. Terrain data for this area has also been provided by intelligence.
The image file provided (JP2) simply lays an image of the terrain on the globe.
The terrain file (PDTT) actually provides depth to the terrain inlay and also
provides elevation and other details for analysis.
First thing to do is ensure that the appropriate terrain and imagery is
accessible via the Globe Manager and set to display on the globe in the
3D Graphics window.
VISUAL TERRAIN
Lets first add an image inlay that provides only visual terrain and see how that
looks.
1. Select the Hierarchy tab in the Globe Manager ( ).
2. Enable the Battlespace.jp2 ( ) image inlay below the Earth ( ) heading in
the Globe Manager ( ).
3. Ensure that the Earth imagery (Earth_PE_b.jp2 ( )) is also enabled.
If the terrain files do not display in the Globe Manager, you can use the
Add Terrain/Imagery option to add them from
C:\Training\STK\BattlespaceMgmt\Terrain.
Exercise 5 | Page 9
FIGURE 5-3.
3D View: GIS boundaries on visual terrain
Adding the visual terrain doesnt obstruct the view of the GIS layers. the
terrain has detail but no height or depth. Notice that the Area of Operation
corresponds to the imagery tile on the globe (Battlespace.jp2).
5. Mouse around in the 3D Graphics window to check out the detail that
visual terrain provides.
FIGURE 5-4.
3D View: Visual terrain detail
ANALYTICAL TERRAIN
In order to provide a truly accurate representation of the terrain in the area of
operation, you also need to add analytical terrain. Analytical terrain will add
height and depth data to the surface of the terrain.
1. Select the Hierarchy tab in the Globe Manager ( ).
2. Enable the Battlespace.pdtt ( ) terrain inlay below the Earth ( ) heading in
the Globe Manager ( ).
You will also need to ensure that terrain data is used in analysis at the scenario
level.
1. Bring the Object Browser to the front (using the tab below the Globe
Manager).
2. Double-click Battlespace_Analysis ( ) to open its properties_( ).
3. Select the Terrain page.
4. Ensure that the Battlespace PDTT file has been added, and the Use option
is enabled.
5. Click OK.
GET A BETTER LOOK

2. Mouse around the 3D Graphics window to get a better look at the terrain
in that area if necessary and answer the following questions.
FIGURE 5-5.
3D View: GIS data with terrain and imagery
Can you see the border imagery in the 3D Graphics windows?

Can you see the area for which you have terrain data?
Can you see the GIS layers?
Using Analytical Terrain With GIS Data

The visual display of terrain (*.pdtt) seems to interfere with the visual display
of GIS data. The markers representing friendly and enemy forces look like
theyre buried in the terrain. The international and provincial boundaries are
also all but invisible. It is difficult to see the feature layers when the terrain
data is enabled because the terrain data gives depth to the surface of the globe
and the feature layers are lying on the globe.
How can I use GIS data to create useful elements that can be used for
visualization and analysis in STK?
While feature layers will not drape over terrain, raster data will. You may
import a feature as an STK object for display on terrain. We will be using
feature layers for our initial familiarization. Later we will import each feature
as an STK object for analysis.
GIS Data As STK Objects

You have GIS data that you can use to model various elements in your
operation, but the terrain obscures the visual display of those elements
making it difficult to see your battlespace. To solve this problem, you can
convert various GIS elements to STK objects. Once converted, you can
manipulate their display and properties just as you would any other object.
Lets close the GIS map document before we begin.
1. Bring the Globe Manager ( ) to the front again.
2. Select the ArcGIS tab.
3. Click Close Map Document ( ).
Model Boundaries
Lets use the shapefiles (*.shp) provided to create area targets that can be used
with the terrain data. This will enable you to outline the various areas of
interest and plot important elements in this operation without sacrificing the
level of terrain detail.
2. Insert a new area target object using the From Saved Shapfile (*.shp)
method ( ).
When you click the Insert... button, the Import Shapefile as STK Object from
which you can to import a shapefile created in ArcView GIS or another GIS
software package into STK.
AREA OF OPERATION
The area of operations encompasses the entire battlefield which includes land
and sea operations in and around Khaliforn. Lets lay the outline for the entire
area of operation now.
2. Locate the Area_of_Operation shapefiles in the student files provided for
this exercise (C:\Training\STK\BattlespaceMgmt\GISdata).
3. Select Area_Of_Operation.shp.
4. Click Open.
When you loaded the shapefile, STK populated the Shapefile Records list with a
list of the individual records contained in that file. The list displays the records
according to the Name By option you choose. The Name By menu is populated
by the first five record specifier types available in the shapefile.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Change the Name By option in the Shapefile Records area to Description.

Select Area of Operation.
Click Insert.
Close the Import Shapefile as STK Object.
CHECK IT OUT
Lets take a look at the STK object created using the shapefile provided.
1. Bring the Object Browser to the front.
Can you see the area target ( ) object in the Object Browser?
2. Position the 2D & 3D Graphics window so that you can see them both.
Notice that you can see STK objects in both visualization windows while the
GIS data showed up only in the 3D Graphics window.
FIGURE 5-6.
2D View: GECKO model
3. Double-click the new area target and go over its properties with your
instructor.
4. When you finish, click Cancel to dismiss the area target properties without
making any changes.
Custom Workflows
The scenario provided includes an HTML-based custom workflow user
interface. Using this interface you can automate the process of adding objects,
defining properties, changing view, and virtually anything that you can do
using the STK graphical user interface. This simple HTML utility, uses
standard button type controls to execute STK Connect commands that will help
us build some of our scenario. Lets check it out!
FIGURE 5-7.
3D View: Battlespace Management Custom Workflow
MODEL ADDITIONAL BOUNDARIES

You can recreate the other boundaries that outline the various regions of your
battlespace using the same method. In the interest of time, STK objects
representing the various boundaries of your battlespace were created for you
using the GIS data provided by intelligence. The objects were configured to
look the same as they did (color) in the GIS layers. Unnecessary labels were
also removed from some of the objects. They can be loaded using the HTML
utility that was included. Lets do that now.
2. Click the Land Boundaries button on the custom HTML utility.
When you click the land boundaries button, the area targets in the table
following are added to the scenario. These objects define the various elements
of the battlefield in much the same way the GIS layers did except they are fully
configurable STK objects.
TABLE 5-2. ArcGIS
AREA
TARGET
COL
layer legend
DESCRIPTION
FROM SHP FILE
Khaliforn
Boundaries marking various regions of the Republic of

Khaliforn and the forward line of troops (FLOT) for the
TFO.
Intl_Boundaries.shp
Meridia
Boundaries outlining the neutral Republic of Meridia to the

north and the hostile Peoples republic of Mhalibu to the
south and east.
Intl_Boundaries.shp
Mhalibu
The_Village
OR
Small village inside the Khaliforn boundary where the

hostages are being held and the rescue will take place.
Intl_Boundaries.shp
Hunter_Liggett_Village.shp
Area Displays
We converted from GIS elements to using standard STK objects. Although
the boundaries of the area targets are more visible than the GIS data was
against the terrain, the various elements still seem a bit buried. Fortunately, we
can solve a lot of this now that were working with STK objects. Lets adjust
the display of the area targets to enhance your visualization.
RAISE THE BOUNDARY

First, raise those boundaries so that the area targets are clearly visible above
the terrain.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Bring the Object Browser to the front.

Select all of the area targets( ).
Set the following 3D Graphics attributes:
TABLE 5-3. 3D
graphics attributes for area targets
OPTION
VALUE
Show Boundary Wall
On
Upper Edge
Height From Terrain
Upper Edge Value
0.1 km
6. Click OK.
This will create a boundary wall that extends just slightly above the local
terrain so that all of the boundaries are visible. Lets take a look.

2. Zoom To one of the area targets.
FIGURE 5-8.
3D View: The Village boundary wall
Model Enemy Forces

Now, its time to start putting some forces on the ground. The three enemy
sites are mobile SA-8 Gecko TELARs (GECKO) equipped with SA-8 TELAR
surface-to-air missiles (SAM). Although the GECKOs are mobile units, they
are currently stationary. We will model these locations as stationary objects at
their current location.
Shapefiles can be used to create a variety of stationary objects in STK--area
targets, facilities, and targets. You can again use the shapefiles provided by
intelligence to mark the three Gecko locations that we saw in the GIS layers.
Lets do that now.
1. Click the MAP & KPA Forces button on the custom HTML utility.
The Gecko locations were modeled using one of the shapefiles
provided by intelligence (Enemy_Points.shp). This file can be found in
the GIS data provided with the student files for this exercise.

3. You should see three facilities (Gecko_1-3) and three sensors (Kill_Zone_13).
THE GECKOS
The three Gecko facilities are configured identically, except for their locations.
Their properties are set to accurately model the SA-8 Gecko TELAR as
follows:
In reality, the physical configuration of the GECKO sites places the missile
launchers approximately two feet about the ground. This was accounted
for in the facilities that were previously created for you by elevation the
position of the GECKO facilities two feet above the ground (Basic Position).
The local terrain was used to create azimuth-elevation masks for the sites.
Those masks were used to constrain access (Basic - AzElMask).
The azimuth-elevation masks were set to display in accordance with the
range of this version of the GECKO (kill range: 1,500 meters, maximum
range: 12,000 meters) (2D Graphics - AzEl - AtRange).
Altitude constraints for the SAMS were set so that the reach of each
station is clearly visible. Each unit has a 25 meter altitude range that tops
out at 5000 meters (Constraints - Basic - Altitude).
Each unit is using the SA-8 GECKO model (3D Graphics - Model).
GET A BETTER LOOK

2. Make one of the GECKO mobile units the focal point in the 3D Graphics
window.
3. Mouse around until you can clearly see the GECKO model.
FIGURE 5-9.
3D View: GECKO model
THE KILL ZONES

The predefined sensors model the range of the radar representing the kill
zone for each enemy GECKO site. In STK, you can use a sensor to model
the field-of-view of a radar so that you have a visual representation of radar
coverage.
Each sensor has a minimum range of 1500 meters and a maximum range
of 12, 000 meters (Constraints - Basic - Range) consistent with the azimuthelevation mask on the GECKO.
The line of sight, az-el mask, and field of view are also constrained for each
sensor (Constraints - Basic).
GET A BETTER LOOK

1. Bring the 3D Graphics window to the front. Your view should already be
centered on one of the GECKO locations.
2. Mouse around until you can clearly see the kill zone.
FIGURE 5-10.
3D View: GECKO 2 kill zone
Model Task Force Omega

Now, that we have a fairly accurate representation of the enemy forces, its
time to define TFO. Using the information provided by intelligence, STK
objects representing the various ground forces that make up the ground order
of battle (GOB) have been modeled and saved for you. We have also provided
the airborne and seaborne forces that complete the TFO team. Using the
custom workflow provided, you can model the entire TFO operation with the
touch of a button. Lets do it!
1. Click the TFO Forces button on the custom HTML utility.
GROUND LOCATIONS
The grounded portion of Task Force Omega (TFO) consists of seven
strategically placed squadrons (Blue 1-7) throughout the northern half of
Khaliforn, as well as a headquarters (TFO_HQ), which is located northeast of
Mhonterrey. The ground portion of TFO are squadrons consisting of temporary
housing for soldiers and equipment.
Again, each facility provided is configured identically except for their location.
Their properties are set to accurately model the squadrons as follows:
The physical configuration of the sites places them approximately two feet
about the ground. This was accounted for in the facilities that were
previously created for you by elevation the position of the GECKO

facilities two feet above the ground (Basic - Position).
Each unit is using the tent city model to represent the temporary structures
(3D Graphics - Model).
GET A BETTER LOOK

2. Make one of the Blue locations the focal point in the 3D Graphics window.
3. Mouse around until you can clearly see the tent city model.
FIGURE 5-11.
3D View: Tent city model
AIRBORNE & SEABORNE OPERATIONS

Modeling the TFO requires not only that you add forces on the ground but
also ships and aircraft representing the airborne and seaborne operations.
Can you see the airborne and seaborne forces that were modeled for
you?
The tables following give a brief outline of the various elements that comprise
the airborne and seaborne forces. You can use it as a reference as you
manipulate the scenario and see the operations in action.
1. First, well discuss the airborne forces:
TABLE 5-4. Airborne
OBJECT
Cobra
TFO forces
DESCRIPTION
An AH-1W SuperCobra attack helicopter (Cobra) is used to assist the rescue helicopter
(Rescue and RTB) by suppressing enemy ground fire.
Cobra also has the capability to relay tactical report broadcasts from Rivet Joint to the
helicopters if that becomes necessary.
Compass Call
Rescue
RTB
RivetJoint
An EC-130H Compass Call airborne tactical weapon system aircraft (Compass Call) is flying
off the cost of Khaliforn. He will be attempting to jam enemy communications during the
rescue attempt.
An MH-53J Pave Low IIIs heavy lift helicopter (Rescue) will be flying in to rescue the
hostages, and then back to TFO headquarters with the hostages (RTB). Note that the flight
to the hostages and the flight back to TFO HQ are represented by two separate aircraft. This
is to account for the in flight delay caused by loading the hostages etc.
A single RC-135 Rivet Joint SIGNET aircraft (Rivet Joint) being used for reconnaissance is
also flying off the coast of Khaliforn. Both helicopters (Rescue and RTB) will need constant
communication to any tactical report broadcasts by Rivet Joint via Cobra.
2. Now, lets go over the seaborne forces:

TABLE 5-5. Seaborne
TFO forces
OBJECT
DESCRIPTION
CG_52
A Ticonderoga class guided missile cruiser (CG-52) equipped with an advanced command
and control (Command and Decision, or C&D, in Aegis parlance), and Weapon Control
System (WCS) that uses powerful computers and radars to track and guide weapons to
destroy enemy targets (Aegis Combat System) used for recognizance and surveillance.
CVN_65
Nuclear-powered aircraft carrier combat vessel.
GET A BETTER LOOK

1. Bring the 2D and 3D visualization windows to the front.
2. Take some time to acquaint yourself with the various objects that make up
the airborne and seaborne forces.
Change the focal point.
Examine the various models.
Check out the routes from a distance.
Manipulate the view to see how the objects interact.
Animate the scenario.
Remember that each helicopter (Rescue and RTB) comprises only half
the rescue operation. If you are focused on one and it seems to
disappear you will likely have to adjust your view so that your are
focused on the other to maintain visual contact.
FIGURE 5-12.
3D View: Rescue helicopter landing
Forward Line of Troops

The Forward Line of Troops (FLOT) is usually reserved for hostile forces
fighting a battle with a line that stretches for miles. This line indicates the
front line separation between combatants. Although the blue and red forces in
this scenario are not fighting a large scale battle, there is a distinct line
between large enemy and friendly forces. Lets model the FLOT now.
1. Open Windows Explorer ( ).
2. Browse to the Import Objects directory in the student files provided for this
exercise (C:\Training\STK\BattlespaceMgmt\Import Objects).
Line Targets are objects that define a line connecting selected points on the
surface of the earth. You can define 2D and 3D Graphics properties for a line
target, and you can impose various kinds of constraints on it.
3. Select FLOT.lt.
4. Drag FLOT.lt and drop it anywhere in the STK Workspace.
5. Close Windows Explorer ( ).

You should be able to see the FLOT on the 2D and 3D Graphics window. Lets
take a look.
2. Make the FLOT the focal point in the 3D Graphics window.
3. Mouse around until you can clearly see how the FLOT divides the
battlespace.
Do the GECKO KIll Zones fall entirely behind the FLOT.
FIGURE 5-13.
3D View: Area of operations
The FLOT is the clear line between TFO and the red forces (MAP and KPA)
that you just modeled.
Access To Tactical Report Broadcasts

Prior to Rescue entering The Village, the Cobra helicopter takes off from a blue
forces controlled airstrip in the southern boundaries of The Village and
performs an armed reconnaissance of the local mountains and The Village
itself. Its obvious that the Rescue helicopters (Rescue and RTB) will be able to
communicate with Cobra based on their close proximity (or is it!). However,
your mission is counting on Cobra being able to communicate with Rivet Joint
so that he can relay tactical reports to the Rescue helicopters (Rescue and RTB).
Go ahead and run a quick access report between the Rescue helicopters (Rescue
and RTB), Rivet Joint and Cobra to determine if this is feasible.

TABLE 5-6. Access
OPTION
VALUE
Access for
Cobra
Associated Objects
Rescue
RTB
Rivet Joint
3. Click the Access... button in the Graphs area.

FIGURE 5-14.
Graph: Cobra access to RivetJoint and Rescue
Use the Access report to answer the following question:

Does Cobra have access to the rescue helicopters for his entire
mission (Rescue and RTB)?
Do you see any gaps in access that you wouldnt have anticipated?
How critical is this period to your mission?
Does Cobra have access to Rivet Joint for the entire mission?
Can Cobra relay tactical reports from Rivet Joint) during period when it
has no access to Rescue?
What could be interfering with transmissions between Cobra and
Rescue, which represents the inbound portion of the mission.
Lets see if we cant find out.

1. Right-click at the end of the first portion of access between Cobra and
Rescue just before the break in access.
2. Select Set Animation Time from the context menu.
3. Select Current from the menu that appears.
Can you see the access line between Cobra and Rescue?
5. If you cannot see the access line between Cobra and Rescue step the
animation backward ( ) until you can.
6. Step the animation forward ( ) until access disappears.
FIGURE 5-15.
3D View: Cobra to Rescue access
WHEN YOU FINISH

2. Close the access report.
3. Leave the Access tool ( ) open.
RivetJoint to Rescue
The Rescue helicopter is performing a terrain following flight profile between
two mountain ranges which is interfering with Cobras ability to maintain
communication with the Rescue helicopter. It appears that the Rescue helicopter
falls behind a ridge that blocks Cobras view for about a minute during the
inbound portion of the mission. The terrain around the village is taking its toll
on your operation, but youve still got some tricks up your sleeve.
Lets first see if RivetJoint has direct access to the Rescue helicopter while Cobra
does not.
TABLE 5-7. Access
OPTION
VALUE
Access for
RivetJoint
Associated Objects
Rescue
3. Click the Access... button in the Graphs area.

FIGURE 5-16.
Graph: RiverJoint access to Rescue
Does RivetJoint have access to Rescue for his entire mission?

How critical is this period to your mission?
Does it overlap with the time that Cobra doesnt have access to
Rescue?
For how long does Rescue have no access?
Its seems that RivetJoint is having the same problem accessing the Rescue
helicopter that Cobra was having. This still leaves the Rescue helicopter
unprotected for a short portion of its inbound flight. Back to the drawing
board!
4. Close the access report.

Direct communication is always optimal, but during periods when direct
communication isnt possible, you may be able to use GPS to fill in the gaps.
Both RivetJoint and Rescue helicopters are equipped to handle transmissions via
the GPS network. Lets see if we cant find a back up method for
communicating with the Rescue helicopter that wont be affected by the terrain.
TABLE 5-8. Create
OPTION
a GPS network
VALUE
Satellite
Select a Method:
CONSTRAIN THE CONSTELLATION

You want to make sure that your objects have access to at least four (4) of the
GPS satellites at any given time during the analysis period. Using the
constraint will ensure that only the necessary data is reported.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open GPSConstellation ( ) properties ( ).

Select At Least N from the Restriction list.
Enter the number 4 in the adjacent textbox.
Click OK.
Model the Chain of Events

Now, lets see if RivetJoint or Cobra have access to the inbound Rescue via the
GPS network. To complete this analysis you will have to build two seperate
chains: (1) the first to asses visibility from RivetJoint to Rescue and (2) the
second to assess visibility from Cobra to Rescue. Those two chains have been
created for you. You can add them using the HTML utility.
1. Click the Chains button on the HTML utility.
The following two chain objects ( ) will be added to your scenario:
Cobra_To_Rescue = Cobra --> GPSConstellation --> Rescue
RJ_To_Rescue = RivetJoint --> GPSConstellation --> Rescue
In each instance the chain will ensure that you determine if either object has
access to the Rescue helicopter via the GPS network. Lets get to work.
REPORT CHAIN ACCESS

TABLE 5-9. Complete
chain access report
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Chain
Cobra_To_Rescue
RJ_To_Rescue
Show Reports
Off
Show Graphs
On
Installed Styles
Generate as
Report/Graph
FIGURE 5-17.
.Graph: Access to Rescue
Use the Complete Chain Access report to answer the following question:
Who can access Rescue via GPS?
Can they access Rescue during the times that there is no direct line of
sight access?
What changes could you make in order to provide better tactical report
access to Rescue?

Who Else Can See Rescue?

You now have a complete picture of the communication opportunities
between your resources. There are quite a few potential times for access and
monitoring. You have to assume that if you can monitor the rescue effort, you
can also be monitored. In a state of affairs such as this, you have no choice
but to assume that enemy forces are monitoring you. Transmissions should be
kept to a minimum and every precaution should be taken. Youll need to
model jammers throughout Khaliforn to ensure that your tactical broadcasts
aren't being monitored. Jammers, that can help with this are onboard
CompassCall.

CompassCall is equipped with two Jammers one on each side of the craft. Each
Jammer is attached using a senor object. The sensor acts as a pointing device
for the communications equipment. The sensors also provide a visual
representation of the range of the Jammers. Lets take a look.
1. Ensure that the 2D and 3D Graphics window are positioned so that you
can see them both clearly.
2. Make CompassCall ( ) the focal point in the 3D Graphics window.
3. Click the CompassCall Jammers button on the HTML utility.
FIGURE 5-18.
3D View: Jammers field-of-view
4. Center the view in the 2D Graphics window around the Jammers fields-ofview extending from CompassCall, while ensuring that you can see
CompasCalls route clearly.
FIGURE 5-19.

6. Watch the pattern of the sensors as CompassCall travels along his path.
Can the Jammers cover all of Khaliforn for the entirety of the rescue
mission?
At what point(s) in CompassCalls path does he leave Khaliforn

uncovered?
Does the time that the Jammers cannot cover all of Khaliforn coincide
with the time during which you have no access to the Rescue
helicopter?
HINT: Set the animation time to the same time that Rescue loses
access and see if Rescue is covered during that time.
When You Finish

1. Make Area_Of_Operation ( ) or Battlespace.jp2 ( ) the focal point in the
3D Graphics window if it is not already.
3. Leave the scenario ( ) open.
How Can I Simulate & Analyze

a Tactical Rescue Operation
In Real-time?
EXERCISE 6
In this exercise, you will take the tools in STK to create and analyze a fictional battlespace
situation. Upon completion, you will have had the opportunity to:
Animate a scenario in real-time in STK.

Use DSIM data and RT3 to simulate a rescue operation.
Define a simple query.
Work with entities and STK objects.
Customize the display of a real-time simulation.
How Can I Simulate & Analyze a Tactical Rescue Operation In Real-time?
Problem Statement
The Republic Of Khaliforn (Khaliforn) has been struggling with a growing Maoist
insurgency sponsored by the Peoples Republic of Mhalibu (Mhalibu) an isolated
communist nation that borders Khaliforn to the south and east. The Khaliforn
Peoples Army (KPA) is a group of insurgents living in Khaliforn who are backed
by the Mhalibu Army of People (MAP).
Members of the KPA have attacked multiple western embassies inside
Khaliforn and have taken a number of diplomats hostage. These hostages are
being held inside a village in west-central Khaliforn (Hunter-Liggett Village). The
hostage situation has attracted international attention. The United Nations
(UN) has authorized a task force to assist the Khaliforn government--Task Force
Omega (TFO).
Intelligence reports suggest that MAP and KPA forces are massing in
southern Khaliforn. The enemy forces consists of three divisions equipped
with Soviet-era weaponry. They are not considered a significant threat,
however, if they move the hostages south to one of these divisions before the
TFO can go in and get them, the rescue will become much more complicated.
The TFO needs to act while the hostages are still in the village and the entire
rescue can be executed while the attackers are out of range and without
protection from the rest of their division.
The exercise will involve reconnaissance missions and a search-and-rescue
(SAR) effort to extract the hostages. As the mission planner, you must not
only have a thorough awareness of all the players in the exercise (both
friendly and unfriendly), but you must also plan the various missions. You
must create a simulation that can be used for planning and analysis.
BREAK IT DOWN
You have a previously created scenario that outlines the battlefield and
both friendly and unfriendly forces in great detail. Refer to the scenario
breakdown below for specifics.
You need to gain an overview of the expected performance of all the
players in the simulation.
Situational awareness is your main objective for this exercise.
EXERCISE 6 | PAGE 2
HOW CAN I SIMULATE & ANALYZE A TACTICAL RESCUE OPERATION IN REAL-TIME?
SOLUTION
You have configured a battlespace situation for the nation of Khaliforn. You
have a recorded simulation that will be fed into STK via DIS and RT3. Using
that simulation, you need to monitor assets in realtime, as they perform the
rescue mission, to verify the following:
Resources can effectively communicate in the battlespace.
Both rescue helicopters (Rescue and RTB) will need constant access to any
tactical report broadcasts by Rivet Joint either directly or via Cobra.

Compass Call resources can jam enemy communications in the area during
the rescue attempt.
All TFO assets are out of enemy range for the duration of the rescue.

teaches you to simulate and analyze the rescue effort, a partially developed
files area.
1. Open the Battlespace_ Analysis scenario if it is not already.
If you do not have the BattlespaceAnalysis scenario, you can open a
C:\Training\STK\BattlespaceMgmt\ Scenarios\.
scenario file (*.sc) Battlespace_Simulation.
Reacquaint Yourself With Battlespace

The scenario that was provided for this exercise contains all of the objects
that make up your battlespace. Lets review.
The workspace is organized so that you have a view of the area of
operations for the rescue mission.

The workspace has also been organized such that an HTML based custom
workflow is integrated into the workspace, the Globe Manager and Object
Exercise 6 | Page 3
Browser, which you will use often, are always visible, and toolbars that you
will use to access a variety of tools are clearly visible.
GPS network for design and analysis of communications system.
THE BATTLEFIELD
The following objects define the battlefield:
An area target outlining the entire area of operation.
An area target outlining the boundary of the Republic Of Khaliforn (Khaliforn).
An area target outlining the boundary of the Republic Of Meridia (Meridia)
north of Khaliforn.
An area target outlining the boundary of the Peoples Republic Of Mhalibu
(Mhalibu) to the south and east of Khaliforn.
A line target representing the forward line of troops (FLOT), which
indicates the front line separation between combatants.
THE GOOD GUYS

The following objects represent the good guys (TFO):
An AH-1W SuperCobra attack helicopter (Cobra) is used to assist the rescue
EXERCISE 6 | PAGE 4
helicopter by suppressing enemy ground fire, and relaying tactical report

broadcasts if that becomes necessary.
An EC-130H Compass Call airborne tactical weapon system aircraft
(Compass Call) is flying off the cost of Khaliforn attempting to jam enemy
communications during the rescue attempt.
An MH-53J Pave Low IIIs heavy lift helicopter (Rescue) will be flying in to
rescue the hostages, and then back to TFO headquarters with the hostages
(RTB). Note that the flight to the hostages and the flight back to TFO HQ
are represented by two seperate aircraft. This is to account for the in flight
delay caused by loading the hostages etc.
A single RC-135 Rivet Joint SIGNET aircraft (Rivet Joint) being used for
reconnaissance is also flying off the coast of Khaliforn.
A Ticonderoga class guided missile cruiser (CG-52) equipped with an
advanced command and control (Command and Decision, or C&D, in
Aegis parlance), and Weapon Control System (WCS) that uses powerful
computers and radars to track and guide weapons to destroy enemy targets
(Aegis Combat System) performing recognizance and surveillance about 50
nautical miles off the coast of Khaliforn.
Nuclear-powered aircraft carrier combat vessel (CVN-65) performing
recognizance and surveillance about 50 nautical miles off the coast of

Khaliforn.
Seven strategically placed battle stations throughout the northern half of
Khaliforn (Blue 1-7), as well as a headquarters, which is located in
northwestern Khaliforn (TFO_HQ).
THE BAD GUYS

And, the bad guys (MAP & KPA):
Three mobile SA-8 Gecko TELAR (Gecko 1-3) equipped with SA-8
TELAR surface-to-air missiles (SAM) representing Mhalibu Army of the

People (MAP) and The Khaliforn Peoples Army (KPA) ground forces.
An area target outlining the boundary of the village where the hostages are
being held (TheVillage).
Real Time Tracking Tool (RT3)

The STK/Real Time Tracking Tool (RT3) Extension is an off-the-shelf solution
for displaying and analyzing live and simulated data feeds in STK and AGI
Viewer; its user interface has the same appearance in both applications. An
RT3 license is required to use the RT3 Extension, and you must install the RT3
disk to add it to your STK and AGI Viewer installations.
The RT3 Extension's user interface is comprised of six components - the
Display Manager, the Archive Player, the Event Manager, the Event Log, the Output
tool, and the Display Settings tool - that allow you to select data sources, replay
archived data, refine output by utilizing queries, and monitor data by
establishing events. You can access each of the components from the RT3
menu or toolbar.
In this scenario, the RT3 Display Manager is enabled and tabbed on the left
hand side of the with the Object Browser and Globe Manager.
DSIM
DSim is a separately licensed extension to RT3 that provides an IEEEcompliant Distributed Interactive Simulation (DIS) and High Level Architecture
(HLA) interface for reading data feeds from distributed simulations. DSim
Exercise 6 | Page 5
uses MK Technology's VR-Link toolkit to interact with the HLA and DIS
feeds.
Prepare For the Simulation

Before you begin the simulation, lets animate the existing scenario and
familiarize ourselves with the battlespace. After were done, you can make
some adjustments to the battlespace to prepare for the simulation.
GET MOVING!
The scenario time period is very short. Take some time to view the action in
the scenario from several different perspectives. For instance, you may want
to focus on one of the rescue helicopters (Rescue and RTB) up close when they
come in for the rescue or pull back and watch as the jammers attached to
CompassCall cover the area of operation.
2. Pause ( ) or reset ( ) the animation and change your focal point to focus
on the action of various different objects.
Watch as many times as you like focusing on various aspects of the scenario
until you feel comfortable that you understand the function of each element.
This will make it easier to follow the simulation.
If you completed the Battlespace building and analysis exercise
previously, you may not need to spend as much time reviewing the
action of the scenario. This scenario is exactly the same as the one that
you built in that exercise.
DELETE OBJECTS
You have data for the various objects that make up the action of the rescue.
That data contains information about several entities. RT3 will not be able to
manage those entities during the simulation if duplicate STK objects exist in
the scenario already. Go ahead and delete the objects that will be manager by
the simulation.
2. Delete ( ) the following:
Cobra ( )
EXERCISE 6 | PAGE 6
CompassCall ( ) (the Jammers and other attached equipment will be deleted

automatically when you delete CompassCall)
Rescue ( )
RTB ( )
RivetJoint ( )
Cobra_To_Rescue ( )
RJ_To_Rescue ( )
CG_52 ( )
CVN_55 ( )
When you delete the chain objects you will be asked if you want to also delete
all assigned objects. The GPS constellation is part of each chain. You do not
want to delete that network.
3. Click No when the Delete Object dialog appears.

2. Ensure that Area_Of_Operation ( ) or Battlespace.jp2 ( ) is the focal point
in the 3D Graphics window.
3. Save ( ) your work. In doing so verify the scenario name and location
(C:\My Documents\STK 9\BattlespaceSimulation).
Were ready to get started now!
RT3 Display Manager

The Display Manager is the primary interface for selecting real-time data feeds
and defining how they will be displayed and tracked in the RT3 Extension.
1. Bring STK ( ) to the front.
2. Select the RT3 Display Manager ( ) tab (below the Object Browser) to bring
it to the front.
If the RT3 Display Manager is not visible, enable the RT3 toolbar. From
that toolbar you can launch the various RT3 Extension components.
Exercise 6 | Page 7
Select a Provider
A provider is an interface to a specific real-time data source. Providers
convert the source data stream into fields of data, which can be information
about the source or individual real-time data items being provided by that
source.
For this scenario, you will use Distributed Interactive Simulation (DIS) since the
data provided was produced by DSim to be DIS data.
1. Select the Distributed Interactive Simulation provider from the topmost dropdown menu in the RT3 Display Manager ( ) if it is not already.
2. Click the button beside Distributed Interactive Simulation.
FIGURE 6-1.
RT3 Provider selection
When you insert a provider element in the Display Manager, the Provider
Configuration window opens. The options available vary depending on the
provider.
EXERCISE 6 | PAGE 8
FIGURE 6-2.
RT3 Provider configuration
The Distributed Interactive Simulation (DIS) provider is used to read DIS data
feeds. The options here tell STK how to wait for the external data (with
update rate information, port numbers, etc). You can edit or create a
configuration file using the Configuration File Editor.
The DIS heartbeat is the length of time, in seconds, that STK should wait for
data from an object before being considered deleted from the scenario. The
data feed that we have has data in six to ten second intervals. The DIS
configuration looks for a five second heartbeat.Well need to change that to
prevent DIS from creating duplicate objects.
3. Set the Heartbeat (sec) option to 10.
DSIM CONFIGURATION FILE EDITOR

The Configuration File Editor can be used to customize the mapping of entity
classes to specific markers and models for display in STK, and to define
object templates to model entities received through a DSim DIS or HLA
entity provider. In this exercise, we will use the default configuration file
provided with STK (Default.dsim). The fields and values all conform to SISO
standards. Lets take a look at the defaults provided.
1. Click the Edit... button.
Exercise 6 | Page 9
FIGURE 6-3.
DSim Configuration File Editor
The Kind, Domain, Country, and Category fields have been populated with
selections consistent with these standards. The SubCategory, Specific, and Extra
fields can be manually populated with compliant data. The Marker Settings
window provides four options for defining the marker to be used for an
entity. The Model & Template Settings window provides three options for
defining the model to be used for an entity.
2. Click Close to dismiss the Configuration Manager without making any
changes.
3. When you return to the DIS Configuration window, click OK to accept the
values.
Create a Query
Immediately after configuring a provider connection, you will be prompted to
create a query. By default, none of a provider's entities are displayed when the
provider is first added; you must create a query to begin viewing data. A query
is a real-time element that filters a provider's data to display specific subsets of
it, called entities. By default, none of a provider's entities are displayed when
the provider is first added; you must create a query to begin viewing data.
FIGURE 6-4.
.RT3 Query creation
1. When the RT3 Query Creation dialog appears, click Create Query.
Creating a query will open the Query Configuration window. By default, a Simple
Query is created. A simple query is a basic data filter that utilizes a SQL-based
set of expressions and operands to determine what data will be displayed. The
options here allow you to define the data that you want to display - by
comparing the data - and the manner in which it will be displayed.
2. When the Query Configuration window opens, name the query Airborne
Rescue Operations.
Now, lets define a clause that tells RT3 to acknowledge all data for aircraft
objects. You can use the mappings outlined in the DSim configuration file to
differentiate entities.
3. Click the Add button to add a clause to the simple query.
TABLE 6-1. Simple
query aircraft clause
OPTION
VALUE
Field Name
Domain
Operand
Field Value
Conjunction
None
The clauses that you just created will display any aircraft (2) found in the data.
The options below the clauses define the display of the entities that are
acknowledged. Each standard query can be configured to display entities in
STK or AGI Viewer with general, line, model, and marker display options.
GENERAL DISPLAY OPTIONS

The General display options allow you to customize the color and label for the
entities that meet the criteria defined.
1. Locate the General options.
TABLE 6-2. General
OPTION
VALUE
Color
White
Display Labels
On
display options
3. Click Label Settings...

4. Move ( ) DisplayName to the Chosen Fields list.
5. Click OK.
MODELS & MARKERS

Using the display options that RT3 provides, you can make more meaningful
representation of objects. Lets define a marker and a model for the aircraft in
this scenario. Well define a detailed model for viewing at close range and a
standard Mil2525B marker for distance viewing.
1. Locate the Model options.
TABLE 6-3. Model
OPTION
options
VALUE
Display Models On
Model File
C:\Program Files\AGI\STK
9\STKData\VO\Models\Air\aircraft.mdl
When the entities associated with this query display in the 3D Graphics
window, the default model for each entity, as defined in the Provider
Configuration Manager will display.
3. Locate the Marker options.
TABLE 6-4. Marker
OPTION
VALUE
Display Markers
On
MIL2525B Symbol
On
options
5. Click OK.
Query Ships
This operation depends on two different types of vehicles--aircraft and ships.
We told RT3 to acknowledge and display all of the aircraft. Lets create a
second query for ships.
If we had defined the previous query to include both, we wouldnt be
able to define different display properties for the different vehicle types.
1. When you return to the RT3 Display Manager ( ), ensure that Distributed
Interactive Simulation is the selected provider.
2. Select Simple Query from the entity drop-down menu.
FIGURE 6-5.
3. Click the
provider.
RT3 Display manager with query
button beside Simple Query to add a second query to the same
4. When the Query Configuration window opens, name the event Seaborne
Rescue Operation.
5. Click the Add button to add a clause to the simple query.
6. Next, define a clause that acknowledges all ships
TABLE 6-5. Simple
query ship clause
OPTION
VALUE
Field Name
Domain
Operand
Field Value
Conjunction
None
DISPLAY OPTIONS
The clauses that you just created will display any ships (3) found in the data.
Now set the display options for ships. Well have ships show up in a different
color. Everything else should be the same.
1. Locate the General options.
TABLE 6-6. General
OPTION
VALUE
Color
Blue
Display Labels
On
display options
3. Click Label Settings...

4. Move ( ) DisplayName to the Chosen Fields list.
5. Click OK to return to the Query Configuration window.
MODELS & MARKERS

Ships will use the default model, but lets define a marker different than that
being used by aircraft for distance viewing.
1. Locate the Model options.
TABLE 6-7. Model
OPTION
options
VALUE
Display Models On
Model File
C:\Program Files\AGI\STK
9\STKData\VO\Models\Sea\ship.mdl
3. Locate the Marker options.

TABLE 6-8.
OPTION
VALUE
Display Markers
On
MIL2525B Symbol
On
5. Click OK.
That should ensure that ships and aircraft entities look distinctly different in
the visualization windows.
6. When you return to the Display Manager ( ), ensure that the following are
enabled:
Distributed Interactive Simulation provider
Airborne Rescue Operation query
Seaborne Rescue Operation query
Marker, Model, Label and Line display options
FIGURE 6-6.
RT3 Display manager with query
The RT3 Event Manager will launch automatically.

7. Minimize ( ) or dismiss ( ) the Event Manager.
DIS Log
External Tools allow you to further customize your workspace by integrating
the functionality of external applications. A logger will be used to playback
pre-recorded DIS data and push it into STK via the RT3 interface. The logger
has been integrated into STK for quick access. Lets open it now.
1. Browse to the location of the DSim Data (typically,
C:\Training\STK\BattlespaceMgmt\DSimData
2. Select DISLog.
FIGURE 6-7.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Simulation Logger
When DISLog opens, extend the Options menu.

Select Playback.
Enable the Realtime option if it is not already.
Click OK.
Position the logger so that it is not obstructing the view in the 3D Graphics
window.
LOAD THE SIMULATION LOG

You have your logger up, but it has no file to read. You need to tell the logger
where to find the data.
1. Extend the File menu.
2. Select Open.
3. Browse to the DSimData directory in the student file provided for this
exercise (C:\Training\STK\BattlespaceMgmt\DSimData).
4. Select the pre-recorded data that will stream to STK (BSM.log).
5. Click Open.
Start the Simulation

In this exercise you will be visualizing data in real-time using the STK/Real
Time Tracking Tool (RT3). When visualizing data with RT3, it is important that
the STK animation time matches the timestamp of the incoming data feed. If
you are viewing live data, this is most easily accomplished by making sure your
system time is accurate and that you are running STK in Real-Time animation
mode. When viewing archived data, set the animation mode to X-Real-Time
and animate from the beginning of the archived feed.
1. Ensure that STK is in Real-Time Animation Mode ( ).
2. Ensure that both the Object Browser and the 3D Graphics Window are clearly
visible.
3. Click the green Play button on the logger.
If several networked computers are accessing data from the same
source, only one of those computers needs to run the data feed from
the network.

Entities populate the Object Browser. You can see aircraft and ships entering the
scenario. Once you bring in entities from your DIS or HLA data feed, any
siblings associated with the objects (prebuilt or designed by you) can now be
used with those objects.
Entities & Objects

We have seperate queries that display entities differently based on their
domain, but every entity that shares a domain is the same color (white or blue)
and model (default aircraft or ship model). Most of the aircraft in this exercise
are helicopters, but all aircraft use the default airplane model. Likewise, you
have two very different ships both being represented by the default ship
model. The entities are not very visually dramatic.
If you wanted each object to show up with its own model, you could do one
of two things:
Create a seperate query for each object and customize the associated
display properties when you define the query;

or
Promote the entity to a savable STK object, and define display properties
that can be saved with the object even when the simulation is not active.
GET INFO TOOL

You can use the Get Info Tool to return data from the 3D Graphics window.
Currently it can be used to return information about and act on STK, GIS,
and RT3 objects. You can launch the Get Info Tool for an entity directly from
the RT3 Display Manager (as we did here) or using the Get Info Tool button ( )
on the Default toolbar.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bring the RT3 Display Manager ( ) to the front, again.

Right-click the Airborne Rescue Operations query.
Select View Query Entities.
When the Get Info Tool opens, select STK Objects from the Layers dropdown.
5. Expand the layers tree as follows:
...RT3
...Airborne Rescue Operation
6. Click on any object to display information about that object.
Note that all of the aircraft are listed under the Airborne Rescue Operation
heading as STK Objects.
How can that be? We havent promoted them.
By default, the Auto Promotion option is enabled in RT3. When this option is
active, entities with attitude data will automatically be promoted heavy objects.
The data that we are using contains attitude for the vehicles that make up the
rescue operation.
7. When you finish, close the Get Info Tool.
STOP THE SIMULATION

1.
2.
3.
4.
Reset ( ) the animation in STK.

Click the black Stop button on the logger.
Click the black Reset button on the logger.
Bring the Object Browser and the 3D Graphics window to the front.
What happened to the objects created for you?
When STK stops receiving attitude data for a vehicle it is not longer a part of
the STK scenario unless that data were stored with the object, which it is not
by default.
Promoting Entities
The entities in the data are automatically promoted to STK objects, which is
nice, but we would also like to be able to stop the clock and perform more indepth analysis and perhaps save still images of various aspects of the rescue
operation. If the objects disappear we cant do that unless we hurry to
perform analysis and snap images while the scenario is in motion. That might
not always be realistic.
How can I save promoted entities as STK objects?
DISPLAY SETTINGS
The RT3 Display Settings allows you to configure the behavior of RT3 in STK.
From here you can control various aspects of entity and object display.
1. Click the Display Settings button ( ) on the RT3 toolbar.
When you click the Display Settings button will launch the STK Broker
Configuration dialog. Broker provides the ability to manage large numbers of
tracks within STK. This includes graphics level of detail control (changing
models, symbols, etc). Broker allows switching from tracks with sensors
(heavy objects), to a light object (track and label only) dynamically with the
objective to optimize hardware resources.
FIGURE 6-8.
Display Settings (STK Broker Configuration)
The options available are outlined in the table following:

TABLE 6-9. RT3
Display Settings (Broker Configuration)
OPTION
DESCRIPTION
Enable Auto Promotion
This option is on by default. If enabled, entities with attitude data will

automatically be promoted to heavy objects.
Rotate Markers for Velocity
If enabled, markers in the 2D and 3D graphics windows will be rotated to

maintain a facing in the direction of the entity's velocity. By default, markers
are oriented to the right.
Display Correlated Entities
If enabled, entities that have been identified as secondary correlated entities by

an entity processor will be displayed in addition to the primary correlated
entity.
Scenario Creation Mode
If enabled, objects that are removed from the broker will not be deleted from
the scenario; this will allow you to preserve the objects for later offline
analysis.
Detail Thresholds
If enabled, controls that allow you to apply detail thresholds and then define
threshold distances for the display of the model, label and marker, marker, and
point levels of detail for entities. If you haven't defined a level of detail, RT3
will skip to the next level of detail in that direction. For example, if you haven't
defined a marker for the entity, when you zoom out beyond the threshold for
model display RT3 will jump to the point level of detail to ensure that the
entity remains visible in some capacity at all times.
2. Enable the Scenario Creation Mode option.

3. Click OK.
Restart the Simulation

1. Ensure that STK is in Real-Time Animation Mode ( ).
2. Ensure that both the Object Browser and the 3D Graphics Window are clearly
visible.
3. Click the green Play button on the logger.
If several networked computers are accessing data from the same
source, only one of those computers needs to run the data feed from
the network.

Can you see the ships and aircraft in the Object Browser again.
3D Display
As discussed earlier, every entity that shares a domain is the same color (white
or blue) and model (default aircraft or ship model). Most of the aircraft in this
exercise are helicopters, but all aircraft use the default airplane model.
Likewise, you have two very different ships both being represented by the
default ship model. The entities are not very visually dramatic. Now that the
objects are available in the Object Browser, you can edit their properties just like
any other object.

2. Make Rescue ( ) the focal point in the 3D Graphics window.
3. When you see object appear in the 3D Graphics window Pause ( ) the
animation.
FIGURE 6-9.
3D View: Rescue helicopter
3D MODELS
In reality, an MH-53J Pave Low IIIs heavy lift helicopter (Rescue) will be flying in
to rescue the hostages, and then back to TFO headquarters with the hostages
(RTB). Lets change the model for the Rescue helicopter.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Open Rescues ( ) properties ( ).

Browse to the student files provided for this exercise
(C:\Training\STK\BattlespaceMgmt\Import Objects).
Select ch-53e_super_stallion.mdl.
Click Open.
Click OK.
Wow! What a difference.
FIGURE 6-10.
3D View: Rescue helicopter
9. Repeat the steps above to assign the same model to RTB ( ).

Models representing various real-world aircraft can be found in the STK
install directory. Additional models were also included with the student files
provided. Lets change the models for each object and then view the action of
the scenario with the models in place.
1. Update other objects in the scenario with more appropriate models. The
table following outlines the various objects and their respective models.
TABLE 6-10. Object
OBJECT
models
MODEL
LOCATION
C:\Training\STK\BattlespaceMgmt\Import Objects
ch53e_super_stallion.mdl
RivetJoint
C:\Program Files\AGI\STK 9\STKData\VO\Models\Air
rc-135v_rivet_joint.mdl
Cobra
C:\Training\STK\BattlespaceMgmt\Import Objects
ah-1z_super_cobra.mdl
CG_52
C:\Program Files\AGI\STK 9\STKData\VO\Models\Sea
aegis.mdl
CVN_65
C:\Program Files\AGI\STK 9\STKData\VO\Models\Sea
aircraftcarrier.mdl
Rescue & RTB
After you change the model take some time to change the view the action of
the various objects so that you can see them.

4. Use the Zoom To option to change the view from object to object.
Ensue that you pause the animation when changing the view.
Who Else Can See Rescue?

Once an entity is promoted, you can edit its properties and use it with other
STK objects. Youll need to model jammers throughout Khaliforn to ensure
that your tactical broadcasts aren't being monitored. Jammers, that can help
with this are onboard CompassCall.
CompassCall is equipped with two Jammers one on each side of the craft. Each
Jammer is attached using a senor object. The sensor acts as a pointing device
for the communications equipment. The sensors also provide a visual
representation of the range of the Jammers. Lets take a look.
1. Ensure that the 2D and 3D Graphics window are positioned so that you
can see them both clearly.
2. Make CompassCall ( ) the focal point in the 3D Graphics window.
3. Click the CompassCall Jammers button on the HTML utility.
FIGURE 6-11.
4. Center the view in the 2D Graphics window around the Jammers fields-ofview extending from CompassCall, while ensuring that you can see
CompasCalls route clearly.
FIGURE 6-12.

6. Watch the pattern of the sensors as CompassCall travels along his path.
Can the Jammers cover all of Khaliforn for the entirety of the rescue
mission?
At what point(s) in CompassCalls path does he leave Khaliforn

uncovered?
Does the time that the Jammers cannot cover all of Khaliforn coincide
with the time during which you have no access to the Rescue
helicopter?
When You Finish

1. Reset ( ) the animation in STK.
2. Click the black Stop button on the logger.
3. Close ( ) the logger.
Use What You Know

Use what youve leaned over the past couple of days to complete some
BATTLESPACE COVERAGE
Now that you have designed a Battlespace situation, you have been asked to
compute various coverage opportunities across the region. Determine the
coverage of the whole area of Kahliforn by your air-breathing assets (not
including your rescue helicopter). Are they able to cover the whole region
during the course of your analysis? What percentage of the region is covered?
DESIGN A RESCUE ROUTE

If the whole area of Kahliforn is not covered 100%, design a route for a new
Aircraft Mission Modeler aircraft that can take off with the Rescue helicopter,
but monitor other areas of the country.
Reporting Mission Results

Version 9

800.220.4785 610.981.8000
2010-04
Overview
Welcome to the Reporting Mission Results training course.This course is a
objects and their environments, but how to report results in many different
formats and mediums, both visual and textual, and use your results to create
visual and textual presentations.
STK Basic Edition

STK/Integration Module
STK/Terrain Imagery, & Maps Module
Movie Timeline plugin installation package
Table Of Contents
How Do I Optimize Scenarios For Movie Making?...................... 1-1

Making Technical Animations ...............................................................................1-2
Gather Info About Your Movie...............................................................................1-3
Prepare the Canvas................................................................................................1-5
Clean Up Your Scenario.........................................................................................1-6
Application Level Customization ...........................................................................1-9
Setting Application Preferences............................................................................1-9
Prepare the 3D Graphics Window .......................................................................1-11
Export the REMSAT Globe...................................................................................1-14
AGI Globeserver...................................................................................................1-14
Desktop Management .........................................................................................1-16
Working With STK Windows...............................................................................1-17
Using STK Toolbars..............................................................................................1-23
On Your Own........................................................................................................1-27
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................1-28
Can I Make 3D Model More Realistic
by Adding Movable Parts?............................................................. 2-1
Table Of Contents
Object Models........................................................................................................2-3
What Models Are You Currently Using? ...............................................................2-5
Castle Rock Model.................................................................................................2-6
Model Articulation Properties ...............................................................................2-7
Work With Articulations........................................................................................2-8
Hercules Model....................................................................................................2-16
Model Articulation Files ......................................................................................2-18
Automate Hercules ..............................................................................................2-19
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................2-27
How Do I Create Animations
Using STK and Other Custom Tools? ........................................... 3-1
Camera Control Tool ..............................................................................................3-3
Follow Hercules .....................................................................................................3-5
Perform a Walkthrough..........................................................................................3-6
Create a Camera Path............................................................................................3-7
Create an Animation............................................................................................3-10
Movie Timeline Plugin .........................................................................................3-13
Extend the STK User Interface.............................................................................3-13
Managing Plugins From the STK GUI ..................................................................3-15
Enable Movie Timeline Controls..........................................................................3-16
Recording Control ................................................................................................3-18
Preview Controls..................................................................................................3-18
Import and Export.................................................................................................3-19
Unit Controls ........................................................................................................3-19
Open the Movie Timeline Tool ............................................................................3-19
Properties.............................................................................................................3-23
Save and Load......................................................................................................3-33
Converting & Compressing Video........................................................................3-33
Author a Visual Data Format File.........................................................................3-34
AGI Viewer...........................................................................................................3-35
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................3-35
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Saving & Displaying Data:

Snaps, Graphs & Dynamic Displays ............................................. 4-1
Survey Your Scenario.............................................................................................4-2
Snap Properties......................................................................................................4-3
Experiment With Snap Properties .........................................................................4-6
Display Dynamic Data..........................................................................................4-10
Quick Reports.......................................................................................................4-14
Reformatting Report Data....................................................................................4-15
Flight Data Graph.................................................................................................4-16
Save Your Work ...................................................................................................4-17
Can I Provide My Colleagues That
Do Not Use STK With A Usable
Verion of My Scenarios?................................................................ 5-1
Create Your Presentation.......................................................................................5-2
Title Your PowerPoint ............................................................................................5-3
Add Static Images & Data .....................................................................................5-3
Add a Movie...........................................................................................................5-4
Add a Visual Data Format File!..............................................................................5-4
Save Your Work .....................................................................................................5-6
III
Table Of Contents
iv
How Do I Optimize Scenarios

For Movie Making?
EXERCISE 1
In this exercise you will prepare a scenario for creating optimal visual outputs (both
dynamic and static). Upon completion you will be able to:
Gather information about the scope and format of your animation.

Prepare the scenario for viewing including:
Setting environment options.
Clearing unnecessary graphics.
Customizing the STK Workspace.
Modifying and improving globe imagery.
How Do I Optimize Scenarios For Movie Making?
Problem Statement
You need to prepare a presentation that will illustrate how the REMSAT
system with the inclusion of an aircraft would be a better way to manage and
fight forest fires in the mountainous region of Douglas County, Colorado.
You will present your findings and ideas to the Colorado State Forest Service
officials.
BREAK IT DOWN
You have some information that might be useful. Heres what you know:
The presentation will be based on the analysis performed in STK.
You will use the REMSAT analysis that incorporates the Hercules aircraft
water drops.
You will make a PowerPoint presentation that includes animations, graphs,
snap shots, and Excel reports.
You will be making the presentation at the Colorado State Forest Service
headquarters.
The presentation and videos will be displayed on a screen via a projector
hooked to your laptop.
SOLUTION
Use the existing REMSAT scenario and analysis to plan a technical animation
that allows you to visualize the communication of the REMSAT system, and
the fire fighting techniques of the Hercules aircraft for the Colorado State
Forest Service.
Making Technical Animations

Like most video production processes, much of the preliminary work required
to produce a quality product is done behind the scenes prior to making the
actual animated movie. You need to ensure that your scenario is configured so
that the frames captured will show the right views and that the animation will
flow well from one frame to another.
MOVIE MAKING CHECKLIST

Use the following checklist to guide you through the movie-making process.
1. Gather information about the movie.
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 2
HOW DO I OPTIMIZE SCENARIOS FOR MOVIE MAKING?
Define the purpose

Define the audience
Select the medium
Create a storyboard
2. Prepare the scenario for filming

Create a scenario and make it technically accurate
Anti-aliasing
Field of view (FOV)
Scenario time period
Animation times
Time step
Window size
Pixel options
Add to your scenario
Globe enhancements
Terrain
Objects
Models
Articulations
Make the scenario esthetically pleasing
Remove clutter
Consider your color selections
3.
Create a camera path
4. Create video output
Do a walkthrough
Record.
5.
Test and edit your movie
Gather Info About Your Movie

They say a picture is worth 1000 words. Visualizations can depict complex
concepts and relationships that would be much more difficult to understand
using data alone. Use the Movie Making Checklist to ensure that you properly
prepare your scenario.
Exercise 1 | Page 3
PURPOSE
Considering the following now will help you later when you need to
determine what portion of your scenario you should include, so that your
movie will make the concepts that you want to illustrate clear and really
impact your viewers:
What message am I trying to convey?
What is the central focus of the movie?
What concepts do I need to get across?
You want to make a movie that allows you to clearly visualize the
communication of the REMSAT system, and the fire fighting techniques of
the Hercules aircraft, so you want your movie to focus on the timing and
mechanics of incorporating the water drops from the Hercules aircraft as well
as the key communication points in your system.
AUDIENCE
To help determine your target audience, ask yourself the following questions:
What is the technical knowledge of the audience?

Is the audience made up of mostly lay people, engineers, or managers?
What are the audience's expectations?
What is the audience mostly focused on?
Knowing your audience will help you determine whether to make a highly
conceptual movie (for managers) or a technically-detailed movie (for
engineers).
You need to show your movie to Colorado State Forest Service officials. A
portion of this group will be making design and budget decisions, while it is
firefighters that will be using the concepts in the video to implement the
design.
MEDIUM
You will be incorporating the movies and still images that you create into a
PowerPoint presentation that will be viewed via a feed from your laptop to a
projector. Knowing that, you can make some decisions about your medium.
What frame size would be best suited an animation used in
PowerPoint?
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 4
How long should your movie be?

Will you need any special equipment to make the animation?
STORYBOARD
Create a storyboard of the movie that shows what you want to see, when you
want to see it, and in what order.

A previously developed scenario that incorporates the elements of the
REMSAT system that will be captured in still images and animations is
availble to you. The REMSAT_MoviesStarter scenario is an accumulation of
the different analysis that youve performed. This scenario also models and
considers the mountainous terrain of the burn area that falls within Douglas
County. Use that model as your base.
3. Locate the REMSAT_Comms scenario that you saved earlier (C:\My
Documents\STK 9\REMSAT_MoviesStarter).
4. Select REMSAT_MoviesStarter.sc.
If you do not have the REMSAT_MoviesStarter scenario, you can open a
VDF version of the completed scenario at C:\Training\STK\REMSAT\
Scenarios.
You will be stripping the scenario of unnecessary objects, etc. If you save the
scenario now, all of the objects that you dont need will be saved in your
scenario directory. Lets make some changes before you save this scenario.
Prepare the Canvas

Now that you have clearly outlined what you want your movie to depict, you
can prepare your scenario for filming. This scenario will be used as the
canvas for the movies and still images used in your presentation, and not
technical analysis. Youll need to not only customize the scenario, but also
your workspace for optimal efficiency.
Exercise 1 | Page 5
Clean Up Your Scenario

Now its time to ensure that the technical animation that you are preparing
will be as aesthetically pleasing as it is technically accurate. One of the most
import aspects in cleaning up a scenario is making sure that you remove any
clutter in the scene so that the action you wish to highlight is easily visible and
has the most powerful impact possible.
Take a good look at your scenario, and talk with your instructor about
whether or not you need to do the following:
Remove unnecessary objects

Turn off object labels
Turn off area target boundaries and markers
Turn off vehicle ground tracks
Clear visual accesses
REMOVE AREA TARGETS

The area targets in this scenario were used to outline Douglas county and the
Hayman burn area in an effort to determine the portion of the Hayman burn
area that falls within Douglas county so that you could focus your analysis in
that area. Those boundaries wont be used in the movie that you intend to
present, as a matter of fact, the boundaries could obstruct your view in the
2D Graphics window. Lets remove both of those area targets.
1. Select all of the area targets ( ) in the Object Browser.
Douglas
Hayman
2. Click the Delete ( ) button.
IMPORT OBJECTS FROM A SAVED SCENARIO

The version of the REMSAT scenario used to do the communications
analysis did not include the Hercules aircraft because it was not relevant to the
analysis that you were doing at the time. The movie making version needs to
be a bit more all encompassing and since the aerial firefighting is a crucial part
of you plan, you can add Hercules and Peterson Air Force Base to this version of
the scenario. You can import the saved Hercules aircraft directly from the
scenario directory where you saved it.
1. Extend the Insert menu in the STK Workspace.
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 6
2. Select From file...

3. Browse to the REMSAT_SlurryBomber scenario directory that you saved
earlier (C:\My Documents\STK 9\REMSAT_SlurryBomber).
4. Change the Files of type to All Object Classes.
5. Select Hercules.ac.
6. Hold down the Ctrl key and select Peterson_AFB.f.
7. Click Open.
ADJUST THE DISPLAY OF VEHICLES

The two vehicles in your scenario will be a vital part of your animation. You
want to leave these objects in your scenario; however, to ensure that the action
in your scenario is realistic and lifelike, you will need to make some
adjustments to their display properties.
1. Open Hercules ( ) properties ( ).
TABLE 1-1. Hercules
OPTION
VALUE
Show Route
Off
Show Route Marker
Off
4. Click OK.
Now, lets make some additional adjustments to Fieldcrew.
1. Select Fieldcrew ( ) in the Object Browser.
2. Open Fieldcrews ( ) properties ( ).
3. Ensure that the following are set:
TABLE 1-2. 2D
PROPERTIES PAGE
2D Graphics - Attributes
2D Graphics - Route
Graphics global attributes
OPTION
VALUE
Show Route
Off
Show Route Marker
Off
Show (Waypoint Markers)
Off
4. Click OK.
Exercise 1 | Page 7
TURN OFF FACILITY LABELS

Lets also remove the label display from all of the facilities in the scenario.
1. Select all of the facilities ( ) in the Object Browser.
Castle_Rock
Nodes_1-4
PetersonAFB
2. Open their properties ( ).

TABLE 1-3. Facility
2D Graphics attributes settings
OPTION
VALUE
Off
Show Label
Off
5. Click OK.
REMOVE CONTOUR GRAPHICS

Remove your 2D and 3D contours to improve performance if you need to
reopen the scenario.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Open DL_To_HQs ( ) properties ( ).

Select the 2D Graphics - Contours page.
Disable the Show Graphics option.
Disable the Show option in the Level Labels area.
Click Apply.
Select the 3D Graphics attributes page.
Disable the Show Lines option in the Contour Graphics area.
Click OK.
REMOVE ACCESSES
Remove all accesses so you dont see the access lines.
1. Extend the Analysis menu.
2. Click Remove All Accesses.
EXERCISE 1 | PAGE 8
Application Level Customization

There are many ways to customize your workspace in STK. You can
customize the STK desktop application in any of the following ways:
Modify the default behavior of the STK application

Reset the default directory
Customize windows and toolbars
Support and control STK actions from an integrated HTML Viewer
Customize STK using plugins
Use HTML Utilities
Setting Application Preferences

Application preferences enable you to define the default behavior of the STK
application. Preferences that you set are applied to all scenarios that are
opened during the current STK session, whether they are previously saved
scenarios or newly created scenarios. Application preferences need to be set
only once.
OPENGL OPTIONS
STK application level OpenGL options provide support for advanced 3D
viewing options. Because the computer's graphics card needs to allocate extra
buffers when implementing this type of anti-aliasing, these options must be
enabled before you create the window in which images are to be captured.
That being the case, you must enable these options before you open the
scenario so that when the 3D Graphics window is created the settings will be
applied. The anti-aliasing options are not on by default, because they are not
optimal for performing analysis as they will concentrate your CPUs resources
towards producing quality graphics.
Well discuss anti-aliasing in greater detail later, but for now, lets ensure that
the anti-aliasing options are properly set for the animation that you need to
create.
1. Extend the Edit menu in the STK Workspace.
2. Select Preferences...
3. Select the OpenGL page.
Exercise 1 | Page 9
TABLE 1-4. OpenGL
options
OPTION
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Support Scene
Anti-aliasing
Off
Smooth jagged edges for poster images or to create

clean images for use in high-quality presentations.
Off
The computer's graphics card needs to allocate extra

buffers when you implement this type of anti-aliasing,
this option must be enabled before you create the
window in which images are to be captured.
On
This option renders the contents of the selected 3D

window in a pixel buffer (pbuffer) before rendering it
to the 3D window or image
Support
Stereo View
Support
Offscreen
Rendering
4. Click OK.
CHANGE THE UNITS

Optimizing visualization for movie making sometimes requires that you
perform some simple calculations to determine your optimal bit rate and time
step. Model articulations also reference times, such as their start, stop and
duration, in epoch seconds. That being the case, its always good practice to
change the date format to epoch seconds when using a scenario for movie
making.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open REMSAT_MovieStarter ( ) properties ( ).

Select the Units page.
Change the DateFormat units to Epoch Seconds (EpSec).
Click Apply.

Lets also change the scenario description.
2. Change the Description to REMSAT scenario for movie making.
3. Click OK.
Now is the time to save your scenario. Removing unnecessary objects before
you save minimizes clutter in the scenario directory. Save that scenario with a
different name to preserve the integrity of the previously developed analysis.
scenario file (*.sc) REMSAT_Canvas.
Prepare the 3D Graphics Window

Thus far, youve made changes at the application and scenario level. Now, its
time to prepare the 3D Graphics window itself.
LIGHTING
It is important to consider the scenario and animation time periods and the
time step when making movies that depict the events in a scenario.
Do the events take place during daylight hours?
If not, will objects that you need to view need special lighting?
Is the animation moving too fast? Too slow?
Objects and events are always easier to view in daylight at an appropriate pace.
Unless there is a reason that you need to view events that occur in darkness,
its always a good idea to make sure your scenario action will take place in
daylight. If, in fact, the events that you need to depict occur in darkness, you
will need to consider special lighting conditions that will illuminate and
dramatize those events.
In this case, the fire fighting takes place during the day, so all of the events that
you need to depict will be in daylight. No special lighting will be necessary;
however, you did make some lighting changes to the old 3D Graphics window
to illuminate the terrain. That should still be set.
ANNOTATIONS
Now, remove the default annotations from the 3D Graphics window.
2. Select the Annotation page.
3. Disable all text annotations that are set to display in the 3D Graphics
window (typically, Show Time, Show Time Step, and Show View Reference
Frame).
WINDOW SIZE
The size of your window is important if you plan to use compression to store
your video. To ensure the best quality playback by most compression schemes
make sure your window dimensions are divisible by sixteen (16).
You will be creating a PowerPoint presentation that will be projected onto a
screen via your laptop. Since compression will not be an issue in this case, lets
just check the dimensions of the 3D Graphics window and talk about how you
might adjust them if you were making a video tape or DVD for distribution.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Go back to the 3D Graphics window properties ( ).

Select the Window Properties page.
Find the initial width and height of the 3D Graphics window.
Work through these questions with your instructor to determine the
appropriate window size.
What medium did you select?
How will your movie be viewed?
How will your movie be distributed?
Will you need to compress your output?
If so, are your window dimensions divisible by sixteen (16)?
5. Select 640 x 480 from the Size drop-down menu.

You will be playing the video that you make on a PC, so youll want to ensure
that youre using square pixels. If you were using media such as TV you could
use a different Preset.
6. Ensure that the Preset option in the Pixel Options area is set to Square Pixels.
ANTI ANTI-ALIASING
It is a good idea not to use anti-aliasing when recording your video for the
first time. When you use anti-aliasing, the recording process takes much
longer. Since this is your first pass, you may need to go back and make
adjustments which will require that you re-record. You can turn on antialiasing when you make your final recording.
PIXEL OPTIONS
Pixel options control the pixel aspect ratio while recording frames. Setting the
proper pixel options will ensure that you get the best quality playback. For
example, you would use square pixels for a PC or NTSC Widescreen for a
wide-screen TV. Lets ensure that the pixel options are set properly to produce
quality images for the medium that you have chosen.
1. Locate the Pixel Options on the Window Properties page.
2. Work through these questions with your instructor to determine if your
pixel options are appropriate.
What is the Presets?

What is the Pixel Aspect Ratio?
What medium did you select?
How will your movie be viewed?
3. If necessary, make changes to the pixel options. We will keep the square
pixels as the preset option
4. When you finish, click Apply. Leave the 3D Graphics windows
properties ( ) open.
FIELD OF VIEW
Field of view defines how much you can see, in degrees, in the 3D Graphics
window. The larger the value, the more you can see. The maximum angle is
160 degrees. A large field of view is similar to a wide-angle lens in
photography, where size differences are exaggerated due to proximity to the
camera. A small field of view is similar to a telescopic lens. The default field of
view in STK is 45 degrees. Fifty (50) degrees is a good starting point for
movie making. Lets set your field of view to 50 degrees so that you get a good
view of the action without distorting or exaggerating the objects that you
want to analyze.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Locate the Viewing options.
Change the Field of View to 50 deg.
Click OK.
Export the REMSAT Globe

The current scenario uses the default basic STK globe (Basic.glb) and inlays
imagery (HaymanArea.jp2) and terrain data (HaymanArea.pdtt) provided by an
external source. Before you do any experimenting with other available globes,
lets export this globe to ensure that you can reload it when youre finished.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bring the Globe Manager ( ) to the front.

Select Earth ( ) in the tree.
Click the Export Globe ( ) button on the Globe Manager ( ) toolbar.
Browse to the scenario directory (C:\MyDocuments\STK 9\
REMSAT_Canvas).
5. Change the File Name to REMSAT.
6. Ensure that the Save as type is set to Globe files (*.glb).
7. Click Save.
Now, every time you load REMSAT.glb, a globe which includes the Hayman
area terrain and imagery that you created and loaded for this analysis.
AGI Globeserver
The AGI Globeserver enables you to remotely access an AGI Web server that
hosts globe data and streams the required portions directly to your 3D display.
This portion of the exercise requires internet access.
1. Bring the Globe Manager ( ) to the front.

2. Click the Add Terrain/Imagery ( ) button.
First, youll need to connect to Globeserver.
3. Click the Globeserver button ( ) on the left-hand side of the Open Terrain
and Imagery Data window.
4. Click the ellipsis button ( ) beside the Server option.
5. Set the following in the Globeserver Configuration window.
You can also connect to the Globeserver vis the Scenario - 3D Graphics
properties.
TABLE 1-5. Globeserver
connection settings
OPTION
VALUE
Enable Globeserver Access
On
Server
globeserver.agi.com
Port
80
6. Click OK.
7. Click Cancel on the Open Terrain and Imagery Data panel. We will come back
to this later.
LOAD A PREDEFINED GLOBE

Now that youre connected, lets look at some of the predefined globes that
are available via AGI Globeserver.
2. Click the Import Globe button ( ) in the Globe Manager ( ).
3. Click Yes on the pop-up that appears. This pop-up informs you that your
globe will be overwritten.
4. Browse to the location of your globe files (typically,
C:\Program Files\AGI\STK 9\STKData\VO\Globes.
5. Select any one of the predefined globes.
6. Click Open.
7. Mouse around to look at the globe in the 3D Graphics window.
8. Repeat the process to see the different globes available via Globeserver ( ).
LOAD TERRAIN AND IMAGERY

The list of available files will be populated with item available for selection via
AGI Globeserver. Try loading and unloading various files to get a feel for how
the Globe Manager is used to access and manage multiple terrain and imagery
sets.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click the Add Terrain/Imagery ( ) button in the Globe Manager.

Click the Globeserver ( ) icon on the left.
Multi-select several files from the list.
Click OK.
When a file is selected, it will show up in the Globe Manager.
5. Go back to the Globe Manager ( ).

6. Turn on some of the terrain and/or imagery that you imported.
7. Use the Zoom To ( ) button to get a better look at the imagery associated
with each globe.
8. Mouse around to look at the images that you selected.
9. Repeat the process to see the different images have been provided for
you.
10. When you finish, close the Globeserver button ( ).
REAPPLY THE REMSAT GLOBE

In addition to turning on or off the display of terrain and imagery on your
globe, you can also import and export globes using the Globe Manager.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Go back to the Globe Manager ( ).

Select Earth ( ) in the tree.
Click the Import Globe button ( ).
Click Yes on the pop-up that appears. This pop-up informs you that your
globe will be overwritten.
5. Browse to the scenario directory (C:\My Documents\STK 9\
REMSAT_Canvas).
6. Select REMSAT.glb.
7. Click Open.
The default globe with the Hayman terrain and imagery applied will be
reloaded.
Desktop Management
Creating technical animations is very different from performing analysis.
Youll want animation and capture tools readily available without having to
fumble through your analysis tools to access them. You can transform the
STK desktop into a professional movie making studio.
The STK desktop offers many ways for you to organize and interact with its
various windows. The illustration below highlights some of the many features
available to improve your workflow.
FIGURE 1-1.
STK Desktop management
Working With STK Windows

Working with multiple windows can sometimes clutter the STK desktop;
however, there are numerous options for arranging and managing the various
windows that will suit your needs and keep clutter to a minimum.
PINNED AND UNPINNED WINDOWS

Any window on the STK desktop that can be docked has a push pin button.
By default, docked windows are said to be pinned in place, represented by a
vertical push pin.
FIGURE 1-2.
Object Browser docked and pinned
A pinned window means that it is visible at all times in the application's main
window. If you click the push pin, however, you toggle it to the unpinned
state (horizontal push pin), which hides the window from view. Instead of
seeing the full window, you simply see its title. Hover the mouse cursor over
the title of the window to bring it back into view. When you switch to another
window, the unpinned window hides again. To restore it back to a pinned
state, simply click the push pin again while the window is visible. Multiple
windows can be unpinned at one time, with each having its title listed along
the window edge.
The visible title tab (circled in red on left) indicates that the window, in this
case the Object Browser, is unpinned and hidden from view. If you move the
mouse cursor over the title tab, the unpinned window reappear. The
horizontal push pin indicates that the window is unpinned.
FIGURE 1-3.
Object Browser docked and unpinned
You can pin or unpin any number of windows in any number of locations in
the STK Workspace.
FIGURE 1-4.
STK desktop with multiple unpinned windows
TRY IT!
1. Click the vertical push pin in the Object Browser.
2. Move the mouse somewhere else in the STK Workspace.
Did the Object Browser disappear?

Can you see the tab indicating the unpinned location of the Object
Browser.
DOCK MARKERS
When dragging a docked or floating window to a new location, the STK
desktop displays helpful dock markers that indicate window positioning
options. To dock the window, you must release the mouse button when the
cursor is over one of the buttons on the marker. The dock markers will also
appear over windows that are already docked, to give the most flexibility in
how you dock your windows in relation to each other.
FIGURE 1-5.
Dock markers
As you mouse over the various dock markers, shaded areas will appear
dynamically. The shaded area indicates the size and position of the window if
that dock location is selected.
FIGURE 1-6.
Docking markers
TRY IT!
1. Move the mouse cursor into the title bar of any docked window such as
the Object Browser or the Globe Manager.
2. Click and hold the mouse button as you drag the window from its current
location.
Are the dock markers visible in the STK Workspace?
3. Mouse over the various dock markers to see exactly where the window
will be positioned if it is selected.
4. Release the mouse button when you are happy with the window position.
TABBED GROUPS
It is also possible when docking near another previously docked window to
group them together in a tabbed formation by selecting a special icon in the
center of the dock markers:
FIGURE 1-7.
Docked tab groups
TRY IT!
1. Move the mouse cursor into the title bar of the Object Browser.
2. Click and hold the mouse button as you drag the window from its current
location.
3. Move the mouse over the window that you would like to include in the
tabbed group with the Object Browser.
4. Select the center icon in the dock marker display.
5. Release the mouse button.
Are there tabs below the windows that you just combined into the
tabbed group?
6. Switch back and forth between windows using the tabs below the group.
NO AUTOMATIC DOCKING
If you move a docked window, unless you drag and drop the window onto a
dock marker, it cannot dock -- it remains in a Dockable state, but will
appear to float. If you manually set a window to Floating mode, it will never
dock as you move it around, and the dock markers will not appear, until you
set the window to dockable.
FIGURE 1-8.
Window position selection
Some windows may open directly into floating mode. If you try to drag a
window to dock it and it does not dock, check to see if it is set to floating
mode, and, if so, change it to dockable.
Using STK Toolbars

STK toolbar system is designed for usability, flexibility, and easy
customization. Toolbars specific to a particular window are located on that
window giving you quick access to features relevant to the window.
CUSTOMIZE QUICKLY
Clicking a toolbar's Options button gives you quick access to customization
features.
FIGURE 1-9.
Toolbar options
AUTOMATIC RESIZING
If you size any window that is part of the STK desktop so that one (or more)
of its toolbars would be too large to fit in that window, the toolbar(s)
automatically resize, hiding buttons as needed. Clicking the Options button will
show the standard customization options as well as the buttons that were
hidden.
FIGURE 1-10.
Toolbar resizing
TRY IT!
1. Resize the STK Workspace until some or all of the toolbars change.
2. Click the Options button for the various toolbars.
Can you see the hidden buttons.
WINDOW TOOLBARS
Toolbars exist on several STK windows, allowing quick access to those
features relevant to the window. So, whether you have the windows integrated,
docked, or floating, the toolbars associated with the window always travel
with it.
These toolbars are independent of the main application's toolbars in most
respects, and independent of other windows having the same toolbars. So
which toolbars are showing on which windows is completely customizable, as
are the individual buttons on those toolbars, without affecting the toolbars on
the main application or other windows.
For example, if you do most of your work in a 3D Graphics window, you can
float that window and utilize its toolbars directly, and reduce the size of the
rest of the STK desktop.
If you drag a toolbar to redock it to another side of a window, it will only
dock to the window that created it. If you float multiple toolbars with
the same title, for example multiple 3D Graphics toolbars, it may
become difficult to remember which window is the owner of that
toolbar.
If you customized toolbars in STK prior to version 9, these customized
toolbars are incompatible with the new system and will not be loaded.
FIGURE 1-11.
Customized workspace example
HIDING AND DISPLAYING TOOLBARS

There are several ways to hide or display a toolbar in an STK window. Any of
the following methods will display a list of available toolbars.
Right-click in the window, and select Toolbars,
Right-click on the toolbar,
Click on the windows system menu, as shown in the example below.
FIGURE 1-12.
Access the system menu
A checkmark indicates that the toolbar is currently being displayed in the

window, as shown in the example below. To hide a toolbar or display a hidden
toolbar, click it.
FIGURE 1-13.
Toolbar display
On Your Own
Lets take some time to create and arranges the windows and toolbars
necessary to create your very own personalized movie making studio. You
may want to do some or all of the following:
Close any open 2D views.
Create multiple, tabbed, docked, or pinned 3D windows that you can easily
switch back and forth between, and focus each view on a different event
that you will film for your presentation.
Create one toolbar that includes all of the moving making, object editing,
and animation options that you might need.
Minimize your workspace and maximize your visualization windows as in
the example above.

The possibilities are endless! Spend some time experimenting with the various
customization options available.
Save Your Work

Can I Make 3D Model More Realistic

by Adding Movable Parts?
EXERCISE 2
In this exercise you will prepare objects in a scenario by adding movable parts and model
enhancements. Upon completion you will be able to:
Edit 3D Model properties.

Add an attach point to a model file allowing for other objects to be offset on the
parent model.
Add articulations to a model.
Edit a model articulation file for use with an existing object.
Can I Make 3D Model More Realistic by Adding Movable Parts?
Problem Statement
You are preparing a PowerPoint presentation that outlines the feasibility of the
REMSAT fire fighting system that you have been assessing. You will be
presenting your findings and ideas to the Colorado State Forest Service
officials at their headquarters feeding the presentation from your laptop to a
projector.
You have a scenario that models the different parts of the REMSAT system,
and youve done a ton of analysis, but you want to make the 3D animation
more realistic. Currently, none of your objects have any moving parts. This
makes it difficult to accurately depict the timing of events that occur during
the scenario, such as the water drop from Hercules, and the capabilities of the
equipment being used at the Castle Rock facility.
BREAK IT DOWN
You have some information that might be helpful. Heres what you know:
You would like to show the movement of the pointable roof antenna dish
atop the outpost at Castle Rock showing its ability to point towards and
track a particular satellite (Anik-F2).
Youd like a visual representation of the actual water drop from the rear
hatch of the Hercules aircraft.
You want to show the aircrafts propeller movement as well.
SOLUTION
Before making the movies that will accompany your PowerPoint presentation,
edit some of the models in the existing REMSAT scenario so that they seem
more life-like. Use moving model parts to create a pointable antenna dish on
Castle Rock, the movement of Hercules propellers, and the water release
mechanism on the Hercules aircraft.

A previously developed scenario that incorporates all of the elements of the
REMSAT system as well as having been optimized for movie making is
available to you. Use that as your base.
1. Open the REMSAT_Canvas scenario if it is not already open.
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 2
CAN I MAKE 3D MODEL MORE REALISTIC BY ADDING MOVABLE PARTS?
If you do not have the REMSAT_Canvas scenario, you can open a VDF
version of the completed scenario at
2. Save the new scenario in your user area (C:\My Documents\STK 9). In
doing so, create a unique folder and rename the new folder and the
scenario file (*.sc) REMSAT_Models.
Object Models
You can use 3D models to represent scenario objects and aid in analyzing and
visualizing the relationships among the objects. STK provides detailed 3D
models representing objects such as ground stations, aircraft, air strips,
satellites, ships, helicopters, and much more. Once you specify a model to
represent an object, it is graphically displayed in its correct position and
orientation, as defined in the objects Basic properties. Position and
orientation can vary over time and can be manually adjusted within the
objects 3D Graphics properties. The center of a model is placed at the X, Y and
Z position of the object it is representing.
MODEL (*.MDL) FILES

A model is a graphical representation of an object. You define that graphical
representation in a model file which is an ASCII text file with an MDL
extension (for example, sample.mdl).
A model file contains the following:
Description - A detailed description of the model.
Components - Each component describes a specific part of the model,
such as an antenna dish.

Primitives - A component contains one or more primitives that define the
shape of the component.
Parameters - Parameters are used to further describe a primitive or
component.
Exercise 2 | Page 3
Model files are arranged in a hierarchy of components and primitives. In the

hierarchy, the component is the parent of all primitives and subcomponents
contained within. A primitive that refers to a component is the parent of that
component.
Figure 2-1 is a hierarchy of components and primitives for a simple vehicle
model:
FIGURE 2-1.
Model file hierarchy of components
A component can contain primitives that define the shape of the component
(such as a polygon or a cylinder), parameters that describe it in some way
(such as color or shininess), or primitives that refer to other components. In
the hierarchy, the component is the parent of all primitives and
subcomponents contained within. A primitive that refers to a component is
the parent of that component.
The units in a model file are specified in meters. Models can be built in any
unit, but the Root component in the file assumes they are in meters.
Some unaltered models are already loaded in the REMSAT scenario. Some
models are not converted and are an example of a native model file. Others,
such as the model used to represent Hercules was built in another editor and
converted to MDL format.
You may need to build or modify a model file (.mdl) if you:
Work in a classified environment
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 4
Need to add an attach point or an articulation

Require a new design
USING EXISTING MODELS

STK comes with a variety of ready to use models. These ready to use models
can be loaded directly into STK and then scaled or adjusted to your
specifications within STK.
New models are continually being created for your use. When you install
STK, several commonly used models are installed for you, but many more are
available. You can request a CD containing the full model library by calling
AGI. You can also download or view an STK model on the AGI Web site. To
keep your STK model library current, you can sign-up to receive Email
notifications when models are updated or new models become available.
CONVERTING MODELS
LightWave 3D is a high end computer graphics program developed by NewTek.
You can convert LightWave files to a format recognized by STK (.mdl) using
the LightWave to MDL model converter (LWConvert) available for download
from the AGI Web site.
If youre using a model building tool other than LightWave, you can convert
your model to LightWave format and then use LWConvert to create a model file
recognized by STK.
What Models Are You Currently Using?

Before you make changes to the object models, determine for which objects
youd like to use enhanced models.
Hercules
Castle Rock
Then, determine which of the following you need to do for each object:
Use an existing model
Edit an existing model
Convert an external model
Create a model file
Exercise 2 | Page 5
You will highlight the Hercules water drop and Castle Rocks communications
equipment. Although default models are currently loaded for all objects,
better models containing articulations are available for two of them. Lets load
those models and then see if additional edits are necessary.
Castle Rock Model

Castle Rock has communications equipment which includes moving parts that
youd like to be able to visualize. The default facility model (facility.mdl) is
currently being used to represent Castle Rock in the 3D Graphics window. Lets
get a close up look at Castle Rock.
2. Reposition your view so that Castle_Rock ( ) is the focal point in the
3D Graphics window.
3. Mouse around to get a good look at the antenna atop the outpost at Castle
Rock.
ORIENT YOURSELF
Lets recreate the compass on the bottom left corner of the 3D Graphics
window, so that its closer to the outpost that you are trying to adjust.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 6

Find the Compass area.
Click Show.
Change the Y Origin to Bottom.
Adjust the positioning if necessary.
Click OK.
FIGURE 2-2.
3D View: Castle Rock outpost
The antenna atop the outpost at Castle Rock is pointing east. Anik F2 is
looking at the outpost from the south. You want that antenna pointing at
Anik F2. Lets see if we can move the dish around so that it is facing south.
ARRANGE YOUR WORKSPACE

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open Castle_Rocks ( ) properties ( ).

Click on View... button in the Articulations area.
Minimize ( ) Castle_Rocks ( ) properties ( ).
Slide the Articulations dialog over beside the 3D Graphics window where it
is not obstructing your view, but is still easily accessible.
Model Articulation Properties

Model articulation properties allow you to view, establish, or modify the
articulated (movable) parts of the model, such as a moving dish on Castle
Rock by changing any of the following:
Level of Detail. Specifies the Level of Detail for defining model movements
(articulations). Level 0 indicates the finest level of detail and level 1

indicates the coarsest model.
Exercise 2 | Page 7
Articulation. Select the articulation, or the name of the movement in the
model (.mdl) file, that you want to define. When you select an articulation,
the Transformations list automatically populates with all related
transformations. If the Articulations list is empty, the model has no
movable parts.
Transformations. Select the transformation that you want to define and the
slider to modify the transformation.
Work With Articulations

Prior to moving any articulations in the model, take note of the original
values. Although there is a Cancel button, pressing it will have no effect in the
3D Graphics Window once a change is made to the models articulation value.
You must reset all values to their default number prior to closing articulation
window.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select Move in the Articulations list.

Select one of the transformations in the list.
Move the slider beside the Transformations list up or down.
Select another transformation.
Move the slider up or down.
When you finish moving the model, reset any values that you changed
(zero for Move and Rotate values or 1.0 for Scale values).
7. Click OK to dismiss the Articulations dialog.
8. Leave Castle_Rocks ( ) properties ( ) open.
Were you able to change the direction of the antenna dish?
The default facility model has no pointable elements. When you use the Move
articulation the entire model moves--the facility, outpost, and the antenna
dish. The antenna that you are modeling rotates independent of the facility at
which it is stationed and the outpost to which it is attached. If you were trying
to point such an antenna at an object, you wouldnt move your whole facility.
You need a model that has a stationary facility and outpost and a moving
antenna dish.
MODEL THE MOVABLE ANTENNA DISH

The model being used to represent Castle Rock and the antenna dish atop that
outpost, needs to be tweaked a bit to so that it will behave more realistically.
EXERCISE 2 | PAGE 8
A customized facility model has been provided for you. Lets open that model
file and add pointing elements and movable parts.
ATTACH POINT
An attach point defines a specific position to which a sensor can be locked. If
you look at the MDL file representing Castle Rock in a text editor, you will see
that it contains such an element.
1. Browse to C:\Training\STK\REMSAT\Models.
2. Open facilityPointing.mdl file in TextPad or another text editor.
3. Locate the AttachPoint element (around line 623). It looks like this:
AttachPoint Sensor
The attach point in this model is the position of the center of the dish on top
of the outpost, which is represented by the sensor attached to Castle Rock in
the scenario. After you edit the model file and load it in STK, you will use this
attach point to define the vertex of the pointable dish.
ARTICULATIONS AND POINTABLE ELEMENTS

A model articulation defines a range of positions and orientations for a
component or primitive, such as the allowable gimbal angles for an antenna.
Articulations do not change the way an STK object is defined or affect access
or other calculations between objects being modeled. Use it to visually resolve
anomalies or to provide realistic motion in the models for animation.
The exact point at which the movable part will attach to Castle Rock (the
AttachPoint) has already been included. Now, lets add an articulation that will
define the movement of the dish.
1. Locate the commented lines that mark the location of the RoofAnt
articulation (around line 697). They look like this:
#
#
#
#
Articulation RoofAnt
...
...
EndArticulation
2. Prior to making any changes to the model file, save facilityPointing.mdl in

your scenario directory (C:\My Documents\STK 9\REMSAT_Models).
Exercise 2 | Page 9
Ensure that when you resave the file, Textpad doesnt add a TXT
extension to the file name (i.e. facilitypointing.mdl.txt).
3. Remove the comment marker (#) from the beginning of the four lines
that create the articulation.
...
...
EndArticulation
# Pointing RoofAnt 1 0 0
4. Now replace those four lines with the lines that will define the
articulation.
zRotate Yaw -360 0 360
yRotate Pitch -360 0 360
EndArticulation
# Pointing RoofAnt 1 0 0
Take a look at the lines you just added. The RoofAnt articulation enables the
antenna dish on Castle Rocks outpost to rotate from -360 to 360 degrees along
the Z and Y axis of the parent. Now, the antenna can rotate, but we still need
to be able to point it at Anik F2. Lets add a pointable element to the
articulation that you just created.
5. Remove the comment marker (#) at the beginning of the line that creates
the pointable element. When you finish, it should look like this:
Pointing RoofAnt 1 0 0
6. When you finish, save facilityPointing.mdl in your scenario directory

(C:\My Documents\STK 9\REMSAT_Models).
7. Close TextPad.
LOAD THE NEW MODEL

1. Go back to Castle_Rocks ( ) properties ( ).
Castle Rocks properties may be minimized in the STK Workspace.

4. Browse to the scenario directory where you saved the model
(C:\My Documents\STK 9\REMSAT_Models).
5. Select facilitypointing.mdl.
6. Click Open.
7. Click Apply.
8. Click on View... button in the Articulations area.
ARRANGE YOUR WORKSPACE

1. Minimize ( ) Castle_Rocks ( ) properties ( ).
3. Slide the Articulations dialog over beside the 3D Graphics window where it
is not obstructing your view, but is still easily accessible.
ROTATE THE DISH

Now, you have a clear view of Castle Rock. Lets see how that articulation
works.
Do you see the RoofAnt articulation that you just created?
1. Select RoofAnt in the Articulations list.
Do you see the two transformations that you added (Yaw and Pitch)?
2. Select one of the transformations in the list.
What are the upper and lower limits of the slider associated with each
transformation.
3. Move the slider up or down, and watch as the antenna dish on the Castle
Rock outpost rotates.
4. When you finish moving the model, reset the Pitch and Yaw values to
zero.
5. Click OK to dismiss the Articulations dialog.
Now, instead of the entire facility, outpost and antenna moving, you can rotate
and turn just the antenna dish.
MODEL OFFSETS
Use Offsets to position a model and marker representing an object in the
3D Graphics window by offsetting the object from its reference frame.
FIGURE 2-3.
3D View: Outpost antenna pointing at ANIK F2
The outpost is sitting on the north side of the facility and the AnikF2 satellite
is on the south side of the facility. In reality, the outpost is positioned on the
south side of the Castle Rock facility. Anik F2 will be looking to the antenna
from the south. As it stands, your antenna would have to look through the
facility to see Anik F2. Lets move the outpost to the south side of the facility.
Applying a simple rotational offset to the model will accomplish that.
3. Select the 3D Graphics Offset page.
TABLE 2-1. Rotational
Rotational Offset
offset settings
OPTION
VALUE
Use
On
180.0
5. Click Apply.
7. Mouse around until you find the outpost.

FIGURE 2-4.
3D View: Castle Rock with rotational offset applied
Now, what side of the facility is the outpost on?

What direction is the antenna dish pointing?
POINT THE DISH

The outpost and antenna are on the correct side of the facility, but the
antenna is not pointing in the right direction. Lets point the movable antenna
at Anik_F2.
2. Select the 3D Graphics Model Pointing page.
3. Look at the Pointable Elements table.
The pointable element that you added to the RoofAnt articulation is available
for selection. Thats the part of the model that we want to target at Anik F2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select RoofAnt-000000 in the Pointable Elements list.

Select Anik_F2_28378 ( ) in the Available Targets list.
Click OK.
FIGURE 2-5.
3D View: Outpost antenna pointed at Anik F2
Did the outpost change direction?

Did the antenna change direction?
What direction is the antenna pointing now?
From what direction will Anik F2 be looking to the outpost?
You may want to store a view of Castle Rock targeting Anik 2 for later
use.
ADJUST THE FIELD OF VIEW

You now have the dish pointing at Anik. You want to show the sensor beam
as well. Lets do that now.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open Target_Aniks ( ) properties ( ).

Reduce the Cone Angle value to 2 deg.
Click Apply.
VERTEX OFFSET
Now, lets adjust the vertex of the sensor, such that it will begin from the
attach point of the dish that we created in the model file.
1. Select the 3D Graphics - Vertex Offset page.
TABLE 2-2. Anik
vertex offset properties
OPTION
VALUE
Inherit from Parent Object
Off
Use Attach Point
On
Attach Point
Sensor - 000000
3. Click Apply.
DISPLAY TIMES
Lets also ensure that you can always see the sensor projection.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the 2D Graphics - Display Times page.

Change the Display Status to Always On.
Click Apply.
FIGURE 2-6.
3D View: Target Anik sensor display
Take a look at the 3D Graphics window. You should now see the vertex of the
sensor coming out of the antenna dish. You will not need to view the sensor
and can turn it off now.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the 2D Graphics - Display Times page.

Turn the Display Status to Always Off.
Click OK.
Save ( ) your work.
Hercules Model
In order to really show the critical role that the Hercules aircraft plays in the fire
fighting process, youll want to make the action and timing in your scenario,
and subsequently in your movie, as life-like as possible. We have provided an
alternate version of the Hercules model that contains articulations that add
some moving parts to Hercules. Using this model will help you make the action
in the fire fighting scene more dramatic.
SET THE ANIMATION TIME

You can use the information on the Route page to set the animation time
around the same time that Hercules reaches the burn area (just before Hercules
goes into his holding circular pattern). Hercules should be moving into the
burn area just about at the end of the second waypoint in his route.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open Herculess ( ) properties ( ).

Select the Route page.
Right-click the Stop time for Waypoint 2.
Select Set Animation Time from the menu that appears.

2. Reposition the view so that Hercules is the focal point in the 3D Graphics
window.
This should give you a good view of the rear hatch of Hercules at the time
when the hatch is set to open.
FIGURE 2-7.
3D View: Hercules at water drop
You may want to store a view of Hercules entering the burn area for
later use.
LOAD A CUSTOM MODEL

Right now, Hercules is set to use the default catalog model file (c-130h_Hercules).
Lets switch that out and use the customized model that has been provided.
The customized model includes articulations that will better depict the water
drop.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Enable the Model File option.
Browse to the student files area (C:\Training\STK\REMSAT\Models).
Select c-130h_water_drop.mdl.
Click Open.
Click Apply.
MODEL MAKEOVER
Lets quickly look at the articulations provided in the modified Hercules model.
1. Click on View... button in the Articulations area.
2. Minimize ( ) Herculess ( ) properties ( ).
3. Position the 3D Graphics window so that Hercules ( ) is clearly visible and
you can still work in the Articulations dialog.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select 0 in the Level of Detail list.

Select Props in the Articulations list.
Select Spin in the Transformations list.
Move the slider bar beside the Transformations list up and down.
Can you see the propellers on the aircraft spin?

8.
9.
10.
11.
Try some of the other articulations to see how they work.

Reset the articulations to their initial values.
When you finish, click Cancel to dismiss the Articulations dialog.
Click OK, to dismiss Herculess ( ) properties ( ).
The custom model that you just loaded looks just like the standard Hercules
aircraft model. The new Hercules model contains several articulations that
will enhance your presentation, but how will you execute the articulations
during animation?
Model Articulation Files

You were able to control an articulation in the Castle Rock model using the
Model properties for that object. If you have a large number of articulations to
control, rather than using the slider bars, you could create an articulation file
to automate the execution of moving parts at the appropriate time. Lets take a
closer look at model articulation files.
ARTICULATION FILE FORMAT

Articulation keyword blocks and commands are an integral part of a model
file. A separate file, called the model articulation file, contains the information
needed to animate the articulation commands contained in the model file.
The model articulation file contains a time-ordered list of data about each
articulation that can be applied to the associated object.
Helpful hints about articulation files:
Articulation files must be stored in the same directory as the object being
articulated (NOT the object model).

Articulation file names are identical to the name of the object (not the
model file), and have an object-specific extension. For example, in this
example, the object for which articulations are being specified is an aircraft
(.ac) named Hercules and the model file name is c-130_hercules.mdl, the
articulation file name should be Hercules.acma.
If you make changes to the articulation file, or are loading it for the first
time, you must go to the 3D Graphics- Model page of the object that is being
articulated and reload the articulation file.
Make sure that the scenario time is set appropriately for you to view the
articulation.
Note that the articulation file is directly related to a particular STK object
instance and NOT to the model file that contains the articulation
commands.
Automate Hercules
Lets use an articulation file to open the rear door of the Hercules aircraft to
prepare for the water drop, drop the water, close the rear door after the drop,
and spin Herculess propellers.
A partially developed aircraft articulation file has been provided for you. You
will edit the file and then save the changes to create a functional articulation
file containing several automated articulations.
OPEN THE ARTICULATION FILE IN A TEXT EDITOR

First, youll edit the articulation that opens the rear door in preparation for the
water drop.
1. Browse to the REMSAT student files, and open the models directory
(C:\Training\STK\REMSAT\Models).
2. Open Hercules.acma file in TextPad or another text editor.
3. Before you make any changes to the original file, save the articulation file
in the REMSAT_Models directory in your user area (C:\My Documents\
STK 9\REMSAT_Models).
Remember articulation files (*.acma) must be stored in the same
directory as the object being articulated (not the object model).
4. Ensure that the name of the file is Hercules.acma.
Text editors often add a TXT extension to files as part of the saving
process, so if youre not careful, your file could be saved as
Hercules.acma.txt, and STK would not read the articulations. Ensure
that no additional extension has been added to your file.
ARTICULATION TO OPEN HATCH

The first articulation in the in the file, indicated by the OpenDoor commented
(#) line, moves a model component called door_tail from 0 degrees
(STARTVALUE) to 32 degrees (ENDVALUE). This articulation represents the
opening of the rear door in preparation for the water drop.
#OpenDoor
NEW_ARTICULATION
#STARTTIME ####
#DURATION ####
...
PERIOD
0.0
ARTICULATION
door_tail
TRANSFORMATION
Pitch
STARTVALUE
ENDVALUE
0.000000
32.000000
Keyword value pairs that we wont be focusing on in this articulation are

replaced with an ellipsis (...).
This articulation has no STARTTIME or DURATION value. Hercules should make

the water drop along the edge of the burn area while it is circling overhead.
Normally, you would determine when an articulation would take place. In this
portion of the scenario, you need to determine what time the rear door should
open (STARTTIME), and how long it should take to open completely
(DURATION). You can again use the information in Hercules route page to
determine the approximate time (in Epoch seconds) that Hercules would
make his drop. He should be circling the burn area at the time of the drop.
What time should the rear door open in preparation for the water drop?
For how long should it take for the door to open?
5. Go back to Hercules.acma.
6. Remove the comment marker (#) from the STARTTIME line.
7. Enter the appropriate start value (the time the hatch should open).
8. Remove the comment marker (#) from the DURATION line.

9. Enter a duration of 30.00000.
When you finish, it should look something like this:
NEW_ARTICULATION
STARTTIME
2800.0000
DURATION
30.000000
...
ARTICULATION TO CLOSE HATCH

A second articulation, indicated by the CloseDoor commented (#) line, creates
a single articulation that starts after the articulation to drop the water, runs for
30 seconds, and moves a model component called door_tail. This
articulation represents the closing of the rear door after the water drop.
#CloseDoor
NEW_ARTICULATION
STARTTIME
DURATION
...
...
PERIOD
ARTICULATION
TRANSFORMATION
...
...
#STARTVALUE
#ENDVALUE
2930.000000
30.000000
0.0
door_tail
Pitch
This articulation has no STARTVALUE or ENDVALUE value. The first articulation

moves the same model component (door_tail) from 0 degrees (STARTVALUE)
to 32 degrees (ENDVALUE) in order to open the rear door. You need to
determine what the STARTVALUE and ENDVALUE would need to be to move that
same component back where it started.
If the door is fully open at 32 degrees (the ENDVALUE of the first
articulation), at what value would the door closing start (the
STARTVALUE of the second articulation)?
If the door was closed at 0 degrees (the STARTVALUE of the first
articulation), at what value would it be fully closed again (the
ENDVALUE of the second articulation)?
2. Remove the comment marker (#) from the STARTVALUE line.
3. Enter a STARTVALUE of 32.00000.

4. Remove the comment marker (#) from the ENDVALUE line.
5. Enter a ENDVALUE of 0.000000.
When you finish, it should look like this:
#CloseDoor
NEW_ARTICULATION
STARTTIME
DURATION
...
ARTICULATION
...
STARTVALUE
ENDVALUE
2930.000000
30.000000
door_tail
32.000000
0.000000
SPIN THE PROPS

The articulations that you looked at previously made the door open, and stay
open for a specified duration. These are one time events. You can also create
periodic articulations that cycle for a specified period of time (in seconds)
over a specified duration. Depending on the values specified for PERIOD and
DURATION, the articulation can cycle any number of times. You can have a
number of cycles in one DURATION. Such articulations are useful for creating
the illusion of perpetual motion such as wheels turning or propellers spinning.
A third articulation, indicated by the SpinTheProps commented (#) line,
creates a periodic articulation that starts when Hercules takes off from the
runway, and moves a model component called Props from -360 degrees to
360 degrees until Hercules lands.
#SpinTheProps
NEW_ARTICULATION
STARTTIME
1800.00
DURATION
####
...
PERIOD
####
ARTICULATION
Props
TRANSFORMATION
Spin
STARTVALUE
-360.0
ENDVALUE
360.0
This articulation has no PERIOD or DURATION value. The propellers should

rotate 360 degrees in specific intervals (PERIOD) throughout Hercules entire
flight--takeoff to landing (DURATION).
First, lets figure out what the DURATION of the articulation should be. The
articulation STARTTIME is Herculess takeoff time (1800). You can either
animate the scenario and take note of the time that Hercules lands or check
Herculess Route properties for the landing time.
What time does Hercules land?
What would be the duration of Hercules flight (Landing Stop - Takeoff
Start = DURATION)?
7. Remove the comment marker (#) from the DURATION line.
8. Enter the length of Herculess flight (in epoch seconds) as the
DURATION value.
Now, you need to determine the time it takes to complete each cycle of the
transformation (PERIOD). The period for an articulation is based on the time
step of your scenario. To figure out a rough value for the PERIOD, take the
animation time step, and multiply that by six (6). Once you determine the
PERIOD, you can watch the transformation as the articulation cycles during
animation and adjust it if necessary.
If the time step is 60 seconds, what should the period be?
If the time step is 1 second, what should the period be?
10. Remove the comment marker (#) from the PERIOD line.
11. Enter the PERIOD value that you came up with by completing the simple
calculation above. You might want to try a value of 10.00
WATER DROP
The articulations that we looked at previously made parts of the aircraft
model move. Five additional articulations that make up the water drop from
the open rear door, have also been included. These articulations are complete.
Lets take a look at them.
The first articulation defines the size of the water plume that will flow from
Herculess open rear door.
2. Locate the Water_plume articulation with the Size transformation.
#Water Drop
NEW_ARTICULATION
STARTTIME
DURATION
...
ARTICULATION
TRANSFORMATION
STARTVALUE
ENDVALUE
2830.00
100.00000
Water_plume
Size
0.0000000
1.0000000
3. Walk through the articulation with your instructor and answer the
What does the first size transformation do?
How many degrees does the water flow extend?
If youre not sure what an articulation does, you can play with it in the
Articulations dialog in the objects 3D Model properties.
A separate articulation containing a second transformation (Flow) for the

Water_plume articulation follows directly.
4. Locate the Water_plume articulation with the Flow transformation.
STARTTIME
DURATION
...
ARTICULATION
TRANSFORMATION
STARTVALUE
ENDVALUE
2830.00
100.00000
Water_plume
Flow
0.0000000
1.0000000
What does the size transformation do?
At what time does the water flow begin?
For how long does the water flow?
Another articulation containing a third transformation (MoveX) for the
1. Locate the Water_plume articulation with the MoveX transformation.
NEW_ARTICULATION
STARTTIME 2900.00
DURATION 30.0
...
ARTICULATION Water_plume
TRANSFORMATION MoveX
STARTVALUE 0.0
ENDVALUE -100.0
Why are there so many parts to this articulation?
What does MoveX affect?
Yet another articulation containing a fourth transformation (MoveZ) for the
1. Locate the Water_plume articulation with the MoveZ transformation.
NEW_ARTICULATION
STARTTIME 2900.00
DURATION 30.0
...
ARTICULATION Water_plume
TRANSFORMATION MoveZ
STARTVALUE 0.0
ENDVALUE 100.0
following question:
What does MoveZ affect?
The last articulation containing a fifth transformation (Size) for the
2. Locate the Water_plume articulation with the Size transformation.
#Water Drop
NEW_ARTICULATION
STARTTIME
DURATION
...
ARTICULATION
TRANSFORMATION
STARTVALUE
ENDVALUE
2930.00
100.00000
Water_plume
Size
0.0000000
1.0000000
What does the last size transformation do?
How many degrees does the water flow extend?
SAVE YOUR WORK

Articulation files must be stored in the scenario directory. Articulation file
names are identical to the name of the object (not the model file), and have an
object-specific extension. In this example, the object for which articulations
are being specified is an aircraft named Hercules and the model file name is c130h_water_drop.mdl. The articulation file name should be Hercules.acma.
1. When you finish, save ( ) Hercules.acma in your user area
(C:\My Documents\STK 9\ REMSAT_Models).
Remember articulation files (*.acma) must be stored in the same
directory as the object being articulated (not the object model).
RELOAD ARTICULATIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.

Click on Reload button in the Articulations area.
Click OK.
CHECK IT OUT!
Lets take a look at how these articulations make the Hercules aircraft model
behave.
2. Set the animation time for 2800.
3. Make sure your time step matches or is slower than the time you set as the
PERIOD in SpinTheProps.
5. Pause ( ) the animation at some point during the water drop.
FIGURE 2-8.
3D View: Hercules water drop
Can you see the rear door open?

Can you see the water drop?
Can you see the rear door close?
Are the propellers spinning while Hercules is flying?
You may want to store a view of Hercules making the water drop for
later use.
Save Your Work

How Do I Create Animations

Using STK and Other Custom Tools?
EXERCISE 3
In this exercise you will record a movie to use in a PowerPoint presentation. Upon
completion you will be able to:
Set up camera paths that customize the view for a movie.

Create and record a movie in STK.
Use a previously created and installed UI Plugin to record a second movie in STK.
How Do I Create Animations Using STK and Other Custom Tools?
Problem Statement
presenting your findings and ideas to the Colorado State Forest Service officials at
their headquarters. As part of the presentation, youd like to create a technical
animation that depicts the action of the Hercules water drop.
BREAK IT DOWN
Take a look at what you know:
You need a animation of the Hercules water drop.
You will play the animation from your laptop and project it onto a screen.
You need the animations to be fairly short, so that size wont cause delays
when launching them from your PowerPoint presentation and you can keep
the audiences attention.
You have a customized Movie Timeline tool available for your use.
SOLUTION
Use the existing REMSAT scenario to create technical animations using both
traditional STK methods and testing a new custom tool--the Movie Timeline.
Compare and contrast the processes for each method and determine which
will be used for creating animations moving forward.

A previously developed scenario that models and analyzes the REMSAT
system and the incorporation of the Hercules aircraft is available to you. Youve
already planned your presentation and made some adjustments to the objects
models that will be used. Use that model as your base to capture animations
that allow you to see the fire fighting action in motion.
1. If the REMSAT_Models scenario is not open, open it now.
If you do not have the REMSAT_Stills scenario, you can open a VDF
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 2
HOW DO I CREATE ANIMATIONS USING STK AND OTHER CUSTOM TOOLS?
previously developed analysis.
scenario file (*.sc) REMSAT_Action.
Camera Control Tool

Use the Camera Control tool to define the path that the virtual camera takes
during a technical animation. The Camera Control tool provides:
Keyframes properties - Use to add, modify, copy, and delete camera paths.
Many of the functions on this page are duplicated on the Camera Control
toolbar.
3D Window properties - Use to define properties for a particular camera path
in a specific 3D Graphics window.
Render Properties - Use to control how the camera paths are drawn in the
3D Graphics window.
Camera Control toolbar - Use this toolbar to interact with camera paths.
Well discuss the different properties in more detail as you use them.
The Camera Control tool requires that the Selection option on the
3D Graphics Annotation property page be Enabled.
CAMERA PATHS
The REMSAT scenario that you opened has already been prepared for
filming. The next step in the process is to create the path that the virtual
camera will take throughout the movie.
You can store a camera position and view data at a user-defined animation
time. This stored camera position and time is defined as a key frame. A
sequence of key frames is called a view path. A view path can be replayed and
followed during animation. Depending on the animation time step and the
time step between key frames, STK interpolates using splines to determine
views between key frames. View paths, therefore, tend to transition smoothly
from key frame to key frame. Using the Soft VTR capability, each frame
generated while animating along a view path can be written to a file. These
Exercise 3 | Page 3
files can then be used to create movies or videos. Here are a few rules of
thumb for creating a simple Camera Control path.
A good camera path adds substantial user interest and visual appeal to an
animated movie by displaying different viewpoints which change over the
course of a scenario as it animates.
TIPS
Here are some tips that will help you create better camera paths:
In general fewer key frames result in a smoother camera path.
To create a smooth camera path that travels completely around an object,
use at least five keyframes.

To determine the number of frames needed to achieve the desired length
of the movie, you need to calculate the amount of elapsed time between
keyframes. To do this, multiply the running time of the movie by 30. Since
the standard frame rate is 30 frames per second, this calculation provides
the number of frames you need to produce to achieve the desired running
time.
Once you have the number of frames needed, divide the overall animation
time (in scenario epoch seconds) by the number of frames needed. This
gives you the time interval (in seconds per frame) needed to make your
scenario produce the requisite number of frames. This number is used in
the STK basic properties panel before you start recording frames.
Try to make the keyframes at points where you really want the camera to
show the very best visuals that you can arrange.
Once you have mapped a camera path or series of camera paths to use for
animation purposes, make sure the window is the correct size before
recording.
You can change the view in the 3D window at any time to any keyframe by
double-clicking the keyframe in the 3D window and then clicking the Add
Keyframe button ( )button. The viewer position, direction, and time are
changed to that of the selected keyframe.
VIDEO OUTPUT
An animated movie consists of a series of successive frames played back
rapidly (in the US, the rate is 30 frames per second). The procedures used to
record these movies all involve some method of running the STK 3D window
and simultaneously saving the screens, with or without compression.
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 4
There are tradeoffs involved with making a movie. Generally speaking, the
moviemaker will need to juggle several things, including:
Available playback speed (Data Rate)
Desired screen size
Desired file size
Techniques that make a sharper, larger picture require more playback speed
and larger file sizes.
Follow Hercules
Lets make a camera path that follows Hercules as it moves towards the burn
area and makes a slurry drop on the fire.
HERCULES CAMERA PATH

The video that you will show in your presentation will be used to demonstrate
Hercules role in the firefighting effort. The best way to show this is to have the
virtual camera follow Hercules as he enters the drop zone and after he turns
out to return to Peterson.
SET THE ANIMATION TIME

Hercules does not exist for the entire scenario time period. Lets limit the
animation period to encompass that portion of the Hercules flight that we
want in our movie.
You want to capture the period just prior to Hercules entering the burn area,
dropping slurry on the fire, and then the outbound turn that sends Hercules
back to Peterson. To begin your movie making path, you must determine where
you want your movie to begin.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select the Route page.
Right-click the Stop time for Waypoint 2.
Select Set Animation Time from the menu that appears.
Click Cancel to dismiss Hercules ( ) properties ( ).
If you stored a view of Hercules entering the burn area, you can recall it
now.
Exercise 3 | Page 5
CHANGE THE ANIMATION PERIOD

1. Open REMSAT_Actions ( ) properties ( ).
2. Select the Basic - Time page.
3. Use the information on Hercules Route page to set the following Animation
properties ( ):
TABLE 3-1. REMSAT_Actions
animation times
OPTION
VALUE
Start Time
Set equal to the Stop time of Waypoint 2 (2680.00)
Stop at Time
On
Stop at Time
Set the Stop At Time to 3700.00.
Step Size
1 sec
4. Click OK.
Perform a Walkthrough
The next step in the process is to perform a walkthough to ensure that
nothing unexpected that you dont want in the film shows up during
animation.
2. Reposition the view so that Hercules is the focal point in the 3D Graphics
window if it is not already.
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 6
FIGURE 3-1.
3D View: Hercules at water drop
Does your scenario start, run properly, and stop at the appropriate points?
Are there any unnecessary annotations or obstructions in your 3D

Graphics window?
Create a Camera Path

Now that you have prepared your 3D animation, you need to make a custom
camera path, or a custom view. Camera paths are comprised of key frames or
the placement of the camera at a particular time. Lets make our camera
path now.
There are a few tips to keep in mind when creating a camera path and the key
frames in it.
Try to make the key frames at points where you really want the camera to
show the very best visuals that you can arrange. It is good to try to capture
some dramatic lighting, or to show a feature of the Earth in the background.
In your case, youd like to see Hercules make a water drop and land. If you
record a key frame that includes such elements, they will also show up in the
camera path that is created from that key frame.
1. Open the Camera Control tool ( ).
2. Select the Keyframes page.
Exercise 3 | Page 7
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click New. A new camera path segment will be added to the table.
Rename the camera path Hercules Water Drop.
Scroll down to the Keyframes area.
Click Add.
Each time you snap a frame, STK advances the animation at the rate of the
designated time step.
7. Use the mouse to manipulate the view in the 3D Graphics window until
you get a good view of Hercules heading to the burn area.
8. Click Add in the Keyframes area. A second keyframe will be added to your
camera path.
Keyframes show up in the table in the keyframes area with an automatically
assigned sequential identifier, the time, and the field of view for that shot.
1. Close the Camera Control tool ( ).
ADD MORE KEYFRAMES

1. Adjust the 3D Graphics window as necessary to find a favorable view.
2. Click the Add Keyframe button ( ) on the 3D Camera Control toolbar.
If the Camera Control tool is open when you use the Add Keyframes
button, the added keyframes dont appear in the Keyframes table until
you click Apply or OK in the Camera Control tool.
Add as many keyframes as you like. Dont be afraid to get creative. You may
want to increase the time step as well to add more time in between each
keyframe. We recommend 120 seconds or higher. Each time you pause to set
the 3D Graphics window take a good look at the action you are viewing. If you
think you want to see more or less in a particular shot, go back and change the
field of view.
REVIEW THE RECORDING

When you finish, go back to your 3D window to see what youve recorded.
3. Click the Follow Path While Animating ( ) button.
EXERCISE 3 | PAGE 8
You may need to slow down the time step.

5. Watch as move through your scenario along the new camera path.
Do you have a smooth path?
Did you include all of the events that you want to highlight in your
presentation?
MAKE SOME ADJUSTMENTS IF NECESSARY

1. If you notice areas where there are problems, pause ( ) the animation.
2. Click the Free Edit Mode ( ) button.
3. Mouse around in your 3D Graphics window until you see your new camera
path.
When in free edit mode, the camera path includes control points that can be
used to adjust the curves an tension of the path.
4. Use your mouse to click and drag the edit points along the path until
youre happy with the camera path.
Take a look at Table 3-2. Colors Explained for an explanation on what each
color represents.
TABLE 3-2. Colors
Explained
OPTION
VALUE
Camera Path
Red
Keyframes
White
Keyframe Tension Adjusters
Yellow
Current Camera Position
Blue
CHECK IT OUT!
1.
2.
3.
4.

Click the Follow Path While Animating ( ) button.
Exercise 3 | Page 9
5. Watch as move through your scenario along the new camera path.
Do you have a smooth path.
Has editing the keyframes made a visible impact?
CLEAN UP
When youre happy with your camera path, you can remove the path lines and
control points from the 3D Graphics window.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open the Camera Control tool ( ).

Select the Keyframe page.
Disable the Show option for Hercules Water Drop.
Select the Render Properties page.
Set the following:
TABLE 3-3. Render
OPTION
STATE
Show Keyframes
Off
Show Control Points
Off
Show Camera Object
Off
properties
6. Click OK.
Now that youve created an camera path that follows Hercules as he enters the
burn area and makes his drop, you can follow the scenario from that
perspective at any time by clicking the Follow Path While Animating ( ) button.
You can also record an animation in which the camera follows that path,
which is what well do now.
Create an Animation
You are now going to create a movie using the camera path that you created
earlier.
SOFT VIDEO TAPE RECORDER

Now youre ready to start recording. Use STKs Soft Video Tape Recorder
(SoftVTR) capabilities to record this version of your movie. SoftVTR controls
how individual or sequential frames of animation are captured and saved.
Do not maximize your 3D Graphics window. Soft VTR will not work
properly with a maximized 3D Graphics window.

Select the Soft VTR page.
Enable the Record every Animation Time Step option.
Click the ellipsis ( ) button beside the Directory option.
Browse to the REMSAT_Action directory in your student area
(C:\My Documents\ STK 9\REMSAT_Action).
6. Click OK.
7. Enter a Filename Prefix such as HercDrop.
8. Set the File Format to Windows Media Video (WMV).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PRELOAD TEXTURES
1. Enable the Preload Textures option.
The Preload Textures option preloads globe textures which ensure that the
correct resolution textures are loaded for each animation frame. Preloading
textures improves visual quality which is useful for recording animation. If not
selected, you will be able to move more smoothly around the 3D Graphics
window, but the correct resolution texture may not fully load until you stop
moving the cursor.
2. Enable the Use option in the Anti-Aliasing area.
3. Change the Blending Region Size to 4 X 4.
4. Click Apply, but leave the Soft VTR page open so that you can stop
recording when youre finished.
RECORD!
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Click the Follow Path While Animating ( ) button.
When the animation stops, go back to the Soft VTR page, and select Off at
the top of the page.
6. Click OK.
The video is not finished until you turn off the recording option and click OK
on the SoftVTR page. When you close the SoftVTR page, STK will write the
necessary header information to the file and close it properly. If you try to
open the file before this is completed you will not be able to view your video.
1. Browse to the REMSAT_Action directory in your student area
2. Double-click the WMV file that you created to open it in your default
viewer.
3. Watch the movie play back.
Does the action move too quickly? too slowly?
Do the events that you want to highlight display clearly?
Are important events viewed from an appropriate angle?
4. Make any necessary adjustments.
5. Repeat the recording process until your happy with your movie.
THE FINAL CUT

1. When you are satisfied with the movie, go back to the SoftVTR page.
2. Enable the Anti-Aliasing option, if you would like.
3. Make your final recording.
TAKE A LOOK
2. Double-click the WMV file that you created to open it in your default
viewer.
3. Play your movie back.
4. If you are satisfied with the movie, close the WMV file and viewer.
WHEN YOU FINISH

1. Close the Camera Control tool ( ).
Movie Timeline Plugin

You have a nice animation that you can use for your presentation but you will
be creating many animations for various projects moving forward. A member
of your team has created a movie making tool, the Movie Timeline, that could be
useful in making animations both for this project and moving forward. Now
that youve already made an animation using the traditional STK strategy,
youd like to test the new tool and see if it will enhance your efficiency when
you need to create technical animations for future projects.
What exactly is the Movie Timeline?
The Movie Timeline puts a new twist on and old capability -- it provides an
entirely new way to create technical animations from within STK. This
customized user interface plugin is fully integrated into the STK desktop
application. It is a seperate tool that integrates itself with STK and provides
direct access to the features and functions commonly used for movie making
and allows you to manipulate STK without opening and closing properties to
access and adjust functionality. This amazing tool was developed using the
newest AGI technologies including user interface (UI) plugins.
Lets take a moment to learn more about the latest integration technology for
AGI products--UI Pplugins.
Extend the STK User Interface

User interface (UI) plugins provide the capability to extend AGI products at
run-time. UI plugins allow you to leverage your own software development
environment (SDE) to integrate custom user interfaces that run seamlessly
inside AGI products, and exist alongside the standard elements and controls
provided by our COTS software packages. UI plugins allow you to add
custom toolbars, extend existing context menus, host custom windows, and
manage plugin properties. Using these custom toolbars, context menus, and
user controls, you can follow workflows unique to your organization or use
third-party code directly within the desktop environment. The result is
powerful user-defined workflows which can enhance your user experience
and extend AGI products to accommodate powerful integration of AGI
technology and in-house functionality.
UI Plugins allow you to do things like:
Extend context menus in the STK GUI.
Add toolbars and custom controls to the STK GUI.

Host custom windows.
Control the STK progress indicator.
UI PLUGIN INSTALLATION
The Movie Timeline plugin provided for you was installed using an installation
package that allocates the various necessary components to their proper
location.
Once a plugin component has been built, it can be deployed to other
machines for use by others. To do this, all the appropriate files (the WSC and
script file for Windows Script Components, and all relevant DLL files for
compiled components) built with the plugin must be copied to the other
machine. The plugin must be registered in the Windows registry and an
appropriate XML registration file must be placed in a registration search
folder.
You can also find a version of this for download on AGIs Developer
Network. www.adn.agi.com.
To register your plugin with the hosting environment, you need to list it in an
XML registration file. You may choose to create a new XML file for each
plugin you create; or you may choose to use one file to register multiple
plugins (even multiple plugins to multiple categories). Plugin availability will
depend on where the XML manifest is installed.
TABLE 3-4.
MANIFEST LOCATION
AVAILABILITY
{INSTALL_DIR}\Plugins
Available for every user on the local machine
{CONFIG_DIR}\Plugins
Available only for the current user.
Once a plugin has been installed, a user can choose to use a plugin by
selecting its ProgID or DisplayName from the user interface. The plugin may
choose to declare certain parameters as being editable by the user. If so, then
the user interface allows a user to edit these settings as well.
Managing Plugins From the STK GUI

To manage the registered plugins, STK offers a user interface integrated into
the application level options that displays all registered plugins, their status
and a list of supported commands. The purpose of custom property pages is
to provide a mechanism to extend the application level options for a specific
plugin at run-time. The custom configuration page is hosted by the
application and provides a user interface that can be used to edit the plugin's
settings.
FIGURE 3-2.
Custom configuration options for UI Plugins
ENABLE THE MOVIE TIMELINE TOOL

Lets enable the previously installed Movie Timeline plugin now.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Extend the Edit menu in the STK Workspace.

Select Preferences...
Select the UI Plugins page.
Ensure that the Active option for the Movie Timeline plugin is enabled.
Click OK.
Enable Movie Timeline Controls

When the Movie Timeline plugin is active, a toolbar that allows you to access the
Movie Timeline window and all its associated controls will be visible in the STK
GUI.
If the Movie Timeline toolbar is not visible in the STK GUI, enable it as you
would any other toolbar.
2. Select Toolbars.
3. When the list of available toolbars appears, select Movie Timeline.
or
1. Right-click in the toolbars area of the STK Workspace.
2. Select Movie Timeline from the list of toolbars that appears.
FIGURE 3-3.
Enabling custom toolbars
Lets take a closer look at the Movie Timeline controls and the function of each.
FIGURE 3-4.
Movie Timeline toolbar
TABLE 3-5.
BUTTON
DESCRIPTION
Open the Movie Timeline
Record from the Movie Timeline
Play the Movie Timeline showing each frame
Play the Movie Timeline emulating playback speed
TABLE 3-5.
BUTTON
DESCRIPTION
Import a Move Timeline
Export the Movie Timeline
Set DateFormat to Gregorian UTC
Set DateFormat to Epoch Seconds
Recording Control
When you record a movie, it will always record in Normal mode, capturing
each frame regardless of computer performance, and regardless of the last
preview mode used. You can expect it to play back at a fixed rate on any
system capable of properly playing the movie.
When you click the Record button ( ), either from the Timeline window or
from the toolbar, the Movie Recording wizard will launch. From the seven pages
that comprise this wizard, you can set and check any and all of the options
that affect the recording of your movie. Well discuss those properties in more
detail later. First, lets take a moment to understand some of the other
controls available.
Preview Controls
There are two ways to preview the movie before recording--Play the Movie
Timeline showing each frame ( ) and Play the Movie Timeline emulating playback
speed ( ). It's best to try both kinds of preview at least once before recording
a movie. For simple scenarios, you may not notice a difference between the
two. This is good because it means the preview should be accurate. If the two
types of previews differ, the final movie should combine the content from
one preview with the playback speed of the other preview.
PLAY ALL FRAMES

The Play the Movie Timeline showing each frame button ( ) plays the movie using
Normal animation mode. Normal animation mode shows each frame of
animation as fast as your computer can render it. The rate you see here may be
faster or slower than the playback rate of a recorded movie, depending on the
performance of your computer's graphics card. This mode is good for
previewing frame-dependent effects like pulsing sensors.
EMULATE PLAYBACK
The Play the Movie Timeline emulating playback speed button ( ) uses a special
animation mode called XRealTime to emulate the proper playback rate of a
recorded movie. If your graphics card performance is low, frames of
animation may be dropped from this preview, to keep up the playback rate. If
your graphics card performance is high, it is possible that additional frames
will be added, to maintain the desired rate. This preview mode is the preferred
mode when you're trying to get an idea of how fast the action will unfold for
viewers watching your movie.
Import and Export

Most users will never need to click the Import ( ) or Export ( ) buttons.
These buttons are for people who need to migrate a Movie Timeline from one
scenario to another, or are trying to manage multiple versions of a timeline for
one scenario. They allow you to save and load the state of the timeline
independently from the STK scenario. Timelines are saved in a .mtline file
format.
Unit Controls
The times displayed on the timeline are shown using DateFormat units, as set
on the Units page of the scenario Basic properties (Basic - Units). If you change
the DateFormat unit setting in STK, you can use the Reset button to apply the
change to the timeline.
The two buttons on the toolbar can be used as shortcuts, to switch the
DateFormat units to one of the two types commonly used in STK movie
making: Gregorian UTC and Epoch Seconds. When you click either of these
buttons, you immediately set the displayed units both on the timeline and in
the STK user interface.
Open the Movie Timeline Tool

Now that youve opened the Movie Timeline controls, lets go ahead and get
started. Before you begin using the Movie Timeline to set up and capture
animations, you should ensure that the 3D Graphics window within which you
want to catch the animation is not docked, maximized or set to be larger than
the desktop to ensure that the Movie Timeline tool can adjust the window size
appropriately. Lets do that now, and then open the Movie Timeline tool.
1. Ensure your 3D Graphics window is floating.
When you open the Movie Timeline from here, an abbreviated version of the
Movie Recording wizard will launch. The Movie Recording wizard will set scenario
level and window level properties for you.
2. Click the Open the Movie Timeline button ( ).
FIGURE 3-5.
WINDOW
When the Movie Recording wizard launches, the Windows page will be selected. If
your scenario has more than one 3D Graphics window the name of each
window (as specified in its Title bar) will display on the Windows page.
Selecting a window here will confirm which window is being recorded and
ensure that the options set for each movie are applied to the appropriate
window.
FIGURE 3-6.
Movie Timeline Window selection
3. Select the window whose view is focused on Hercules, which should be the
only 3D Graphics window available.
4. Click Next. Clicking Next will advance you to the Time & Length page.
MOVIE TIME & LENGTH

The Time & Length page controls the animation properties and the movie
length. In this example, the length of the movie is easy to determine--you
want to capture the water drop, which is the most dramatic portion of
Hercules flight. If you didnt know how long the movie should be, you could
accept the defaults. There will be many opportunities to edit and review the
animation settings and the recording before recording your first movie using
the Movie Timeline tool.
FIGURE 3-7.
Movie Time & Length
The Movie Timeline tool uses the options set at the scenario level to populate
the base values here. For example, the step size that displays here will coincide
directly to the step size option at the scenario level animation properties. The
Movie Timeline tool will also automatically populate the Movie time range equal to
those set to define the Animation period set at the scenario level. Your
scenario is already set to span only the length of Hercules flight around the
burn area and the water drop, so you can leave the default Start and End times.
The animation settings here are the same that were used to make the previous
animation. We can leave those values for now.
TAKE A TEST DRIVE

1. Ensure that the Movie Timeline tool is accessible but not blocking the view
of your 3D Graphics window.
2. Click the Preview Speed button ( ).
3. Watch the action in the 3D Graphics window.
4. When you are satisfied with the length and speed of the animation, click
Finish.
When you click Finish, the Movie Timeline interface will launch and integrate
itself in the bottom of the STK Workspace.
FIGURE 3-8.
After completing the wizard, the main timeline is displayed. There are a
number of interactive elements on the timeline window that make movie
making easy:
Click and drag anywhere in the white bar with the tic marks to control STK
scenario time.
Drag the green or red handles at either end of the timeline to control when
the movie begins and ends. Position the
start and end times to surround the action of interest in your scenario.
Zoom in or out on the timeline by clicking the magnifying glass icons at
the bottom left. For a smoother zoom,
select the desired direction (+ for zoom in, - for zoom out), and click and drag the
desired button to the right.
When zoomed in, the blue bar at the bottom indicates relative position,
and can be manipulated with the mouse.

The left and right arrows on either end can be clicked and dragged for
smooth scrolling.
5. Explore some of these options with your instructor before you move on.
Properties
The the Movie Recording wizard allows you to set and confirm both recording
and output files as well as set options for how the tool will interact with STK.
Lets work our way through the movie properties using the Movie Recording
wizard.
1. Bring the main timeline window to the front.

2. Click the Properties buttons ( ).
FILENAME & FORMAT

The first page in the Movie Recording wizard is the Filename & Format page
where you can specify just that.
1. Ensure that the Filename & Format page is selected.
FIGURE 3-9.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Movie Filename and format
Click the Save As... button.

Browse to C:\My Documents\STK 9\REMSAT_Action.
Save the movie as WaterDrop.
Ensure the Format is set to Windows Media (WMV).
Click Next to advance you to the Window page.
WINDOW
This is the same Window page that you used to select a window when you
launched the Movie Timeline tool.
1. Ensure the window is still 1 - 3D Graphics 1 - Earth.
2. Click Next to advance to the Resolution page.
RESOLUTION
The Resolution page provides configured presets for screen resolution and
related settings. You can select one of the preconfigured resolution options or
select Custom and define your own.
FIGURE 3-10.
Movie Resolution
Each Preset option available on the Resolution page plugs in a set of predefined
properties that get plugged into the Window Properties for the selected
3D Graphics window as described in the table following. Many movie formats
require these numbers to be evenly divisible by 16. It's best to pick one of the
presets from the pull-down menu if you're not sure.
TABLE 3-6. Resolution
Preset options
PRESET
WINDOW PROPERTIES
Custom
Use the When recording and When not recording

options on the page to define the window size.
Small
Sets the window size to 320 X 240 when recording
Medium
Large
HDTV - 720p
HDTV - 1080i/1080p
By default, the No change in size option is selected not matter the Preset option
selected. You can change that option if you want the window to become
larger or smaller when you are not recording. Pixel setting will be defined
appropriately based on your selections.
If you see error messages during this stage, check to make sure that your
graphics window is not minimized, maximized, or docked. On most systems,
the graphics window is prevented from growing larger than the desktop. If
the window does not have room to resize itself appropriately, it will return an
error and resize itself as best it can. For example, if you ask for HDTV 1080p
while using a 1280x1024 monitor, you may get an error message, because the
window would be too big to fit on the screen (This is an intentional limitation
within Microsoft Windows, to protect general usability of the system). If this
happens, pick a smaller size, or use a higher resolution screen.
1. Set the Preset to Large. This will automatically pick a good size for your 3D
Graphics window.
2. Click Next to advance to the Camera page.
CAMERA
The Movie Timeline can make animations that switch between multiple 3D
camera views. There are two main types of 3D camera views supported--Stored
Views and Camera Paths.
FIGURE 3-11.
Movie Camera
After setting up one or more camera views, you may assign them to become
active at specific times during your movie.
TABLE 3-7. Camera
viewing options
CAMERA VIEW
DESCRIPTION
Stored Views (3D)
Stored views are simple to create, and allow the camera to sit in place and watch the
action unfold.
Camera Paths (3D)
A camera path adds substantial user interest and visual appeal to an animated movie by
displaying different viewpoints which change over the course of a scenario as it is
animated.
Map Styles (2D)
These are similar to Stored Views in 3D, in that they define a viewing area of interest,
but they also include information about which 2D graphics options are turned on.
Currently it is not possible to change Map Styles in the middle of a movie.
We have a nice 3D representation of Hercules. Lets stick to 3D views for this

movie. A stored view, named HercAtDrop, was saved for you with the scenario.
You also created a camera path in the first part of this exercise. Feel free to
select either here.
1. Select the camera path that you created earlier (Hercules Water Drop).
2. Click Next to advance to the Time & Length page.
TIME & LENGTH

This is the same Time & Length page that appeared in the abbreviated version
of the Movie Recording wizard that launched when you opened the Movie
Timeline tool.
FIGURE 3-12.
Movie Time & Length
The two sliders at the top of the page represent the rate of playback and
length of playback, respectively. Together, they dictate that a certain amount
of scenario time will play out during the allotted movie playback time. There is
a small padlock icon as part of the End Time option in the Movie time range area. When
the lock is enabled, changes made to either of the top two sliders will affect the other
slider, and the End Time will remain unchanged. When you disable the padlock
option, changes made to either slider will affect the End Time directly.
Typically, if you have already used the timeline start and end markers (the
green and red handles on either end of the timeline) to frame the action of
interest in your movie, then you will want to leave the padlock on, leaving
your desired start and end time locked in place, and use the sliders to strike a
balance between play speed and movie length
1. If you think you need to make any changes to the values set earlier, do that
now.
2. Click Next to move to the Size & Quality page.
SIZE & QUALITY

There are two major factors that affect the image quality in your movie: (1)
the amount of time that you're willing to spend rendering (creating) the
movie, and (2) how much disk space you're willing to devote to the finished
product.
FIGURE 3-13.
Movie Size & Quality
The options on the top half of this page govern the Render Quality. Antialiasing setting will determine how much time your system spends creating a
movie. Higher anti-aliasing creates a movie with smoother edges and cleaner
images and textures. No anti-aliasing creates draft quality rendering.
Using higher anti-aliasing for your final product is recommended. Higher

rendering quality may even save you some disk space. Without anti-aliasing,
your video may contain aliasing artifacts such as rough edges and flickering
texture maps, which the video encoder may attempt to preserve on disk. A
smoother, anti-aliased image will be stored more effieciently.
1. You can set the Anti-aliasing to Off - Draft quality, fast rendering for your
maiden run. You can reset it when youre ready to make your final
recording.
The options on the bottom half of the page help you define the size of the
movie file on disk. If you're using Windows Media (the default, from the first
page), then you have a lot of flexibility here. You can pick one of the quality
presets (High, Medium, Low, etc) from the pull-down menu, and see an
estimate of the movie size. Conversely, you could enter the desired maximum
size, and the wizard will compute a corresponding bitrate (the amount of disk
space used per second of movie playback) that can be given to the Windows
Media Encoder to target a specific file size. Note that if you have a lot of black
space or solid color in your movie, the actual file size may be substantially less
than the estimated size.
2. If you want, you can change the Quality to Low for the test run. Again, you
can reset it when youre ready to make your final recording.
3. Ensure that the Use off-screen rendering for large or obstructed windows option is
enabled.
4. Click Next to advance to the Record page.
RECORD
The final page provides a summary of the selections that you made through
the wizard, a chance to preview the movie, and the option to begin recording.
FIGURE 3-14.
Movie Record
1. Click Begin Record.

Once recording is underway, the main record button changes to an abort
button
FIGURE 3-15.
Movie Record
The Movie Maker tool starts to animate and you can watch your movie
animating in the 3D Graphics window. You can also watch the Movie Timeline at
the bottom of the STK window. The Timeline will advance with the movie.
2. Wait for the recording to finish. The progress indicator along the bottom
of the page will show your progress.
3. Click Yes when the message asking if you want to watch your recording
appears.
When you answer Yes, the Movie Timeline will have your system play the
recorded movie using the movie playing software that is registered as the
default for that type of file. Typically, this would be Windows Media Player on
most systems.
Watch your movie critically and determine if changes need to be made.
Should it move faster, slower?
Is it too long or too short?
Perhaps the quality needs to be increased or the files size decreased?
If you want to re-record, feel free to go back and change the settings and try
again.
Save and Load

Save and load happens automatically when you save or load a scenario in
STK. The save file has the same base filename as the scenario file, but has a
file extension of .mtline instead of .sc. The data is saved in XML format,
and is not meant to be hand-edited.
1. Close the movie.
2. Save ( ) your scenario.
Converting & Compressing Video

In this exercise, we created a WMV, but there are many other video format
and compression options available. Lets discuss them for just a moment.
STK can create video in an WMV format, AVI format, or as individual frame
files (in BMP, JPEG or TIF). If you wish to produce a final product that is an
MPEG or another format, then you will have to do it as an aftermarket post
processing operation. There are many excellent and inexpensive (if not free)
products available today that will produce an MPEG.
The procedure in this case would be to create an uncompressed AVI, and
then, using an aftermarket converter, convert it to MPEG. A great way to do
this is to create an uncompressed AVI in a large screen size, such as 720x486,
and then, using an aftermarket converter, compress it and reduce the screen
size (to 320x240) in a single step. It is important to not use compression when
you record the AVI from STK, since doing this will usually result in an
inferior movie when you compress it again to make it an MPEG.
This is the video compression option. The Codecs option is populated with
the codecs that are installed on your machine. To run a video, you must have
the same codec on the machine you want to run it on.
Compression will decrease your file sizes and make it possible to display a
larger screen size, due to the decreased data rate requirements. This enhanced
performance comes at the price of screen resolution, due to the compression
algorithms operation. The operation of the compressor will tend to make the
pictures blocky.
Some form of compression is probably inevitable, since a 720x486 (Standard

NTSC video) movie that lasts 10 seconds will take up over 300 megabytes
uncompressed. Playback will also be a problem on all but the fastest
machines.
Compression will make use of various CODECS. STK will be able to use
most of the CODECS that came on your computer; however, sometimes the
operating system will tell STK that it possesses a CODEC that it in fact does
not have. If this happens, unpredictable results may occur.
Repeated compression will degrade the movie quality.
Author a Visual Data Format File

The officials at the Colorado State Forestry Service do not have STK, so if
you provide an STK scenario file (*.sc) they will not be able to open it.
Instead, you will include a Visual Data Format file (VDF) that they can open
using STK Viewer. STK Viewer is freely available via the AGI Web site. If
they did have STK, they would be able to edit and save the VDF file as an
STK scenario file (*.sc).
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the scenario in the Object Browser.

Select VDF Setup....
Ensure the Minimal VDF option is disabled.
When Minimal VDF is off, you can manually select the analysis files, globe
data files, graphics files, and/or scenario files that you want to include with
the VDF file. You want to provide a VDF that includes all of the ancillary
data and files that were used to build and create the REMSAT scenario, as
well as any Quick Reports and Stored Views that you saved with the scenario.
Notice that all the saved Quick Reports are selected for inclusion by default.
Any reports created that were not saved as a Quick Report are not available
for export as part of the VDF file.
5. Click Save.
(C:\My Documents\ STK 9\REMSAT_Action), and in doing so, rename
the file REMSAT.vdf ( ).
AGI Viewer
AGI Viewer is an application for displaying the visual results of analyses
performed and authored by STK users. The four-dimensional viewer, based
on AGIs STK Engine, lets you maneuver through the analysis in time and
space. Interaction with the analysis can be either completely unconstrained or
can use the stored views and camera paths provided by the author as part of
the file.
1. Browse to C:\My Documents\STK 9\REMSAT_Action directory in
your student area.
2. Double-click the REMSAT.vdf ( ) file. The VDF file will automatically
open in AGI Viewer if installed.
3. The AGI Viewer interface includes the same animation and capture tools
that are available to the 3D Graphics window in STK. All of the views and
camera paths that you stored in your previous work will also be available
in the VDF file.
GET MOVING
Take your VDF file for a test drive. Explore the available controls and
options.
1. Mouse around the 3D Graphics window.
2. Play ( ), Pause ( ), and Reset ( ) the animation just like you would in
STK.
3. Follow animation paths just like in STK.
4. Use the Previous Stored Views ( ) or Next Stored Views ( ) to recall
saved views just like you would in STK.
5. Snap frames and record animation just like you would in STK.
Save Your Work

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Close AGI Viewer.

Close the Camera Control tool ( ) in STK.
Save ( ) your work.
Leave STK ( ) open.
Saving & Displaying Data:

Snaps, Graphs & Dynamic Displays
EXERCISE 4
In this exercise you will create visuals for use inside a PowerPoint presentation. Upon
completion, you will be able to:
Create visuals for your PowerPoint presentation, focusing on key concepts.

Create and export graphs in STK.
Display dynamic data in the 3D Graphics window.
Saving & Displaying Data: Snaps, Graphs & Dynamic Displays
Problem Statement
presenting your findings and ideas to the Colorado State Forest Service
officials at their headquarters. As part of the presentation, youd like to take
some still snaps and graph some of the hard data and include the graphs and
still images in PowerPoint slides.
BREAK IT DOWN
You have some information that might be helpful. Heres what you know:
In the planning stages you identified important events in the scenario.
You want at least one good snap of each of the important events that you
identified.
You need a graph showing the complete chain access between crews in the
field and headquarters.
You need to graph time critical flight data for the Hercules water drop.
You want to display dynamic data that will provide LLA position for your
firetruck as the animation progresses.
SOLUTION
Snap some of the action in the REMSAT scenario that highlights the
important events that you identified. Create new graphs of the
communications chain and flight data for Hercules and prepare them for
import into your PowerPoint presentation, and 3D display.
Survey Your Scenario

Youve performed several different analyses to determine the feasibility of
incorporating the REMSAT firefighting model. Youve examined the existing
system, made changes to the system to accommodate budget limitations, and
youve even modeled the possibility of incorporating aerial water drops. Youll
need to set views for various events that take place and snap still images of
those views for use in your presentation.
1. Open the REMSAT_Models scenario if it is not already.
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 2
SAVING & DISPLAYING DATA: SNAPS, GRAPHS & DYNAMIC DISPLAYS
If you do not have the REMSAT_Models scenario, you can open a VDF
scenario file (*.sc) REMSAT_Stills.
TURN OFF THE COMPASS

Before you start making snapshots, you can turn off the compass that you
used to orient your models. You will not need the compass for anything, and
you dont want it to show up in your snapshots or the movies that you will
make later. Lets turn off the compass in the 3D Graphics window.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disable the Show option in the Compass area.
Click OK.
Snap Properties
Up until now, you saved all of the images using the default Snap Properties set
by STK, but STK also allows you to choose from a variety of file formats,
turn anti-aliasing on or off, define a blending size region, and select a
resolution. Lets look at the Snap Properties dialog.
2. Click the Snap Properties ( ) button on the Tools toolbar.
CAPTURE
STK allows you to select one of two available capture option.
Exercise 4 | Page 3
TABLE 4-1. Snap
capture options
OPTION
DESCRIPTION
Snap to
Clipboard
Copies each frame to the clipboard
Snap To File
Saves the frame as a file using the selected file format.

Select the file format to be used when using the Snap to File
option. Choose from one of the following File Formats:
File Format
Windows Bit Map (BMP)

Sun Raster (RAS)
SGI Image (RGB)
Tagged Image (TIF) (best quality)
Jpeg Image (JPEG)
ANTI-ALIASING
You can set anti-aliasing at the scenario level for movie making purposes, but
you can also set anti-aliasing options for still images directly from the Snap
Properties. When anti-aliasing is on, color is derived using the Blending Region
Size selected. If anti-aliasing is off (default), color is derived from the center of
the pixel.
Blending Region Size options include:
TABLE 4-2. Blending
region size options
OPTION
DESCRIPTION
2X2
Color is derived by dividing a single pixel into 4 squares, determining

the color of the center of each square, and then averaging the color
values over the pixel.
3X3

4X4

In this image the upper line has not been anti-aliased, instead it was aliased to
the screen pixels and looks jagged. The bottom line used anti-aliasing which
averages color by slightly adding offset images and causes the brain to see the
line as smooth.
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 4
3. Click Cancel on the Snap Properties.

FIGURE 4-1.
Anti-aliased lines
RESOLUTION
The Resolution options do not affect text that is visible in the 3D window,
including Data Display text. STK uses a default Resolution of Normal for saving
3D frames. Use a high resolution image for high quality print projects such as
a poster or brochure. Use a small image for on screen presentations such as
Word documents, PowerPoint presentations, or a Web site.
Resolution options include:
TABLE 4-3. Snap
resolution options
OPTION
DESCRIPTION
Normal
(Default)
Creates a snapshot of the window that will be the same size as the
actual window.
Create high-resolution poster images. When you change the default
resolution from Normal to High you can also specify the values for the
printer's capacity in terms of dots per inch (DPI), and the width you
wish the image to be when saved.
High
STK then takes these two values and calculates the Height and the Disk
Space Required (both displayed below the Image Width field). The disk
space required is the minimum necessary for uncompressed files such
as bitmaps or TIFs. Actual disk space requirements may vary
depending on the way in which your PC allocates bits. If the Disk
Space Required is greater than actual disk space available, STK will be
unable to save the image.
All images snapped during this STK session will use the selections set here
unless you change them.
Exercise 4 | Page 5
Experiment With Snap Properties

You need to take some really nice views of the equipment at the Castle Rock
facility and Hercules making the water drop. The models are already
articulated and you should be able to get some really nice still images. Lets
snap those views. In doing so, you can experiment with the options available
for snapping still images.
SET THE VIEW

2. Set the animation time so that you are at the water drop.
3. Step the animation forward until you can see the water being released
from Hercules rear hatch.
4. Adjust the view if necessary.
FIGURE 4-2.
3D View: Hercules water drop
STORE THE VIEW

Now, well store this view so that we can easily recall it.
1.
2.
3.
4.
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 6
Click the Stored View ( ) button.

When the Stored Views dialog opens, click the New button.
Change the View Name to Water Drop.
Click OK.
NORMAL RESOLUTION
First, snap the 3D view in a normal resolution with no anti-aliasing.
1. Go back to the Snap Properties ( ) dialog.
TABLE 4-4.
OPTION
VALUE
Snap to File
On
File Format
Windows Bitmap (BMP)
Anti-Aliasing
Off
3. Click Apply.
4. Click the Snap Frame button ( ) on the STK Tools toolbar.
5. When prompted to do so, save the file to the scenario directory in your
student area (C:\My Documents\STK 9\ REMSAT_Stills).
6. Name the file NormNoAlias.
7. Click Save.
ANTI-ALIASING
Now, snap the same view with anti-aliasing enabled.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Go back to the Snap Properties ( ) dialog.

Keep all previous settings.
Select the Normal resolution option.
Enable the Anti-Aliasing option. Dont worry about the blending region
size.
Click Apply.
Click the Snap Frame button ( ) on the STK Tools toolbar.
When prompted to do so, save the file to the scenario directory in your
Name the file NormWithAlias.
Click Save.
COMPARE
Now, lets compare the effects of anti-aliasing on snapshots in a normal
resolution.
Exercise 4 | Page 7
1. Browse to the C:\My Documents\STK 9\REMSAT_Stills directory in

your student area.
2. Change to Details view.
3. Note the size of the two snaps that you just took.
4. Open each snapshot in a separate window, so that you can view them side
by side.
5. Compare snapshots of the same view and discuss the following with your
instructor:
Which snapshot took longer to process?
Are there significant differences in the file sizes of the different
snapshots?
Did enabling anti-aliasing at normal resolution make a visible impact on
the quality of the image?
HIGH RESOLUTION
Now, snap the same view using various high resolution setting with and
without anti-aliasing.
1. Go back to the Snap Properties ( ) dialog.
TABLE 4-5. Snap
OPTION
VALUE
Anti-Aliasing
On
Resolution
High
Printer DPI
96
Image Width
5 in
properties
3. Click Apply.
4. Click the Snap Frame button ( ) on the STK Tools toolbar.
5. When prompted to do so, save the file to the scenario directory in your
6. Name the file HR96.
7. Click Save.
EXERCISE 4 | PAGE 8
RAISE THE DPI

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Bring the Snap Frame properties to the front.

Change the Printer DPI to 300.
Click Apply.
7. Click Save.
RAISE THE DPI AGAIN

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Bring the Snap Frame properties to the front.

Change the Printer DPI to 600.
Click Apply.
7. Click Save.
8. Close the Snap Tool ( ).
COMPARE
Now, lets compare the effects of changing the printer DPI when taking high
resolution snaps.
1. Browse to the directory where you saved the snapshots
(C:\My Documents\STK 9\REMSAT_Stills).
2. Note the size of the snaps that you just took compared to each other and
compared to the normal resolution snaps.
3. Open each snapshot in a separate window, so that you can view them side
by side.
4. Compare snapshots of the same view and discuss the following with your
instructor:
Which snapshot took longer to process?
Exercise 4 | Page 9
Are there significant differences in the file sizes of the different

snapshots?
Does changing the DPI value change the image height?
Does increasing the DPI value increase or decrease the amount of disk
space required?
Display Dynamic Data

3D data displays present dynamic data for the specified object in the
3D Graphics window. This feature is useful when presenting information that
requires both visual and textual data. Data display properties allow you to
specify what data will display and where it is positioned in which, or all,
3D Graphics windows.
It is important to be able to locate the Fieldcrew at all times. That being the
case, it would make sense to add textual data alongside Fieldcrew during
animation. Lets first create a dynamic display in the 3D Graphics window that
tells you the Fieldcrews position in time. That way, all of the textual and visual
data for the Fieldcrew will be in one window. Your audience wont need to look
at separate reports and try to match up the visual and textual representations.
WHAT DO YOU WANT TO DISPLAY?

When displaying data in the 3D Graphics window, it is important not to clutter
the window with unnecessary elements. Having lengthy reports or
unnecessary values displayed can make the 3D Graphics window seem
cluttered and confusing.
By default, the LLA Position report returns the ephemeris of the selected
object, expressed in LLA elements, as a function of time. The LLA Position
report style includes latitude, longitude, altitude, latitude rate, longitude rate,
and altitude rate.
Do you need to see all of that information?
Since the Fieldcrew is a ground vehicle, you know that it travels along
Highway 67 on the surface of the terrain. You arent really interested in
knowing the altitude of Fieldcrew at any given time, nor are you interested in
the latitude, longitude, or altitude rates. What you want to see as Fieldcrew
moves through the burn area is his precise position in time. All you really need
to display is the time, latitude, and longitude.

Before you add the data display to the 3D Graphics window, go ahead and set
the view on Fieldcrew.
2. Reposition the view so that Fieldcrew ( ) is the focal point in the 3D
Graphics window.
3. Adjust the view if necessary.
4. Adjust the Epoch Seconds to zero (0) if necessary.
CUSTOMIZED DATA
Lets customize the LLA Position report style for Fieldcrew so that it includes
only the data that you need.
TABLE 4-6. LLA
Position report
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Ground Vehicle
Fieldcrew
Show Reports
On
Show Graphs
Off
Style
LLA Position
3. Click the Duplicate Styles button ( ).

4. Select the following data providers in the Report Contents list:
LLA State - Fixed - Alt
LLA State - Fixed - Lat Rate
LLA State - Fixed - Lon Rate
LLA State - Fixed - Alt Rate
5. Click the Remove button.
6. Click OK.
The new report style will show up under My Styles in the Report & Graph
Manager ( ).
7. Rename the Report Position in Time.
DISPLAY MY DATA
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Open FieldCrews ( ) properties ( ).

Select the 3D Graphics Data Display page.
Click Add...
Select Position in Time from the Styles list.
Click OK.
Ensure the Show option is turned on.
Click Apply.
TAKE A LOOK
2. Play ( )the animation.
3. Watch carefully as the data is displayed, and answer the following
questions, again.
Is the data display in the way?
Does it obscure the view of the action that you want to see in the
scenario?
Can you clearly read the data being displayed?
Is the font large enough?
Does the data blend into the background?
It seems to be positioned out of the way, and the yellow letters show up nicely
against the ground in the backdrop, but the lettering is a little small. Lets
make the letters a little larger.
ADJUST THE DISPLAY

1. Go back to FieldCrews ( ) Data Display properties page.
2. Select Position in Time in the table at the top of the page.
3. Set the following appearance options:
TABLE 4-7. 3D
Data display appearance for Fieldcrew
OPTION
VALUE
Font Size
Medium
Format
Horizontal
Title
On
4. Click OK.
TAKE ANOTHER LOOK

Lets see if making the text display larger makes the values easier to read.
FIGURE 4-3.
3D View: Fieldcrew with data displayed
3. Play ( )the animation.

4. Watch carefully as the data is displayed, and answer the following
questions, again.
Is the data display in the way?
Does it obscure the view of the action that you want to see in the
scenario?
Can you clearly read the data being displayed?

Is the font large enough?
Does the data blend into the background?
Everything looks good!
Quick Reports
Lets also save the field crews position data as a Quick Report. The Quick Report
feature gives you the ability to save and quickly recreate a report, dynamic data
display, graph, or strip chart. In addition, you can select which quick reports
are published in a VDF file at authoring. The Quick Report list allows you to
quickly recreate a report.
First, lets create an LLA Position report for FieldCrew.
TABLE 4-8. LLA
Position report
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Ground Vehicle
Field Crew
Show Reports
On
Show Graphs
Off
Style
LLA Position
Generate As
Report/Graph
Now, add the report to your Quick Reports list.
4. Click the Save As Quick Report button ( ) on the Report Data window.
RECALLING SAVED QUICK REPORTS

1. Click the down arrow beside the Quick Report Manager button ( ).
2. Select the LLA Position report from the menu.
Reports can also be recalled from the Quick Report Manager. Lets take a look.
3. Click the Quick Report Manager button ( ).
FIGURE 4-4.
Quick Report Manager
When you save a report as a Quick Report, it is listed in the Quick Report
Manager. Any report listed here can be exported with and included in your
Visual Data Files (VDF). You can manage all of your saved reports from the
Quick Report Manager.
Reformatting Report Data

It is important to know when lines of communication between crews in the
field and headquarters are the strongest at any given time while crews are in
the field. This information is crucial to your presentation. When you analyzed
the communications chain between crews in the field and headquarters, you
saved a report outlining complete chain access times in your scenario. That
report was saved in an Excel compatible format in your student area. Before
you move on, lets open that report and clean it up a little bit, so that you can
use it in your presentation.
1. Browse to the C:\My Documents\STK 9\REMSAT_CrewRelay
directory in your student area.
2. Double-click the saved CSV file (REMSAT_Access.csv) to open it in
Excel.
If you do not have the report created, create the report in STK and save
it as a CSV file.
You can change the format and presentation of report data to make it more
aesthetically pleasing to use in your presentation. For example, you can add
shading, borders, resize columns, add color or graphics that highlight critical
elements in the report, change headings, etc.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Extend the Edit menu.

Select Preferences.
Select the Report Options page.
Play with the formatting until you are happy with the layout.
When you finish, save the report.
Close the report.
Close Excel.
Flight Data Graph

The Flight Profile By Time graph provides flight data sampled using a constant
time step between grid points, which will tell us how quickly Hercules can get
to the fire from the runway. You have a snapshot of Hercules fighting the fire.
What you need now is the data that will prove that Hercules can, in fact, get to
the burn area in a timely manner, make the drop, and get out of the area safely.
Reports arent visually appealing. A graph will look better in your PowerPoint
presentation. Create a Flight Profile By Time graph and save it, so that you can
add it to your presentation.
TABLE 4-9. LLA
Position report
OPTION
VALUE
Object Type
Aircraft
Hercules
Show Reports
Off
Show Graphs
On
TABLE 4-9. LLA
Position report
OPTION
VALUE
Style
Flight Profile By Time
Generate As
Report/Graph
SAVE THE FIGHT PROFILE

Now, you need to save the Flight Profile By Time graph so that you can import it
into your presentation later.
1. Click the Save button ( ) on the Report Data window.
2. Browse to the scenario directory in your student area
(C:\My Documents\STK 9\ REMSAT_Stills).
3. Name the graph HercFltProfile.
4. Click Save.
5. Close the graph.
Save Your Work

Can I Provide My Colleagues That

Do Not Use STK With A Usable
Verion of My Scenarios?
EXERCISE 5
In this exercise you will create a PowerPoint for presentation that contains some of the
media and visual outputs that you have been creating. Upon completion, you will be able
to:
Create and embed a VDF file in PowerPoint

Create a PowerPoint presentation combining all of the pieces you have analyzed
Can I Provide My Colleagues That Do Not Use STK With A Usable Verion of My Scenarios?
Problem Statement
You have been working very hard to prepare a presentation that will illustrate
how the REMSAT system with the inclusion of an aircraft would be a better
way to manage and fight forest fires in the mountainous region of Douglas
County Colorado that you have been assessing. You will be presenting your
findings and ideas to the Colorado State Forest Service officials.
You have a presentation that contains the relevant data that you generated in
your analysis as well as a both static (stored views and snapshots) and dynamic
(camera paths) visual data. All you need now, is to save the entire scenario in a
format that allows you to share it with your colleagues without having to run
STK during the presentation.
BREAK IT DOWN
You have two snapshots (firetruck snap and Hercules snap).
You have two graphs (Complete Chain Access and Flight Profile by Time).
You have data from Analyzer on Node Analysis.
You have a movie of your REMSAT scenario.
You will need to transport your REMSAT scenario and will use AGI
Viewer to assist in this.
You want to present a technical PowerPoint to your managers.
You want to add your snapshot, graph, Analyzer data, movie, and VDF to
a PowerPoint presentation.
SOLUTION
Use the REMSAT scenario to create a Visual Data Format (VDF) version of
the scenario. Once you have that last piece, you can put all of the data into
your PowerPoint presentation.
Create Your Presentation

A previously formatted PowerPoint presentation has been created for you. You
can drag and drop the various reports, graphs, static images, movies into the
PowerPoint slides the way you normally would when creating a presentation.
The only file that will require some special handling is the scenario file in
EXERCISE 5 | PAGE 2
CAN I PROVIDE MY COLLEAGUES THAT DO NOT USE STK WITH A USABLE VERION OF MY SCENARIOS?
Visual Data Format. Lets drop in some of the static data, and then well add
movies and VDFs.
WINDOWS SECURITY
Before you add items to your presentation, it is important to check the
security level in PowerPoint. If your security settings are too high, you will not
be able to launch the viewer file from within your PowerPoint.
1. Browse to the C:\Training\STK\REMSAT_Stills directory in your
student area.
2. Double-click the REMSAT_Template.ppt file that was provided for you to
open it in PowerPoint.
Leave the REMSAT_Data directory open and easily accessible, so that
you can drag the snapshots, graphs, videos, etc. from that directory
onto various slides.
3. If a security warning appears, click Disable Macros.

4. Save ( ) the PowerPoint presentation to the C:\My Documents\STK 9\
REMSAT_Data directory in your student area.
PowerPoint is now set to allow the controls to be accessed.
Title Your PowerPoint

You should add a title to the Title Slide.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the Title slide.

Click on Click to add title.
Type in a title such as REMSAT Firefighting Model.
Click on Click to add subtitle and enter your name.
Add Static Images & Data

First, add the snapshots and graphs they you created and saved. After you add
each item, you can add captions, change backgrounds or customize the slide
in any way.
1. Select a slide.
Exercise 5 | Page 3
2.
3.
4.
5.
In the Format menu, select Slide Layout...

In the Apply Slide Layout, navigate to Content Layouts.
Click on the Title and Content.
Open the pull-down window to select Apply to Selected Slides.
Although you can simply drag and drop a picture into a PowerPoint slide, this
layout will nicely center your picture for you.
6. Click on Insert Picture inside of the new slide.
7. Select a snapshot from the C:\My Documents\STK
9\REMSA_Presentation directory in your student area.
8. Drag the picture into the slide.
9. Make any necessary sizing and placement adjustments.
10. Add a caption and/or other formatting.
11. Repeat steps 1-9 to create two picture slides and one graph slide.
That should do it for your still images and report data.
Add a Movie
You can also insert AVIs and WMVs in your PowerPoint presentation. Lets add
the movies that you created in STK.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select a slide.
Extend the Insert menu in PowerPoint.
Select Movies and Sounds - Movie from File...
Browse to the C:\My Documents\STK 9\REMSAT_Action directory in
your student area.
5. Select one of the movies that you created, and drag it onto the slide.
6. Click OK.
7. When prompted to select whether you want to play the movie
Automatically, or On Click, select On Click.
Add a Visual Data Format File!

VDF files can be added to PowerPoint presentations in much the same way you
would include a video. Once the Viewer is on the slide, you can operate it just
as you normally would. You can load Viewer files, animate, display stored
view. You can even customize how the AGI Viewer Active X control behaves.
EXERCISE 5 | PAGE 4
CAN I PROVIDE MY COLLEAGUES THAT DO NOT USE STK WITH A USABLE VERION OF MY SCENARIOS?
The AGI Viewer can be set to load automatically or manually just like a video
or movie.
POWERPOINT CONTROLS TOOLBOX

Before you begin, you need to ensure that the PowerPoint Control Toolbox is
enabled. Lets do that now.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Extend the Tools menu in PowerPoint.

Select Customize...
Select the Toolbars tab.
Ensure that Controls Toolbox is on.
Click Close.
MANUAL LOAD
You can have AGI Viewer load into PowerPoint when the slide in which it is
embedded is brought up, but wait to load the VDF manually during the
presentation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Select a new slide.

Click the More Controls button( ) on the Control Toolbox toolbar.
Select AGI Viewer Control 9 from the list of available controls.
Click the spot in the slide where you want the Viewer to show up.
Make any necessary sizing and placement adjustments.
Accept any license agreements.
Click No on the AGI Viewer Product News Updates.
Switch to Presentation mode.
AUTOMATIC LOAD
You can also have AGI Viewer load into PowerPoint when the slide is brought
up, and have the VDF load automatically.
1. Follow the steps outlined in Manual Load above to add the viewer control
to the slide.
2. Right-click the AGI Viewer control on the slide.
3. Select Properties.
4. In the Properties window, change the PptPreloadMode value to True.
Exercise 5 | Page 5
5. Change the DefaultPackageName value to

C:\My Documents\STK 9\REMSAT_Action\REMSAT.vdf.
PRESENT!
1. Save ( ) the PowerPoint presentation.
2. Play the presentation (Slideshow - View).
3. Use the spacebar to move from slide to slide.
Save Your Work

1. Save ( ) the PowerPoint presentation.
2. Get to your meeting!
EXERCISE 5 | PAGE 6

Systems Toolkit Tutorial

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Systems Toolkit Tutorial

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

STK Fundamentals

Analytical Graphics, Inc.

When Can I Spy On Washington

Model Destinations ...............................................................................................4-4

Model the Target City............................................................................................6-4

When Can I Spy On Washington

Understand the questions that STK answers:

When Can I Spy On Washington From a Molniya Satellite?

orbit and the city of Washington.

WHEN CAN I SPY ON WASHINGTON FROM A MOLNIYA SATELLITE?

Table 1. Welcome to STK!

2. Click the Create a New Scenario button.

When Can I Spy On Washington From a Molniya Satellite?

TABLE 1-1. New

Scenario Wizard options

Can a Molniya satellite spy on Washington, D.C.?

C:\Documents and Settings\Student\My Documents\STK 9

Leave the default analysis period.

WHEN CAN I SPY ON WASHINGTON FROM A MOLNIYA SATELLITE?

GET OFF ON THE RIGHT FOOT--STAY ORGANIZED

When Can I Spy On Washington From a Molniya Satellite?

THE PROPERTIES BROWSER

ACCESSING OBJECT PROPERTIES

WHEN CAN I SPY ON WASHINGTON FROM A MOLNIYA SATELLITE?

Right-click the object in the Object Browser or visualization window (2D or

3D), and select Properties ( ) from the menu that appears.

SCENARIO BASIC PROPERTIES

Set defaults for available databases.

Select an Earth Orientation Parameters (EOP) file.

Allows the configuration of warning messages for missiles,

Record useful information about your scenario.

2. Select the Time page.

3. Select the Description page.

When Can I Spy On Washington From a Molniya Satellite?

Insert STK Objects Tool

Insert STK Objects tool

WHEN CAN I SPY ON WASHINGTON FROM A MOLNIYA SATELLITE?

Select an Object To Be Inserted:

2. Click the Insert... button.

THE ORBIT WIZARD

When Can I Spy On Washington From a Molniya Satellite?

The orbit types available are outlined below.

Circular orbits have a constant radius.

WHEN CAN I SPY ON WASHINGTON FROM A MOLNIYA SATELLITE?

TABLE 1-4. Orbit

repeat every day or to interweave from day to day before repeating.

Repeating Sun Sync

2. Accept all other default values.

When Can I Spy On Washington From a Molniya Satellite?

INSERT THE FACILITY

Select an Object To Be Inserted:

Select From City Database

3. Click the Insert... button.

The STK City Database

WHEN CAN I SPY ON WASHINGTON FROM A MOLNIYA SATELLITE?

2D View: SpySat position

3. Bring the 3D Graphics window to the front.

When Can I Spy On Washington From a Molniya Satellite?

3D View: SpySat position

SpySats object marker is positioned according to the current animation time

WHEN CAN I SPY ON WASHINGTON FROM A MOLNIYA SATELLITE?

If your satellite disappears, you have animated beyond the analysis

Moving Around in 2D and 3D

MAGNIFY AN AREA ON THE MAP